10
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
This bibliography was originally stored on a 3.5” diskette to accompany a 22 page
booklet of the same title. This pdf version was copied from the diskette in the EMR
Library.
AN ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY OF
PLACER GOLD MINING
1896 - 1966
David Neufeld
Yukon & Western Arctic Historian
Parks Canada, September, 1994
Introduction
In the early 1980s, Historical Services,
Prairie and Northern Region (PNRO) began
research on the history of corporate placer
mining in the Klondike to support Klondike
National Historic Sites. As part of this
work the author prepared this detailed
annotated bibliography covering world placer
gold mining during the period 1896-1966. The
scope of the bibliography was broad; in
addition to furnishing references on the
Yukon Territory the writer was to provide
sufficient references to allow a study of
world placer gold mining. The source for the
bibliography was The Engineering Index, a
comprehensive annual review of engineering
and technical literature.
This publication provides a machine readable
copy of the complete bibliography, an
evaluation of the technological history
research value of The Engineering Index, and
summarizes the findings of the bibliography.
History
The Engineering Index originated in the
summer of 1883 when J.B. Johnson was elected
Professor of Civil Engineering at Washington
University in St. Louis. Anxious to be
proficient in his new position Johnson
surveyed existing engineering literature and
began to systematically compile information
on the more important articles in a volume
he called an "Index Rerum" (L. index of
things). The original work covered the major
American engineering periodicals: The
Engineering News, Van Nostrand's Engineering
Magazine, the Journal of the Franklin
Institute, the Transactions of the American
Engineering Societies of Civil, Mechanical
and Mining Engineers and the English
journals Engineering, The Engineer and the
Proceedings of the Institute of Civil
Engineers.
In the fall of 1883 Johnson attended the
Board meeting of the Association of
Engineering Societies and described his
indexing work. The Board was impressed with
the work and in January 1884 Johnson began
to produce a monthly index which was
published in the Association's journal.
Johnson expanded the scope of his index and
by 1891, 100 publications were reviewed and
indexed. Most of these were American
magazines but there was a growing number
from Great Britain and its colonies, France,
Germany and Austria. At this time Johnson
convinced the editors of the Association of
Engineering Societies Journal that a
cumulative index would be a worthwhile
product. He carefully edited the monthly
indexes and in 1892 the Association
published the first cumulative volume
entitled, "Descriptive Index of Current
Engineering Literature". It contained 11,000
notes and cross-references, approximately
1375 per year, and Johnson claimed that, "It
is thought to contain, ... nearly all
periodical, society and fragmentary matter
of permanent value not only for the period
1884 to 1891 inclusive, but a great deal
i
which appeared earlier."
In 1895, Johnson edited the second, and his
last volume of the cumulative index, for the
Engineering Magazine of New York which had
taken over the preparation of the index in
that year. Covering the years 1892-95, the
second edition had almost the same coverage
as the first edition and contained some 6000
entries, about 1500 per year. The second
volume took the title, The Engineering
Index.
The Engineering Magazine hired H.H. Suplee
as editor to replace Johnson and over the
next few years the coverage of the index
significantly expanded. Five-year cumulative
volumes were published in 1901 and 1906 and
both of these reflected the growing scope of
the work. Volume three, covering 1896-1900,
contained 40,000 entries, about 8000 per
year, gleaned from more than 200 technical
11
12
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
publications. Volume four, the last fiveyear cumulative index, covered 1901-1905 and
included some 50,000 entries, about 10,000
per year, from 250 periodicals and journals.
The preface of volume four emphasized the
value of the work: "The Index is used as a
guide to the vast mass of information
otherwise practically buried in the numerous
files of engineering publications in
reference libraries in all parts of the
world, and The Engineering Index thus
becomes the master-key by which these
ii
storehouses of information may be entered."
In 1906, The Engineering Index became an annual
publication. From this date until 1918 it
provided a compilation of between 200 and
250 of the world's leading technical and
engineering publications. Approximately
10,000 entries each year gave comprehensive
coverage of the journals reviewed.
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
purchased the publication in late 1918 and
combined its work with their own more
extensive "Selected Titles of Engineering
Articles." The combined 1919 edition
retained the title The Engineering Index and
included some 12,000 entries from nearly 700
engineering and allied technical
publications subscribed to by the
Engineering Societies Library in New York.
According to the 1919 editor, this library
"comprise(s) perhaps the most complete
collection of scientific and engineering
iii
publications in the world."
Subsequent editions grew in size; the 1927 edition had
18,000 entries. The coverage of the Index
also became more comprehensive. In 1922 the
publishers stated that 25 per cent of the
periodicals indexed were from Great Britain
and colonies and 30 per cent from other
foreign countries. By 1928 the Index
reviewed about 1200 journals and 500
irregular bulletins. This number remained
fairly constant through the rest of the
period under study.
Coverage of Canadian Engineering
While no Canadian journals were included in
Johnson's original monthly indexing in 1884,
several were indexed by the time the third
cumulative volume was published in 1901, the
similarity between American and Canadian
engineering work and the geographic
proximity of the two countries ensured that
Canadian engineering would be fully covered
by The Engineering Index.
The Canadian publications included in the
1896-1900 edition of the index were:
1. British Columbia Mining Record Victoria (monthly)
2. Canadian Architect - Toronto (monthly)
3. Canadian Electrical News - Toronto
(monthly)
4. Canadian Engineer - Montréal (monthly)
5. Canadian Mining Review - Ottawa
(monthly)
6. Engineering Society of the School of
Practical Science - Toronto
Comparison of this list of Canadian journals
with the Canadian mining journals noted by
H.C. Bolton in his comprehensive A Catalogue
of Scientific and Technical Periodicals
iv
1665-1895 reveals only two missing. These
were The Canadian Mining Manual, an annual
prepared in Ottawa by the editor of the
Canadian Mining Review, and the Canadian
Colliery Guardian and Critic published in
Halifax.
By 1909, The Engineering Index referenced
eight Canadian publications.
1. Applied Science - Toronto (monthly)
2. British Columbia Mining Record Victoria (monthly)
3. Bulletin of the Canadian Mining
Institute - Montréal (quarterly)
4. Canadian Architect - Toronto (monthly)
5. Canadian Electrical News - Toronto
(monthly)
6. Industrial Advocate - Halifax
(monthly)
7. Journal of the Canadian Mining
Institute - Montréal (annual)
8. Proceedings of the Canadian Society of
Civil Engineers - Montréal (monthly)
These represented over three per cent of the
total number of journals and other published
materials covered by the index.
In 1919, after the expansion of the index by
the American Society of Mechanical
Engineers, 23 Canadian publications were
included.
1. Association of Dominion Land Surveyors
Annual Report - Ottawa (annual)
2. Canadian Chemical Journal - Toronto
(monthly)
3. Canadian Department of Mines, Mines
13
14
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Branch Bulletin -Ottawa (irregular)
4. Canadian Engineer - Toronto (weekly)
5. Canadian Foundryman and Metal Industry
News - Toronto (monthly)
6. Canadian Machinery and Manufacturing
News - Toronto (weekly)
7. Canadian Manufacturer - Toronto
(monthly)
8. Canadian Mining Institute Bulletin Montréal (monthly)
9. Canadian Mining Journal - Quebec City
(weekly)
10. Canadian Railway Club Proceedings Montréal (9/yr)
11. Canadian Railway and Marine World Toronto (monthly)
12. Contract Record and Engineering
Review - Toronto (weekly)
13. Electrical News - Toronto (semimonthly)
14. Engineering Institute of Canada
Journal - Toronto (monthly)
15. Geological Survey of Canada Reports Ottawa (irregular)
16. Iron and Steel of Canada - Toronto
(monthly)
17. Marine Engineering and Canadian
Merchant Service Guild Review - Toronto
(monthly)
18. Marine Engineering of Canada Toronto (monthly)
19. Mining and Engineering Record Vancouver (monthly)
20. Ontario Bureau of Mines Bulletin Toronto (irregular)
21. Power House - Toronto (semi-monthly)
22. Queen's University Quarterly Kingston (quarterly)
23. Revue Trimestrielle Canadienne Montréal (monthly)
By 1928, when The Engineering Index
undertook a more thorough review of
engineering literature, the following
Canadian publications were indexed:
1. Bus and Truck Transport - Toronto
(monthly)
2. Canada. Department of the Interior
(Water Resources Papers) - Ottawa
(irregular)
3. Canada. Department of Mines
(Geological Survey) - Ottawa (irregular)
4. Canadian Automotive Trade - New York
(monthly)
5. Canadian Aviation - Toronto (monthly)
6. Canadian Chemistry and Metallurgy
(Canadian Institute of Chemistry) - Toronto
(monthly)
7. Canadian Dominion Bureau of Statistics
- Toronto (monthly)
8. Canadian Engineer - Toronto (monthly)
9. Canadian Foundryman and Electroplater
- Toronto (weekly)
10. Canadian Machinery and Manufacturing
News - Toronto (semi-monthly)
11. Canadian Mining and Metallurgical
Bulletin - Montréal (monthly)
12. Canadian Mining Journal - Gardenvale,
P.Q. (weekly)
13. Canadian Mining World - Toronto
(irregular)
14. Canadian Patent Office Record Ottawa (weekly)
15. Canadian Railway and Marine World Toronto (monthly)
16. Canadian Railway Club, Proceedings Montréal (9/yr)
17. Contract Record and Engineering
Review - Toronto (weekly)
18. Electrical News - Toronto (semimonthly)
19. Engineering Journal (Engineering
Institute of Canada) - Montréal (monthly)
20. Engineering Times - Toronto (monthly)
21. Iron and Steel of Canada Gardenvale, P.Q. (monthly)
22. Ontario Hydro-electric Power
Commission Bulletin - Toronto (monthly)
23. Power House - Toronto (semi-monthly)
24. Revue Trimestrielle Canadienne Montréal (quarterly)
25. Royal Society of Canada Transactions
- Ottawa (irregular)
26. Seismological Society of America
Bibliographical Bulletin - Ottawa
(quarterly)
27. Town Planning - Ottawa (bi-monthly)
28. University of Alberta. Science and
Industrial Research Council report Edmonton (irregular)
29. University of Toronto. School of
Engineering Research Bulletin - Toronto
(irregular)
It appears that every major Canadian
technical publication was included by this
time. In 1951 the number of Canadian
journals in the index was expanded to
include:
1. British Columbia. Department of Mines
Bulletin - Victoria (irregular)
2. Canada. Bureau of Mines Memorandum
15
16
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Series - Ottawa (irregular)
3. Canada. Bureau of Statistics - Mining,
Metallurgical and Chemical Branch
Annual Report - Ottawa (annual)
4. Canada. Department of Mines and
Resources Reports and Publications Ottawa (irregular)
5. Canada. Dominion Water and Power
Bureau - Water Resources Papers Ottawa (irregular)
6. Canada. Forest Service Bulletin Ottawa (irregular)
7. Canada. Geological Survey Papers Ottawa (irregular)
8. Canadian Chemical Processing - Toronto
(monthly)
9. Canadian Journal of Research - Ottawa
(semi-monthly)
10. Canadian Machinery and Manufacturing
News - Toronto (monthly)
11. Canadian Metals - Toronto (monthly)
12. Canadian Mining and Metallurgical
Bulletin - Montréal (monthly)
13. Canadian Mining and Metallurgical
Transactions - Montréal (monthly)
14. Canadian Mining Journal - Toronto
(monthly)
15. Canadian Patent Office Record Ottawa (weekly)
16. Canadian Railway Club Proceedings Montréal (9/yr)
17. Canadian Standards Association
Standard Specifications - Ottawa (irregular)
18. Canadian Transportation - Toronto
(monthly)
19. Electrical News and Engineering Toronto (semi-monthly)
20. Engineering and Contract Record Toronto (monthly)
21. Engineering Journal of the
Engineering Institute of Canada - Montréal
(monthly)
22. Hydro News - Toronto (monthly)
23. Modern Power and Engineering Toronto (monthly)
24. Municipal Utilities - Toronto
(monthly)
25. Newfoundland Geological Survey
Bulletin - St. John's (irregular)
26. Nova Scotian Institute of Science
Proceedings - Halifax (irregular)
27. Ontario Department of Mines Annual
Report and Bulletins - Toronto
(irregular)
28. Quebec Bureau of Mines Annual Report
- Quebec City (annual)
29. Revue Trimestrielle Canadienne Montréal (quarterly)
30. Roads and Engineering Construction Toronto (monthly)
31. Royal Society of Canada Proceedings
and Transactions - Ottawa (annual)
32. Shipping Register and Shipbuilder Montréal (monthly)
33. Technique - Montréal (10/yr)
34. Toronto University. Engineering
Society Transactions and Yearbook Toronto (irregular)
35. Western Miner - Vancouver (monthly)
Organization
The organization of the index underwent
several changes during the study period.
Johnson arranged the first editions of the
index alphabetically: "it is arranged
according to the initial letters of certain
'catch-words' which have been selected as
indicating most nearly the true subjects of
the articles indexed." Each 'catch-word' was
sub-divided with other headings more
specifically describing the nature of the
v
articles they headed.
The format of The Engineering Index was
established by J.B. Johnson at the time of
vi
his first cumulative volume. The basic
tenets of the indexing format were as
follows:
1. Only those articles of permanent value were to be
included. As Johnson stated in the first
volume; "Articles of a casual or passing
interest have not often been indexed, and
such matters as were thought to lead to
erroneous conclusions or as were based on
false assumptions or theories, have always
been excluded."
2. Each entry was to provide a concise description of
the contents of the article. Again, Johnson
outlined his aim; "The object constantly
kept in mind in the preparation of these
index notes was to put, in as small a space
as possible, such short descriptions of the
scope and general character of the current
engineering literature ...as would enable
one in search of valuable information on a
particular subject to decide whether or not
it would be worth his while to obtain or
consult the original ... paper. No abstract,
17
18
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
or result, or summaries have been made and
no conclusions given. In other words, these
notes only serve to indicate where valuable
vii
data can be obtained."
Later editors of the index retained Johnson's
guidelines to make The Engineering Index a
consistent and useful research tool for the
study of the history of technology.
Each index reference is a comprehensive
summary of relevant information. The exact
title of the article, the authors name, the
title of the periodical with volume, number
and date of publication, inclusive page
numbers and notes on the number of figures
and illustrations provide the bibliographic
data. A short description of the article is
also included.
Dredges
See also Excavating Machinery; Motorships; Gold Dredges;
Ships; Tin Dredges. Well-Designed Dredge placed in
Service by Indiana Gravel Producer. Pit and
Quarry, vol. 22, no 5, June 3 1931, pp. 57-58 and
60, 6 figs. Dredge of Connersville Gravel Co.,
Connersville, Ind.; hull is 24 ft. wide,48 ft.
long and 4 ft. deep; built as three sections of
steel pontoons, and housed with corrugated-iron
sheeting.
The Engineering Index entries cover a broad range
of topics. While the first volume suffered
somewhat from the limited manpower available for
its compilation (Johnson noted that chemical and
metallurgical subjects in mining engineering were
left out), subsequent editions have striven to
provide information on all the technical and
scientific fields required by engineers.
In the 1906 edition, the first annual volume, the
editors changed the overall organization of the
index. Abandoning the alphabetic 'catch-words' of
its predecessors, the 1906 editors divided up all
the entries into the "great divisions of
engineering practice."
i
ii
iii
iv
v
vi
vii
viii
Civil Engineering
Electrical Engineering
Industrial Management
Marine and Naval Engineering
Mechanical Engineering
Mining and Metallurgy
Railway Engineering
Street and Electric Railways
This practice, the editors claimed, simplified
the search for specific articles and allowed the
user to peruse all the relevant contemporary
literature as though he were browsing through a
well-organized library.
While the system did have these advantages, it
suffered a degree of inflexibility. As the field
of engineering broadened and began to specialize,
it became increasingly difficult to arbitrarily
assign some references to any particular division
of engineering practice. Therefore, when the
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
purchased the Index in 1918 they reviewed
different methods of indexing and decided to
revert to the original alphabetic, or dictionary
method, of indexing. This arrangement was
selected "because it is considered to be the
simplest way to classify such a mass of
information upon so many diversified and
complexly overlapping subjects as are discussed
viii
in present-day engineering literature."
Extensive use of cross-references ensured that no
related references would be missed. Further
alterations were made to the indexing method
during the study period.
Using The Engineering Index
The Engineering Index is not a difficult source
to use if the researcher is well organized and
informed. The vast size of the index requires the
researcher to define his/her topic clearly. It is
also useful to have a basic familiarity with the
topic under study and to be aware of the changes
and modifications that the technique underwent.
The two different index formats used by The
Engineering Index - alphabetic, or dictionary
style, from 1884 to 1905 and again from 1919 to
1966, and subject classification, from 1906 to
1918 - require slightly different research
techniques.
The alphabetic method is especially helpful to
the user who is searching for a particular
reference or information on a very specific
topic. By using the appropriate key word the
reference can be found quickly. The system also
has the advantage of providing a flexible
indexing structure which encompasses the entire
field of engineering practice. Balanced against
these editorial and professional advantages,
however, is the historians desire for a general
survey of a particular technology or process. The
historian must be aware of changes in the
technology and conscious of any alterations or
additions to that technology's set of keywords in
19
20
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
order to be sure to find all the relevant
references. This problem is especially true for
the indexes of the early 1920s. After the reinstitution of the alphabetic index format in
1919 the editors took some time before they
settled on a standard set of keywords.
The indexes which use subject classification
greatly simplify the research task of the
historian. All associated references are located
together in one section of the volume and can be
easily found. This, however, is only true for
topics within the eight divisions of engineering
practiced defined the editors. For an
interdisciplinary topic, or to find the roots of
a new technology that does not fit any of the
major divisions, the task becomes much more
difficult.
Engineering has grown from a handiman's art in
the 19th century to the present highly scientific
and technical profession. This change is
reflected in The Engineering Index and requires
some consideration by the researcher. References
in the earlier editions can be quite general and
usually provide an excellent summary of the
technology in layman's terms. However, as the
complexity of engineering practice rose through
the 20th century the references change
significantly. After the Second World War the
references become more numerous and increasingly
technical and more topic specific.
The Engineering Index is a very useful tool for
the historian of technology. The brief notes
describing the contents of the referenced article
usually provide the researcher with enough
information to decide if the article is worthy of
further study. Thus the index continues to fulfil
its original intent. Many times the index notes
alone supply the researcher with valuable
information. Very often the reference notes can
provide a useful survey history of a technology,
its use, and particular problems.
The researcher should be aware that the Index
does not claim to cover every article in the
periodicals referenced. The user is often
encouraged to check the detailed indices provided
ix
by the editors of the individual journals. Short
notes on specific events and material with only a
local interest are not generally included,
particularly in the earlier editions. An
especially significant gap exists in the earlier
volumes where articles based upon "false
assumptions" on leading to "erroneous
conclusions" have been excluded. Researchers
working on the development of technology or
technological research may wish to consider
additional research in the original journals.
Later editors, with increased support, have
expanded the number of articles noted.
One of the most important aspects of The
Engineering Index and the Engineering Societies
Library in New York, the base collection for the
Index, is the copying service. Even in the
earliest editions, the editors offered to supply
subscribers with either copies of the journals or
photocopies of articles requested. In this way,
for a modest fee, engineers in even the most
isolated locations had access to the complete
collection of the Engineering Societies Library
and all of the material noted in the annual
indexes. This service is currently offered by
companies in both the United States and Great
x
Britain.
Acknowledgements
In the twelve years of manuscript development
this bibliography was improved by the
contributions of several people. Bill Waiser, the
original project manager for Parks Canada, and
Susan Buggey, Chief of Historical Services for
the Parks Canada Prairie and Northern Region
Office, initiated the project to support
historical research work on Yukon Consolidated
Gold Corporation Dredge #4 in the Klondike
goldfields near Dawson City, Yukon. Edna Wilson,
supervisor of the College of Engineering Library
at the University of Saskatchewan, offered
institutional support and professional guidance
in the creation of the bibliography. Several
typists valiantly interpreted the notes and
transcribed the findings into the present machine
readable form. Brenda Oziewicz and Donna McBee,
librarians with the Department of Indian Affairs
and Northern Development in Whitehorse reviewed
the final draft and offered valuable suggestions
on format. Without these contributions this
project would have remained an unused box of
rumpled index cards. Any errors or omissions
remain my responsibility. I hope this information
will encourage research the history of placer
mining and further our understanding of its role
and significance in Canadian history.
Placer Mining Bibliography
The placer mining bibliography was prepared as a
general survey of gold placer mining operations
21
22
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
around the world, with a focus on the Yukon. The
bibliography contains over 1800 references
relating to gold placer mining geology, geography
and technology.
The bibliography is not, however, a replacement
for The Engineering Index. Any serious research
may require further details on specifics of
placer mining. References to gold amalgamation
are one example. While a number of general
references are included, it would render the tool
clumsy and difficult to use if the hundreds of
related references were included. The researcher
is advised to identify aspects of amalgamation
and then find suitable references in the index.
Entries are organized generally along the same
lines as in The Engineering Index. However,
technological and bibliographic changes over the
study period have required some modifications to
the original organization. The basic breakdown is
by technology with sub-divisions generally based
on geography. The references in each entry are
arranged chronologically. An index of entries is
provided but key word, author, and title searches
are possible with word processing software.
Endnotes
This page intentionally left blank.
23
24
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Placer Gold Bibliography
Index of Entries
GOLD
Other [7]
GOLD PLACER
Amalgamation [16]
GOLD PLACER
Assay [29]
GOLD PLACER
Bibliography [2]
GOLD PLACER GEOLOGY
Australasia [5]
Canada [4]
Yukon [9]
United States [17]
World, other [10]
General [26]
GOLD PLACER LOCATION
Africa [24]
Asia [6]
Australia [23]
Canada [1]
Alberta [3]
British Columbia [65]
Newfoundland & Labrador [1]
Quebec [6]
Yukon [98]
Central America [17]
Europe [14]
New Guinea [17]
New Zealand [25]
South America [16]
Bolivia [8]
Columbia [30]
Guiana, Br., Fr., Dutch [30]
Peru [5]
Southeast Asia [14]
United States
Alaska [98]
25
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Arizona [4]
California [49]
Colorado [27]
Georgia [1]
Idaho [20]
Montana [10]
Nevada [6]
New Mexico [8]
North Carolina [2]
Oregon [13]
South Dakota [1]
Utah [3]
Washington [1]
Wyoming [7]
U.S.S.R. [41]
GOLD PLACER
Metallurgy [8]
GOLD PLACER
MINING METHOD
Arid Regions [10]
Cold Regions [21]
Tropical Regions [1]
Dredging
- Geographic
Africa [7]
Asia [2]
Australasia [34]
Canada
- B.C. [11]
N.W.T. [1]
Yukon [11]
Central America [2]
Europe [1]
General [159]
New Zealand [27]
South America [20]
Southeast Asia [4]
United States
Alaska [27]
Calif. [54]
Colorado [5]
Georgia [1]
Idaho [6]
Montana [13]
Nevada [4]
Oregon [1]
S. Dakota [1]
Construction/Maintenance [30]
Land Restoration [15]
General [43]
Hydraulic
Africa [1]
Australasia [4]
Canada
B.C. [10]
25
26
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Quebec [1]
Yukon [7]
Europe [1]
General [24]
New Zealand [3]
South America [3]
United States
Alaska [6]
Calif. [46]
Colorado [1]
Oregon [2]
Other [79]
Sluice
General [12]
New Zealand [1]
United States
Alaska [1]
U.S.S.R. [1]
GOLD PLACER
Miscellaneous Treatments [24]
GOLD PLACER
Testing and Sampling [89]
LAW
Canada [20]
British Columbia [10]
Yukon [11]
Other [6]
General [3]
United States [25]
YUKON
General [73]
27
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD
Other
Production and Its Cause
Mining Industry and Review Nov. 21, 1895
An editorial stating the increased interest in gold
mining and in gold production is due to the
fall in prices of supplies. Twentyseven
dollars will buy as much now as a hundred
dollars would in 1870 though the selling
price of gold has remained constant. 600 w.
Marvellous Increase in Production of Gold
ALEXANDER E. OUTERBRIDGE JR.
Ap Popular Science Monthly March, 1899
A study of the gold production of the world, the
increase due to progress in mining and
metallurgical arts, and facts of interest
concerning this precious metal. 3200 w.
Gold Mining and Gold Production
PROF. JOHN WALTER GREGORY.(Cantor Lecture)
Journal of the Society of Arts - Sept. 13,
1907.Serial.lst part.
This first lecture considers alluvial gold mines, the
source of gold, washing and sluicing,
dredging, methods, etc. Ills. 6500 w.
The Bugbear of Gold
CHARLES SEWELL THOMAS, JR.
Mining and Scientific Press May 13, 1911
Discusses the properties of gold, occurrence in nature,
and the future outlook. 2500 w.
The Cost of an Ounce of Gold
PERCY E. BARBOUR
Engineering and Mining Journal July 10, 1915
Compares cost of production, various conditions in
different parts of the world. 1500 w.
Canadian Gold Production in 1931
L.D. HUNTOON
Mining and Metallurgy v 13 n 301 Jan 1932 p. 4750.
Statistical review of production of placer gold, gold
as byproduct from base metals, and gold
produced from siliceous gold ores; total
production shows decided increase; highgrade
found at depth permits mining lowgrade;
further increase and long life assured.
Free Gold, Story of Canadian Mining
A. HOFFMAN
Rinehart and Co. New York and Toronto, 1947. 420 p.
27
28
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Development of Canadian gold fields, narrative form;
description of places and men of importance
in development, technical aspects of mining
industry, and financial operations. Maps,
woodcuts, tables.
29
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Amalgamation
A Study of Amalgamation Methods. Especially the Patio
Process, with the Object of Avoiding the
Loss of Mercury.
MIGUEL BUSTAMENTE, JR.
Transaction of the American Institute of Mining
Engineers Nov., 1901.
Describes character of ore to be treated and the
experimental investigations. 5400 w.
The Practice of Amalgamation.
W.H. KRITZER.
Pacific C Mining Oct. 10, 1903.
Notes on the manipulation of mercury and care of
plates. 2200 w.
Amalgamating Tables.
ALGERNON DEL MAR.
Mining and Scientific Press Aug. 5, 1905.
Gives sketches of three styles of tables, discussing
the important essentials. 900 w.
A New Device for Amalgamating Gold in Sands and Pulps.
Mining Reporter Aug. 24, 1905.
Illustrates and describes a device invented by PATRICK
MCENTEE for treating goldbearing sands,
stamp mill pulp, and other material. 1200
w.
The Amalgamation of Gold Ores.
THOMAS T. READ.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
May, 1906.
Explains the nature of an amalgam, and discusses the
amalgamation process and the influence of
temperature. Ills. 10000 w.
Amalgamation Methods.
H.W. MACFARREN.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 12, 1908.
Discusses methods of different amalgamators. 3000 w.
Electrochemical Amalgamation and Lixiviation.
ELMER ELLSWORTH CAREY.
Mining World April 17, 1909.
Calls attention to improvements that can be made by
employing electrochemical action in
connection with lixiviation and amalgamation
of gold ores. 2200 w.
29
30
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Increasing the Efficiency of Plate Amalgamation by
Electrochemical Action.
ELMER ELLSWORTH CAREY.
ElecChem and Met Ind May, 1909.
Outlines an electrochemical system of amalgamation
designed to extract from sands or pulp all
gold values not encased.2000 w.
ElectroChemical Amalgamation.
ELMER ELLSWORTH CAREY.
Mining Journal May 15, 1909.
A discussion of gold extraction by amalgamation,
especially the paper of C.G. Warnford Lock,
read before the Inst. of Min. and Met. some
sixteen years ago.2000 w.
ElectroChemical Plate Amalgamation.
ELMER ELLSWORTH CAREY.
Mining Journal June 12, 1909.
An explanation of the electrolytic system and its
claims. 3300 w.
Progress in Electrochemical Plate Amalgamation.
ELMER E. CAREY.
Mining World June 5, 1909.
General discussion of a simple method of converting the
standard plate into an electrochemical
amalgamating device of remarkable
efficiency. 3500 w.
Recovery of Values in Dredge and Place Tailings.
ELMER ELLSWORTH CAREY.
Mining Journal April 23, 1910.
Calls attention to the amount of gold lost in dredging
and indicates a method of saving by use of
electrochemical mercury riffles. 1500 w.
Principles of Electrolytic Amalgamation.
ELMER E. CAREY.
Mining World April 30, 1910.
Discusses the underlying principles of amalgamation.
2000 w.
The Relative Efficiency of Various Amalgams in the
Recovery of Gold.
FRANCIS A. THOMSON and ROBERT KEFFER.
Metallurgical and Chemical Engineering June 1915.
Report of investigations. 3500 w.
Amalgamation Tests.
W.J. SHARWOOD.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
Aug. 1915.
Suggested standard test. 4500 w.
Recovery of Fine Gold by Amalgamation.
E.S. LEEAVER.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir., no. 6081, Aug.
31
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
1928, 4 pp.; see also Min. Rev., vol. 30,
no. 11. Sept. 15, 1928, pp. 2525 and Eng.
and Min. Jl, vol. 126, no. 16, Oct. 20,
1928, p. 610. Written to answer requests for
information on recovery, or reasons for poor
recovery, of fine gold by amalga-mation
process; checking gold content; nature of
gold; float and rusty gold; effect of
impurities; placer gold; cyanidation is
usual method for recovery of gold lost in
amalgamation process.
GOLD PLACER Assay
and Sampling)
(cf. GOLD PLACERS
Testing
Assay of Auriferous Ores and Gravels by Amalgamation
and the Blowpipe.
R.W. LEONARD.
Transactions of the American Institute of Mining
Engineers Nov., 1895.
The method consists in amalgamating with mercury, then
cupelling with lead and measuring the bead
with Plattner's scale. Results are compared
with parallel tests with the stamp mill and
fire assay. 1200 w.
Practical Assaying at Mines and Works.
H. VAN F. FURMAN.
Engineering Magazine March, 1896.
Showing the methods of securing rapidity and accuracy
in metallurgical works. 3000 w.
The Assay by Prospects of Auriferous Ores and Gravels
by Means of Amalgamation and the Blowpipe.
WILLIAM HAMILTON MERRITT.
Transactions of the American Institute of Mining
Engineers April, 1896.
The method of field testing of gold ores, as practiced
in the Kingston School of Mining, is
described, pointing out some points in which
it differs from that presented in a recent
paper by R.W. Leonard. 1500 w.
Anyone Can Assay.
ALEX ROY.
Canadian Engineer May, 1897.
Describes an easy method of making a test for gold. 900
w.
Liquation in Cyanide Bars.
DR. STOCKHAUSER.
Australian Mining Standard June 17, 1897.
Abstract of paper read at meeting of Chemical and
31
32
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Metallurgical Society of South Africa.
Discussing the fact that alloys of gold and
silver with base metals do not solidify
homogeneously, and that therefore errors may
be made in assaying and sampling. Also
discussion. 1500 w.
Gold and Silver Assaying at Guanajuato, Mexico.
W.N. CUMMINGS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 28, 1897.
Description of a crucible used, which commends itself
for the large number of fusions that can be
made at once, the celerity and fuel economy.
Ill. 500. w.
The Scorification Assay.
JOHN DANIELL.
Chemical and Metallurgical Society of South Africa
March, 1898.
Notes from the writer's experience in the estimation of
gold and silver by this process. 1300 w.
Remarks on Fire Assaying of GoldBearing Materials.
WILLIAM BETTEL.
Jour of Chem and Met Soc of S Africa Nov., 1898.
Discusses the losses of gold, collection of finely
divided gold, and other points which affect
the accuracy of results. 4500 w.
Notes on the Assay of the Zincy Precipitates Obtained
in the Cyanide Process.
CHARLES H. FULTON AND CHARLES H. CRAWFORD.
School of Mines Quarterly, New York Jan., 1901.
Describes work performed in the endeavour to evolve a
short and accurate method which can be used
in a custom assay office or mill. Tabulated
information of assays made is given. 2700 w.
Dominion Assay Office in Vancouver.
ALFRED W. DRYER.
British Columbia Mining Record Aug., 1901.
Describes the office and the process; the operations
are conducted in full view of the depositor
of gold dust. 2300 w.
The United States Government Assay Office at Seattle.
A.W. DEE.
British Columbia Mining Record Nov., 1901.
Concerning the equipment of this office and its method
of procedure. Ill. 1700 w.
Methods of Assaying Cyanide Solutions for Gold.
T. LANE CARTER.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 15, 1902.
A compilation of methods for determining the gold
contents of working cyanide solutions. 800
w.
33
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Assaying and Gold Refining.
DONALD CLARK.
Australian Mining Standard Dec. 10, 1903.
Information on the work connected with assaying and
with special auriferous material. Ill.
Serial. 1st part. 30000 w.
The Assay Weight and Its Relation to the Balance of
Precision.
A. WHITBY.
Journal of the Chemical Metallurgical and Mining
Society of South Africa Aug., 1904.
On the difficulty of obtaining weights of sufficient
accuracy for the requirements of the more
sensitive balance now used. General
discussion. 5500 w.
Fire Assaying.
EVANS W. BUSKETT.
Mines and Minerals Sept., 1904.
Describes the apparatus commonly used and the methods,
the reagents, and some of the reactions.
Ills. 2000 w.
The Testing of Gold Ores by Amalgamation.
ERNEST A. HERSAM.
Mining World Dec. 10, 1904.
Describes methods of laboratory amalgamation,
discussing the effect of the size of the
test portion. Serial. 1st part. 4500 w.
Routine Assaying on the Rand.
A. WHITBY.
Jour of Chemical, Metallurigical and Mining Society of
South Africa March, 1906.
Remarks on the importance of the work in the mine assay
office, with a sketch plan of a serviceable
building for a 200stamp mill, the equipment,
the actual work of assaying, etc. Short
discussion. 7000 w.
The Assay of Auriferous Tinstone.
C.O. BANNISTER.
Mining Journal April 21, 1906.
Read before the Inst. of Min. and Met. Reports results
obtained by the author in comparing results
obtained by different methods of assaying
for gold in alluvial tin deposits. 1500 w.
The Assay of Gold Bars as Conducted in the Author's
Assay Office.
ARTHUR C. CLAUDET.
Institution of Mining and Metallurgy Bul No. 27 Dec.
13, 1906.
Describes the method in detail. 2200 w.
33
34
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Some Notes on Assaying.
CHARLES H. FULTON.
Mining World Dec. 22,1906. Serial. 1st part.
Notes having some novel features, prepared for use at
the South Dakota School of Mines. 1200 w.
The Salt Lake, Utah, Government Assay Office.
LEROY A. PALMER.
Mining World April 24, 1909.
Illustrated description of the methods and equipment.
1500 w.
A Portable AssayOutfit for Field Work.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
Jan., 1911.
Describes outfit and supplies for about 100 assays
which could be carried in a 26in. valise.
2500 w.
Improvements in Assaying.
ABBOT A. HANKS.
Mining and Scientific Press May 13, 1911.
Read before the Am. Chem. Soc. Reviews the changes in
the last 25 years in the apparatus and
methods used in fire assaying. 3000 w.
Improvements in Assaying.
ABBOT A. HANKS.
Australian Mining Standard Aug. 24, 1911. Serial. lst
part.
Read before the Calif. Sec. of the Am. Chem. Soc.
Reviews the changes that have taken place in
the last 25 years in the apparatus and
methods used in fire assaying. 1800 w.
United States Assay Offices; Methods of Operation.
Mining and Engineering World Feb. 24, 1912.
Describes methods used 2800 w.
How Gold is Bought.
JESSE SIMMONS.
Scientific American Nov. 16, 1912.
Illustrates and describes the methods of the United
States assay office. 2000 w.
The Determination of Gold in the Presence of Iridium
and Allied Metals in materials Such as Black
Sand. Two prize papers by
JAMES GRAY and CHRIS TOOMBS.
Journal of the Chemical, Metallurigical and Mining
Society of South Africa July, 1913.
Deals with methods, reporting research work. 5500 w.
Handling Gold Dust at Fairbanks.
HUBERT I. ELLIS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 7, 1914.
35
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Describes methods of assay and of melting and molding.
4000 w.
Assay of Black Sands.
P. HOPKINS.
US Bureau of Mines Report Investigations n 3265 Dec.
1934 5 p; see also Mining Journal (Phoenix
Ariz) v 18 n 19 Feb. 28, 1935, p. 56.
Methods described were selected from large number
tried: labour of grinding may be reduced by
removing metallics at two or three selected
screen sizes and cutting down amount of
sample at each lower size; most satisfactory
method of handling metallics involves use of
sulphur or sulphide, instead of acid
treatment or oxidation by scorification.
35
36
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Bibliography
Selected Bibliography on Placer Mining.
H.A. FRANKE.
Mining in California v 28 n 2 Apr 1932 p. 21924.
Bibliography from government publications, textbooks,
and papers dealing with California's gold
placer resources and from other subject
matter, which would help in recovery of
these resources.
Depression Gold Rush.
J.B. KNAEBEL and N.W. VON BERNEWITZ.
Mining and Metallurgy v 13 n 312 Dec. 1932 p. 5246.
Annotated bibliography of recently published
information on prospecting and gold
recovery.
37
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Geology
Australasia
Deep Placer Deposits of Victoria.
H.L. WILKINSON.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 30, 1905.
Discusses the principles which have affected the value
of the regularly defined "deep leads." Maps.
2500 w.
Victorian Auriferous Occurrences.
PROF. T.S. HART.
Australian Mining Standard July 25, Aug. 1, 1906.
Serial. 2 parts.
An explanation of their mineralogical character. 4500
w.
Geological Features of Fiji.
N.D. COCHRANE.
Australian Mining Standard Aug. 3, 1910.
Information concerning the alluvial, reef, and dredging
possibilities. 5000 w.
Origins and Composition of Alluvial Gold, With Special
Reference to Morobe Goldfield, New Guinea,
M.S. FISHER.
Institution of Mining and Metallurgy Bul n 365, 366,
367, 369 and 370 Feb 1935, 46 p supp plates,
(discussion) Mar p. 127 Apr p. 234, June p.
312 and (author's reply) July p. 514.
Specimens from various parts of world were examined;
critical review of conflicting theories;
evidence of derivation mechanically from
denuded veins or lodes; greater purity of
alluvial gold is attributed to electrolytic
corrosion process, resulting in silver being
removed. Bibliography.
Origin and Composition of Alluvial Gold, with Special
Reference to Morobe Goldfield, New Guinea.
M.S. FISHER.
Institution of Mining and Metallurgy Bul n 378 Mar
1936 p. 2731.
Further contribution to discussion of 1935 paper.
37
38
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
GEOLOGY
Canada
The Source of the Fraser River Gold.
HORACE F. EVANS.
Mining World Sept. 2, 1905.
Discusses the probable source of the gold found in the
Fraser River placers. 2000 w.
British Columbia. Origin of the Placer Gold of the
Barkerville Area, Cariboo District, British
Columbia, Canada,
W.L. UGLOW and W.A. JOHNSTON.
Economic Geology, vol. 18, no. 8, Sept. 1923, pp. 541561, 3 figs. Derivation of placer gold from
auriferous quartz veins; character of placer
gold; accretion of gold in gravels; quartz
veins; relationship of placer to vein gold.
Gold Occurrences of Canada Summary Account.
H.C. COOKE and W.A. JOHNSTON.
Canadian Dept. of Mines Geological Survey Economic
Geology Series n 10 n 2309 1932 6l p supp
plates.
Summary designed to afford prospectors geological
guidance in intelligent search for new
supplies of gold and to afford general
knowledge of history, present situation, and
opportunities of goldmining industry in
Canada; Lode gold areas; placer gold; modes
of occurrence and hand method of mining.
Bibliography.
Gold Mining and Milling in United States and Canada.
Current Practices and Costs.
C.F. JACKSON and J.B. KNAEEBEL.
US Bureau of Mines Bul n 363 1932 151 p supp plates.
Data on prospecting, development, mining,
and milling of lodegold ores, and discussion
of placer mining; general information;
examples; statistics and costs.
39
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Geology
Canada
Yukon
Geology of the Yukon. Condensed from advanced sheets of
work by
JOSIAH EDWARD SPURR.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 22, 1898.
Describes the rocks and the disturbances they have
undergone, in part first.
Preliminary Notes on the Surface Geology of the Yukon
Territory.
OTTO NORDENSKJOLD.
American Geologist May, 1899.
Report of observations made on a journey between the
Alaska coast and Dawson City. 3500 w.
Geology of the Klondike Gold Fields.
ANGELO HELLPRIN.
Ap Popular Science Monthly July, 1899.
An interesting illustrated description of this region.
6400 w.
Concentration of Gold in the Klondike.
J.B. TYRRELL.
Economic Geology June, 1907.
Describes the conditions that prevail in Klondike
district, studying the rich placers, their
origin and concentration. Ills. 2000 w.
Concentration of the Klondike.
DR. WILLIS EUGENE EVERETTE.
Scientific American Sup Dec. 28, 1907. Serial, lst
part.
Describes geological investigations of the rocks of the
Yukon River. 4000 w.
Types of Canadian Gold Deposits.
FRANCIS CHURCH LINCOLN.
Engineering and Mining Journal March 4, 1911.
Brief descriptions of the Klondike placer deposits, the
replacement
lodes of Rossland, B.C. and the saddle reefs of Nova
Scotia, 4000 w.
The Law of the Pay Streak in Placer Deposits.
J.B. TYRRELL.
Institution of Mining and Metallurgy, Bul 92 May 9,
1912.
Presents results of a study of the placer deposits of
the Klondike, believing the laws and
principles may be applied to other alluvial
deposits. 5000 w.
39
40
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Scroggie, Barker, Thistle, and Kirkman Creeks, Yukon
Territory (79094N).
D.D. CAIRNES.
Canadian Dept of Mines Mem. 97. Maps and Ills. 43 pp.
Preliminary examination of placer deposits and
conditions.
Wheaton District, Southern Yukon (79093 N).
D.D. CAIRNES.
Canada, Geological Survey, No. 1620, Maps. l3 pp.
Survey and geological examination of this district.
41
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Geology
United States
The Buried Rivers of California as a Source of Gold.
J.R. SCUPHAM.
Mines and Minerals Nov., 1898.
How these rich and peculiar formations have been
preserved. Modern instances of similar
volcanic action covering river beds. Some
particulars in regard to the returns which
have been made by drifting on the ancient
bed rock. 4000 w.
Mysteries of the Ancient Rivers of the Forest Hill
Divide, Placer Co., Cal.
Mining and Scientific Press March 18, 1899.
An account of the discovery of what is presumed to be a
continuation of the rich channel worked in
former years in the Dix mine, with
information concerning these channels. Ill.
1500 w.
Geology of the Apache Canon Placers.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 24, 1903.
In the southern part of the Sierra de los Cabalos, New
Mexico. 2000 w.
The Geology of the Treadwell Ore Deposits, Douglas
Island, Alaska.
ARTHUR C. SPENCER.
Transaction of the American Institute of Mining
Engineers Oct., 1904.
A description of the Treadwell gold deposits in their
geological aspects, with an outline of the
general geological features of the region.
Ills. 13000 w.
Source of the Placer Gold in Alder Gulch, Montana.
EARL DOUGLASS.
Mines and Minerals Feb, 1905.
Explains evidences indicating it was from adjacent
lodes. 3500 w.
Geology of the Breckenridge Placers.
ARTHUR LAKES.
Mines and Minerals Feb, 1912.
Describes the method used in working them. Ills. 5000
w.
Third Beach Line at Nome, Alaska.
ARTHUR GIBSON.
41
42
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mining and Scientific Press April 25, 1914.
Drawings and description of pay streak of an auriferous
gravel deposit and its peculiarities. 1200
w.
Ancient Auriferous Gravel Channels of Sierra County,
California.
MARK N. ALLING.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
July, 1914.
Gives a review of the historical geology of California,
the economic geology, the deposits of drift
mines, etc. Also bibliography. 7500 w.
The ChisanaWhite River District, Alaska (72078 A).
STEPHEN R. CAPPS.
US Geological Survey Bul. 636.
Investigation of the gold placers, copper prospects,
copper and gold lodes. Ills. and Maps. 120
pp.
Preliminary Report on the Trolovana District, Alaska
(72395 N).
ALFRED H. BROOKS.
US Geological Survey Bul. 642G.
Information concerning this region where placers were
recently discovered. Map. 9 pp.
Gold Mining in the Willow Creek District, Alaska
(72213).
STEPHEN R. CAPPS.
US Geological Survey Bul. 642F.
Supplement of a more complete report. 2200 w.
Placer deposits of the Manhattan District, Nevada
(76322 N).
HENRY G. FERGUSON.
US Geological Survey, Bul 640J Jan. 20, 1917.
Field work, history, deposits, etc. Maps, 300 p.
Topography and Geology of Dredging Areas
CHARLES JANIN.
Mining and Scientific Press, vol. 118, no. 4, Jan. 25,
1919, pp. 122123. 4 figs.
Dredging areas in Colo., Mont., Idaho and Oregon.
Abstract from Bul. 127, U.S. Bur. of Mines.
Auriferous Gravels of Southwest Oregon.
A.E. KELLOGG.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz.), vol. 11, no. 20,
March. 15, 1928, pp. 36 and 5455.
3 figs. Refers to placer deposits and geological
history; two masses of ancient gravels
northwest of Kerby; gravels of second cycle,
more extensive and important, near Galice
and Briggs creeks; gravels of third cycle
related to modern streams; in Gold Hill
district most important workings on Foots
43
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
creek; Ludlum Engineering Corp. of New York
recently acquired about 2000 acres dredge
ground and commenced active operations.
Geology and Ore Deposits of the Rocky Bar Quadrangle.
S.M. BALLARD.
Idaho Bureau of Mines and Geology Pamphlet, no. 26,
Mar. 1928. 41 pp.
Situation and access; climate and vegetation; history;
production; physiography; mines and prospects; placer mining; only metals of value
mined are gold and silver; molybdenum may be
added at future date; no deposits of lead,
zinc or copper yet found in sufficient
quantity to warrant recovery.
Origin of Flour Gold in Black Sands
A.E. KELLOGG.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz.), vol. 14, no. 20, Mar.
15, 1931, pp. 34 and 4950.
2 figs. Cause of flour gold, or very fine gold, with
examples of its attrition in Southwestern
Oregon and Northwestern California; Klamath
mountains constituted island in ocean during
cretaceous time, before Cascade mountains
were uplifted; it is considered that
deposits were formed along shore line of
this old island, in same manner that
deposits are now being formed on Pacific
Ocean shore.
New Technique Applicable to Study of Placers
O.P. JENKINS.
California Journal of Mines and Geology v 31 n 2 Apr
1935 p 143210.
Placers are classified as residual, eluvial, stream,
glacialstream, bajada, eolian, and beach;
exploration by serial photography,
geophysics, physiography, and study of
desert processes and sedimentation; paper
deals; primarily with California placers;
largest of possible reserves probably lies
in remaining buried tertiary stream channels
of Sierra Nevada. Bibliography.
43
44
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Geology
World, other
Origin of the Placer Gold of Guiana.
LEE FRASER.
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 26, 1910.
Synopsis of a chapter in "Geology of the Goldfields of
British Guiana," by J.B. Harrison. A resume
of the facts, hypotheses and theories. 2500
w.
The Absence of Alluvial (Placer) Gold Deposits on the
Rand or in its Vicinity.
H.C. BOYDELL.
Chemical, Metallurgical and Mining Society of South
Africa vol. 27, no. 7, Jan. 1927, pp. 154158.
To account for missing gold that would reasonably be
expected to be found in apparently nonexistent placers, two explanations suggest
themselves, enrichment of reef and removal
of gold by transportation or suspension;
both of these are discussed.
Geology of Gold; South Africa, Australia, New Zealand.
E.J. DUNN. Lond.
Charles Griffin and Co., 1929, 303 pp., illus. maps,
tables.
Comprehensive description of principal gold occurrences
in countries under consideration, with
discussion of origin of lodes and lode
cavities, influence of faults, igneous
intrusions, and similar topics bearing upon
genesis of ore deposits; work contains 172
plans and sections illustrating text and 253
photographs and photomicrographs of ores and
native gold; author has been government
geologist to Cape Colony and Victoria, and
bases his book on his own observations.
The Blanket Reefs on the Gold Coast.
A. BRAY. S.
African Engineer., vol. 14, no. 2, Feb. 1929, pp. 3334;
see also discussions and author's reply in
nos. 293 and 294, Feb. and Mar. 1929, pp.2934 and 4547. Indexed in 1928 Eng. Index
Working banket mines are all in Tarkwa district, 45 mi.
from coast at Sekondi; data obtained at
Abosso and AdjakBippo mines, but Taquah and
Abbontiakoon show similar conditions; series
is alternation of sandstones; quartizites
and conglomerates; gold values average 32 to
40 shillings per ton; definite pay shoots,
separated by unprofitable intervals;
theories as to origin of gold, which is not
ordinary placer gold.
45
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Chemische Prozesse bei Bildung von Seifenlagerstaetten.
F.W. FREISE.
Zeitschrift für Praktische Geologie v 40 n 7 July 1932
p 99103.
Chemical process in formation of placer deposits;
results of observations of Brazilian gold,
platinum and monazite placers.
Gesetzmaessigkeiten bei der Bildung von Kuestenseifen.
H. FALKE.
Zeitschrift für Praktische Geologie v 47 n 9 Sept 1939,
p. 1615.
Laws governing formation of coastal placers; remarks
based on observations on coast of Chile at
different points; characteristics of
different placer deposits shown in table.
K voprosu o dal'nosti perenosa rossypnogo zolota ot
korennykh istochnikov.
E.Z. GORBUNOV.
Sovetskaya Geologiya v 2 n 6 June 1959 p. 98105.
Transportation of gold during formation of placers;
methods of determining distance which free
gold travelled in Recent valleys are given,
based on investigation of Kolyma River basin
placers whose original source is known;
distance between primary source and areas
containing maximum gold content averaged
from 700 to 1500 m.
K probleme zolotonosnykh konglomeratov, Yu.
P. IVENSEN, A.A. STEPANOV, V.K. CHAIKOVSKII.
Razvedka i Okhrana Nedr n 2 Feb 1963 p. 17.
Problem of goldbearing conglomerates; attention is
drawn to conglomerates as possible source of
gold and uraninite; five areas in territory
of Soviet Union are outlined where
conglomerates formed and conditions for
formation of placers could be favourable.
Osobennosti razvitiya gidroseti i voprosy rossypnoi
zolotonostnosti na SeveroVostoke SSSR. E.Z.
GORBUNOV.
Sovetskaya Geologiya n 4 Apr 1963 p 7384.
Evolution features of hydrographic network and problems
of occurrence of gold, tin, and tungsten
placers in northeast of Soviet Union; study
of problem with aim to interpret structural
control in evolution of ancient river
valleys and suggested methods of prospecting
for ancient placers.
O sootnoshenii masshtabov korennoi i rossypnoi
zolotonosnosti v razlichnykh zolotonosnykh
provintsiyakh zemnogo shara.
45
46
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
S.D. SHER.
Sovetskaya Geologiya n 3 Mar 1965 p. 39.
Relationship between magnitude of primary gold deposits
and gold placers in various goldbearing
provinces of world; gold deposits in Soviet
Union and China are not covered by this
article; approach is made to problem of
factors controlling dispersion and
concentration of gold in placer deposit.
47
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Geology
General
Prospecting for Gold Gold Placers; How They are
Worked.
ARTHUR LAKES.
Colliery Engineer - Feb., 1896.
Theories of the origin of gold sands and the history
and distribution of gold placer deposits
throughout the world. Illustrated by maps
showing locations of gold deposits in
Europe, Asia and Africa.
The Origin of Placer Gold.
Mining Journal - Aug. 22, 1896.
What placer gold really is, with a sketch of the more
modern views of the mode of the deposits.
The Marble Belt.
A. THURSTON HEYDON.
Mining and Scientific Press - April 10, 1897.
A region of interest to miners because of the large
deposits of rich gravel. Reviews the
formation, character and past work. 1000 w.
The Glacial Epoch Its Relation to Alluvial Gold
Deposits.
L.O. BEAL.
Australian Mining Standard - Oct. 20, 1898.
Reviews the evidence of glaciation, and gives his own
opinion in explanation of the ice movement.
Illustrates the means by which alluvial gold
was gathered and redistributed, and other
geological work. Ill.
Gold Placers in Glaciated Regions.
GEORGE H. STONE.
Mines and Minerals - June, 1900.
Why they present different conditions from those which
have not been affected by glaciation. Ill.
2700 w.
The Origin and Classification of Placers.
H.L. SMYTH.
Engineering and Mining Journal - June 1, 1905.
Aims to show how the distribution and concentration of
the valuable particles in placers are
dependent on the conditions under which
erosion, transportation and deposition takes
place. Serial. lst part. 2000 w.
What Constitutes a Placer.
ARTHUR LAKES.
47
48
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mining World - Sept. 23, 1905.
Describes how placer deposits are formed, and the
causes of barrenness of one gulch and the
richness of another. 1500 w.
The Nomenclature of Modern Placer Mining.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Aug. 17, 1907.
Discusses classification of placers, their origin, and
methods of exploitation. Ills. 2000 w.
Some Principles of Concentration in RiverBed Gravels.
JAMES PARK.
Mining Journal - Aug. 1, 1908.
Considers progress of river erosion, river bed bottom,
position of pay wash, etc. 2500 w.
Nature of Gold in Alluvials.
F. LYNWOOD GARRISON.
Mining and Scientific Press - May 29, 1909.
Gives facts observed in connection with the study of
alluvial gold deposits, and discusses
influences that have affected the gold
accretion. 3000 w.
Some Ore Deposits Connected with Placers.
MATT. W. ALDERSON.
Mining World - July 24, 1909.
Describes peculiarities of ore deposits that are often
misleading. 2500 w.
Transportation of Gold by Organic Underground
Solutions.
F.W. FREISE.
Economic Geology, vol. 26, no. 4. JuneJuly, 1931, pp.
421431.
Experiences and observations at various gold placer
mines in connection with popular theory that
every gold placer that has been exhausted
may after period of years be panned again
and yield profitable amount of newly
accumulated gold; data indicate that gold is
attacked by humic acids, even if dilute,
provided sufficient time is allowed, and
oxygen is excluded; reprecipitation of gold
depends upon character of mineral solutions
circulating in some soils.
Geology of Placer Deposits.
W.E. COCKFIELD.
Canadian Mining and Metallurgy Bulletin n 238 and 239
Feb 1932 p. 5864 and (discussion) Mar p.
126. Origin of placer deposits; requisites
for formation; examples of gold placer
deposits; same principles apply to placer
deposits of other metals.
Geology of Placer Deposits.
49
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
W.E. COCKFIELD.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy and Mining
Soc Nova Scotia Trans v 35 1932 p. 5864
(discussion) p.126. from various sources.
Alluvial Gold.
H.L. HOLLOWAY.
Mining Magazine v 49 n 2 Aug 1933 p. 825.
Author discusses deposition of alluvial gold and shows
how examination of practical considerations
may be of help in assessing potential value
of placer deposit.
Desert Placers.
S. TRESKINSKY.
Mining Magazine v 49 n 4 Oct 1933 p. 21923.
Description of type of placer deposit occurring in
Persia, designated by author as "proluvial"
deposit, being formed by turbulent streams
in mountainous dry region; sketch plans and
sections illustrate distinction between
alluvium and proluvium.
Do Gold Nuggets Grow or Are They Born that Way?
H.A. HEYERHOFF.
Mining and Metallurgy v 16 n 340 Apr 1935 p 195.
Theory of H.A. HEYERHOFF in University of Puerto Rico
Monograph Series B No. 1, indexed under
Geology Puerto Rico, is that there is no
foundation for assumption that placer grains
and nuggets indicate proximity of rocks that
contain large gold particles: contention is
that particles grow by accretion in stream;
in discussion. Red Arrow mine in Colorado is
cited in rebuttal.
Migration of Alluvial Gold.
F.L. GARRISON.
Mining Magazine v 52 n 4 Apr 1935 p. 2159.
High purity of alluvial gold often greater than lode
gold of its source, is due to greater
solubility of silver in natural waters;
solubility of gold in meteoric waters is
regarded as factor in migration, dispersion,
and concentration of gold in alluvials;
natural precipitants of gold; discussion of
theories and of observed facts.
Bibliography.
Do Gold Nuggets Grow or Are They Born that Way?
J.N. BUTLER.
Mining and Metallurgy v 16 n 342 June 1935 p 270.
More About Life History of Nuggets, in supplementary
discussion based partly upon hearsay
information.
49
50
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Do Gold Nuggets Grow or Are They Born that Way?
Mining and Metallurgy v 16 n 344 Aug 1935 p. 344.
More on nugget birth control; in closing discussion,
original author concedes that statement
regarding growth of nuggets by accretion
should have been less positive; specimens
originally referred to are matted aggregates
consisting of tightly packed and compressed
particles, in which malleability of metal as
factor in "coldwelding" is quite apparent.
Die sekundaeren Umlagerungen und Anreicherungen des
Goldes in den Goldseifen.
G. BUERG.
Zeitschrift für Praktische Geologie v 43 n 9 Sept 1935
p. 1349.
Theoretical study of secondary changes and enrichments
of gold in gold placers; conclusions
regarding redeposition and migration of gold
from position of its primary origin.
Occurrence of Gold in Stream Placers.
F.A. CRAMPTON.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 20 n 16 Jan 15 1937 p.
34 and 334.
Comment on fallacy of generally accepted theory that
greatest concentration of gold will occur
close to, or in center of "trough" of stream
bed; uniformity is rare in placer deposits;
combinations of factors influencing gold
deposition may cause series of complex
conditions; each area requires special
study; examples of placer gold deposits,
stressing importance of local conditions.
Sur l'origine de l'or et des pepites alluvionnaires.
R. VAN AUBEL.
Chronique des Mines Coloniales v 6 n 64 July 15 1937 p.
23862.
Contribution to study of alluvial gold and nuggets;
review of researches and conclusions.
Bibliography.
Nekotorye zakonomernosti obrazovaniya v vodoemakh
promyshlennkh kontsentratov tyazhelykh
meineralov.
M.G. BARKOVSKAYA.
Geologiya Rudnykh Mestorozhdentii n 1 JanFeb 1963 p 5064.
Some formation features of economic grade concentration
of heavy minerals in basins of deposition;
genetic classification of basin type placers
is suggested; analysis of process of placer
formation of various genetic types and
evaluation of their economic value;
possibility of artificial formation of
51
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
placers in areas where sediments are
enriched in heavy minerals; results of study
of beaches and shelf.
Formirovanie zolotonosnykh rossypei i otrazhenie
ustoichivosti dolinnoi seti v
mineralogicheskom sostav allyuviya.
L.V. ZORIN.
Izvestiya Vysshikh Uchebnykh Zavedenii. Geologiya i
Razfedka n 7 July 1964 p. 7985.
Formation of gold placers and reflection of stability
of valleys network by mineral composition of
alluvium; effect of distance of
transportation between source and site of
deposition on size of mineral grains in
alluvium.
Podvodna koncentracija zlata iz recnog zlatonosnog
peska.
D. LESIC.
Rudarski Glasnik n 4 1965 p. 510.
Underwater concentration of gold from goldbearing river
sands; theoretical principle of underwater
gold concentration is based on fact that
when goldbearing and is slightly elevated by
underwater impeller pump, water or river
current will transport sand l m in direction
of water flow; it would be possible to get
concentration of free gold, allowing goldbearing sand to settle by putting corduroy
or amalgamating table on this vibrating
device.
51
52
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
LOCATION
Africa
New Brighton Mines, Limited.
C.S. EDMONDSON.
Mining Journal - Feb. 2, 1907.
Report of a visit by C.S. EDMONDSON, who has specially
examined the Bendigo alluvial gold field in
South Africa. 3500 w.
The Gold Coast: The "Sick Man" of the Mining Industry.
JOSEPH RALPH.
Mining Journal - Oct. 22, 1910. Serial. 1st part.
Explains conditions, discussing the climate, labour,
etc. 7500 w.
The Development of the Gold Deposits of Madagascar
(Exploitaton des Gisements Auriferes a
Madagascar).
H. PERES.
Memoires de la Société des Ingenénieurs Civils de
France - April, 1902.
Discussing the geology of the Madagscar placers and the
present methods by which they are worked.
8000 w.
Placer Gold in French Equatorial Africa.
J.L. MIDDLETON.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 133 n 2 Feb 1932 p 8990.
Deposits of placer gold in paying quantities discovered
during April 1929 in Baguetta Creek in
Oubangui Chari district: origin of gold
attributed to intrusion of sedimentary
formation by granite batholith: gold is
recovered by sluicing, with native labourers
shovelling directly into sluices or
transporting gravel by wheelbarrow.
Mining Gold Gravels in Sierra Leone.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 133 n 4 Apr 1932 p.
203.
Notes on two placer gold mining operations.
First Report on Kakamega Goldfield, Kenya.
A. KITSON.
Mining Journal (Lond) v 179 n 5073, 5074, 5075 and 5076
Nov 12 1932 p 7578, Nov. 19 p. 7734, Nov 26
p 794 and Dec 3 p 8078.
Field in northern Kavirondo, discovered in 1931, with
area about 420 sq mi; geology; alluvial
mining and prospecting of reefs; modes of
gold occurrence; development activity.
Geology of Abuasi Goldfield.
53
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
N.R. JUNNER.
Gold Coast Geological Survey Memoir n 2 1932 43 p supp
plates.
Physical features; general and economic geology; mines
of Ashanti Goldfields Corp. and other gold
occurrences; alluvial gold.
L'or au Togo.
V. KACHINSKY.
Chronique des Mines Coloniales v 4 n 37 Apr 1 1935 p.
11423.
Gold deposits in Togo; historical review and comparison
with neighbouring countries; conditions
before and after European occupation;
deposits in rock and alluvial deposits;
conclusions.
Western Abyssinian Plateau.
G.T. EVE.
Mining Magazine v 53 n 2 Aug 1935 p 858; see also
Mining and Indus Mag of S Africa v 21 n 3
Sept 13, 1935 p 912.
Notes on mineralization of plateau area lying east of
Gambeila, head of navigation of Baro river,
affluent of Nile; data refer chiefly to
alluvial and eluvial gold and platinum
deposits and outcroppings of quartz reefs
and stringers.
Les gisements d'or et de platine du Ouallega
(Ethiopie).
Génie Civil v 107 n 26 Dec 28 1935 p 620.
Gold and platinum deposits of Ouallega region in
Ethiopia, adjacent to AngloEgyptian Soudan;
locality map; recovery of metal from
alluvial deposits; pegmatite and quartz
veins were described by GEIER in
Metallwirtschaft Oct 18; brief descriptions
of mines and concessions.
Eastern Lupa Goldfield.
E.O. TEALE and N.W. EADES, with Petrological Notes, F.
OATES.
Tanganyika Territory Geological Survey Dept Bul n 8
1935 6l p supp sheets.
Location, accessibility, physical features and general
information; general geology similar to that
of western Lupa, described by Grantham, in
Bul n 3; eluvial and alluvial deposits have
yielded nuggets without quartz up to 104 oz;
quartz reefs, with iron pyrites and other
sulphides and associated minerals.
Bibliography.
Recent Developments in Gold Mining in Tanganyika
53
54
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Territory.
E.O. TEALE.
Imperial Inst Bul v 34 n 1. JanMar 1936 p 4454.
Brief review of conditions during past 25 yr; gold
production statistics; Musoma gold field;
Mwanza gold field; Mkalama gold field, or
IrambaSekenke region; Lupa gold field;
geological features and principal mines of
each; timber supplies; workable coal
deposits near Galulu Mission offer fuel
supply for Lupa field; sketch map shows
location of fields.
Outline of Recent Developments on Lupa Gold Fields.
Tanganyika Territory.
R.A. MACKAY.
Chemical, Metallurgical and Mining Society of South
Africa J v 37 n 3 Sept 1936 p 98108.
History of development; granitic gneiss complex,
intruded by later granites; quartz reefs and
alluvial gold; placers worked by sluicing
and in dry season by dryblower machine;
dominant features of 28 reef mines of
different character; 14 mills, capacity 2 to
40 tons per day; some deposits carry high
proportion of sulphides, majority free from
copper.
Les Gites miniers d'Eluvions et d'Alluvions au Congo
Belge.
E. POLINARD.
Revue Universelle des Mines v 13 n 3 Mar 1937 p 12133.
Eluvial and alluvial deposits of Belgian Congo; their
prospecting and exploitation discussed;
summary description of detrital deposits;
exploration and evaluation; methods of
exploitation and treatment often differ for
diamond and for gold as well as for
cassiterite.
Gold Coast Mining.
D.D. HOWAT.
Mine and Quarry Engineering v 5 n 1 Jan 1940 p 310.
Historical, statistical and descriptive account;
geology; classification of gold deposits,
both vein and placer; mining camps; land
belongs to native races and concessions are
obtained from reigning chiefs; native
labour; European staff and supervision;
mining health area; power generation and
fuel; transportation. Bibliography.
Die GoldLagerstaetten der Britischen Kolonie
Goldkueste.
F.E. KLINGNER.
Berg und Hüttenmännisches Monatsheft v 88 n 2 Feb 15
1940 p 1722.
Gold deposits of British Gold Coast Colony in West
55
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Africa; discussion of mining conditions and
development of gold mines; geology of
southern Gold Coast; description of
deposits; gold placers; production data.
Bibliography.
"SmallWorkers" of Southern Rhodesia's Gold Mining
Industry.
R.F. MITCHELL.
South African Mining and Engineering Journal v 42 n
2519 May 10, 1941 p 287 and 289.
Brief general review of methods and procedure on small
or "one man" property; deposits are
alluvials, surface or eluvial and reef
deposits; reef deposits are largest
producers; extraction is by amalgamation and
cyanidation in most cases; where pyrrhotite
or arsenopyrite is present, concentrate is
made either by flotation or tabling and
roasted before cyanidation.
Gold Recovery at Revue.
South African Mining and Engineering Journal v 54 pt 1
n 2614 Mar 6 1943 p 7.
Alluvial gold deposits in valley of Revue River in
Portuguese East Africa cover area about 15
mi long and width from few hundred feet to
nearly one mile; gravel depth varies from
few feet to 40 ft deposits were worked in
ancient times; early dredging operations;
notes on work done since property was taken
over by Eastern Transvaal Consolidated Mines
Ltd.
Crystalline Gold
Mine and Quarry Engineering v 17 n 7 July 1951 p 2237.
Study of Buhwezu Plateau. Ankole Southwest Uganda;
country built up of sedimentary KaragweAnkolean rocks of preCambrian age; gold
deposits of alluvial type have been worked
out; alluvial gold has crystalline nature of
metal; possible source of origin of gold
particles discussed; recommendations for
future explorations.
Lupa Goldfield. Tanganyika Territory.
A.M. QUENNEL.
Mining Magazine v 84 n 6 Dec 1951 p 3417.
Location and history of previous development;
mineralization is of preCambrian age,
subjected to erosion in end Tertiary time,
forming auriferous reefs in oxidized zones
which yielded material to alluvial gold
deposits; data on output of alluvial and
reef gold; review of areas where attention
55
56
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
should be directed; map.
La mécanisation de l'exploitation des gisements
alluvionnaires Africains d'apres
l'experience Americaine.
P. SEYER.
Echo des Mines et de la Métallurgie n 3470, 3471, 3472,
3473 July 1954 p 46974, Aug p 51724, Sept p
6024, Oct p 6812.
Mechanization and exploitation of African placers on
basis of American experiences; economical
study and statistics on American mines.
Geology and Gold Deposits of Ruvu River Area.
B.N. TEMPERLEY.
Tanganyika Geological Survey Short Paper n 24 1958 37
p. 4 maps, 6 plates. Stratigraphic sequence
is represented by metamorphosed Basement
complex and alluvium; distribution of
successful gold workings in relation to
valley form; character of river bed and
"gold wash"; suggestions for further
prospecting; occurrences of pyritic and
eluvial gold.
Alluvial Goldfield in Ethiopia.
H.L. HOLLOWAY.
Mining Magazine v 107 n 2 Feb 1958 p 739.
In Kebre Mengist field, south of Addis Ababa, most
prolific sources of gold have been various
stream valleys; gold is water worn and
usually coarse; prospecting system, dredging
operation and data on gold recovery.
Alluvial Gold of Msidza River, Lundazi District.
J.G. SIMPSON, A.R. DRYSDALL.
Northern Rhodesia. Geological Survey Economic Unit
Report n 5 1964 7 p.
For stretch of about 1 1/2 mi south of confluence of
Mukusa and Msidza Rivers, bed of latter
contains partly indurated goldbearing
gravels which are largely confined to
present course, only extending into banks on
inside of bends; average width is estimated
to be 8 ft and depth 9 in; although narrow
lenticular quartz veins containing up to 10
dwt of gold outcrop in vicinity of river, no
large "reefs" were indicated; 30% of gold is
finegrained.
57
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
LOCATION
Asia
The Chicksan Mines, Korea.
THOMAS T. READ.
Mining and Scientific Press - April 1, 1911.
Illustrated account of the mines owned by this company,
which include both veins and placers. 2000
w.
Gold Placers in Central China.
E.G. THURSTON.
Mining and Scientific Press - Feb. 15, 1913.
Describes examples of placer mining, showing the
Chinese to be industrious workers for small
returns. Ills. 2500 w.
Chiksan Mines, Chosen.
CLARENCE L. LARSON.
Engineering and Mining Journal - July 25, 1914. Serial.
1st part.
Describes this Americancontrolled property in Korea.
Ills 3300 w.
Gold Mining in Outer Mongolia.
E.W. MILLS.
Mining Journal (Lond.), vol. 165, no. 4891, May 18,
1929, pp. 399402.
Notes on prospecting expeditions; gold placers are
known to exist on many rivers, but active
mining confined to small area from DzounModo
to Kudara, 10 mi. from Siberia; history,
geology, accessibility, transportation,
climate, labour and general notes; total
production 1901 to 1919 about 320,000 troy
oz.; gold quartz mining and milling since
1915; brief description of five of principal
placer fields. Paper read before China
Instn. of Mining and Metallurgy.
Gold Mining and its Vital Importance to Manchuria.
G.T. EVE.
Far Eastern Review v 28 n 7 July 1932 p 31314 and 329.
Broad review of gold mining industry in Manchuria and
comparison with Amur region of Siberia; data
on past production.
Gold in Manchuria.
G.T. EVE.
Mining Magazine v 47 n 4 Apr 1933 p 2125.
Outline of prospects for alluvial and lode gold mining,
by late mining adviser to Nanking
Government.
57
58
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACERS
LOCATION
Australia
The Victorian Alluvial Gold Field.
Australian Mining Standard - Feb. 6, 1896.
A map of about thirty miles of alluvial district having
the roads, claims, rivers and hills located
with explanation in the text. 2400 w.
Victorian Gold Mining.
THOMAS CORNISH.
Mining Journal - Feb. 29, 1896.
Misleading statements in prospectuses. 1500 w.
The Auriferous Beach Sands on the North Coat (N.S.W.).
J.E. CARNE.
Australian Mining Standard - March 12, 1896.
A full description from the annual report of the New
South Wales Department of Mines.
The Alluvial Leads of Victoria.
Australian Mining Standard - Feb. 25, 1897.
Plan of these leads from the source to the present
workings, with tabulated statement giving
some idea of the metal won. 500 w.
Benalla Gold Field (Vic.).
W.H. FERGUSON.
Australian Mining Standard - Oct. 21, 1897.
Report, with plan of field, describing the reefs,
alluvial claims, and prospecting. 2000 w.
Revival in Victorian Alluvial Mining.
WILLIAM BRADFORD.
Australian Mining Standard - April 7, 1898.
Information concerning the plains south of Ballarat.
Ill. 1700 w.
Mining in Victoria.
Australian Mining Standard - Nov. 10, 1898.
An interesting account of this mining region of
Australia, illustrating the primitive
methods of alluvial gold mining and
extraction, and the progress in methods.
The Alluvial Deposits of Western Australia.
T.A. RICKARD.
Transactions of the American Institute of Mining
Engineers - Dec. 1898.
Describes the geology and physiography of these gold
fields, distribution, dry blowing machinery,
water supply and theories of the origin of
the deposits. Ill. 9900 w.
59
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
The Clermont Goldfield.
B. CUNSTAN, assistant government geologist.
Queensland Gov Mining Journal - Aug. 15, 1902.
Report describes the geological considerations, the
alluvial deposits, etc. of this district in
Queensland. Serial. lst part. 11,500 w.
Alluvial GoldMining Appliances.
Queensland Gov Mining Journal - Aug. 15, 1902. Serial.
1st part.
An illustrated description of machines and accessories
which have proved to be of special
importance in alluvial gold mining on the
Clermont field. 3500 w.
Deep Alluvial Mining.
D.H. BROWNE.
Mines and Minerals - Jan. 1904.
An illustrated article giving practical hints and
descriptions of methods which have been
employed in the mines of New South Wales,
Australia. 3800 w.
Deep Alluvial Mining in Victoria.
F. DANVERS POWER.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Sept. 29, 1904.
Describes the deep leads and the systems of mining.
Ills. 2000 w.
Black Ridge, Clermont.
LIONEL C. BALL.
Queensland Gov Mining Journal - June 15, 1905.
Preliminary report of the geological survey, giving
location, geology, deposits and general
information of the auriferous ground.
Serial. lst part. 10,000 w.
Charlotte Plains Deep Leads.
E.J. DUNN.
Australian Mining Standard - July 5, 1905.
Describes deep alluvial mining, showing gold wash
deposits. 1200 w.
Black Ridge, Clermont.
LIONEL C. BALL.
Queensland Gov Mining Journal - Dec. 15, 1905. Serial.
1st part.
Recent note son this gold mining district given as a
supplementary report to an ear lier article.
Deals with the geology, mining and milling,
claims, etc. Ills. 8500 w.
Deep Placer Deposits of Victoria.
H.L. WILKINSON.
59
60
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Engineering and Mining Journal - Dec. 30, 1905.
Discusses the principles which have affected the value
of the regularly de fined "deep leads" Maps.
2400 w.
Charlotte Plains Consolidated.
F.D. JOHNSON.
Australian Mining Standard - June 27, 1906.
An account of the drainage and final successful working
of this deep alluvial gold mine in Victoria.
1500 w.
Saving Minerals from Beach Sands.
Mining World - Oct. 10, 1908.
Account of a novel device for recovering minerals from
the beach sands of Richmond River, New South
Wales. Abstracted from the Town and Country
Journal. Ills. 900 w.
DeepLead Alluvial Mining in Victoria.
FRANK REED.
New Zealand Mines Record - Dec. 16, 1908.
Illustrated description of methods. Plates. 2000 w.
The Beginning of Australia's Gold Mining Industry as
Recorded in 1852.
A.H. GUERNSEY.
Engineering and Mining Journal, vol. 127, no. 17, Apr.
27, 1929, pp. 668669, 4 figs.
Discovery of gold was announced by Edward Hargraves,
Apr. 3, 1851; rush to diggings was well
under way by middle of May; at height of
activity, about two fifths of miners were
making $5 per day, and other twofifths
gained from fifty cents to $1.50 and
remainder earned nothing. Extracts from
article in Harpers New Monthly Magazine,
Dec. 1852. Victorian Deep Leads, A.R.O.
WILLIAMS. Mining Magazine v 52 n 3 Mar 1935
p 13748. Description of methods developed
for exploitation of deepseated auriferous
gravel deposit in Victoria, Australia;
ancient river channels were worked to depths
of over 400 ft below surface; study
indicates how past practice is likely to be
improved upon, as mines are being reopened;
importance of draining wash gravel before
driving workings in it; ventilation
requirements.
DeepLead Mining in Victoria, Australia, with Note on
Similar Practice at Wingdam.
B.C., D.C. MACKENZIE.
Canadian Mining and Metallurgy Bulletin n 280 Aug 1935
p 40010.
Definition of deep leads; deep leads of Victoria are of
3 types; alluviumcovered, subbasaltic, and
61
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
elevated subbasaltic; Ballarat panelling
system and Chiltern blockingout system of
mining; production and capital costs;
essential characteristics of ideal deepplacer proposition.
Deep Lead Mining in Victoria.
G.B. O'MALLEY.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 28 n 330 Mar 9
1936 p 17183.
Description of plant and operations of Talbor Alluvials
Ltd; earlier work in field was discussed by
A.R.O. WILLIAMS in Mining Magazine Mar 1935;
thickness of wash ranges from few inches to
30 ft, values being in lower part, rarely
over 12 in. deep; payable width is commonly
500 to 600 ft; depth to bedrock is from 92
to 440 ft; mining methods; flow sheet of
treatment plant.
Washing Deep Lead Gravels for Gold.
L.A. CROZIER.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 29 n 338 Nov 9
1936 p. 435.
Tailings retreatment plant at Allendale, Victoria,
(near Ballarat) washes material from gravel
dumps remaining from deep lead operations;
recovery 15 oz gold per week from 3000 cu yd
gravel, simply by washing and gravity
collection; slackline excavator with 3/4 cu
yd scoop handles material and dumps into
hopper, from which material is discharged
into sluice boxes.
Gulgong Gold Field.
L.J. JONES.
New South Wales Dept Mines Geological Survey Mineral
Resources n 38 1940 p 7134.
History; physical geography; gold production
statistics; 1870 to 1937 inclusive with
total of more than 5,205 oz. general
geology; detrital or placer deposits;
alluvial "leads"; alluvial gold in
conglomerates of Permian coal measures;
description of Main or GulgongCooyal deep
lead and of tributary leads; gold reefs,
outcropping at surface and concealed by
alluvium; clay, antimony and silica
deposits. Bibliography.
Magnetic Prospecting of Gulgong Deep Leads.
J.M. RAYNER.
New South Wales Dept Mines Geological Survey Mineral
Resources, n 38 1940 p 13558, maps, supp
plates.
61
62
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Principles of magnetic prospecting; susceptibility of
common rock types; geology of Gulgong area;
method used to locate position of stream
channels in old land surface now covered
partly by basalt and extensively by alluvial
deposits; primary aim is to indicate where
boreholes and shafts may be sunk to best
advantage in search for goldbearing wash; 5
areas are favourable.
Deep Alluvial Gold Leads of Kalgoorlie.
C.M. HARRIS.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 38 n 452 May
10 1946 p 26972.
Article does not deal with geological aspects, purpose
being to place on record valuable
prospecting and mapping done by professional
prospector Oliver Hancock about 1900; many
places in area are considered to be still
worthy of further attention.
Geology of Country About Coolgardie, Coolgardie
Goldfield.
W.A., J.C. MCMATH, N.M. GREY, H.J. WARD.
Western Australia Geological Survey Bul n 107 1953 365
p, 3 supp maps, 24 maps in separate atlas.
Physiography of country; older greenstones,
metamorphism, granites and allied igneous
rocks, and Recent deposits; structural
elements; alluvial deposits of gold; quartz
reefs and lodes; minerals; other than gold;
details on mining groups.
Gold Recovery from Auriferous Gravel from Goulburn
River, Near Seymour, Vic.
J.T. WOODCOCK.
Australia. Commonwealth Sci and Indus Research
Organization Ore Dressing Investigations
Commonwealth Mining Dept., Univ. of
Melbourne Report 598 June 1960 6 p.
Two gravel samples containing 1 and 6 dw/ton gold
respectively were tested; gold ranged in
size from 16 to 200 mesh; after rejecting
plus 10 mesh fraction by screening, 9699% of
gold was recovered in strake concentrate;
nearly all of this gold was readily
amalgamated, and recovery in amalgam was
about 94%.
63
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACERS
LOCATION
Canada
Gold Mining Industry 1958. Canada.
Dominion Bureau of Statistics n 26209 Jan 1960 B39 p.
Statistics on alluvial gold mining, auriferous quartz
mining, and coppergoldsilver mining
production, export, import, consumption, and
costs including labour, fuel, and
electricity.
63
64
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACERS
LOCATION
Canada
Alberta
Alluvial Gold Mining at Edmonton, Alberta, Canada.
ISAAC COWIE.
Canadian Mining Review - May, 1898,.
An account of the mineral wealth of this region, the
methods of mining employed, and general
information of interest. 3400 w.
Gold on the North Saskatchewan River.
J.B. TYRRELL.
Bulletin of the Canadian Mining Institute - Feb., 1915.
The physiography, history, occurrence, production,
geology, and source of the gold. 4500 w.
Gold Hunting House Boat.
G.Y. SCHIERBOLTZ.
Canadian Mining Journal v 64 n 6 June 1943 p 358.
Illustrated note on houseboat 32 ft long to be used in
attempt to recover gold from potholes of
North Saskatchewan River; idea is to anchor
boat above pothole; current drives large
water wheel on upstream end of boat; wheel
actuates suction pump and suction hose is
lowered into pothole; if appearance of
pumped sand indicates possibility of coarse
gold or nuggets, plan is to cofferdam hole
with sandbags and hoist coarse gravels out.
65
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
LOCATION
Canada
B.C.
The Gold Mining Revival in British Columbia.
Mining Journal - Aug. 29, 1896.
Editorial review of present prospects in this field.
1700 w.
GoldBearing Reefs and Placers of Northern British
Columbia.
WILLIAM HAMILTON MERRITT.
Canadian Mining Review - March, 1898.
Notes on the general character of the placers and
quartz reefs, and the general character of
the ores. Ill. 3800 w.
The Auriferous Alluvium of the Fraser River and Its
Tributaries.
J.D. KENDALL.
British Columbia Mining Record - Feb., 1900.
Part first gives an outline of the economic history and
some hydrographic data.
An Atlin Hydraulic Mine.
Mining and Scientific Press - May 11, 1901.
Brief Illustrated account of the mining conditions in
this district of British Columbia. 800 w.
Auriferous Black Sands of Vancouver Island, B.C.
W.M. BREWER.
Engineering and Mining Journal - May 18, 1901.
An account of the difficulty met in saving the gold,
and the recent success; also discusses the
source. 1500 w.
Black Sand Auriferous Deposits of Wreck Bay, Jordan
River, and Other Localities of Vancouver
Island.
R. LIND WATSON.
Mines and Minerals - June, 1901.
Descriptive. Map. 1200 w.
Auriferous Beach Sands of British Columbia.
British Columbia Mining Record - Aug., 1901.
General information concerning these deposits and the
attempts to work them, the machines, used,
etc. Ills. 5000 w.
Mining Operations in Atlin, B.C.
R. LIND WATSON.
Mines and Minerals - Dec. 1901. Serial. 1st part.
An illustrated description of some of the placers and
65
66
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
the hydraulic plants which are being
installed. 2200 w.
Characteristics of the Atlin Gold Field.
J.C. GUILLIM.
Canadian Mining Review - Jan. 31, 1902.
Describes the placer bearing streams, and the region
through which they pass. Ill. 2700 w.
Recent Operations in the Atlin District.
MOSTYN WILLIAMS.
British Columbia Mining Record - Feb. 1902.
Brief accounts of the operations of five companies
employed in construction and equipment of
hydraulic plants. Ill. 2400 w.
Hydraulic Mining in Omineca District During 1901.
British Columbia Mining Record - Feb. 1902.
Report for the year of this placer district, especially
the operations on the Vital and Town Creek
section. Ill. 1800 w.
Notes from the Atlin District, British Columbia.
W.M. BROOK.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Nov. 29, 1902.
An illustrated article giving information of the
progress made by the companies operating in
this region. 2200 w.
Alluvial Deposits of Horsefly, B.C.
W.M. BREWER.
Mining and Scientific Press - Oct. 31, 1903. Serial.
1st part.
Illustrates, describes the placer and hydraulic mines
of this portion of the Cariboo district.
1200 w.
Hydraulic Mining on the Quesnelle.
WILLIAM M. BREWER.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Oct. 31, 1903.
Describes this portion of the Cariboo mining district,
giving details of operation and results
obtained by hydraulic mining of these
auriferous gravels. 2300 w.
Quesnelle Forks Mining Division of British Columbia.
W.M. BREWER.
Mines and Minerals - Feb. 1904.
Illustrated description of a great placer mining region
and the developments. 4000 w.
Hydraulic Mining in Cariboo, BC.
J.B. HOBSON.
Mining and Scientific Press - Feb. 20, 1904.
From the annual report, showing details of large
operations in progress in Cariboo. 1st part.
1200 w.
67
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
The Atlin District.
W. WALLACE GRIME.
Engineering and Mining Journal - March 31, 1904.
Information concerning the mining laws, the methods and
the development. 1100 W.
Hydraulic Mining Conditions in the Atlin District of
British Columbia.
Mining Reporter - July 27, 1905.
Extract from the report of the Provincial Mineralogist.
Describes the present conditions, the progress and the
character of the deposits. 1500 w.
Hydraulic Placer Mining in the Cariboo District.
B.C. ETIENNE A. RITTER.
Mining World - Dec. 8, 1906.
A report of this district and the important mines being
worked. Ills. 2300 w.
Placer Mining Methods in the Atlin District.
ALFRED CARMICHAEL.
Mines and Minerals - Jan. 1907.
Illustrated description of the dams and plant for
obtaining water, and the methods of mining
and blasting before hydraulicking. 3000 w.
British Columbia Placers: Past and Present.
HORACE F. EVANS.
Mining World - May 4, 1907. Serial. 1st part.
Interesting information concerning the early placer
mining of British Columbia. 1800 w.
Mining in Atlin, British Columbia, 18981908.
ROSALIND WATSON YOUNG.
Journal of the Canadian Mining Institute - 1909.
Reviews the history of the ten years. Ills. 4500 w.
Some Notes on the Siwash Creek Section.
B.C. NEWTON, W. EMMENS.
Mining World - May 6, 1911.
Gives the history of a district yielding exceedingly
rich specimens of freemilling gold ore. The
geology is described and also the placer
mining. Ills. 1800 w.
Auriferous Gravels of Cariboo, B.C.
E. JACOBS.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Sept. 23, 1911.
Illustrated account of profitable quantities of placer
gold. 4000 w.
Placer Gold Mining in British Columbia (70949).
E. JACOBS.
Canadian Mining Journal June 1, 1916.
67
68
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Production, with report by districts. 3000 w.
Cariboo Placers and Lodes.
J.A. MACPHERSON.
Mining and Engineering Record, vol. 24, nos. 8 and 9.
May 1919, pp. 125129, 9 figs.
Concerning conditions, ore treatment and transportation
costs.
Notes on the Placer Mines of Cariboo, British Columbia.
J.B. TYRRELL.
Economic Geology, vol. 14, no. 4, June 1919, pp. 335345, 4 figs.
Historical account topography, conditions and
development of drainage.
Operations in the Cariboo, British Columbia.
DONALD D. FRASER.
Engineering and Mining Journal, vol. 113, no. 12, Mar.
25, 1922, pp. 490491.
Reviews activities generally.
Placer Deposits of Cedar Creek Area, Cariboo District,
British Columbia.
W.A. JOHNSTON.
Canadian Mining Journal, vol. 43, no. 45, Nov. 10,
1922, pp. 762765, 2 figs.
Results of writer's examination and mapping of area in
September 1922. Notes on accessibility of
area, physical features, mining operations
and placer gold deposits.
Cedar Creek Placers.
W.A. JOHNSTON.
Canadian Mining Journal, vol. 46, no. 5, Jan. 30, 1925,
pp. 117119, 2 figs.
New mining plant and mining conditions at Cedar Creek,
Cariboo District, B.C.
Mining in Cariboo.
D.D. FRASER.
Canadian Mining Journal, vol. 48, no. 43, Oct. 28,
1927, pp. 849850.
Mining during past year continued without any
noticeable change for better or worse.
Placer and Vein Gold Deposits of Barkerville, Cariboo
District, British Columbia.
W.A. JOHNSTON and W.L. UGLOW.
Canada Dept. Mines, Geological Survey Memoir, no. 130,
1927, 246 pp.
General and economic geology; origin of placer gold.
Alluvial or Placer Mining in British Columbia.
H.J. ROBERTSON.
Canadian Mining Journal, vol. 59, no. 13, Mar. 30,
1928, p. 268, 2 figs.
Many rich superficial deposits worked out; deeply
69
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
buried deposits still untouched; lowgrade
deposits also still unworked; only few
isolated instances of suitable conditions
for dredging, as narrow, steep valleys are
rule, with goldbearing gravel capped by
glacial drift.
Placer Mining in the Atlin District.
C.L. MONROE.
Canadian Mining and Metallurgy Bulletin, no. 211, Nov.
1929, pp. 12721279, 3 figs.
General notes on history and future possibilities.
Gold in Northern British Columbia.
F.A. KERR.
Canadian Mining Journal, vol. 52, no. 27, Oct. 1931,
pp. 761764, 3 figs.
History of placer mining in region; origin of placer
gold deposits; occurrence; discovery;
significance in relation to lode deposits;
discoveries of lode deposits with high gold
content.
Monashee Creek Placers. Osayoos District, B.C.
Canadian Mining Journal v 53 n 10 Oct 1932 p 43540.
History of development, dating from 1874; topography;
bench deposits; bedrock geology; recent
development and future possibilities.
Placer and Vein Gold Deposits of Barkerville, Cariboo
District, British Columbia.
W.A. JOHNSON and W.L. UGLOW.
Canada Dept Mines, Geol Survey Summary Report 1932 pt
A 1 n 2331 1933 p 175. Summary of Memoir No.
149, published in 1926; general geology;
origin of physical features; resume of lode
mining, dating from 1876; general character
of veins and of vein gold; description of
principal mines and prospects; descriptions
of placer deposits, occurring in 5 types.
Geology and Placer Deposits of Quesnel Forks Area,
Cariboo District, British Columbia.
W.E. COCKFIELD and J.F. WALKER.
Canada Dept Mines, Geol Survey Summary Report 1932 pt
A1 n 2331 1933 p 76143.
Area has known production of about $6,000,000 since
1874; most parts of area are readily
accessible and topography is relatively low;
general geology; origin of physical
features; description of placer deposits, in
which pay streaks occur in many ways; notes
on principal mining properties; brief
descriptions of quartz veins. Bibliography.
69
70
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Review of Mineral Industry of British Columbia in 1933.
H.G. NICHOLS.
Canadian Mining Journal v 55 n 2 Feb 1934 p 6873.
Statistical review; notes on activities in principal
mining districts; feature was reopening and
further development of isolated gold mines.
GoldBearing BlackSand Deposits of Graham Island, Queen
Charlotte Islands.
J.T. MANDY.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy and Soc of
Nova Scotia Trans v 37 1934 p 56372.
Deposits of fine gold in beach sands, originating from
reworking of extensive morainic deposits by
wave and wind action; black sand deposits
have lenticular and varying distribution
along base of bluffs; extent, distribution
and location of concentrates varies greatly
and changes rapidly and frequently;
exploitation is not recommended to
"greenhorns"; recovery methods.
Willow River MapArea, Cariboo District, B.C.; General
Geology and Lode Deposits.
G. HANSON.
Canada Dept Mines, Geol Survey Summary Report 1933 pt
A n 2350 1934 p 3048. General description of
district; geology; quartz veins, containing
much pyrite and arsenopyrite, some
pyrrhotite, many of veins bearing gold;
description for individual deposits; note on
origin of placer gold.
Willow River MapArea, Cariboo District, B.C.; Placer
Deposits.
W.E. COCKFIELD.
Canada Dept Mines, Geol Survey Summary Re port 1933 pt
A in 2350 1934 p 4961.
Report deals only with placers included in western part
of Willow River map area; placer gold of
district may occur in many different ways;
description of creeks. Bibliography.
Cariboo and Bridge River Goldfields. British Columbia.
V. DOLMAGE.
Canadian Mining and Metallurgy Bulletin n 268 Aug 1934
(trans) p 40530 (discussion) 4305. These
goldfields are about 300 mi apart and
contain deposits of distinctly different
types; location, history, geology, and ore
deposits of each are described.
Manson River and Slate Creek Placer Deposits, Omineca
District, British Columbia.
F.A. KERR.
Canada Dept Mines, Geol Survey Summary Report 1933, pt
A n 2350 1934 p 929. General geology; notes
on placer mining activity since 1861;
71
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
practically all gold placer deposits in area
occur on or near bedrock; much testing of
higher ground has been done, but with little
or no reward; no lode gold deposit of
importance has been discovered or developed
to state of economic importance.
Cariboo Mining District I, II and III.
J.N. WYNNE.
Mining Magazine v 54 n 3, 4, and 5 Mar 1936 p 13743,
Apr p 2128 and May p 27784.
Mar: Historical sketch, dating from gold rush of 1858.
Apr.: Present activities; geology;
mineralogy. May: Future possibilities.
Gold at McDame Creek, Cassiar District. B.C.
G. HANSON.
Canadian Mining Journal v 57 n 3 Mar 1936 p 1213.
Outline history of development and description of
placer and vein deposits in area less than
200 mi east of Juneau, Alaska; known goldbearing veins occur in volcanic rocks, in
area 3 by 5 mi; some veins are 15 to 100 ft.
wide; larger veins contain little pyrite or
other sulphide and are not known to contain
visible free gold; in 1877, McDame Creek
produced nugget worth $1300.00.
Recovery of Alluvial Gold.
D.C. MACKENZIE.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Trans v 40
1937 (mtg. Oct. 1936) p 1106. Bul n 298 Feb
1937. Results of experiments carried out at
Wingdam mine of Consolidated Gold Alluvials
of BC, Ltd., with object of establishing
reliable method of concentration of "wash"
and maximum recovery of gold from
concentrate; description of Lorentsen gold
saving machine and its use; enumeration of
important points for operation under
conditions described.
Mining Deep Lead by Australian Method.
D.C. MACKENZIE.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 139 n 4 Apr 1938 p 3941 and 545.
Deep lead (leed) is Australian term used to denote
ancient river bed deposits, further
classified as alluvium covered, subbasaltic,
and elevated subbasaltic, and elevated subbasaltic; last type can be mined by adits
instead of shafts; paper describes and
discusses application of Australian
procedure to deposits in Canada,
particularly in British Columbia; glossary
of deep lead mining terms.
71
72
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Cariboo.
C.M. CAMPBELL.
Mining and Quarry Engineering v 4 n 8 Aug 1939 p. 2713.
Historical and descriptive account; early placer
operations; quartz veins; operating methods.
Fraser River Tertiary Drainage History in Relation to
PlacerGold Deposits.
D. LAY.
British Columbia Dept Mines Bul n 3 1940 30 p.
Outline of present Fraser River drainage; effect of
damming caused by lava flows; glacial and
bed rock geology; mining operations
concerned with Fraser River Tertiary
drainage system; Tertiary Mine surface
exposures and underground workings; Canyon
mine; operations of F. Delong; possible
upstream continuation of Tertiary mine
channel; Golden Province Mines Co.
Placergold Deposits, Wheaton (Boulder) Creek Cassiar
District, Northern British Columbia.
S.S. HOLLAND.
British Columbia Dept Mines Bul n 2 1940 44 p.
Creek lies in Arctic drainage area; accessibility;
topography, benches are prominent and
important feature downstream from point 1 mi
south of Alice Shea Creek; tributaries;
glacial features; descriptive geology;
physiographic history; lode deposits,;
placer deposits; history and production;
origin of placer gold; working methods;
prospecting possibilities; description of
lenses.
Nelson MapArea, East Half, British Columbia.
H.M.A. RICE.
Canada Dept Mines and Resources Geological Survey
Memoir n 228 1941, 86 p (map in pocket).
Area is bounded by longitudes 116 and 117 West and by
latitudes 49 and 50 N; it includes 2100 sq
mi and towns of Kalso, Creston and Yahk;
general and structural geology; placer gold
deposits; lodge deposits related to three
rock types; nonmetallic deposits;
descriptions of individual properties;
mineral springs. Bibliography.
Fraser River Tertiary Drainage History in Relation to
Placer Gold Deposits II.
D. LAY.
British Columbia Dept Mines Bul n 11 1941 75 p supp
plates.
Report supplements Bul No 3 and continues investigation
of Fraser River drainage as far as Grand
Canyon, 109 mi upstream from Prince George;
topography; glacial geology; bed rock
73
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
geology; Tertiary Fraser River sediments;
Tertiary West Road (Black Water) River
sediments; Tertiary lacustrine deposits;
placer gold deposits; review of drainage
history; Rocky Mountain trench; table of
formations.
Mining Placer Ground With Stripping Shovel.
Excavating Engineer v 36 n 5 May 1942 p 24851 and 276.
Spruce Creek Placers, Ltd. solve mining problems with
specially designed 2yd stripping shovel;
excavation procedure; tailings removal. From
Mining World Mar 1942.
Mineral Possibilities of Areas Adjacent to Alaska
Highway. Pt II: British Columbia Section.
L.O. THOMAS.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Trans v 47
1944 p 20327 (Bul n 385 May 1944), p. 22843
(Bul n 386 June 1944).
Cordillera system of mountains; summarized descriptions
of known mineral occurrences; in five areas;
Rainy Hollow and Tatshenshini River; Atlin
Lake; Dease Lake and River; Liard River;
Peace River; copper silver, lead zinc; lode
and placer gold; coal; platinum; oil and
gas; other minerals. Bibliography.
Manson Creek Area.
J.E. ARMSTRONG and J.B. THURBER.
Western Miner v 18 n 6 June 1945 p 647.
Area comprises about 2760 sq mi in central British
Columbia; history of mining; physical
features; structural geology; economic
geology; placer deposits; lode deposits.
Extracts of paper 459 of GSC.
Ashcroft Area, B.C.
S. DUFFELL.
Western Miner v 20 n 8 Aug 1947 p 523.
Area described lies between latitudes 50 and 51 and
longitudes 121 and 122, with town of Spences
Bridge about 8 mi southeast of its
geographical center; gold placers; lode
mining; copper; hematite; chromite; gold;
coal; saline deposits. From Paper 4710 Geol
Survey of Canada.
Post War Recovery in Cariboo.
D.D. FRASER.
Western Miner v 20 n 4 Apr 1947 p 51.
Summary of activities on lode and placer mines.
Prospecting Possibilities in Cariboo District.
S.S. HOLLAND.
73
74
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Western Miner v 20 n 5 May 1947 p 568, 60.
Accessibility, by motor roads and trails; history;
geology; gold quartz veins and replacement
deposits in limestone; minor deposits of
mixed sulphide replacements in limestone;
belt of quartz veins along line of
occurrence of richest gold placers is
considered to be most favourable prospecting
ground in Cariboo; in areas of deep
overburden, intensive trenching must be laid
out on framework of geological knowledge.
Bibliography.
Geology and Mineral Deposits of Princeton MapArea.
British Columbia.
H.M.A. RICE.
Canada Geological Survey Memoir n 243 1947 136 p. supp
plates; maps in pocket. Report on area of
about 3100 sq mi; early discoveries were of
gold placer deposits, some yielding
platinum; lode mining has received most
attention; area also includes Tertiary coal
measures of Princeton and Coalmont, from
which more than 4,000,000 tons of coal have
been mined; bentonite; gypsum.
Geology and Mineral Deposits of Nicola MapArea, British
Columbia.
W.E. COCKFIELD.
Canada Geological Survey Memoir n 249 1948 164 p. supp
plates, maps in pocket.
Area covers about 3000 sq mi in southern interior
region of British Columbia; present account,
based largely on author's own field work
from 1939 to 1944, is illustrated to
geological map.; placer gold deposits; gold
and silver vein deposits; coal.
Fort St. James MapArea. Cassiar and Coast Districts,
British Columbia.
J.E. ARMSTRONG.
Canada Geological Survey Memoir n 252 1949 2l0 p supp
plates, map in pocket.
Geology and mineral deposits of area of 11,200 sq mi in
east central British Columbia; history;
physiography and glaciation; general and
structural geology; placer gold creeks;
mercury, silver lead zinc, gold, copper,
antimony, chromite, molybdenum, tungsten,
tin vanadium, manganese, coal, asbestos,
asphaltum phosphate and perlite deposits.
Bibliography.
Placer Gold Production of British Columbia.
S.S. HOLLAND.
British Columbia. Dept Mines Bul n 28 1950 p 564, 3
separate maps.
Recorded placer production for Province and for each
75
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
stream since 1958; production of crude gold,
fineness, value.
Base Metal "Jackpot" in B.C.
M.D. HEDLEY.
Western Miner v 24 n 4 Apr 1951 p 702.
Value of mineral production in 1950 estimated at
$137,500,000 and comprises production of
gold placer; gold lode, silver, copper and
lead, zinc, coal and structural materials;
miscellaneous other metals; minerals and
materials; data on price of metals; existing
mines reviewed.
Lode Mining Flourishes SouthCentral B.C.
H. SARGENT.
Western Miner v 24 n 10 Oct 1951 p 224.
Region Three includes Similkameen, Osoyoos, Greenwood,
and Vernon Mining Divisions; area has record
of mineral production that extends for many
years, and includes placer and lode gold,
placer platinum, silver, copper, lead, and
zinc, coal, limestone and silica (used for
flux), rock, gravel, and sand; statistics on
output.
DeepLevel Mining on Lightning Creek.
C.W.S. TREMAINE.
Western Miner and Oil Review v 34 n 7 July 1961 p 469.
Property consists of 20 mi of placer leases on
Lightning Creek in Cariboo mining district;
main part will be confined to section of
creek about one mile long; 35 holes give 6
cross sections of creek over one mile
length; drilling shows deeplevel, goldbearing gravels to be 6 ft deep, to vary in
width from 40 ft to 140 ft and to be at very
uniform depth of 165 ft below present creek
bed; history of mining at Lightning Creek.
Return to Fraser.
G.C. DRAPER.
Canadian Mining Journal v 84 n 11 Nov 1963 p 5861.
Proposed method for recovering gold from bed of Fraser
River contemplates sinking of shaft in solid
rimrock, tunneling out under river, boring
holes to surface of bedrock so that fine
material can be drawn off and gold and
platinum extracted; traps will be installed
in most strategic locations on river and
drain them as soon as they are replenished;
Fraser deposits over 18 million cu yd of
sand and silt at its mouth; tests were made
to determine action of placer gold when sand
in which it rests is drawn off from below.
75
76
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Annual Report of Minister of Mines and Petroleum
Resources 1962.
BRITISH COLUMBIA.
Dept Mines and Petroleum Resources Report 1963 310 p.
4 maps.
Statistics and departmental work; data on production of
lode metals; place, structural materials and
industrial minerals; petroleum and natural
gas, inspection of lode mines; placer mines;
quarries and coal; inspection of electrical
equipment and installations at mines and
quarries.
77
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER LOCATION
Labrador
Canada
Newfoundland and
Reported Discovery of Placer Gold in Labrador.
Canadian Mining Journal, vol. 44, no. 2l, May 25, 1923,
pp. 396397.
Official statement from Geological Survey, Ottawa.
77
78
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
LOCATION
Canada
Quebec
The Alluvial Gold Fields of Quebec.
ALEXANDER GRAY.
Mining World - April 16, 1910.
Gives the history of this area, and the present
exploitation and development. 2500 w.
Alluvial Gold Deposits in Quebec.
FRITZ CIRKEL.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Nov. 25, 1911.
Describes deposits known since 1835, and their recent
exploration. Ills. 3000 w.
Placer Mining in the Province of Quebec.
H.A. BALL.
Mining and Scientific Press - May 25, 1912.
Brief review of the history of these placers, the
present condition and the outlook. 1800 w.
A Brief Historical Sketch of Gold and Copper Mining in
Quebec.
DR. JAMES DOUGLAS.
Canadian Mining Journal - July 1, 1912.
A review. 1000 w.
Placer Gold on Meule Creek, Seigniory of RigaudVaudreuil, Quebec.
JOSEPH KEELE
Canadian Mining Journal - Nov. 15, 1912.
Abstract of a report describing the geology, the mining
methods, and discussing the origin of the
gold. 3000 w.
GoldBearing Gravels of Beauce County, Quebec.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
- March, 1915.
Describes the conditions under which gold occurs in
this district, and considers the causes
which gave rise to them. 5000 w.
79
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
LOCATION
Canada
Yukon
Gold Mining in the Yukon District.
W.M. OGLIVIE.
Canadian Mining Review - April, 1897.
Detailed description of the different methods of gold
mining used, with information to regard to
the various routes by which one may arrive
at these gold fields, and points of interest
to miners. 4400 w
Gold Mining in Alaska; Notes from the Klondike.
US Consular Reports, No. 447 - June 9, 1897.
On the promising conditions of these fields, and
interesting information relating to their
development. 2300 w.
The Yukon Gold Fields.
Australian Mining Standard - July 1, 1897.
Extracts from Inspector Constantine's report to the
government at Ottawa. On the richness of the
deposits. 800 w.
The Gold Finds of Alaska.
West Mining World - July 24, 1897.
Words of caution regarding investments with some
information of the country, the deposits,
and the products. 2500 w.
The Alaskan Placers.
Mining and Scientific Press - July 24, 1897.
Brief account of the new discoveries, the routes by
which to reach the Klondike fields, the
mines so far discovered, and the dangers and
hardships of the region. 1800 w.
In the Far Northwest.
WILLIAM OGILVIE
West Mining World - July 31, 1897.
Extracts from report of WILLIAM OGLIVIE, surveyor to
the Dominion government, on the extent of
the goldbearing section, its richness, etc.
2000 w.
The Yukon Gold Excitement.
Engineering and Mining Journal - July 31, 1897.
Presents facts leading to the belief that the Klondike
is a very rich placer gold deposit, also
79
80
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
giving information of the country, the
climate, cost of transportation, and the
attitude of the Canadian government. Short
editorial also given. 1800 w.
The Klondike Gold Fields.
Scientific American Sup - July 31, 1897.
Brief account of location, climatic conditions, ways of
reaching the gold fields, method of
mining,etc. 1000 w.
The Alaskan Gold Discoveries.
Bradstreet's - July 31, 1897.
Remarks on the effect of the recent discoveries both on
the financial markets and speculation.
Mention of the difficulties to be faced in
reaching the region is made, and of the
severe life due to the climate. 1000 w.
British Yukon Mining Regions.
Canadian Engineer - Aug. 1897.
An illustrated sketch of the district, its rich gold
deposits, fuel supply, and other minerals;
the difficulties to be met, routes, etc.
2800 w.
The Yukon District.
GEORGE M. DAWSON.
Canadian Mining Review - August, 1897.
Some account of the explorations made in this district,
with information of the country and its
resources. 1800 w.
The Klondike Mining Camp.
Accounts by GEORGE HAMLIN FITCH and C.A. SNOWDEN, with
illustrations.
Harper's Weekly - Aug. 7, 1897.
Gives particulars of the discovery of these rich mines,
the processes of mining, etc. 4800 w.
The Alaska
RUSSELL L.
Mining and
Discussion
Gold Field.
DUNN.
Scientific Press - Aug. 7, 1897.
of this field with conclusions. The placers
are believed to be derived from erosion of
goldbearing lodes, the richness of the
Klondike placer is likely to be equalled by
other discoveries, and the conditions are
different from other mining regions. Also
editorial. 4500 w.
The Geological Survey's Expedition to the Yukon in
1896.
HAROLD B. GOODRICH.
Harper's Weekly - Aug. 14, 1897.
81
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
An interesting account of the journey from Juneau to
the interior 2400 w.
The Klondike Placers.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Aug. 14, 1897.
Information on the mode of laying out the claims,
manner of working, with account of early
explorations as published in the "Canadian
Engineer." 1000 w.
The Yukon Gold Region.
CYRUS C. ADAMS.
Harper's Weekly - Aug. 14, 1897.
Valuable information gained by a Canadian surveyor,
relating to important finds in the Klondike
and other Yukon regions, routes, etc. Map
and Ill. 1600 w.
The Klondike Gold Fields.
HARRY DE WINDT.
Contemporary Review - Sept., 1897.
Comments on the dangers and difficulties of the region,
gives a brief outline of the journey,
information of the deposits and manner of
working, scarcity of food, etc. 2500 w.
The Canadian Yukon Gold Fields.
Canadian Engineer - Sept., 1897.
Review of the projected schemes for regulating the
mining operations, improvement of the means
of transports, etc. with other information
of interest. Ill. 2500 w.
The Gold Fields of Klondike and the Yukon Valley.
HAROLD B. GOODRICH.
Engineering Magazine - Sept., 1897.
Methods of mining pursued in Alaska, and the necessity
of improvement in ways of getting to the
gold district. Ill. 3600 w.
The Klondike Gold Field.
H.K. CARROLL.
Scientific American Sup - Sept. 11, 1897.
Brief description of the country and account of the
wonderful deposits, with outline of the two
routes travelled. Ill. 2000 w.
Gold Fields of Alaska and the Yukon.
CYRUS C. ADAMS.
Chautauquan - Oct., 1897.
Discusses matters of interest in relation to this
region. The routes,desolation, types of
mining, and important facts. 2800 w.
81
82
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Placer Mining in the Klondike Country.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Oct. 9, 1897.
Brief description of the region and the methods of
working. 1000 w.
The Klondike Gold Fields.
H. BRATNOBER.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Oct. 23, 1897.
A description of the placers, and the conditions found,
by one who has just returned from Alaska.
1200 w.
The Klondike Placers.
T.K. ROSE.
Nature - Oct. 28, 1897.
Brief history of the district, with description of the
gold fields, and methods of working. 1700 w.
How Gold is Mined on the Klondike and the Chances of a
Fortune There.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Nov. 27, 1897.
A statement of facts showing that the region is not
nearly as rich as was California in 1850.
1500 w.
The Latest News from the KlondikeYukon Country.
JOHN D. MCGILLIVRAY, in the "New York Herald."
Engineering and Mining Journal - Dec. 11, 1897.
Extracts from letters sent from this region reporting
the hard conditions of labour, and the
doubtful prospects. 2000 w.
The Klondike Gold Fields.
US Consular Reports - Jan., 1898.
Gives views of two prominent men who have spent some
time in this region, and also comments on
the preparations being made in Victoria for
the coming trade. 1500 w.
Mining Conditions in the Klondike.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Jan. 29, 1898.
Extracts from a letter published in the "N.Y. Times" of
Jan. 23d. Discouraging the going to this new
gold field, reporting disappointment and
suffering of those there, and the
unreliability of the claims for sale. 2500
w.
The Yukon Gold Fields.
US Consular Reports - Feb. 4, 1898.
Considers Vancouver as a base of supplies, the
transportation enterprises, and the
83
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
situation at Dawson City. 1600 w.
The River Trip to the Klondike.
JOHN SIDNEY WEBB.
Century Magazine - March, 1898.
Interesting account of the country and life of the
miners, with some information of the method
of mining, etc. Ill. 12000 w.
The Rush to the Klondike.
SAM STONE BUSH.
American Review of Reviews - March, 1898.
An article on the present output and future promise of
Alaska's new gold fields, by an observer.
Gives characteristics of the country,
methods of mining and living, etc. Ill.
12000 w.
The New Arctic El Dorado.
HENRY WYSHAM LANIER.
Chautauquan - May, 1898.
An account of the goldrush to this region, and of the
routes, country, prospects, etc. Ill. 3000
w.
The GoldFields of British Columbia and the Klondike.
WILLIAM HAMILTON MERRITT.
Journal of the Society of Arts - June 10, 1898.
Deals with the immense possibilities of the mountain
ranges of Western British America, giving a
very interesting report of the region and
the mining operations. Discussion. 8000 w.
As Seen by an Old Prospector.
"ALEX QUARTZ".
Mining and Scientific Press - Aug. 13, 1898.
An account of the promising fields near St. Michaels,
with some reference to the Klondike, and to
other districts. 4500 w.
Gold and Other Resources of the Far West.
J.A. LATCHA.
Forum - Sept., 1898.
A description of the rich mineral fields of the west,
the steps necessary for their development
and the changes of recent years. Urging
specially the building of railroads through
the rich mineral regions. 5000 w.
Notes from the Klondike.
A.N.C. TREADGOLD.
Canadian Mining Review - Sept., 1898.
Descriptive of the region and existing conditions. 4500
w.
83
84
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
The Pilgrimage to the Klondike and Its Outcome.
FREDERICK PALMER.
Forum - Sept., 1898.
Gives briefly the history of goldseeking in this
region, the present conditions and future
outlook. 5500 w.
A Winter's Work in the Klondike.
TAPPAN ADNEY.
Harper's Weekly - Oct. 1, 1898.
Letter and illustrations giving an idea of the
conditions prevailing in this region.
5500 w.
The Country of the Klondike.
RUSSELL L. DUNN.
Mining and Scientific Press - Oct. 22, 1898. Serial.
Statements based on observations and information
obtained during a recent visit to the basins
of the Yukon and Alsek rivers.
The Cost of Production
Bankers' Magazine Lond
Discussing whether the
not greater
of Gold and the Klondike Fields.
- Nov., 1898.
cost of obtaining the gold is
than the profit. 2300 w.
The Yukon Country.
P.T. ROWE.
Chautauquan - Jan., 1899.
Abstract of a lecture delivered at Sitka, Alaska. An
account of the changes so rapidly wrought
and of the mining conditions and general
outlook. 4500 w.
The Headwaters of the Lewis River.
A. THURSTON HEYDON.
Mining and Scientific Press - Jan. 21, 1899.
A study of the country made by the writer while
prospecting. 1200 w.
A Journey to the Klondike (Eine Reise nach Klondyke).
ZDENKO HOROVSKY.
Zeitschrift des Oesterreichischen Ingenieur-und
Architekten Vereines - March 3, 1899.
An excellent account of the methods of mining for gold
in the Klondike region, being an address by
a Bohemian engineer, relating his
experiences. 3500 w.
Alaska and the Klondike.
ANGELO HELLPRIN.
Ap Popular Science Monthly - May, 1899. Serial. Ill.
Part first describes the writer's journey to this
region, in by the White Pass and out by the
Chilkoot.
85
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
The Economics of the Klondike.
JACK LONDON.
Review of Reviews - Jan., 1900.
Considers the profits and losses of the rush to this
region, and what the ultimate outcome will
be. Ill. 2500 w.
A Year's Progress in the Klondike.
ANGELO HELLPRIN.
Ap Popular Science Monthly - Feb., 1900.
An interesting illustrated description of the
improvements in Dawson, and in means of
communication with the outside world, the
mining outlook, etc. 2800 w.
The Yukon and Nome Gold Regions.
S.C. DUNHAM.
Bulletin of the US Dept of Labour - July, 1900.
A full account of these two gold fields and a
comparison of the conditions and values.
20400 w.
Notes from Dawson; the Koyukuk Region.
US Consular Reports, No. 774 - July 7, 1900.
An estimate of the output of gold for this season, and
other information. 450 w.
Mining on the Klondike.
A.J. BOWIE.
Mines and Minerals - July, 1901.
Illustrates and describes the mining methods used. 7000
w.
An English Observer on the Klondike GoldFields.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Nov. 23, 1901.
From the London "Economist." Extracts from a letter
written by an observer of experience.
Considers the alluvial gravels very rich and
explains the excessive cost of treating
them. 1300 w.
White Horse Mining District. Yukon Territory.
WILLIAM M. BREWER.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Feb. 1, 1902.
A description of the district with illustrations. 4000
w.
Mining Methods on the Klondike.
EUGENE HAANEL.
Engineering and Mining Journal - April 11, 1902.
An explanation of the methods, machinery and appliances
used. Ill. 3900 w.
Conditions in Dawson.
85
86
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
US Consular Reports, No. 1365 - June 12, 1902.
Information concerning transportation, mining, etc.
2200 w.
Gold Mining in Klondike.
PROF. HENRY A. MIERS.
Popular Science Monthly - July, 1902.
Descriptive of the country, methods of mining, cost of
living, etc. 5000 w.
The Klondike A Four Years' Retrospect.
British Columbia Mining Record - Aug., 1902.
2000 w.
Methods and Values on the Yukon.
JOHN D. MCGILLIVRAY.
Engineering and Mining Journal - June 13, 1903.
An account of the improvements in methods and reduction
in cost of working, with general
information. Warns capitalists to consider
the cost of transport before investing in
this region. 2200 w.
White Horse District, in Yukon Territory.
WILLIAM M. BREWER.
Mines and Minerals - Aug., 1903.
Reviews the history, geology, present conditions, and
future prospects of the mining industry. May
and editorial. 5500 w.
Present Condition of Gold Mining in Arctic America.
R.A.F. PENROSE, JR.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Nov. 28, 1903.
Describes some of the difficulties found in the
northwestern part of North America, the
mines, and the Klondike region. Ill. Serial.
1st part. 2000 w.
The Alsek Placer District. Yukon Territory.
W.M. BREWER.
Mining and Scientific Press - Dec. 5, 1903.
Map, with information from prospectors' reports. 800 w.
The Alsek Mining District.
W.M. BROOK.
Engineering and Mining Journal - May 12, 1904.
An illustrated description of a new placer goldfield in
the Northwest Territory of Canada, near the
Alaska border, recently discovered. 800 w.
Auriferous Bench Diggings of Bonanza, Yukon Territory.
Mining and Scientific Press - Dec. 3, 1904.
Describes the locality, with remarks on the probable
source of the gold. 1000 w.
87
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
The Klondike.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Jan. 5, 1905.
Reports production as amounting to $1,000,000 less than
in 1903, and reviews the work done, the
mining methods, etc. 1500 w.
Gravel Mining Costs in Alaska and Northwest Canada.
CHESTER W. PURINGTON.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Feb. 9, 1905.
Gives facts compiled from statistics collected during a
recent inspection of the placer fields in
Alaska. Yukon Territory, and Northern
British Columbia. 1600 w.
Mining in the Yukon.
F.T. CONGDON.
Canadian Mining Review - July, 1905.
Excerpt from a recent address sketching the evolution
in mining methods since 1896. 3300 w.
The Klondike in 1905.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Jan. 6, 1906.
Discusses the causes of the lessened production, the
mining methods, water supply, mining laws
and regulations. 2500 w.
Development of Placer Gold Mining in the Klondike
District, Canada.
J.B. TYRRELL.
Iron and Coal Trades Review - June 22, 1906.
Abstract of a paper read before the Inst.of Mining
Engrs. Calls attention to the difficulties
encountered, the plans successfully adopted
to overcome them, and the constantly reduced
cost of mining. The method of steamthawing
is described. 2000 w.
Placer Mining Methods in the Yukon.
L.M. PRINDLE.
Mining World - Dec. 1, 1906.
Describes the conditions and the methods of working.
1200 w.
Placer Mining in the Klondike.
JOSEPH B. TYRRELL.
Engineering and Mining Journal - March 2, 1907.
An illustrated account of conditions prevailing in
district, and interesting new methods
developed. Extracted from a paper before the
Inst. of Min. Engrs., London. 4000 w.
Recent Developments in Mining in the Southern Yukon.
D.D. CAIRNES.
Canadian Mining Journal - April 15, 1907. Serial. 1st
87
88
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
part.
Explains the conditions under which mining must be
conducted, and the general characteristics
of this district, describing claims seen,
and deposits. 1600 w.
Development of the Bonanza Creek Gold Mines.
FRANCIS C. NICHOLAS.
Mining World - Jan. 8, 1908.
An illustrated description of the region, with review
of the past history, and account of present
conditions. 1800 w.
Mining and Mining Methods of the Yukon.
A.A. PARÉ.
Quarterly Bulletin of the Canadian Mining Institute July, 1908.
Notes on the placer and gravel mining methods, with
sketches of the geology and other details.
Ills. 6500 w.
Alaska and Yukon.
T.A. RICKARD.
Mining and Scientific Press - Jan. 2, 1909. Serial.
Maps and illustrated review of the mining centers, the
discoveries of gold and the future
possibilities. 3300 w.
First Discovery of Gold in the Yukon, Canada.
R.B. BENNETT.
Mining and Engineering World - Aug. 26, 1911.
Gives the story told by John McDougall, of Vancouver,
B.C. 1800 w.
Yukon Gold.
O.B. PERRY.
Mining and Scientific Press - May 11, 1912.
Report of operations for the year ending Feb. 1, 1912.
1200 w.
The Gold of the Klondike.
J.B. TYRRELL.
Canadian Mining Journal - May 1, 1913.
Abstract of a paper before the Roy. Soc. of Canada.
Describes this region, its geology, placers,
transportation of loosened rock,
concentration and deposition, character of
the gold, etc. Ills. 8000 w.
Placer Mining in the Klondike
D.D. CAIRNES.
Canadian Mining Journal - March 1, 1914.
Extract from guide book prepared by the Can. Geol.
Survey. 2500 w.
The Klondike and Yukon Goldfield.
H.M. CADSELL.
Mining Journal - Aug. 15, 1914.
89
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
From an article in the Scottish Geog. Mag. Describes
the working of these gold placers at the
present time. 4000 w.
Mining in the Far North.
EMIL EDWARD HURJA.
Mining and Scientific Press - Oct. 10, 1914.
An account of operations of the Yukon Gold Co. during
the season for 1914. Ills. 1500 w.
The Klondike and Yukon Goldfield in 1913.
H.M. CADELL.
Smithsonian Report - 1914.
Semipopular general description. Ills. 20 pp.
Mining in the Far North.
EMIL EDWARD HURJA.
Mining and Scientific Press - Nov. 28, 1914.
Reviews the history of the Klondike, the Treadgold
placers, and outlying districts. Ills. 2200
w.
Mining in the Far North.
EMIL EDWARD HURJA.
Mining and Scientific Press - Nov. 14, 1914.
Maps and description of the operations of the CanadianKlondyke Gold Mining Company, Ltd. Ills.
1500 w.
Dawson, Nome, and Fairbanks.
HUBERT I. ELLIS.
Engineering and Mining Journal - March 20, 1915.
Describes these placer mining camps, discussing the
stages through which they passed. Ills. 3000
w.
Methods and Costs of Placer Mining in Yukon (74426).
Canadian Mining Journal Nov. 1, 1916.
Prospecting, methods of thawing, sluicing, selfdumper,
etc. 4000 w.
Placer Gold Deposits.
F.A. KERR.
Canadian Mining Journal v 53 n 5 May 1932 p. 2036.
Notes concerning application of scientific knowledge to
search for placer gold deposits in Northern
British Columbia and Southern Yukon;
probable sources of gold; zones favourable
for original supply of placer gold; zones
favourable for preservation of placers;
other sources of placer gold.
NahanniFrances River District.
F.A. KERR.
Canadian Mining Journal v 55 n 3 Mar 1934 p. 10711.
89
90
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Notes on district in Yukon and Northwest Territories;
one of most inaccessible in Canada, except
by air; area more than 50,000 sq mi;
historical and descriptive data;geology;
quartz veins; placer deposits; prospecting
activity; airplane is best method of
transportation. Bibliography.
Operations of Yukon Consolidated Gold Corporation.
W.H.S. MCFARLAND.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. Trans v
42 1939 (mtg Mar 1939) p 53749 Bul n 331 Nov
1939. At end of 1938, Company held 1650
placer mining claims and 9 leases or
concessions; main reason for increased
prosperity are development of successful
methods of stripping off layer of frozen
"muck" and thawing frozen gravel by cold
water instead of steam, and increased price
of gold; cost data and calculations showing
increase in working profit; description of
operations and technique.
Klondike Gold Rush.
T.A. RICKARD.
Canadian Mining Journal v 64 n 4 Apr 1943 p 21927.
Historical and descriptive account of
stampede following discovery made by George
Washington Carmack in 1896 on Rabbit Creek,
renamed Bonanza; one pan of gravel, weighing
15 lb. yielded 40 1/4 oz. gold; dredging of
8,205,270 cu yd gravel in 1941 yielded 28.43
cents per cu yd at cost of 14.7 cents per cu
yd. Bibliography.
Mineral Development in Northwest and Yukon Territories.
C. CAMSELL.
Western Miner v 17 n 12 Dec 1944 p 424.
Review of recent activities; prospecting; geological
surveys; temporary suspension of gold
production in Northwest Territories; milling
at Labine Point on Great Bear Lake; Norman
Wells and Canol project; placer and lode
mining in Yukon; prospecting.
Placer Mining in SubArctic.
E.N. PATTY.
Western Miner v 18 n 4 Apr 1945 p 449.
Dealing with conditions and practice in Alaska, Yukon
Territory and British Columbia, paper
duplicates, to large extent, similar paper
by same author, indexed from Engineering and
Mining Journal Apr 1945. Before annual
meeting British Columbia and Yukon Chamber
of Mines at Vancouver B.C.
Placer Has Its Advantages.
G.A. COLLINS.
91
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Western Miner v 18 n 7 July 1945 p 50.
Disrepute of placer operations is usually attributed to
poorly conceived project, inadequate
testing, inadequate financing; inadequate
knowledge of methods; personal aspect,
management; antiquated equipment and
methods, or to improper gold recovery;
suggestions, with special reference to
British Columbia and Yukon Territory.
Some Placer Methods in SubArctic.
E.N. PATTY.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 146 n 4 Apr 1945, p
1125.
Outline of early practices in Klondike region;
description of modern mechanized methods of
prospecting and mining; removing surface
muck; cold water thawing of gravel; natural
thawing; Yukon dredging operations; small
scale placer mining.
Expansion Northwestward.
W.W. FOSTER.
Western Miner v 19 n 2 Feb 1946 p 468.
Review of changes that have taken place in northern
half of British Columbia, Yukon Territory
and western portion of Northwest
Territories, with special reference to
mineral industry. Before British Columbia
and Yukon Chamber Mines.
Dezadeash Area, Yukon.
E.D. KINDLE.
Western Miner v 20 n 8 Aug 1947 p 4850.
Area described occupies 4200 sq mi in southwest Yukon;
many of streams in Dezadeash map area were
tested for placer gold some 50 yr ago and
small placer operations have been carried
out since then on many of original
discoveries; little prospecting for lode
deposits attempted in area, and no metallic
mineral deposit is yet discovered. From
Paper No. 4715. Geol Survey of Canada.
Bibliography.
Recent Prospecting and Exploration for Ore Deposits in
British Columbia and Yukon.
A.B. IRWIN.
Western Miner v 20 n 9 Sept 1947 p 435.
List of 24 discoveries during last 15 yr, all gold
discoveries unless specified otherwise; in
addition to deposits discovered in virgin
areas, new ore bodies found in old mines are
included; notes on 10 of these properties.
Firth River, Yukon Territory.
91
92
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
R.W. SANDY.
Canadian Mining Journal v 69 n 7 July 1948 p 835; see
also Western Miner v 21 n 6 June 1948 p 856.
Notes on area in extreme north of Yukon, bordering
Arctic Ocean, adjacent to Alaska; gold
recovered from gravel bars as early as 1899;
gold quartz samples said to have been
brought out in Dec 1946; fish and game;
weather; transportation routes and
facilities.
Yukon's Greatest PostWar Gold Output.
F.H. STEPHENS.
Canadian Mining Journal v 71 n 2 Feb 1950 p 801.
Descriptive review of gold dredging and other placer
and lode operations.
93
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
LOCATION
Central America
The Upland Placers of La Cienga, Sonora, Mexico.
ROBERT T. HILL.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Jan. 25, 1902.
An illustrated description of these rich placers, and
the conditions and in habitant of this
region. 2000 w.
Gold Mining in Santo Domingo.
F. LYNWOOD GARRISON.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Sept. 14, 1907.
An illustrated article giving information in regard to
the placer gold deposits, and the probable
presence of platinum. 2500 w.
Dry Placers of Northern Sonora.
F.J.H. MERRILL.
Mining and Scientific Press - Sept. 12, 1908.
Describes these formations and the methods of working.
1200 w.
The Mines of the Altar District, Sonora, Mexico.
CHARLES A. DINSMORE.
Mining World - May 28, 1910.
Describes the working of the placers, the ore
treatment, and quartz mines. Ills.
2500 w.
The Altar Gold Placer Fields of Sonora, Mexico.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Oct. 1, 1910.
Illustrates and describes the country and mining
methods employed. 2500 w.
Mining Cement Gravel at Altar, Mexico.
Mines and Minerals - Nov., 1910.
Illustrates and describes old and new methods of
recovering gold from cemented gravel in
absence of water, 1800 w.
DryWashing for PlacerGold in Sonora, Mexico.
J.V. RICHARDS.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
- April, 1911.
Illustrates and describes some of the more common
devices. 1200 w.
The Olancho Country.
A.D. AKIN.
Mining and Scientific Press - July 12, 1913.
An account of the placers, cost of operation, working
93
94
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
conditions, natural advantages, etc. 3000 w.
Gold Mines and Placers in Panama (Minas y placeres de
oro en Panama).
O. LETCHER.
Ingenieria Internacional, vol. 18, no. 10,Oct. 1930,
pp. 510511. 4 figs.
Panama British Corporation has Darien, Veraguas, and
Chiriqui mining concessions, with totalarea
about 18,000 sq. km.; development work.
Panama.
V.F.S. LOW.
Mining Magazine vol. 44, nos. 4 and 5, Apr. 1931, pp.
201209, and May, pp. 273279, 6 figs. Apr.:
Account of progress in concession of Panama
Corp., dealing particularly with alluvial
discoveries. May: Lodemining developments.
Gold Placers of Antioquia.
S. DEL RIO.
Mines Magazine v 22 n 1 Jan 1932 p. 78 and 38.
General description, with brief note on one mine.
Gold Rivers of Honduras.
A.H. BLACKISTON.
Pan-American Union Bul v 66 n 8 Aug 1932 p 55964.
General notes in popular language.
Report on Placer Gold Investigation of District of
Corozal and Naranjito.
W.D. NOBLE.
Revista de Obras Publicas de Puerto Rico v 11 n 8 Aug
1934 p. 6926.
Historial and descriptive data, chiefly concerning
districts on north side of island, about 24
mi west of city of San Juan; some production
statistics and estimates of yardage and
value of placer deposits; list of claims
staked under old Spanish law.
Honduras, Pioneer Frontier.
C.S. HALEY.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 142 n 6 June 1941 p.
358.
General description of department of Olancho, in
eastern Honduras; transportation; gold
placer deposits; labour and supplies;
favourable attitude of Government; living
standards; notes on El Rusio and Vijao
districts; in general conditions resemble
those in California in its virgin days, with
opportunities for development of placer
mining.
Mexican Placer Possibilities.
A. TERRONES BENITEZ.
Mining World v 10 n 3 Mar 1948 p. 247.
95
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Opportunities exist for developing large scale placer
projects in several provinces, but heavy
investments will be needed; general
commentary, with notes on some specific
areas.
Gold In Mosquitia.
S.M. GLASSMIRE.
Mining Journal v 255 n 6520 Aug 5 1960 p. 146.
In 1952 Honduras produced 32,000 oz of gold; stream
channels contain placer deposits in upper
mountainous areas meander; ruggedness of
terrain, physical conditions and area's
isolation, engineering and economic
problems; data on sampling.
Los placeres auriferos del area de Quilali, Rio Jicaro,
Departamento de Nueva Segovia.
A. BENGOECHEA G.
Nicaragua. Servicio Geologico Nacional Boletin 5 1961
p 6799, 5 maps, 9 plates. Goldbearing
placers in Quilali, Jicaro River, department
of Nueva Segovia; area is located at contact
of granite intrusion with metamorphic
schists; auriferous quartz veins are
associated with this contact and supplied
material to alluvial placers; data on
prospecting and sampling.
95
96
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
LOCATION
Europe
The Occurrence of Alluvials in Hungary and
Transylvania.
LOUIS HORVATH.
Mining Journal - Sept. 7, 1907. Serial. 1st part.
Trans. from Mon. Zeit. On the prospect of working these
goldbearing alluvials on a large scale by
means of dredges. 3500 w.
The Gold Alluvials of the River Drau in Hungary.
A. VON GERNET.
Institution of Mining and Metallurgy Bul. 43 - April 2,
1908.
Brief note concerning these goldbearing gravels. 400 w.
GoldBearing Sediment of the Rivers Adda and Oglio (Qua
e la nelle regioni minerarie d'Italia).
P. PIEPOLI.
Miniera Italiana,vol. 12, no. 9, Sept. 1928, pp. 312314, 3 figs.
List of useful minerals; found in sediment of these
rivers; description of primitive, smallscale
gold washing practiced along Adda and Oglio.
Zur Freigoldfrage im Strumica and ValandovoGebiete in
Suedserbien.
O. ROCHATA.
Montanistische Rundschau v 28 n 31 Nov. 1 1936 p. 16.
Problem of placer gold in Strumica and Valandovo
districts of Southern Yugoslavia; account of
primitive gold washing methods in different
sections; geological and petrographic
features and results of author's
investigations.
La fréquence de d'or dans les roches.
V.A. CHARRIN.
Génie Civil v 110 n 2860 June 5, 1937 p 5068.
Occurrence of gold in stream beds of Cevennes region in
France.
Das Gold der Donau.
D. PANTO.
Berg-und Hüttenmännisches Jahrbuch v 85 n 3/4 Nov 30
1937 p 3614.
Gold of Danube River valley;results of gold washing
tests, carried out by author and his coworkers from 1932 to 1934 in Hungary,
brought to light further knowledge of gold
of Danube River valley, which is here
discussed.
Les rivières aurifères des Pyrénées.
Génie Civil v 111 n 2887 Dec 11 1937 p 5078.
Compilation of old reports on gold bearing rivers of
97
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Pyrennes highlands in France.
Die Dalzburger Schwemmlandlagerstaetten.
E. PREUSCHEN.
Berg-und Hüttenmännische Monatshefte v 86 n 3 Mar 1938
p 3645.
Salzburg alluvial deposits; investigation of gold
enrichments in valley of Pongau Salzach
stream; results show that gold content of
strata near surface is too negligible to be
of interest and it appears that there are no
enrichments at lower depth. Bibliography.
Gold in ElsassLothringen.
E. KOHL.
Zeitschrift für Praktische Geologie v 47 n 10 Oct 1939
p 1802.
It is pointed out that only placer gold of Rhine
district could be profitably mined; this was
totally abandoned in 1900 due to rising
costs of living;prospects of finding
deposits of any economic significance are
regarded as slight.
Gold Mining in Hohe Tauern.
A.P.E. HOPKINS and W.J.H. COLLINS.
Mine and Quarry Engineering v 4 n 11 Nov 1939 p 3658.
Fissure veins averaging 3 ft. wide, generally carrying
gold in gneiss, barren in schist, and in
places widen out in limestone, carrying
ankerite, siderite, galena, chacopyrite and
galena, but no gold; alluvial gold, with
magnetite and garnet, in maris in valleys,
but rocks and boulders make commercial
dredging impracticable; mining practice; 25ton stamp mill with amalgamation plates and
concentrating tables, idle since 1927.
Alluvial Gold in Northern Spain.
R.S. BOTSFORD.
Mining Magazine v 61 n 5 Nov 1939 n 26574.
Description of area of 3500 acres held by British
company on Orbigo River, 20 mi west of city
of Leon: Keystone drill tests indicate
average value of 2.62 grains gold per cu yd
for about 30,000,000 cu yd; estimated
60,000,000 to 80,000,000 yd of dredging
ground; cheap labour and electric power;
geology; gold distribution; notes on
conditions in Spain.
Die alten Goldwaeschereien im Gebiete der Schwarza in
Ostthueringen.
D. HEYER.
Zeitschrift für das Berg- Hütten- und Salinenwesen in
Deutschen Reich v 87 n 12 Mar 1940 p 3557.
97
98
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Early gold placers in region of Schwarza River in East
Thuringia, Germany; historical review of
placer mining which probably flourished
between 10th and 15th century although exact
period is not known; alluvial gold is still
present in region, but revival of
exploitation is most improbable.
Die Goldvorkommen in GriechischMakedonien.
E. MACK.
Zeitschrift für Erzbergbau und Metallhüttenwesen v 17 n
1 Jan 1964 p 918.
Occurrences of gold in Greek Macedonia; results of
prospecting in area of 16,000 sq km included
sampling of placers and detritus produced by
weathering, examination of ancient mining
sites, and sampling of outcrops; statistics
on gold dredging.
L'or en France.
P. ROUVEYROL.
Mines et Metallurgie n 3584 May 1964 p 2378.
Gold in France; Salsigne mine is only gold producer in
France and has annual output 12001500 kg;
main gold deposits and occurrences are
located in Armorican Massif, massif Central,
in Pyrenees, Alps, and Alsace; gold occurs
in both hydrothermal veins and in placers.
99
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACERS
LOCATION
New Guinea
The Gold Rush to British New Guinea.
THEODORE F. BEVAN.
Australian Mining Standard Feb. 18, 1897.
A lecture delivered in Melbourne is reported, with the
discussion that followed. 3000 w.
Papua Mining.
J.H.P. MURRAY.
Australian Mining Standard April 1, and 8, 1908.
Serial. 2 parts.
An account of this richly mineralized region and the
difficulties that confront prospectors. 6000
w.
Mining in Papua.
HUGH MAHON.
Australian Mining Standard July 13,1911.
Information concerning the goldfield at Woodlark
Islands. 2500 w.
The Bulolo Goldfield, New Guinea.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review vol. 20, no.
233, Feb. 6, 1928, pp. 152156, 7 figs.
Gold field in extreme southeast of mandated territory
of New Guinea was discovered by Park and
Mettleton in 1923; topography; geology;
future work, mining methods at Edi Creek,
and nature of gold; alluvial diggings and
three quartz lodes located; little effective
work done on latter.
Tapping a New Gold Field of Potential Importance.
L.A. DECOTO.
Engineering and Mining Journal, vol. 129, no. 5, Mar.
8, 1930, pp. 250251, 2 figs.
Account of interview with author; island lying
southeast of Philippines and north of
Australia; general data on climate and
accessibility; gold placers and lode mines
examined and reported on.
Air Transport Aids Mining in New Guinea.
Engineering and Mining Journal., vol. 129, no. l2, June
23, 1930, pp. 594596, 9 figs.
Property is being brought to production by use of
airplanes as sole means of transporting 2500
tons of equipment and material for two large
electrically operated dredge and for 1100kw.
hydroelectric power plant; description of
99
100
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
deposits; sampling by hand drills; and shaft
sinking indicates 39,000,000 cu. yd. gravel,
averaging 50.5 cents per cu. yd., with
dredging depth 21.9 ft; steelhulled 10cu ft.
dredges to dig 3,500,000 cu. yd. per year,
yielding about $1,700,000 gross return;
costs estimate not over 15 cents cu. yd.
Gold Fields of Dutch West Borneo.
E.J. VALLENTINE.
Mining Magazine v 46 n 2 Feb 1932 p 869; see also Far
Eastern Review v 28, n 6 June 1932 p 2923.
Historical notes, dating from year 977;
diluvial and alluvial deposits; dredging
ventures; origin of deposits; general
conditions in Dutch Borneo.
New Guinea.
A. DICKINSON.
Mining Magazine v 48 n 5 May 1933 p. 26577.
Topographical, climatic, and historical notes;
description of properties held by New Guinea
Gold Fields Ltd; alluvial deposits; clayey
quartzose breccia deposits, and manganese
oxides, with 20 to 30 ft overburden
removable by drag scraping and sluicing;
vein deposits; airplane transport; 400 hp.
steam electric power plant; mining law,
taxes, etc.
Development of Gold Mining in Morose, New Guinea.
H. TAYLOUR and I.W. MORLEY.
Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Proc n
90 June 30, 1933 p. 24753; see also Far
Eastern Rev v 29 n 12 Dec 1933 p 56570 and v
30 n 1 Jan 1934 p 337 and (author's reply to
discussions) Inst Mining and Met Bul n 359
Aug 1934 p 710.
Notes under headings Introductory Remarks, Omissions
and Errata and Additional Bibliography,
submitted to bring up to date paper indexed
in Engineering Index 1933 p 551 from various
sources.
Development of Gold Mining in Morose, New Guinea.
H. TAYLOUR and I.W. MORLEY
Instution of Mining and Metallurgy Bul n 347 Aug 1933
60 p supp plates; see also Australasian
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Proc n
39 Mar 31 1933 p 181 supp plates; and Mining
Journal v 182 n 5116, 5117, 5118, 5119 and
5120 Sept 9 1933 p 6246 Sept 16 p 6446 Sept
23 p 6602 Sept 30 p 6789 and Oct 7 p 693.
History of discovery and production; geography and
geology; legislation; labour; alluvial,
dredging, and ore mining practice;
amalgamation and cyanidation practice;
steam, hydroelectric, gas and oil power;
101
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
surface and aerial transportation; present
status of industry. Bibliography.
HydroElectric Plants Fly into New Guinea.
F.R. SHORT and H.D. HODGINS.
Electric Journal v 31 n 9 Nov 1934 p 4324.
Goldmining plant,completely electrified is operating 50
mi. in interior of cannibalinfested New
Guinea; two camps of Bulolo Gold Dredging
Co. maintain about 200 white men and 600
natives; three modern gold dredges are
operating, and construction of fourth is
well underway; location is supplied with
power from 3000kva hydroelectric station,
over 11,000 v transmission system.
Gold Mining in New Guinea.
J.B. BRAITHWAITE.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 30 n 353 Feb
15 1938 p 16773.
Review of recent developments in reef and alluvial
mining; transportation; climate and social
life; native labour; Bulolo dredging; other
mines in Moroble district; Wewak field in
Sepik District.
Gold Occurrences in New Guinea.
N.H. FISHER.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 32 n 376 Jan
10 1940 p 2327.
Detailed description of geological features of large
and small alluvial and lode deposits; Morose
gold field; origin of alluvial gold; lode
deposits of WauEdie Creek area; other
districts.
New Guinea Gold, Epic of Industry.
South African Mining and Engineering Journal v 55 pt 1
n 2689 Aug 19 1944 p 579, 581.
In 1942, Japanese aggression forced closing of rich
gold fields but recent developments bring
renewed hope that they may again be in
operation before very long; something of
romance of their development, in face of
incredible difficulties, is told.
Fineness of Gold, with Special Reference to Morose
Goldfield, New Guinea.
H.N. FISHER.
Economic Geology v 40 n 7 Nov 1945 p. 449495.
Study represents attempt to correlate sheds of various
types of gold with geological features and
to discovery of determining factors
101
102
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
governing gold fineness; comparisons are
made of goldbearing areas of various types
in other parts of the world; refinement of
gold by stream action or by lying long
immersed in placers; effects of removal from
original outcrop; variations within lodes.
Bibliography.
Fineness of Gold, with Special Reference to Morose
Goldfield, New Guinea.
N.H. FISHER.
Economic Geology v 40 n 8 Dec 1945 p.53763.
Comparisons with other localities; epithermal,
mesothermal, and hypothermal deposits; for
Morose gold field, by comparing average
fineness of gold in two streams with that
below their junction, it is possible to
calculate relative amounts contributed by
each of them, as with Bulolo and Watut
Rivers, or Wau and Sandy Creeks; it gives
quantitative basis for assessing importance
of tributaries and serves as guide for
further prospecting. Bibliography.
Bulolo Rehabilitated.
Mining World v 9 n 1 Jan 1947 p 334.
Notes on program for resumption of operations of Bulolo
Gold Dredging Ltd; mine will be in
production again as soon as necessary parts
for dredges dismantled during war are
delivered and installed; up to outbreak of
World War II, dredges had produced
approximately $50,000,000 in gold; 77 mi
road built.
103
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
LOCATION
New Zealand
The Alluvial Gold of Otago, N.Z.
Australian Mining Standard Oct. 8, 1896.
From the "New Zealand Mining Journal." An attempt to
explain the presence of so much gold in the
rich placers, rivers and creeks. 2300 w.
Gold Mining in New Zealand.
C.C. LONGRIDGE.
Mining Journal Feb. 6, 1897.
Warnings and suggestions, quoting opinions of the
Government Inspecting Engineer. Also
editorial. 2500 w.
Mining in New Zealand.
C.C. LONGRIDGE.
Mining Journal - Feb. 13, 1897.
Nature of the gold, power blasting, crushing and
stamping, cyaniding, sluices, labour and
cost are briefly noticed. 800 w.
Auriferous Beaches on the West Coast.
MR. MACFARLANE.
New Zealand Mines Record Nov. 16, 1897.
These beaches contain gold in immense quantities,
intimately associated with magnetite and
other minerals. Gives conclusions reached as
to the source of the gold, and to the
probability of good returns from the working
of these beaches.
2000 w.
Notes on the Auriferous IronSands of New Zealand.
ALEXANDER MCKAY.
New Zealand Mines Record April 16, 1898.
Describes these deposits, and the manner of working the
beaches. 1200 w.
Report on the Auriferous Deposits of the Copper
Hinemaia River. A
ALEXANDER MCKAY.
New Zealand Mines Record April 17, 1899.
The government geologists' report of the Taupo
district, Auckland, N.Z. did not find a
payable prospect. 1600 w.
Beach Sands of the Pacific Coast.
W.J. ADAMS.
Modern Machine April 1900.
Discusses their origin, methods of working, devices
used, etc. Ill. 4500 w.
103
104
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Notes on the Auriferous Iron Sands of New Zealand.
ALEXANDER MCKAY.
New Zealand Mines Record March 16, 1901. Serial. 1st
part.
Information concerning these deposits in various
districts and their workings. 8200 w.
The Gold Deposits of New Zealand.
ALEXANDER MCKAY.
New Zealand Mines Record April 16, 1902. Serial. 1st
part.
Considered in relation to the comparative quantities of
reef and alluvial gold on the various gold
fields of the colony. 3400 w.
Auriferous Iron Sands of New Zealand.
New Zealand Mines Record May 16, 1902.
Information concerning these deposits on the east and
west coasts. 4500 w.
Hydraulic Sluicing and Alluvial Mining in New Zealand
in 1901.
New Zealand Mines Record Sept. 16, 1902.
A review of the annual reports of the Inspectors of
Mines for the Otago goldfields. New Zealand.
14,000 w.
Black Sands of New Zealand, the Pacific, and Tierra del
Guego.
C.C. LONGRIDGE.
Mining Journal April 20, 1907.
An account of the auriferous sands of various sea
beaches and the methods of treatment. 3500
w.
Deep Alluvial Leads in the Mount Ida District, Otago.
MOSES BROWN.
New Zealand Mines Record July 16, 1907. Serial.
From Mount Ida Chronicle. A study of the deposits of
this district. 3300 w.
GoldMining in Central Otago.
New Zealand Mines Record Dec. 16, 1907. Serial.
Abstracts from Bul. No. 2 (new series) of the New
Zealand Geol. Survey, Historical and
descriptive. 4000 w.
Gold Deposits in Central Otago.
New Zealand Mines Record June 16, 1908. lst part.
From a Bulletin by Prof. James Park. The present
number, treats of some principles of
concentration in riverbed gravels. 2000 w.
105
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
The Future of New Zealand's Alluvial Goldfields.
Mining Journal Nov. 21, 1908.
Considers available ground and values, methods; and
machinery, and the personal factor. 4000 w.
The Geology of the Mikouni Subdivision, North Westland.
PERCY GATES MORGAN.
New Zealand Mines Record Jan. 16, 1909. Serial, lst
part.
An illustrated description of the region, the alluvial
mining, and the deposits of gold, silver,
coal, and information concerning other
industries. 6000 w.
The South Island of New Zealand.
G.W. EASTON TURNER.
Australian Mining Standard July 3, 1913.
Deals with gold recovery from the black sand beaches
lying immediately inland above the tide
level. 2200 w.
Gold Mining in Otago, New Zealand.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review, vol. 18, no.
211, Apr. 5, 1926, pp. 269274, 10 figs.
Kawarau River schemes; Shotover Gold
Dredging Co.; St. Bathan's deep lead.
Gold in New Zealand.
J. HENDERSON.
New Zealand Journal Science and Technology, vol. 12, no
3, Dec. 1930, pp. 154165, l fig. Historical
outline dating from 1857; review of Hauraki,
West Coat, Nelson, Otago, and Marlborough
mining districts; alluvial gold field; lode
mining; table and graph showing value of
gold produced from each district up to end
of 1928; prospecting; future prospects.
Origin of Tuapeka GoldBearing "Cement."
J. PARK.
New Zealand Journal Science and Technology v 13 n 5 Apr
1932 p 2637.
Deposit consists mainly of subangular pieces of
micaschist, with waterworn boulders of
greywacke and quartzite and occasional
jasperoid quartzite; cementing medium is
finely comminuted fresh micaschist;
thickness 300 to 400 feet; alluvial gold
occurs throughout cement; schist is of local
origin, boulders from distance; origin of
deposit is attributed to fluvioglacial
action. Bibliography.
105
106
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Tuapecka Conglomerates.
G.W. THOMSON.
Mining Magazine v 47 n 6 Dec 1932 p 32933.
Cemented gravel deposits in Tuapeka district of Otago,
New Zealand, supplementing brief item in
issue of Oct 1931; sampling and assay data;
prospecting, mining and proposed milling
method.
GoldBearing Conglomerates of Central Otago.
E.O. MACPHERSON.
New Zealand Journal Science and Technology v 14 n 5 Apr
1933 p 26274.
Observations made during examination of alluvial gold
fields; new viewpoints which may have
bearing on origin of auriferous conglomerate
and future of these fields.
Mining Deep Leads.
G.S. CABOT.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 28 n 325 Oct 8
1935 p 47981.
Outline of history and geology of Waikaia gold field in
New Zealand; notes on operation of King
Solomon mine, worked by hydraulic elevator
before abandoned; mine reopened by 3
compartment shaft 200 ft. deep about 4 ft 8
in. of wash gravel mined by drifts and
crosscuts; longwall retreating mining will
be used when lateral and roof pressure
demand it; underground work is on contract.
Emphasis on Coal Mining in New Zealand.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 44 n 4 Jan 10
1952 p 1213.
Summary on mining production in 1950; coal is most
valuable product; gold dredging static;
petroleum, scheelite, manganese, arsenic,
iron, copper, lead, asbestos, bentonite,
serpentine, dolomite, magnesite and sulphur
worked on small scale.
Geology of Tavua Goldfield, Viti Levu, Fiji.
A. BLATCHFORD.
Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Proc n
168169. MarJune 1953 p 1331, 6 supp plates.
Stratigraphic series represented by
intrusive, Vatukeula series, mudstone and
basalt contact, Sambeto series, Recent
Alluvium and river gravels; character of
geologic structure and lodes; mineral
assemblage and paragenesis; ore shoots by
mines and their control; development of
exploration; maps, cross sections.
107
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
LOCATION
South America
The Placer Gold Fields of Ecuador.
Mining Journal May 16, 1896.
An editorial account of the region with the prediction
that the country is destined to add
considerably to the world's output of gold.
1200 w.
Mining and Hydraulic Engineering in Brazil.
WILLIAM MAUDE.
Engineering Magazine Feb. 1905.
Illustrated account of the novel conditions under which
old placers have been reopened. 4000 w.
Placers of Northern Ecuador.
Mining Journal March 4, 1911.
Extract from Theodore Wolf's "Geology and Geography of
Ecuador," published in 1891, describing
conditions especially along the rivers. 3000
w.
Mining in the Straits of Magellan.
H.W. EDWARDS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 2, 1911.
Brief review of the history of the region, and the
working of the gold placers. 2500 w.
Barbacoas Goldfields.
Mining Journal Feb. 14, 1914.
Map and description of the reef mines and alluvial
deposits and their development. 3500 w.
Gold Deposits in Chile. (Los yacimientos auriferous de
Chile. Su explotacion y el beneficio de sus
minerales).
BERTHKOERTING.
Instituto de Ingenieros de Chile Anales, vol. 22, no.
12, Dec. 1922, pp. 719758, 21 figs.
Describes three kinds of deposits; veins, impregnations
and placers; mining methods; amalgamation;
chloridizing; cyaniding; etc.
Gold Washeries (Lavaderos de Oro).
W. STRACHE.
Revista Financiera, Salitre y Minas, vol. 5, nos. 52
and 53, Sept. 1930, pp. 765771 and Oct., pp.
785788, 7 figs.
Sept.: Gold is generally found in Coast Range in Chile,
in granodiorate and its metamorphic
products; washeries represent detritus of
107
108
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
veins and occur as talus and as alluvial
deposits or placers; advantage of washeries,
as contrasted with vein mines, is that
little capital is required for their
operation; data on prospecting and mining,
with notes on construction and use of
California type of cradle gold washer. Oct.:
Gulch placers; benchplacer deposits; beach
deposits; ancient riverchannel deposits.
"Gold Farms" of the Inambari.
C. WOODS.
Engineering and Mining Journal., vol. 131, no. 4, Feb.
23, 1931, p. 172, l fig.
Methods employed by Indians for recovery of gold
deposited during high water in bars and on
banks of Inambari River.
Gold in Ecuador.
H.L. HOLLOWAY.
Mining Magazine v 46 n 4 Apr 1932 p. 21933.
History of gold mining in Euador; origin of placer
deposits.
Chilenische Goldseifen und ihre Vorrichtung fuer
Baggerbetrieb.
B. GEIER.
Metall und Erz v 30 n 3 lst Feb 1933 issue p 416.
Gold placer in Chile and dredging equipment employed in
mining; characteristics of Chile placer
deposits and their suitability for dredging;
use of exploratory boreholds and shifts;
evaluation of drilling results; gold content
of placers and calculation of reserves.
Die technische und wirtschaftliche Bedeutung des
heutigen Goldseifenabbaus in Brasilien.
F.W. FRIESE.
Metall und Erz v 32 n 19 lst Oct 1935 issue p 4579.
Technical and economic aspects of present gold
placering in Brazil; it is claimed methods
being employed are very primitive; for
further development, necessary capital can
be secured only through formation of larger
corporations, and this is made difficult by
new mining law.
Los Placeres Aufiferos de Huayllaripa.
J. RASSMUSS.
Boletin Oficial de la Direccion de Minas y Petroleo
Ministerio deFomento v 1314 n 46 Dec. 1935 p
718 supp plates.
Gold placers of Huayllaripa; Tertiary volcanics and
Cretaceous limestones,much folded at and
near contacts; goldbearing conglomerates are
most recent deposits; extensive ancient
workings; Huayllaripa mines shows trace to
1/2 g gold per cu m; Pucaccasa mine, trace
109
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
to 2 g; Huinchuzlia mine, up to 1/2 g;
fluvial deposits; total of 15,000,000 cu m
estimated, with value assumed.
Placer Mining in Rio de Canada Honda. Argentina.
D.J. SABIN.
Mining and Metallurgy v 17 n 353 May 1936 p 2389.
Mine is at altitude of 5500 ft, in San Luis Mountains
of Province of San Luis; ancient hand work
by Incas, operated by English company about
1885;present workings are in valley 4 or 5
km long and 300 to 500 m wide; Dieselpowered
excavators equipped with dragline
buckets;overburden removed and pay gravel
loaded into dump wagons and treated in semiportable screening plant; gold is coarse and
is saved in ordinary riffles.
Rivers Gold Belt of Uruguay.
N.W. WILSON.
Mining Magazine v 59 n 4 Oct 1938 p 20110.
Summary of results of investigation of gold field near
Brazilian frontier, in departments of Rivera
and Cerrro Largo; topography; climate;
history; communications; supplies; labour;
geology; mineralization commonly located in
zones of faulting or shearing that traverse
diabase or granitized diabase; notes on one
lode mine; placers; production statistics.
Informe sobre el yacimiento do aluvion de oro en al
Valle de Quebrada Mocupia.
R.P. MORRISON.
Venezuela. Ministerio de Minase Hidrocarburos Revista
de Minas e Hidrocarburos n 11 AprJune 1953 p
725.
Information on alluvium gold deposit in Valley of
Quebrada, Mocupia; characteristics of
deposit and data on sampling.
Sobre los depositos aluviales auriferos del Rio Tumbes.
G. PETERSEN G.
Sociedad Nacional de Mineria y PetroleoBoleting n 99
SeptOct 1964 p. 1113. Alluvial auriferous
deposits of Rio Tumbes; thickness of
auriferous sand ranges from 10 cm to 2 m;
grade of this placer is low; prospectors
recover 2 to 9 g gold per day.
109
110
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
South America
Bolivia
Gold Placers in Bolivia.
MILTIADES ARMAS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Oct. 28, 1911.
Illustrates and describes auriferous deposits on the
eastern slope of the Andes,giving an account
of their development. 2000 w.
Gold Placer Revival in Bolivia (Resurgimiento de los
placeres auriferos en Bolivia).
Revista Financiera Bursatil y Minera,vol. 11, no. 22,
Mar. 1928, pp. 233 and 235236. Historical
and descriptive notes of Tipuani River
region; during past 12 years, development
undertaken by New Orleans interest; much
capital expended in development work,
without great return; enterprise now
believed to be capable of giving return on
investment. Article taken from Ingenieria
Internacional.
Placer Mining Venture on Rio Kaka.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 136 n 3 Mar 1935 p
1323.
Operations of BolInca Mining Corp. on tributary of Beni
River; principal sampling confined to top 12
ft of 50 acre Sipiapo placer; Sauerman
slackline excavator. Lamberthoist, and
centrifugal pump being installed; company
also has parts for small dredge of rated
capacity 1200 cu yds per day;Sikorsky
amphibian plane is used for transport
between La Paz and Sipiapo; hydroelectric
power sites are available.
La Mineria del oro en Bolivia.
Sociedad de Ingenieros de Bolivia Boletin v 20 n 25
1941 p 638.
Gold mining in Bolivia;status of registered
concessions; gold deposits; considered as to
quality; new legislation on gold mining
price of gold and its commercial value in
Bolivia; present condition of gold mining
industry in Bolivia; notes on properties and
activities of four gold mining enterprises;
means of promoting gold mining industry;
gold in national and international
economics; dredges and cost of dredging gold
placers.
Los Trabjos auriferos de la "Compania Armayo de Minas"
en la Region de Tipuani.
F. GERBRACHT.
111
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mineria Boliviana v 1 n 12 Nov 1944 p 116.
Gold workings of Cia Aramayo de Minas in Tipuani
region; interview with credited author;
transportation problem solved by use of
airplanes; local water transport; testing
deposits by drilling and shafts; reserves
estimated as $8,065,000 of recoverable gold
in Guanay, Silicuni, Duran, Challana Grande
and Unica regions; half of gravels near
Tipuani showed $1,554,000 recoverable gold,
with average recovery of 79c per cu yd.
Los Yacimientos Auriferos de la Prov. Nuflo de Chavez.
F. PEISER.
Mineria Boliviana v 1 n 12 Nov 1944 p 2130.
Gold deposits of Nuflo de Chavez province, in Bolivia;
auriferous quartz veins, with general strike
of northwest to north northwest; alluvial
deposits.
Oro en el Rio Cajones.
Mineria Boliviana v 6 n 49 Nov 1949 p 89.
Gold in Cajones River; geology and mineralogy; mining
practice is to open "callejones de ganancia"
or trenches about 40 to 50 m long to reach
bedrock of old riverbed, extract auriferous
sand and gravel, which is later washed in
small sluice boxes or in pans; work is
usually on contact and about 30 men produce
about 4 kg of gold per mo.
Tertiary Channel Gold Deposits at Tipuani, Bolivia.
W.C. STOLL.
Economic Geology v 56 n 7 Nov 1961 p 125864.
Course of ancient river channel in which gold occurs is
marked by belt, commonly 500 to 2500 m wide,
of cemented conglomerate, or cangalli, which
rests on folded Devonian shale; pay streaks
contain wellwashed gravel and many massive
quarzite boulders, together with
concentrations of gold, cassiterite,
bematite, magnetite, garnet and apatite; at
base of cangalli, gold lies mostly close to
bedrock on bottom of main and side channels
and on rock benches.
111
112
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
South America
Columbia
The Gold Deposits of Colombia (Les Alluvions Aurifères
de la Colombia).
A. HUTIN.
Revue Technique April 10, 1904.
An account of the placer workings of San Carlos,
Antioquia, Colombia. 1800 w.
Placer Mining in Antioquia, Colombia.
F.F. SHARPLESS.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 25, 1905.
Description of this field, with remarks on the work
done, the difficulties, etc. 2500 w.
Mining in Colombia.
HENRY G. GRANGER.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 4, 1906.
Account of early work of the placers and methods used
and the valuable emerald mines. 1600 w.
Placer Mining in Colombia.
F.F. SHARPLESS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Sept. 1, 1906.
An illustrated article giving information concerning
the production in past and present time, and
related matters of interest. 2500 w.
A Mining Enterprise in Colombia.
FRANCIS C. NICHOLAS.
Mining World Feb. 9, 1907.
Illustrated description of gold placer deposits
remarkable both for their high values and
for peculiarities of formation. 2000 w.
The Eocene GoldBearing Gravels of Colombia.
FRANCIS C. NICHOLAS.
Mining World April 20, 1907.
Describes the placer deposits of great wealth which
have yielded millions, studying the
geological conditions. 2000 w.
Mining Industry of Antioquia, Colombia.
S.A. SILAS H. WRIGHT.
Mining World March 20, 1909. Serial, lst part.
An illustrated description of this richly mineralized
region,and the conditions existing there.
The present number considers mainly the
auriferous gravel deposits. 4500 w.
Alluvial Gold Deposits and Mining in Colombia.
P.A. ALIG.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 3, 1910.
Information concerning the production, the extent of
the deposits, operating facilities and
general conditions. 1500 w.
113
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Dredging Prospects on the Pacific Coast of Colombia.
Mining Journal Feb. 25, 1911.
Map and information concerning the country and its
goldproducing prospects. 3000 w.
Placer Mining in Colombia.
R.D.O. JOHNSON.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 9, 1911. Map
Account of placers worked by primitive and modern
methods for many years. 4500 w.
Native Placer Mining in Columbia.
R.D.O. JOHNSON.
Engineering and Mining Journal Oct. 19, 1912.
Illustrates and describes native tools and methods
used, and gives information. 3500 w.
Nechi River Placer Mining, Colombia.
WILLIAM F. WARD.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 16, 1913.
Information concerning the successful dredging and
hydraulic mining. Ills. 2500 w.
The Gold Placers of Antioquia, Republic of Colombia,
South America.
M.H. DE HORA.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
July 1913.
A brief study of the location of the placers in
relation to nearby ore fields. Map. 1200 w.
"Playa" Panning on the Cauca River.
WILLLIAM F. WARD.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
July 1914.
Gives details of conditions and workings of this river
in Colombia,S.A. Ills. 1300 w.
Placers of Antioquia, Colombia.
RALPH W. PERRY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Oct. 9, 1915.
General review. Ills. 3500 w.
Pato Property of Oroville Dredging Company.
W.A. PRICHARD
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 30, 1915.
Report on this property in Colombia, S.A., in the Nechi
River valley. 4000 w.
The Pato and Nechi Placer Properties, Colombia.
W.A. PRICHARD.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 6, 1915.
Information from the report to the Oroville Dredging
Co., Ltd., of London. Map. 2500 w.
113
114
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
The Exploitation of the Gold and Platinum Fields in the
Republic of Colombia (Der Abbau der Gold and
Platinfelder von Kolumbien).
ADOLF VOGT.
Zeitschrift des Vereines Deutscher Ingenieure, vol. 65,
no. 10, Mar. 4, 1921, pp. 241243, 2 figs.
Discusses prospects. Description of plant with cableway
excavator; goldwashing plant; economic
aspects of plant.
The Auriferous Alluvials of Colombia.
M.O. PÉREZ.
Engineering and Mining Journal, vol. 124, no. 20, Nov.
12, 1927, p. 772.
In author's belief rivers of department of Antioquia
and of Province of Choco offer ample room
for profitable operation of more than 200
monitor and hydraulic elevator
installations.
Mining Gold in Colombia's Rich Alluvial Deposits.
M.O. PÉREZ.
Du Pont Magazine, vol. 22, no. 10, Oct. 1928, pp. 1719,
5 figs; see also Min. Rev., vol. 30, no. 14,
Oct. 30, 1928, pp. 1315, 5 figs and Spanish
translation in Ingenieria Internacional,
vol. 16,no. 11, Nov. 1928, p. 527, 3 figs.
Historical and descriptive notes on gold fields in
Departments of Antioquia, Tolima, Bolivar,
Caldas, and Cauca; optimistic data on
possibilities on Nechi River; examples of
high yields on Porce and Nechi rivers;
advantages of alluvial mining; use of
monitors and hydraulic elevators; tabular
data on yields from 16th to 19th century.
Placer Mining in Colombia.
S. DEL RIO.
Engineering and Mining Journal., vol. 129, no. 7, Apr
7, 1930, pp. 354356, 4 figs.
Mining in department of Antioquia, where conditions are
exceptionally favourable to hydraulic
mining; source of alluvial gold deposits is
networks of quartz veins and stringers of
auriferous pyrites in decomposed granite;
operation of placers is usually, but not
always, preceded by sampling of ground;
construction work and operating practice.
Colombia Revisited.
A.J. BENSUSAN.
Mining Magazine v 51 n 4 Oct 1934 p 2139.
Notes on mining inspection trip in Southern
Colombia,South America; general information
on state of Narinyo, with special reference
to alluvial and vein gold mines in region
between Barbacoas district and vicinity of
115
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Pasto.
Unusual Unwatering Operation.
R.F. ALLEN.
Mining Magazine v 57 n 1 July 1937 p 918.
Description of alluvial hydraulicking mine in Colombia,
(exact location not specified) where
extensively flooded workings were unwatered
by siphoning.
In Choco Colombia.
A. MEYER.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 142 n 9 Sept 1941, p
359.
Historical outline; geology; alluvial deposits of gold
and platinum worked principally by primitive
methods; average earnings of native miners
20c/day; early dredging failures; two
companies now operate successfully;
equipment, methods, and activities of Cia
Minera Choco Pacifico, center of activity at
Andagoya; smaller enterprise of Minas de
Negua, with camp site at La Concepcion on
Negua River. Bibliography.
Colombia Important Gold and Platinum Producer.
A. MEYER.
Mining and Metallurgy v 23 n 427 July 1942 p 3836; see
also Mining Journal (Lond) v 218 n 5581 Aug
8 1942 p 3801.
Statistical and descriptive account; many small native
operators, using hand methods, add to output
of larger foreign directed companies; most
of gold comes from alluvial mines;
Department of Antioquia is most important
gold producing district; Choco stands in
second place for gold and first for
platinum.
Contribucion al Estudio de los Placeres Auriferos del
RioSucio de Uraba. Opto de Antioquia.
H.E. WHITE URIBE.
Revista Mineria v 22 n 127 AprAug 1944 p 992132.
Contribution to study of gold placers of Sucio de Uraba
river, in Department of Antioquia, Colombia;
seven tracts are considered; most favourable
prospects are those in lower part of Sucio
river and the former channels; interesting
topic for future study is relationship with
deposits of platinum metals; gold bars from
Department of Narino have been known to
carry as much as 3% iridium.
Untested Colombian Basin May Hold Large Gold Placer.
J.F. TROUTMAN.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 147 n 5 May 1946 p 82-
115
116
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
3.
Since completion of highway from Castilla to Ataco, all
dredgeable ground on upper Saldana River
(tributary of Magdalena River) has been
titled; Ata River basin is also dredgeable
for 12 km above confluence with Saldana;
surface pannings along upper area vary from
about 5c to over dollar per pan; area has
not been drilled, but depth will range from
about 45 ft on lower end to about 30 ft on
upper end of Ata area; sketch map,
indicating location of area.
Colombian Survey,
N.W. WILSON.
Mining Magazine v 75 n 5, 6 Nov 1946 p 28192, Dec p
3517.
Geography and topography; climate and vegetation;
health; politics; mining law; labour;
communications and transport; mineral and
metal production; geology; vein and placer
gold deposits; silver; platinum; other
minerals; mining activity and methods.
Bibliography.
Hoya inexplorada de colombia que Puede Contener un Gran
Yacimiento de Oro.
J.F. TROUTMAN.
Revista Mineria (Asociacion Colombiana de Mineros) v 23
n 137 MayOct 1946 p 106379. Untested
Colombian Basin may hold large gold placer.
Spanish translation of article from
Engineering and Mining Journal 1946.
Study of GoldBearing Placers of RioSucio de Uraba,
Antioquia, Colombia.
H.E. WHITE URIBE.
Mining Journal (Lond) v 229 n 5860, 5861,5862, Dec 13
1947 p 8267, Dec 20 p 8423, Dec 27 p 8612.
Drainage area of Sucio de Uraba is
considered as comprising seven regions;
notes on individual localities, some of
which are regarded favourably.
117
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER Location South America
French, Dutch
Guiana British,
Gold Mining in British Guiana.
JOHN H. POWELL.
Australian Mining Standard June 14, 1900.
Read before the Inst. of Min. and Met. Lond. Part first
describes the country and deposits and
methods of mining.
Quartz and Placer Deposits in British Guiana.
CHARLES E. CLARKE.
Engineering and Mining Journal July 11, 1896.
Description of the country generally and of the Barima
district in particular. 2400 w.
The Gold Industry of British Guiana.
DAVID E. HEADLEY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 22, 1896.
Historical and descriptive sketch. 3800 w.
The Gold Fields of Guiana.
H. TWEDDLE.
Engineering and Mining Journal July 23, 1898.
Historical sketch with illustrations. 6000 w.
Mining in Tropical Regions.
Mining World Sept. 9, 1905.
Abstract from "L'Industrie Aurifère." Describes methods
of placer exploitation in French Guiana.
1500 w.
Placer Mining in French Guiana.
LEON DELVAUX.
Engineering and Mining Journal March 2, 1907.
An illustrated account of old and new methods on the
Elysee placer, and the success. 2000 w.
Placer Mining Conditions in Dutch Guiana.
J.B. PERCIVAL.
Mining and Engineering World Oct. 5, 1912.
Map, illustration and description of a gold region
formed from the earliest times.
1500 w.
Gold Industry in Dutch Guiana, Its Past and Present.
J.B. PERCIVAL.
Mining and Engineering World Aug. 14, 1915.
Brief review of its history. Ills. 1200 w.
Gold in Dutch and French Guiana.
GEORGE A. LAIRD.
117
118
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mining and Metallurgy, no. 190, Oct. 1922, p. 1113, 4
figs.
That systematic investigation and development of goldbearing areas have not been accomplished is
due, it is claimed, not so much to lack of
gold as to geographical, physical and
climatic conditions of the two colonies.
The Goldfield of Dutch Guiana.
B.W. HOLMAN.
Mining Magazine, vol. 30, no. 2, Feb. 1924, pp. 8589, 5
figs.
Description of goldfields, and method of testing
deposits.
Gold in French Guiana [L'or en Guyane fran\aise et les
richesses aurifères du Mataroni (Ipoucin
Approuague)].
A. PERROUD.
Société des Ingénieurs Civils de France Memoires et
Compte Rendu des Travaux, vol. 78, no. 78,
JulyAug. 1925, pp. 555569.
Discusses backward state of knowledge regarding
geology, auriferous zones, deposits, and
their characteristics, extent of placers,
dredging, etc.
Gold in British Guiana.
D.R. GRANTHAM.
Mining Magazine v 50 n 5 May 1934 p 26474.
Description of types of gold deposits worked in British
Guiana, with notes on geology, by Director
of Geological Survey; Potaro and Kaburi
districts are now accessible by motor roads
from Bartica to Potaro and branch roads to
Tiboku; discovery of diamonds on Kuribrong
River is mentioned.
Geology and Gold Deposits of Konawaruk, 1935.
S. BRACEWELL.
(British Guiana) Geological Survey 1936 20 p. Price
12c.
Report on river basin area of about 300 sq mi; gold is
produced by dredging and by hand labour;
quartz vein occurrences are noted, but no
workable gold quartz veins are known;
general geology; descriptions of gold
deposits and development work; diamonds are
being recovered with gold on some claims.
Geology and Gold Deposits of Potaro.
G.J. WILLIAMS.
(British Guiana) Geological Survey 1935 Reports 1936 62
p map in pocket. Price 72c. Report on area
in forest belt on tributaries entering
Potaro River between escarpment and
Essequibo River: physiography; formation;
general geology; origin of gold, from
119
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
granitic and other sources; distribution
from source; detailed descriptions of
deposits. Petrological appendix,
Alluvial Gold and Diamonds in British Guiana,
G.J. WILLIAMS.
Mining Magazine v 56 n 3 Mar 1937 p 1538.
Mode of migration of detrital minerals; economic
significance of float gold; physiographic
development; distribution of detrital
minerals; in relation to physiographic
development; study is based on recent work
in Potaro district.
Gold Prospects in British Guiana.
D.R. GRANTHAM.
Mining Magazine v 56 n 2 Feb 1937 p 7380.
Supplementing paper by same author from issue of May
1934, summary of situation is given; history
of gold mining in British Guiana; physical
features, general geology and geology of
gold deposits; ideal conditions exist for
formation of rich alluvials, with little
chance of digging payable quartz reefs;
methods of locating favourable areas; notes
on principal districts.
HandWorking on British Guiana Goldfields.
C.J. WILLIAMS.
Mining Magazine v 56 n 4 Apr 1937 p 21822.
Although hand methods used in Guiana are inefficient
and wasteful, few attempts to mechanize
placer mining have been successful; chief
obstacle to mechanization is patchy nature
of deposits, which renders it impracticable
to evaluate ground without working it;
dredging opportunities probably exist;
battel (pan) and tom work; sluice work;
group sluicing; ground sluicing.
Report on Geology and Mineral Deposits of Upper Waini
River, North West District, D.A. BRYAN
DAVIES.
British Guiana Geological Survey Bul n 15 1940 21 map;
see also Great Britain Imperial Inst Bul v
39 n 1 JanMar 1941 p 5162.
Metamorphosed basic and acid to intermediate volcanic
rocks intruded by batholiths and stocks, all
intruded by dolerite; alluvial gold has been
worked in 3 small fields; no workable
deposits of auriferous quartz; diamonds not
in workable concentration; low grade
siliceous.
British Guiana.
B.W.W. MCDOUGALL.
119
120
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Western Miner v 18 n 7 July 1945 p. 408.
British Guiana is only British colony on South American
Continent; general description; industries;
gold placer mining; geology; bauxite, gold
and diamonds are only minerals of
consequence produced in colony; gold
deposits, alluvial and lode; most of
development work on goldbearing lodes has
been in weathered zones.
Mineral Resources of British Guiana.
South African Mining and Engineering Journal
v 58 n
2867 Jan 24 1948 p 555, 5578.
Alluvial diamonds; gold occurrences; gold washing
methods, using battel (batea), "tom" or
sluice, and by hand operated "dinkie" for
crushing quartz stringers, hydraulicking;
gold quartz mining; bauxite deposits; clay;
natural gas; sand; lignite; stone for road
materials;manganese; uranium occurrence, as
small specimens of euxenite; iron ore
reported. From handbook of Interior
Development Committee of British Guiana.
La mine d'or de SaintElie et AdieuVat en Guyana
Francaise.
B. CHOUBERT.
Echo des Mines et de la Métallurgie, n 3441 Feb 1952 p
99116.
Gold mine of SaintElie and AdieuVat in French Guiana;
history of development; data on production
and characteristics of equipment used;
geologic structure of region; study of
metallogenesis; composition of gold bearing
rocks; gold placers, lateritized deposits,
eluvium, lodes, and impregnated deposits.
British Guiana.
A.G. THOMSON.
Mining Journal (Lond) v 238 n 6081 Mar 7 1952 p 2423.
Description of mineral deposits, chiefly gold,diamonds,
important occurrences of bauxite, columbite,
manganese ore, and uranium containing
mineral, euxenite; problem of mechanization
of mining and development of systematic
survey of alluvial deposits; data on output
and reserves of minerals.
De goudafzettingen in het Lawagebied.
W. DE HAAN.
Geologie en Mijnbouw v 14 n 9 Sept 1952 p 3217.
Gold deposits in basin of Lawa river (Surinam);
residual ore deposits in smaller tributaries
of Lawa river and hypothesis about their
origin; it is stated that deposits are in
main alluvial; primary ore deposits are
veinlets and stockwords of gold bearing
121
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
quartz at contact of schists with intrusive
acid rocks; primary deposits are poor in
gold; map. (In Dutch with English summary).
Diamond and Gold Deposits of Mekuru District, Cuyuni
River British Guiana.
E.R. POLLARD.
British Guiana Geological Survey Bul n 24 1953 27 p. 3
supp plates.
Characteristics of volcanic series, Haimaraka shales,
older basic intrusive, granitic rocks,
Roraima formation, newer basic intrusive and
superficial deposits; diamonds occur in old
terrace deposits near Cuyuni river and
around White Sand deposit; gold of coarse
alluvial variety occurs in headwaters of
Urluowra and Amunga; petrographic study of
rocks; analysis of gabbros.
Een Surinaams exploratieprobleem.
Geologie en Mijnbouw v 17 n 6 June 1955 p 1656.
Problem of exploration in Surinam; constant low assays
versus erratic high assays; in prospecting
of eluvial containing gold nuggets, result
may be disappointing notwithstanding fact
that their exploitability can be proved by
actual mining.
Mineral Development in British Guiana.
G.M. STOCKLEY.
Mining Magazine v 115 n 4 Oct 1956 p 20712.
Impact on placer gold, diamonds, columbite, and
manganese ore on economy of colony.
Gold Deposits of Cuyuni River.
R.T. CANNON.
British Guianan Geological Survey Bul n 27 1958 69 p.
4 maps, 2 plates.
Gold is associated with granite intrusive and their
late magmatic derivatives, with various
members of volcanic series and metamorphic
rocks which may be older, and with older
basic intrusive, gabbros and diabases;
deposits include gold bearing quartz veins,
dissemination in bedrock and placers;
details of individual deposits.
L'exploitation mécanisée du placer aurifère de
Boulanger en Guyane Francaise.
P. SEYER.
Mine et Métallurgie n 3548., 3549,3550 Feb 1961 pp 837,
Mar p 14550, Apr p 2214. Mechanized mining
of Boulanger gold placer in French Guiana;
operation and adaptation of Marion dredge
and washery; exploration of placer;
121
122
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
statistics on placering.
L'orpaillage en Guyane francaise.
B. ESAMBERT.
Annales des Mines Jan 1964 p 526.
Gold washing in French Guiana; history of production
and mining regulations since 1860;
statistics of gold production between 1860
and 1962; occurrences of gold veins in
Precambrian Paramaca series; prospects for
discovery of high grade deposits are poor.
123
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
South America
Peru
Examining a Peruvian Placer.
PIERRE BOUERY.
Mining and Scientific Press June 21, 1913.
Gives briefly the history of their discovery, origin of
the placers, climatic conditions, labour,
etc. Ills. 2000 w.
The Gold Placers of Maranon River, Peru.
Mining and Engineering World May 9,1914.
Map and description and history of these workings. 1500
w.
Mining in Pataz Province (Peru) (Mongrafja gornicza
prowincji Pataz (Peru)).
B. GLINSKI.
Przeglad GorniczoHutniczy, vol.19, no. 8, Apr. 15,
1927, pp. 217223.
Geography, topography and geology of region; goldbearing sands, mining and metallurgical
methods, production statistics.
Placer Gold in Peru.
H.D. KEISER.
Engineering and Mining Journal., vol. 131, no. 6, Mar.
23, 1931, pp. 260261, 4 figs.
Concession granted to C. Woods; by Peruvian Government
No. 1930; area more than 50,000 sq. mi.,
embracing territory drained by Inambari
River and tributaries; to validate
concession, serial photographic map will be
prepared; plans for exploitation of
concession.
Informe sobre los aventaderos de Aporoma.
C. Del SOLAR B.
(Peru) Boletin Oficial de la Direccion de Minas e
Industriaus v 15 n45 Oct 1935 p 5671.
Report on Aporoma deposits in Sandia province, between
three affluents of Inambari river;
indications of work on large scale by early
Spanish colonists; operations by Aporoma
Goldfields Ltd until 1917; results of
present examination indicate 21,000,000 cu m
minable gravel carrying at least 0.3 g gold
per cu m; estimates of new equipment
required, cost of repairing existing canals,
etc.
123
124
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
S.E. Asia
Gold Placers of Nueva Ecija, in the Philippines.
MAURICE GOODMAN
Mining Journal Oct. 26, 1907.
Gives the recent report of Mr. MAURICE GOODMAN. 1500
w.
Philippine Placers.
R.Y. HANION.
Mining and Scientific Press Aug.26, 1911.
Information concerning the known fields and their
development. 1200 w.
The Black Sands of Paracale.
PAUL R. FANNING and F.T. EDDINGFIELD.
Philippine Journal of Science Aug., 1912.
Reports an investigation of the black sands of Luzon.
Ills. 8700 w.
Mining in Malaya.
A.C. SPARKS.
Electrical Review (London), vol. 102, no. 2618, Jan.
27, 1928, pp. 145146. Impressions of visit
to Federated Malay States, with reference to
methods of applying electric power in tin
mining; all larger towns in F.M.S. supplied
with electricity by government or municipal
authorities; dredging method; opencast
mining; coal mining; plant and machinery
almost entirely British made, but Chinese
now making gravel pumps. Extracts from paper
London Branch of Assn. Min. Elec. Engrs.
Mining in Malaya.
Far Eastern Review, vol. 24, no. 3. Mar. 1928, pp. 140141, 1 fig. Gold, coal and tungsten ores
(wolfram and scheelite) are successfully
mined in Malaya, but tin preponderates; for
many years Federated Malay States have been
largest producers of tin in world; they also
have world's largest hydraulic tin mine and
one of largest tinlode mines.
Gold in Burma and Shan States.
J.C. BROWN.
Mining Magazine v 52 n 1 and 2 Jan 1935 p 920 and Feb
8292.
Gold bearing quartz veins of Katha district; gold
associated with diorite near Kalaw, Southern
Shan States; alluvial deposits of Chindwin
River; gold bearing terraces of Uyu River;
occurrences of Hukawng Valley; gravels of
Irrawaddy River; origin of Irrawaddy gold;
large nuggets and gold dust obtained by
125
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Chinese miners from eluvial deposits of
slopes; occurrences in tributaries of
Irrawaddy; miscellaneous occurrences.
Placers Also Yield Gold.
V.V. CLARK.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 138 n 8 Aug 1937 p
4189 and 421.
Historical outline; dredging activity;dragline
excavator and floating washing plant,
hydraulic mining; notes on individual placer
operations; sources of placer gold in
various districts; prospecting.
Beschouwingen over oorsprong en vorming van de
alluviale goudafzettingen in de afdeelingen
Bengkalis en Indragiri.
J.E. LOTH.
Ingenieur v 52 n 38 Sept 17 1937 p M2936.
Consideration on origin and formation of alluvial gold
deposits in Bengkalis and Indragiri at East
coast of Sumatra.
Prospecting in East India Jungle.
V.V. CLARK.
Mining and Metallurgy v 18 n 372 Dec 1937 p 5457.
Notes on activities of six prospecting groups in
Netherland East Indies; three are searching
for lode mines, studying structures,
developing and diamond drilling, and three
groups are searching for placer mines with
pans, pits, and Empire drills; detail of
experiences of one of latter groups.
Placer Operations of North Mindanao Mining Co. Surigao,
Mindanno.
W.F. BOERICKE and N.N. LIM.
Philippines Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 1 1939
20 p.
Deposits appear to be remnants of ancient auriferous
river channel, subjected to subsidence,
upheaval and subsequent erosion; depth to
bedrock 4 to 40 ft. averaging about 12 ft;
boulders abundant; sampling practice; water
supply system with 18,000 ft ditches and
flumes and 4000 ft of 20 to 10 in. pipe;
normal flow 900 miners inches, with 250 ft
head; details of equipment, practice, yields
and costs.
Placering in Mindanao With Dragline and Stacker Scow.
W.F. BOERICKE.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 140 n 10 Oct 1939 p
389.
Paper describes recent work on Tuba Flat area of Curuan
River, 50 mi north of Zamboanga in Southern
125
126
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mindanao; gravels 6 to 30 ft deep. averaging
about 15 ft not cemented and free from clay;
boulders of moderate size amount to about
30% of ground; Diesel engine powered No. 55
BucyrusErie dragline, with 3 cu yd bucket;
43,500 cu yd gravel washed in one month
yielded 34 1/3 cents per cu yd or 89.5% of
test pit value.
Burmese Mineral Resources.
W.E. HOSKING.
Mining Journal v 22 n 5836 June 28 1947 p 3845.
Difficulty of access and lack of transportation has
retarded development of many known deposits;
lead silver and lead zinc deposits; native
copper; gold placers; manganese and iron
ores; prospecting. Before Cornish Inst Min.
Mech and Met Engrs.
Economic Importance of Jointing in Limestone Bedrock of
Two Alluvial Gold Mines, Pahang, Malaya.
J.A. RICHARDSON.
Institution of Mining and Metallurgy Bul n 490 Sept
1947 p 238 (discussion) n 493 Dec p 437.
Strong joint planes cutting PermoCarboniferous
limestone bedrock have played important part
in locating of relatively rich shoots in
gold placers and residual deposits in at
least two gold mines in northwest Pahang:
igneous rocks intrusive into sediments; Foo
Brothers hydraulic gold mine, Sungei
Timah,Pahang; Tui gold mine; Padang Tungku,
Pahang.
Economic Importance of Jointing in Limestone Bedrock of
Two Alluvial Gold Mines, Pahang, Malaya.
J.A. RICHARDSON.
Institution of Mining and Metallurgy Bul n 522 May
1950 p. 35.
Author's reply to discussion of paper from Bul 490 Sept
1947.
127
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
U.S.
Alaska
The Gold Fields of Alaska.
ROBERT STEIN.
Review of Reviews - June 1896.
Largely descriptive of the country and means of access
to the gold fields. 3000 w.
Alaska and Its Mineral Resources.
ARTHUR LAKES.
Mines and Minerals March. 1898.
Abstract "Alaska Mining Record." The geographical
situation of the mining districts with
account of discovery, the development work,
and the conditions under which the work must
be done. 2500 w.
Gold Deposits, Geology and Geography of Alaska.
W.H. DALL and F.C. SCHRADER.
Mining and Scientific Press March 10, 1898.
Information from a U.S. Government pamphlet prepared by
W.H. DALL and F.C.SCHRADER, and edited by
S.F. EMMONS.
Gold Fields of Alaska; Rush of Prospectors.
US Consular Reports March 11, 1898.
Reports the large number of prospectors already on the
Pacific coast en route for these gold
fields, and comments on the movements of
Canada aiming to securing as large benefits
as possible from the discovery. 800 w.
The Alaska Gold Fields and the Opportunities They Offer
for Capital and Labour. SAMUEL C. DUNHAM.
Bulletin of Dept of Labour May 1898.
Report of official investigations made under government
instructions, giving information of value on
all subjects relating to this region. Ills.
and maps. 7200 w.
Distribution of Gold in Alaska.
R.H. STRETCH.
Mining Industry and Review May 5, 1898.
Presents views based on work extending over a period of
three months. 1400 w.
The Alaskan Gold Fields and the Opportunities They
Offer for Capital and Labour. SAMUEL C.
DUNHAM.
Bulletin of US Dept of Labour Nov. 1898.
Report of recent investigations in these mining
districts, showing what progress is being
made, and the need of taking every
precaution in going to this region. 23400 w.
127
128
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mining Conditions in Alaska.
"ALEX. QUARTZ."
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 12, 1898.
Discussing the seeming decline of the mining industry
and explaining some of the causes. Claims
that it is not from lack of gold in its
mines, but the hard conditions imposed by
the government. Gives encouraging reports of
some districts recently explored. 2500 w.
The Cape Nome District, Alaska.
HERBERT MURRAY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 25, 1899.
Information gleaned while prospecting, and from wellinformed miners. 1200 w.
The Cape Nome Gold Fields.
US Consular Reports, No. 633 Jan. 20, 1900.
Concerning gold discoveries reported, tables giving
market quotations, other information. 800
w.
Some Notes on Nome, Alaska.
PAUL F. TRAVERS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 27, 1900.
An account of the discovery, and of the present outlook
and conditions. Ill.1200 w.
Some Notes on the Nome Gold Region of Alaska.
F.C. SCHRADER and ALFRED H. BROOKS.
Transactions of the American Institute of Mining
Engineers Feb. 1900.
Describes the region, the deposits, the difficulties to
be met, etc. Map. 4000 w.
The New Mining District at Cape Nome.
ENOS BROWN.
Scientific American Feb. 3, 1900.
Information concerning this region, its location,
climate, deposits, etc. 900 w.
The Gold Sands of Cape Nome.
ANGELO HELLPRIN.
Ap Popular Science Monthly April 1900.
Account of this mining district, giving its history,
describing the deposits and workings. Ill.
3700 w.
The Gold Deposits of Cape Nome.
CHARLES G. YALE.
Scientific American Sup May 12, 1900.
Information concerning beach deposits, and their
probable origin,means of working, etc. 1700
w.
Gold Deposits and Mining Methods at Cape Nome.
129
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Scientific American May 19, 1900.
Information concerning the location, devices or power
machines used, etc. Ill. 1400 w.
The Auriferous Sands of Cape Nome. (Les Sables
Aurifères du Cap Nome, Alaska).
R. DE BATZ.
Génie Civil June 9, 1900.
A general description of the Cape Nome region and gold
fields, with maps. 3500 w.
Cape Nome, Alaska, Gold Region.
F.C. SCHRADER and A.H. BROOKS.
Mines and Minerals July 1900.
Epitome of report by F.C. SCHRADER and A.H. BROOKS, of
the U.S. Geol. Surv. Concerning the
formation of the country, and where and how
the gold is found. Ill. 4300 w.
The Great Storm at Nome.
WINTHROP PACKARD.
Engineering and Mining Journal Oct. 13, 1900.
In the N.Y. "Evening Post." An account of a storm which
wrecked a large part of the city. 1700 w.
Some Notes on Alaska.
W.M. COURTIS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 10, 1900.
Observations made on a recent trip in the Ketchikan
district and as far as Bennett Lake. 1000 w.
Some Experiences in the Nome District, Alaska.
BARRY SEARLES.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 29, 1900.
Reviews the rush of the season of 1900 and the
resulting conditions, giving information of
the region, and the degree of success. 3200
w.
Notes on Nome, and the Outlook for Vein Mining, in that
District.
FORBES RICKARD.
Engineering and Mining Journal March 2, 1901.
The writer's opinion concerning the gold deposits,
their origin, etc. 2000 w.
Gold Mining in Alaska.
H. VAN F. FURMAN.
Mines and Minerals May 1901.
An illustrated description of the southeastern part of
the country, its formations and some of the
mines. 3800 w.
The Placer Gold Fields of the Nome Region.
ALFRED H. BROOKS.
129
130
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mining and Metallurgy May 1, 1901.
An illustrated account of the present condition and
future possibilities of this region. 2700 w.
The Golovin Bay Region of Northwestern Alaska.
J.D. LOWNY.
Engineering and Mining Journal June 15, 1901.
Describes the characteristics of the region, its
advantages over Nome, and recently organized
enterprises. Gold dust assays from $17 to
$19 per ounce. 1300 w.
The Season of 1901 at Nome.
HERBERT MURRAY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 23, 1901.
A review of the year and the conditions under which the
work has been carried on., 1800 w.
The Story of Nome Gold Fields.
OTTO HALIA.
Mining and Scientific Press March 1, 1902.
Reviews the history of this field since its discovery
in July 1898.
Mining Conditions in the Nome Region, Alaska.
ARTHUR J. COLLIER.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 21, 1902.
The decreased production and the causes are discussed.
700 w.
The Gold Sands of Cape Nome.
A.L. QUENEAU.
Engineering Magazine July 1902. Ill.
Description of beach at Cape Nome, showing the methods
of working the auriferous sand. 3500 w.
Gold Mining in the Nome District.
LEWIS GARRISON.
Engineering and Mining Journal Oct. 4, 1902.
An account of the companies formed, and the need of
water, showing that the district has passed
largely into the hands of companies with
large capital. 1200 w.
Boring the Tundra of the Nome Gold Fields in Search of
Gold.
OTTO HALLA.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 28, 1903.
Gives an account of investigations, which have shown
that the deposits between the hillsides and
the Behring sea contain large amounts of
auriferous gravel. 1000 w.
The GoldBearing Gravels of Alaska.
JOHN D. MCGILLIVRAY.
The Engineering Magazine July 1903.
A brief summary of their position and extent, with
suggestion of means for vastly increasing
131
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
their accessibility by a logical and
inexpensive policy of taxation and road
building. Illustrated. 3800 w.
The Treadwell Group of Mines Douglas Island, Alaska.
ROBERT A. KINZIE.
Transaction of the American Institute of Mining
Engineers Oct 1903.
History, geology, and illustrated detailed description
of mines and methods of ore that does not
yield an average of more than $2 per ton.
13,800 w.
Unexplored Alaska.
Scientific American Sup May 14, 1904.
Information from a publication of the U.S. Geol.
Survey, giving a story of a pioneer journey
of 535 miles through Central Alaska, between
the Yukon basin and the Arctic Ocean. 1100
w.
Forty Mile, Alaska.
J.S. FRENCH.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec.24, 1904.
An account of mining methods and life in the Yukon
basin. Ills. 3700 w.
The Porcupine Placer District, Alaska.
CHARLES W. WRIGHT.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 14, 1905.
From the U.S. Geol. Survey. An illustrated description
of this district in Southeastern Alaska.
2400 w.
A Growing Camp in the Tanana Gold Fields, Alaska.
SIDNEY PAIGE.
National Geographic Magazine March 1905.
An account of life and conditions at the Fairbanks
camp. Ills. 2500 w.
The Placer Fields of NorthWestern America.
THOMAS TONGE.
Mining Journal March 18, 1905.
Information obtained from CHESTER WELLS PURINGTON, who
recently investigated the placer mining
industry of Alaska in regard to the
conditions, cost of mining and best methods
to employ in the different districts. 4000
w.
Gravel and Placer Mining in Alaska.
CHESTER WELLS PURINGTON.
Mining World July 29, 1905.
Explains methods of mining necessary by unusual
conditions, information on cost. Map. 4000
w.
131
132
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Placer Mining in Alaska.
C.W. PURINGTON.
Mining and Scientific Press Aug 12, 1905.
Abstract from Bulletin of the U.S. Geol. Survey,
describing the methods of mining. Ills. 1800
w.
Gold Mining in Southeastern Alaska (Der Goldbergbau in
Südost Alaska).
H. HAAGEN.
Glückauf Oct. 7, 14, 1905.
Illustrating and describing the AlaskaTreadwell plant
on Douglas Island. Two articles. 8000 w.
GoldMining in Alaska.
Engineering April 27, 1906.
Editorial, describing the deposits and giving an
account of the difficulties in the different
districts. 3000 w.
Cape Nome Placers.
E.B. WILSON.
Engineering and Mining Journal Oct. 13, 1906.
Describes the peculiar occurrence of the gold, and the
mining conditions. Ills. 1000 w.
Alaska and Its Possibilities.
J.T. CORNFORTH.
Mining Report Jan. 10, 1907.
Read at meeting of the Am Mining Cong. Information
relating to the early history, the gold
production, and other metals; the
transportation facilities, etc. 1400 w.
The Great Treadwell Mines on Douglas Island.
ARTHUR COE SPENCER.
Mining World Sept. 21, 1907. Serial. lst part.
Information in regard to the deposits, development,
production, geology, etc., of these gold
mines. Ills. 1200 w.
Mining in the Wrangell District, Alaska.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 8, 1908.
An account of the development of the gold placers and
the copper projects. 2500 w.
Mining the Treadwell Lode.
T.A. RICKARD.
Mining and Scientific Press July 18, 1908.
An account of the methods adopted in the mining of wide
ore bodies without the aid of timbers. An
unusually large lowgrade deposit of gold
ore. Ills. 2000 w.
The Gold Placers of Parts of Seward Peninsula.
133
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
C.C. LONGRIDGE.
Mining Journal Aug. 29, 1908. Serial, lst part.
Compiled from the U.S. Geol. Survey reports by C.C.
LONGRIDGE. An illustrated historical resume
of Alaska placer fields and their
development. 6000 w.
Mining Methods in the North.
T.A. RICKARD.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 12, 1908. Serial, lst
part.
Traces the evolution of methods of mining goldbearing
gravel in Alaska. Ills.3000 w.
Placer Gold Mining in Interior Alaska.
Engineering and Mining Journal March 20, 1909.
Information concerning conditions, methods, and
prospecting. 4000 w.
Haines District, Alaska.
W.A. SCOTT.
Mining and Scientific Press Aug. 7, 1909.
Brief account of this gold mining district. 1200 w.
The Fairbanks Gold Placer Region, Alaska.
L.M. PRINDLE and F.J. KATZ.
Mining World Aug. 21, 1909.
Abstracted from Bul. 379, U.S. Geol. Survey. A review
of the mining development, and gives
information of methods used. Map. 3500 w.
Mining in the Fairhaven Precinct, Alaska.
FRED F. HENSHAW.
Mining World Nov. 20, 1909.
Abstracted from Bul. 379, U.S. Geol. Survey. Map and
account of operations and methods in this
goldfield. 2200 w.
The Innoko Placer District, Alaska.
A.G. MADDERN.
Mining World April 16, 1910.
Abstract from Bul. 240, U.S. Geol. Surv. Sketch map and
account of the discovery of placer gold.
2000 w.
Placer Mining Operations in Alaska in 1909.
ALFRED H. BROOKS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 27 1910.
Information concerning the last year's work, the
production,etc. Maps. 3000 w.
Some Economic Gold Deposits of Alaska.
FRANCIS CHURCH LINCOLN.
Engineering and Mining Journal Sept. 17, 1910.
133
134
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Brief descriptions of the more important gold deposits,
with information concerning them. 5000 w.
Nome Placer Mining.
T.M. GIBSON.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 17, 1910.
Information concerning the work of the past season, and
of a new find that may prove important. 1800
w.
The Iditarod.
E.H. THOMAS.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 18, 1911.
Illustrated account of Alaska's newest gold camp. 800
w.
PayStreaks at Nome.
T.M. GIBSON.
Mining and Scientific Press March 25, 1911. Serial.
1st part.
Maps, and account of the important placers found in the
beach deposits. 3500 w.
The Fineness of Gold in the Fairbanks District, Alaska.
PHILIP S. SMITH.
Economic Geology Aug. 1913.
Map and statement of the fineness of the placer gold
found on the creeks in the Fairbanks region,
Alaska, with location of the known lode
mines and prospects.
2400 w.
The Chisana Placer Gold Strike in Alaska.
Mining and Engineering World Nov.22, 1913.
An account of a strike of some promise in Alaska. 2500
w.
The Chisana (Shushanna) Gold District.
D.D. CAIRNES.
Canadian Mining Journal Jan. 1, 1914.
Information concerning these placer deposits in Alaska.
2500 w.
Chisana Goldfields.
D.D. CAIRNES.
Bulletin of the Canadian Mining Institute Feb. 1914.
Map and information concerning the location, routes,
expenses, accommodations, topography,general
geology, the discovery, etc. Ills. 6000 w.
Drift Mining in the Frozen Gravel Deposits of Cape
Nome.
ARTHUR GIBSON.
Mining and Scientific Press March 7, 1914.
Gives data based on actual mining operations at some of
the best and most successful mines on Seward
Peninsula. Alaska, Ills. 2000 w.
135
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Report of the Mine Inspector for the Territory of
Alaska to the Secretary of the Interior, for
the Fiscal Year Ending June 30,1914.
U S Gov Printing Office 1914.
Mainly a description of the mining operations. 32 pp.
The Chisana Placer District of Alaska.
ALFRED H. BROOKS.
Mining and Engineering World Nov. 28, 1914.
Describes the gold deposits, copper deposits, and
mining methods. Maps and Ills. 2500 w.
Mining in the Far North.
EMIL EDWARD HURJA.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 5, 1914.
The present article deals with the upper Yukon: Circle
City, Eagle and Woodchopper. Ills. 2000 w.
Mining in the Far North.
EMIL EDWARD HURJA.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 19, 1914. Serial, lst
part.
An account of placer mining in the Fairbanks district.
Ills. 4000 w.
Mining in the Far North.
EMIL EDWARD HURJA.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 30, 1915.
Describes the dredging and placer operations in the
Iditarod district. Ills. 1500 w.
Mining in the Far North.
EMIL EDWARD HURJA.
Mining and Scientific Press March 6, 1915.
Conditions at Hot Springs, Gold Mountain, Koyukuk, and
Andreafski districts. Ills.
1500 w.
Yakataga Beach Placers.
ARTHUR G. THOMPSON.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 1, 1915.
Characteristics and methods of working. Ills. 2000 w.
Mineral Resources of the ChisanaWhite River District,
Alaska.
STEPHEN R. CAPPS.
US Geological Survey Bul 622F. (c. 1915)
General description, geology, etc. Maps. 18000 w.
Development Methods at Fairbanks.
Engineering and Mining Journal June 12, 1915.
Describes methods and machinery for working these
placers. Ills. 6000 w.
135
136
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Bagley Scraper for Gravel Mining in Alaska.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 14, 1915.
Successful operation on Otter Creek. Ills. 1200 w.
Mining Methods at Ashanti (81890 A). Region, Alaska
(82056 N).
STEPHEN R. CAPPS.
Maps. 52 pp. U S Geological Surv Bul 662E.
General features of this district; geology; placer and
lode deposits. (c. 1917)
Present Status of Mining in Alaska.
HARRY J. PHILLIPS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Press, vol. 115, no.
10, Mar. 10, 1923, pp. 446448.
Development retarded by lack of transportation
facilities and by restrictions of present
Government policy; British Columbia's aid
for prospectors contrasted; need for diverse
industry.
The RubyKuskokwim Region. Alaska.
J.B. MERTIE, JR. and G.L. HARRINGTON.
US Geological Survey Bul. 754, 1924, 126 pp. 17
figs., partly on supp. plates.
Geography, geology, and mineral resources; placer gold
is only mineral deposit that has been
exploited on a commercial scale.
Mineral Resources of Alaska, 1922.
A.H. BROOKS and others.
US Geological Survey, Bul 755, 1924,
partly on supp.plates.
Results achieved in investigation of
of Alaska and treating of
the territory, especially
mineral production.
220 pp., 14 figs,
mineral resources
mining industry of
of statistics of
Mineral Resources of Alaska, 1923.
A.H. BROOKS and others.
US Geological Survey, Bul 773, 1925, 280 pp. 17 figs.
Contains following articles; Preface,and Alaska's
Mineral Resources and Production, A.H.
BROOKS; An Early Tertiary Placer Deposit in
the Yentna District, S.R.CAPPS; Mineral
Investigations in Southeastern Alaska, A.F.
BUDDINGTON; Occurrence of Copper on Prince
William Sound, F.H.MOFFIT; Mineral Resources
of Kamishak Bay Region, K.F. MATHER; Cold
BayKatmai District, W.R. SMITH; Geology and
Gold Placers of Chandalar District, J.B.
MERTIE, Jr.; Outlook for Petroleum Near
Chignik, G.C. MARTIN; Recent Survey of
publications of Alaska.
PlacerMining Methods; and Costs in Alaska.
N.L. WIMMLER.
137
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
US Bureau of Mines Bul. no 259, 1927, 224 pp. 68 figs.
Results of study of present conditions in Alaska placer
mining, methods employed and costs.
The Gold Resources of Alaska.
P.S. SMITH.
Economic Geology, vol. 25, no. 2, MarApr. 1930, pp.
176196, 3 figs.
Brief historical note of gold mining in Alaska; tabular
production statistics of placer gold and
lode gold, 1880 to 1929, total value
$380,838,000; placer gold deposits; reserves
estimated as $360,000,000 or more; lode gold
deposits; facts are not available for
estimate of lode gold reserves, but it is
considered quite possible that reserve of
lode gold far exceeds that of
placers;tabular summaries of principal
placer and lode regions and districts of
Alaska. Bibliography.
Geology of the EagleCircle District, Alaska.
J.B. MERTIE, JR.
US Geological Survey Bul., No. 816, 1930, 166 pp. and
index, 30 pp. partly on supp. plates.
Area lies between Fortymile and Circle mining
districts, and embraces Seventymile district
and American Creek, Fourth of July Creek,
and Woodchopper Creek precincts; geographic
features; descriptive geology; geologic
history; distribution of gold placers;
sources of gold; placer mining operations;
two groups of claims, comprising 7 mi. of
placer ground on Coal Creek regarded as good
hydraulic venture for some company.
Past PlacerGold Production from Alaska.
P.S. SMITH.
US Geological Survey BlU n 857B 1933 (Mineral
resources of Alaska, 1932) p 938. Tabulated
statistics and commentary on production, by
districts, from 1880 to 1930 inclusive,
showing total$258,962,000, as compiled from
available official records.
Tractors Speed Placer Development in Alaska.
M.H. GUISE.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 137 n 10 Oct 1936 p
507.
Note on accomplishment of M.H. GUISE;dragline scraper
and washing plant designed, shipped, and
transported 35 mi overland to site on Peters
Creek within 75 days after examination of
property was begun; direct tractor
transportation operating costs on 500 tons
amounted to about $8 per ton, lower than any
137
138
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
contracting rate.
Recent Mineral Developments in Copper River Region.
F.H. MOFFIT.
US Geological Survey Bul 880B 1937 p 97109.
Copper mining,lode gold and gold placer mining in
Chitina Valley and Bremner River districts;
Nabesna gold mine in Nabesna Valley; gold
placers and quartz veins in Chisana
district; Chistochina district, and Ahtell
Creek Valley.
Choosing Mining Method for GoldBearing Gravels.
W.W. STALEY and R.H. STORCH.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 138 n 7 and 9 July
1937 p 3426 and 359 and Sept p 434.
Study of property at source of Birch Creek and its
first tributaries, between mouth of North
Fork and Gold Dust creeks, 40 mi from Circle
City, Alaska, to determine relative
suitabilities of hydraulicking, use of power
drag scraper, or dredging; comparative cost
estimates; estimated operating expense
favours use of power scraper, by narrow
margin.
Mineral Industry of Alaska in 1935.
P.S. SMITH.
US Geological Survey Bul 880A 1937 p 135.
Production statistics, with descriptive notes on
prospecting and mining activity; gold lodes,
gold placers; silver, copper, lead, platinum
metals, tin, coal, petroleum; miscellaneous
mineral products.
Valdez Creek Mining District, Alaska, in 1936.
R. TUCK.
US Geological Survey Bul n 897 B 1938 p 10931.
Report on result of short investigation of current
mining activities of district on south flank
of Alaska Range, about 50 mi east of Alaska
Railroad; gold was first discovered in
region in 1903; summary of geology;
metamorphosed sedimentary rocks; igneous
intrusive, and unconsolidated glacial and
stream deposits; notes on 5 lode deposits;
placer deposits; placer mining on 6 creeks
and gulches.
Gold Placers of Fortymile, Eagle and Circle Districts.
J.B. MERTIE, JR.
US Geological Survey Bul n 897C 1938 p 133261.
Districts in eastcentral Alaska; gold discovered in
last two decades of 19th century and since
that time placer mining has been continuous;
salient features of geography and geology;
granitic rocks are considered to be primary
source of gold in deposits; description of
139
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
mining activities in districts in 1936;
features of deposits; notes on mining
methods.
Fineness of Gold from Alaska Placers.
P.S. SMITH.
US Geological Survey Bul n 910C 1941 p 147272.
Report analyzes records obtained from 1534
determinations of fineness of Alaska placer
gold and shows that 23% of records are of
gold of fineness higher than 900; 42% are
between 850 and 899; 26% between 800 and
849; 9% of gold less than 800 fine; quality
of gold from each of 8 major geographic
regions, 41 districts, and 84 smaller areas
are tabulated and discussed in some detail
separately. Bibliography.
Mineral Industry of Alaska in 1939.
P.S. SMITH.
US Geological Survey Bul n 926A 1941, 106 p map in
pocket.
General features; total mineral production valued about
$25,296,000; gold lodes;development notes;
gold placers; production by districts;
dredging; silver, produced as minor
constituent; platinum metals; copper; lead;
tin; coal; no petroleum produced in 1939,
but earlier production in Katalla district
is mentioned; miscellaneous mineral
products.
Mining in Northern Copper River Region, Alaska.
F.H. MOFFIT.
US Geological Survey Bul n 943B 1944 p 2546.
Mining in region in 1941 included both gold lode and
gold placer operations but was conducted on
modest scale; principal placer operations
were on streams belonging to Chistochina
River system; minor operations were in
progress on tributaries of Ahtell Creek,
branch of Slana River; only one lode gold
mine was in operation; Nabesna mine near
head of Nabesna River.
Summary of Alaskan Mining.
H.G. WILCOX.
Western Miner v 19 n 4 Apr 1946 p 557.
Termination of war has removed restrictions on man
power, materials and equipment for gold mine
operations; increased interest in mining is
evidenced by claim staking,taking of options
on gold lode and placer claims, expansion of
mechanized mining, ordering of two new
dredges for Seward Peninsula and application
139
140
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
for RFC loan for dredge in Koyukuk;
cinnabar; asbestor jade; platinum; tungsten,
antimony, tin and chromium, oil; coal.
Alaska's Mining Problems.
N.C. STINES.
Mining World v 8 n 12 Nov 1946 p 4952.
Price of gold; freight rates, maximum hours clause of
wages and hours act; aboriginal rights and
lands reserved from occupation; pollution of
streams; problems are aggravated by great
distances between sparse settlements in
territory coupled with serious
transportation problems.
Improvements at Cleary Hill Help Offset High Alaska
Coals.
Mining World v 9 n 9 Aug 1947 p 302.
Notes operations of yearround producer of both lode and
placer gold. In Fairbanks district; underground mining methods are principally cut
and fill stoping, supplemented by stulls and
half sets; amount of timbering varies with
nature of ground, more support required in
faulted areas; milling by amalgamation and
flotation; in placer mining, dragline with 1
1/2 cu yd bucket is used for stripping and
for feeding raised sluice boxes.
Handicaps Fail to Deter Alaskan Gold Production.
H.G. WILCOX.
Western Miner v 24 n 4 Apr 1951 p 8081.
Gold value produced during 1950 was $9,900,000; placer
and lode mining reviewed; Matanuska
bituminous and Healy River subbituminous
coal fields produced 395,000 tons in 1950;
petroleum exploration by Navy Dept.;
exploration of tin, tungsten, chromite,
zinc, nickel, titanium bearing magnetite and
iron deposits; uranium deposits found in
Kuskokwim area, north of Haycock on Seward
Peninsula and in dikes of Hyder area.
Geology Placer Gold in Alaska.
J.B. MERTLE Jr.
Washington Academy of Sciences J v 30 n 3 Mar 15 1949 p
93124.
Placer golds are natural alloys principally of gold and
silver; physical and chemical properties of
gold silver alloys; artificial
alloys;analysis of placer gold from Alaska;
geographic distribution of gold placers;
classification; formation; most of placers
in Alaska are of fluviatile origin; fineness
of placer gold; divergence between lode gold
and placer gold derived from it.
Bibliography.
141
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Alaska Mining Review.
H.G. WILCOX.
Western Miner v 25 n 4 Apr 1952 p 51, 54.
IN 1951 minerals; production increased 1% over 1950;
gold production decreased 29%; review of
gold placer mining, platinum, tin, tungsten
antimony, mercury, base metals; and
petroleum development.
Placer Mining in Alaska.
B.J. THOMAS, D.J. COOKE, E. WOLFF, W.H. KERNS,.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 7926 1959 34 p.
Operations classified into three categories; those
having sluices at bedrock level, those
having sluices above bedrock, and those
having mobile nonfloating washing plants;
diesel powered bulldozers and draglines are
utilized for conveying; unit costs range
from $2.54 to $0.16 per cu yd depending on
type of operation employed.
Reconnaissance of Beach Sands, Bristol Bay, Alaska.
R.V. BERRYHILL.
US Bureau of Mines Report Investigations 6214 1963 48
p.
Reconnaissance studies of beach deposits along 220 mi
of shoreline; magnetic separation tests,
petrographic analyses, and determinations
for radiometric equivalent uranium, gold,
platinum, iron and titanium were made; spot
samples from some beaches indicate small
deposits containing up to 10% recoverable
titaniferous magnetite; some larger deposits
were indicated to contain from 1 to 2% total
heavy metal, principally as titaniferous
magnetite.
Placer Gold Occurrences in Alaska.
E.H. COBB.
US Geological Survey Mineral Investigations Resources
Map MR38 1964 15 p. map. List of references
gives data on localities of placer gold by
quadrangle and are keyed by number within
each quadrangle to locations shown on map.
141
142
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
U.S.
Arizona
Gold Placers in Arizona.
T. LANE CARTER.
Engineering and Mining Journal March 18, 1911.
Gold is found in long narrow strips of wash composed of
fragments of rock. Ills.
2000 w.
Gold Placers of Arizona Dry Washings of Value.
T. LANE CARTER.
Mining and Scientific Press Aug. 10, 1912. Ills.
Describes conditions and the geology of the region, and
the difficulties to be overcome. 3500w.
History and Present Status of Arizona's Gold Placers.
M.A. ALLEN.
Arizona Mining Journal, vol. 7, nos. 2 and 3, June 15
and July 1, 1923, pp. 57, and 40, 67, and
25, 1 fig.
From Univ. of Ariz. Bur of Mines, Bul. no. 118.
History, production, location, development, and present
status of Arizona's placer deposits.
Arizona: Gold Placers and Placering.
E.D. WILSON and J.B. TENNEY.
Arizona Bureau of Mines Mineral Technology Series n 34
Bul n 132 v 3 n 1 Jan 1932 114.
General origin and features; importance of rain;
historical notes; production statistics;
description of deposits, by counties; Small
Scale Gold Placering, G.R. FANSETT;
Suggested List of Equipment for Prospecting
in Southwest, C.H. JOHNSON; Food Suggestions
for Prospector, M.C. SMITH; Treatment of
Sunstroke or Heat Prostration, F.P. PERKINS;
Information on Poisonous Animals, C.T.
VORHIES; Laws, Regulations, and Court
Decisions in Relation to Location and
Retention of Gold Placer Claims in Arizona,
G.M. BUTLER. Bibliography.
Saving Gold in Cemented Gravels.
H.W. BERGER.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 16 n 14 Dec. 15, 1932,
p. 7 and 28.
Features of machine designed by author; first unit
built for La Cholla Mining Co. Ltd. in Yuma
County, Ariz, and test runs made in June
1932.
143
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
U.S.
California
A GoldPaved Valley.
DAN DE QUILLE.
Mining and Scientific Press Aug. 8, 1896.
Some thoughts regarding the amount of gold deposited in
the valleys of California by the rivers of
the Sierras. The indestructibility of gold,
and the strange places where it is found.
2000 w.
Gold Mining in California.
AUG. J. BOWIE.
Mining and Scientific Press Sept. 26, 1896. Serial.
The benefits to government from the gold mines of the
country. Interesting information on
hydraulic mining, legitimate and speculative
mining, speculative mines, mining as a
business proposition,with an outline of the
topography and geology of California, gold
quartz veins, depth of mines, etc.
The Gravel Fields of Northern California.
C.L. HALL.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 6, 1897.
Information of the placer mining in Trinity and
Siskiyou counties. 2000 w.
GoldBearing Beach Sands of California.
ARTHUR LAKES.
Mines and Minerals March, 1898.
How they are formed, deposited, and concentrated by the
waves of the ocean. 900 w.
River Mining in California.
R. DUNN.
Mining and Scientific Press March 19, 1898.
Considers the appliances for working, and the subjects
generally. 4800 w.
Gold in Ancient California River Channels.
Mining and Scientific Press July 30, 1898.
Extracts from the account of the Forest Hill Divide by
Ross E. Brown, with comments and
illustrations. 3500 w.
Placer Mining in California.
ARTHUR LAKES.
Mines and Minerals Feb. 1899.
The condition of the industry at present and an account
of its former greatness. 2800 w.
Forest Hill Placer Mines.
143
144
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
ARTHUR LAKES.
Mines and Minerals May 1899.
How ancient river beds of Placer County, California,
now in the mountain tops, are worked. 1500
w.
Placer Mining and the Future Possibilities of this
Branch of the Mining Industry.
JOHN W. GRAY.
Mining and Scientific Press May 6, 1899.
A discussion of the outlook in California, especially,
for this system of mining. 2000 w.
Mining on the California Gold Belt.
W.H. STORMS.
Mining and Scientific Press May 26, 1900. Serial.
An account of recent workings by improved methods.
Note on Hydraulic Mining in LowGrade Gravel.
WILLIAM H. RADFORD.
Transactions of the American Institute of Mining
Engineers Nov. 1901.
A report of actual figures in working property in
Northern California. 700 w.
LowGrade Gravel Property.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 6, 1902.
Illustrated description of a property in California,
where the supply of water is brought 30
miles,and the expense of maintenance is
rather high. Gives results showing profits.
1300 w.
Rich Gold Mines of Sierra County.
GEORGE F. TAYLOR.
Pacific C Mining Dec. 19, 1903. Ill.
Account of district with recent yield of $190,000,000
from placer and quartz mines. 3500 w.
The Ancient Channel of Gibsonville, Cal.
SAMUEL C. WIEL.
Mining and Scientific Press July 29, 1905.
Describes these channels and the old methods of mining,
the character of the gravels, and the
general conditions. Ills. 1800 w.
Ancient Gravel Channels of Calaveras County,
California.
Mining and Scientific Press Sept. 9, 1905.
From the 12th Annual Report of the State Mineralogist
of California. Map, with outline of the
processes by which these ancient goldbearing
channels were formed is given in the present
number. Serial. 1st part. 1700 w.
GoldMining in Siskiyou County, California.
145
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
C. GODFREY GUNTHER.
Mines and Minerals July, 1906.
An account of methods applied in old placer fields that
have worked over by the early prospectors.
2000 w.
The Auriferous Black Sands of California.
J.A. EDMAN.
Mining Reporter May 2, 1907.
Introductory remarks, with a statement of the origin,
distribution and probable values of the
heavy black sands on the Pacific Coast, from
the standpoint of the miner and
metallurgist. 2200 w.
Placer Dredging in California.
GEORGE L. HOLMES.
Mining World May 25, 1907. Ill.
Account of the development and success of this
industry,showing types of dredges used. 1600
w.
The Auriferous Black Sands of California.
J.A. EDMAN.
Engineering and Mining Journal June 1 1907.
A brief statement of their origin, distribution and
probable value. 2000 w.
The Ancient River Channels of California.
GEORGE W. KIMBLE.
Mining and Scientific Press June 8, 1907.
A short study of this interesting subject. 700 w.
The Auriferous Black Sands of California
DR. DAVID T. DAY.
Mines and Minerals July, 1907.
Gives the scope and results of the investigation by the
United States Geological Survey. 2700 w.
Black Sands of the Pacific Coast.
DR. DAVID T. DAY.
Journal of the Franklin Institute Aug. 1907.
An interesting account of the investigations made, with
information of methods of analysis and
concentration and the valuable byproducts
found. 4500 w.
The Black Sand Problem.
F. POWELL.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 10, 1907.
A suggestion from personal experience for an effective
method of collecting black sand. 1200 w.
The Beach Placers of the South Pacific Coast.
C.D. IRVINE.
Mining World Aug. 29, 1908.
145
146
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Describes the deposits, the difficulties in recovering
the gold,etc. 2000 w.
Placer Mining Industry on the Pacific Coast.
DENNIS H. STOVALL.
Mining World April 7 1909.
Illustrated description of the district and report of
output. 700 w.
Santa Clara River Placers.
CLAUDE E. JAMISON.
Mining and Scientific Press March 5, 1910.
Brief account of part of California, said to be the
district where gold was first discovered.
1500 w.
Trinity River Gravels, California.
J.S. DILLER.
Engineering and Mining Journal Sept. 9, 1911.
Abstract of a paper by J.S. DILLER in Bul 470B US
Geological Survey Sketch map and description
of auriferous gravels worked since 1850.
3000 w.
Economic Mining of LowGrade Gravel, California.
A.H. MARTIN.
Mining and Engineering World July 13, 1912.
Describes practice in mining lowgrade auriferous
gravel. 1500 w.
Black Sand of the Pacific Coast (75010).
HERBERT LANG.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 2, 1916.
Occurrence and treatment of these deposits. Commercial
aspects. 3000 w.
TwentyOne Years' Mining at Yellow Aster (76620).
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Feb. 10, 1917.
History of lowgrade gold property. Ills. 2500 w.
Gold Mining in California.
E. HIGGINS.
Mining and Metallurgy, vol. 6, no 220. Apr. 1925, pp.
192193.
Mining Costs; price of gold; new capital for
development; golddredging operations; it is
concluded that there appears little reason
to expect boom of any proportion.
Auriferous Placer Resources of California.
A. GIBSON.
Mining Congress Journal, vol 13, no. 6, June 1927, pp.
476479.
Virgin and undeveloped placer deposits of California of
amazing magnitude; California's prevolcanic
gravel channels which are definitely located
by means of magnetometric determinations;
147
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
development of placer resources on
scientific basis urged.
The Diver Becomes A Gold Miner.
F.M. BLANCHARD.
Engineering and Mining Journal., vol. 127, no. 16, Apr.
20, 1929, pp. 628629, 3 figs.
Method of reaching gold in swift river channel beds;
centrifugalpump suction hose is positioned
and held under water by diver with complete
equipment and air supply; pulp delivered on
board dredge from which diver operates, and
gold is amalgamated by standard methods;
operation in Middle Fork of Feather River
near Kanaka Bar, about 25 miles north of
Oroville, Calif.
Drift Mining at Vallecito.
G.J. YOUNG.
Engineering and Mining Journal, vol. 128, no. 10, Sept.
1929, pp. 394397, 3 figs.
Decline in gold dredging and lode mining; opportunities
in hydraulic placer mining and drift mining
of tertiary river channels; discussion of
types of old channel deposits; description
of work done near Six Mole Creek; gravel
treatment.
Recovery of Flour Gold from River Sand.
E.A. SPERRY.
Engineering and Mining Journal, vol. 128, no. 15, Oct.
12, 1929, pp. 581582, 3 figs.
Notes on works of experimental plants, in treatment of
sands of Cuba and Bear Rivers in California;
direct amalgamation or cyanidation was not
suited for purpose; description of
concentration on table with 60mesh screen
section, giving ratio 40 to 1 and product
carrying 20 per cent black sand; final
extraction of gold from black sand by
amalgamation, using small amount of
potassium cyanide to clean gold; actual cost
of operation was less than 3 cents per yd.
of sand handled.
Placers of Southern California.
R.J. SAMPSON.
Mining in California v 28 n 2 Apr 1932 p 24555.
List of areas in which work has been done in past, with
brief description of some of more important
developments now under way.
Elementary Placer Mining Methods and GoldSaving
Devices.
C. MCK. LAIZURE.
Mining in California v 28 n 2 Apr 1932 p 112204.
147
148
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Comment on revival in smallscale placer gold mining
operations in California during 1930; paper
prepared primarily for novice and those with
little experience or technical training; map
and notes of placer mining areas in
California; simple equipment; special
machines and processes; summary of mining
laws.
Auriferous Gravel Channels of Nevada County.
F.A. CRAMPTON.
Mining Journal (Phoenix Ariz) v 16 n 6 Aug 15 1932 p 57.
Reconnaissance notes, indicating existence of
favourable area.
Gold Mining and Milling Methods and Costs at Valecito
Western Drift Mine, Angels Camp, Calif.
D. STEFFA.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir. n 6612 Apr 1932 13
p supp plates.
Ancient stream bed; geology; prospecting and
development; cross cutting;breasting;
drainage, plant capacity 15 t per hr;
treatment involves washing; disintegrating,
screening and sluicing, with washing of
fines under 3/8 in. on Hungarian riffle and
screen table; 3.7 cu ft water required per
cu ft gravel; flow sheet; operating and cost
data.
Renewed Activity in California Gold Mining.
W.W. BRADLEY.
Mining and Metallurgy v 13 n 309 Sept 1932 p 38490.
Historical review of Californian gold mining, with
production statistics; placer mining in
1932; recent developments in lode mining;
outline map showing gold producing
districts.
Gold Deposits of Redding and Weaverville Quadrangles.
C. V. AVERILL.
Calif Division Mines Calif J of Mines and Geology v 29
n 12 JanApr 1933 p 373. Report on area in
Shasta and Trinity Counties; geography,
climate and industries; descriptions of gold
lode and placer mines and prospect, listed
in alphabetical order respectively.
Use of Diving Equipment in Gold Recovery.
E.F. HOUSER.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 16, n 19, Feb. 28,
1933, p. 5 and 13.
Application of deepsea diving practice to recovery of
gold from sand in deep hole in Tuolumme
river in California; duties of diver are to
direct suction hose in removal of minor
gravels and sand from hole and to place
149
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
powder charges to blast large rocks which
drag bucket of dredge cannot handle.
Placer Mining in San Gabriel Canyon.
S. ZADACH.
Mining Journal (Phoenix Ariz) v 17 n 3 June 30, 1933, p
3.
Notes on recent activity in mining camp worked about 60
yr ago.
Booming.
C. MCK. LAIZURE.
Calif Division of Mines Calif J of Mines and Geology v
29 n 34 JulyOct. 1933 p 36871.
Brief description of method of placer mining used in
California since 1849, and suitable where
there is only small flow of water available
and little capital; accumulation of water,
suddenly discharged, washes away surface
soil and lays bedrock bare; sketch and
description of one type of "flopgate" or
"selfshooter"; gate that opens automatically
when water reaches desired level in
reservoir.
Elementary Placer Mining in California and Notes on
Milling of Gold Ores.
C. MCK. LAIZURE, H.H. SYMONS, F. SANBORN and H.A.
FRANKE.
Calif J Mines and Geology v 30 n 2/3 Apr/July 1934 p
121289 supp plates.
Types of placer deposits; simple placer mining
equipment; pan rocker, dip box and sluice
box; special machines and processes; dry
washing; black sand treatment; marketing
gold, platinum and black sand; placer mining
areas in California; mining laws;
prospecting for vein deposits; sampling of
vein deposits; milling of gold ores; hand
sorting; amalgamation; arrastre construction
and operation; other reduction mills;
gravity concentration; flotation;
cyanidation. Bibliography.
California Gold Number.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 135 n 11 Nov 1934 p
481529.
Editorial introduction; California Gold Continues to
Enrich Nation; Production Statistics;
EightySix Years of Production in California;
Gold Dredging Receives New Impetus,
C.M.ROMANOWITZ and G.J. YOUNG; Hydraulic
Mining Again Interesting to Capital, J.D.
STEWART; Echo of Days of '49 Is Supplied By
Smallscale Placer Mining Operations, W.W.
149
150
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
BRADLEY; California's Goldbearing Tertiary
Channels.
Gold Drift Placer Mining.
J.F. DULING.
Western Miner and Prospector v 2 n 1 Feb 1935 p 49; see
also Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 18 n
21 Mar 30 1935 p 56.
Example of practical application of geophysics; outline
of geology of tertiary gravels; extracted
from U S Geological Survey Prof Paper n 73;
notes on reopening of old workings in
Eldorado County in 1933; geological study of
surface and underground working led to
belief that main tertiary river channel had
not been followed; geophysical survey by
electrical method aided in location of
ancient river channel.
Gold Placer Mining Revived at Lincoln.
J.B. HUTTL.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 136 n 9 Sept 1935 p
4403.
General description of activities in area within radius
of 10 mi of town about 29 mi northeast of
Sacramento, Calif; modified dredging
equipment; drag line scrapers and scowmounted washing plants; use of Diesel
engines and electric power.
Gold Mining Costs.
W.F. BOERICKE.
Canadian Mining Journal v 56 n 10 Oct 1935 p 4712.
Analysis of past and present costs in California,
showing effect of higher wages in offsetting
advantages gained through greater efficiency
in methods and equipment.
Washing Gravel Underground at Luck John.
G.A. COLLINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 137 n 10 Oct 1936 p
5134.
Mining property of 320 acres in Magalia district, Butte
County, Calif; gold bearing gravel channel
1000 ft. wide with slate bedrock and lava
capping; gravel is mined by room and pillar
system; gravel tight, but not cemented,
requires blasting, done with 5 ft holes and
20% powder; gravel shot down from face is
flushed into sluice; washed gravel carried
in Vflume to chute and trammed through lower
tunnel to waste dump.
PowerShovel Mining in Northern California.
C.V. AVERILL.
Mining Congress Journal v 22 n 11 Nov. 1936 p 43.
Notes on equipment and practice at various mines, using
3/4 cu yd up to 1 1/4 cu yd shovels,
151
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
operated by electric power, Diesel or gas
engines; also dragline power shovels for
placer mining.
Mineral Resources of El Dorado County.
C.A. LOGAN.
Calif J Mines and Geology v 34 n 3 July 1938 p 20680
map.
Historical outline, dating from reputed discovery of
gold by James W. Marshall, Jan 24, 1848, on
South Fork of American River; report deals
chiefly with gold placer and quartz mines
and prospects; notes on asbestos, chromite
copper, ems and ornamental stones, limestone
and lime.
California Gold Placering.
P. BLEWETT.
Mining and Contracting Review v 42 n 23 Dec 15, 1940 p
712.
Outline of geology of California placer deposits and of
old gold recovery methods; review of modern
methods and equipment, featuring "doodlebug"
or dragline type of dredge as used for
shallow diggings; cost data; hydraulic
placering legislation; bucket dredging;
resoiling.
Mines of Southern Mother Lode Region Tuolumne and
Mariposa Counties.
C.E. JULIHN and F.W. HORTON.
US Bureau of Mines Bul n 4241940 179 p. supp plates.
General review; history; production; Mother Lode rocks;
mineralization and structure; data for each
country, on production, lode gold mines;
placer mines; copper mines, and others, such
as chromite in Tuolumne County, and silver
and barite in Mariposa County.
Geology of Cat Camp Placer District.
J.F. DULING.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 25 n 11 Oct 30 1941 p
23.
Area in Calaveras County, Calif, about 2 mi wide and 5
mi long; outline of geological history and
formation of what is known as Tertiary river
system;Tertiary Calaveras River is
considered to have had stream channel
measuring about 2400 ft between rims;
transition to present stream system; notes
on gravel deposits; sampling data; mining
activity; only present operation is
conducted by R.M. WATSON on Sec 14 and 23
T.4.N. R 9 E.
Increased Gold Output of California's Placers.
151
152
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
P. BLEWETT.
Mining Journal (Phoenix Ariz) v 24 n 19 Feb 28 1941 p
23.
General descriptive account, with statistics, typical
data on cost of larger Yubatype dredge with
capacity 125 cu yd per hr; production from
California placers in 1939 was $22,261,575
from 162,335,000 cu yd. average recovery of
13.7c per cu yd; conclusions as to causes of
increased gold production since 1933.
Mineral Resources of Trinity County.
C.V. AVERILL.
Calif J Mines and Geology v 37 n 1 Jan 1941 p 889, map
in pocket.
County in northwestern part of California; general
information; geology; most important mineral
product is placer gold recovered by
dredging; some hydraulic mining; mercury
production in Altoona district; asbestos;
barite; chromium; coal; copper; gold quartz
mines, dredges and hydraulic operations;
granite; limestone and marble; mangenese;
mercury; mineral paint, mineral
water;platinum; production statistics; list
of mines and prospects.
Giants Work.
F.L. ELAM.
Explosives Engineer v 20 n 1 Jan 1942 p 158.
Illustrated notes on operations at Lost Camp mine near
Blue Canyon, Calif, featuring use of gelatin
explosive for blasting semicemented gravel;
8 holes 7 in. in diam are well drilled to
depth of about 65 ft. spaced according to
area to be mined; each hole is sprung with
50 lb of 40% Gelatin Extra and is then
loaded with 1200 lb of 20% gelatin dynamite.
Placer Mining for Gold in California.
Calif Dept Natural Resources Div Mines Bul n 135 377
p, maps in pocket.
Small scale placer mining methods, tools, and machines;
dragline and bucket line dredges; jigs for
gold dredges; treatment of black sand; drift
mining; geology of placer deposits;
prospecting and sampling; placer mines, by
counties; laws affecting placer mining.
Bibliography.
Marysville: Northern Diggings' Base.
B. THOMPSON.
Mining World v 11 n 1 Jan 1949 p 1920.
Narrative dating from exploration in 1828; gold
discovered on Yuba River in 1848; river
traffic, by canoe, scow and steamboats;
Marysville itself shipped out$16,000,000;
153
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
river boat Phoenix fitted out as dredge in
1850, but was not successful; since 1900,
Yuba gold dredging fields have yielded about
$100,000,000.
Mines and Mineral Resources of Yuba County.
J.C. O'BRIEN.
California J Mines and Geology v 48 n 2 Apr 1952 p 14379.
Yuba County embraces 408,320 acres; gold is chief
mineral; value of gold dredged from Yuba
River totals about 100 million
dollars;recorded production of platinum and
silver obtained during refining of gold; two
small manganese deposits are located in
northeastern corner of county; utilization
of sand and gravel; tabulated list of mines
and prospects.
153
154
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACERS
Location
U.S.
Colorado
Prospecting for Placer Gold.
ARTHUR LAKES.
Colliery Engineer Dec. 1895.
Description of Alma Placer, South Park, Colo. Method of
economically handling large quantities of
goldbearing soil in this typical placer is
treated in a detailed manner with sketches.
5000 w.
Geology of the FourMile Placer Mining Districts,
Colorado.
HERBERT C. HOOVER.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 22, 1897.
The geology, method of deposition, and origin of gravel
and the gold are discussed. 1900 w.
A Mountain Placer.
ARTHUR LAKES.
Mines and Minerals Dec., 1897.
Description of a placer located high in the mountains
of Colorado, near Breckenridge. Discusses
the points to be considered in making an
estimate of a placer's value, the natural
features that bear on its value, and veins
sometimes discovered in working a placer.
Ill. 2000 w.
Origin of Placer Gold in the Drains of the Divide.
A.M. WELLES.
Mining Reporter Dec. 22, 1898.
Presents the writer's explanation of the occurrence of
gold in Cherry Creek, its tributaries, and
other waterways in Colorado. 2200 w.
Observations on Some Prospects and Mines Around
Breckenridge, South Park, Colorado.
ARTHUR LAKES.
Mines and Minerals May, 1899.
Notes taken in a trip made to examine a gold placer
property. Ill. 1600 w.
Exploiting a New Placer Field.
ARTHUR LAKES.
Mines and Minerals Oct., 1900. Ill.
Some considerations taken account of, as illustrated at
Fairplay, near Alma. Colorado. Ill. 2200 w.
The Breckenridge, Colorado, Placer Problem.
WADE L. CROW.
Mining Reporter Jan. 9, 1902. Special number.
Abstracts from the Colorado School of Mines Bulletin
No. 3. A description of the deposits of the
low flats and bars, with a discussion of the
different methods of exploitation attempted.
155
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Ill. 3000 w.
Summit County Placers of Colorado.
PROF. ARTHUR LAKES.
Mines and Minerals Jan, 1903.
Illustrated description of great hydraulic works now
nearing completion near Breckenridge. 2500
w.
Hydraulic Mining on Banner Placer, Colorado.
KIRBY THOMAS.
Mining World Sept. 16, 1905.Describes arrangements
made to secure a sufficient supply of water
for hydraulic mining, and the methods of
working. Ills. 1700 w.
Breckenridge, Colorado.
JAMES W. NEILL.
Mining and Scientific Press Sept. 8, 1906.
An illustrated description of methods of placer mining.
1500 w.
The Breckenridge Gold Placers, Colorado.
ARTHUR LAKES.
Mining World Jan. 4, 1908.
Illustrates and describes this region. 1100 w.
Gulch Mining in Gilpin County.
ARTHUR J. HOSKINS
Mines and Minerals Nov., 1912.
History and description of some old Colorado placers
not being reworked by hand. Ills. 2000 w.
Placer Mining in Upper Valley of Grand River, Colo.
C. HARTLEY.
Mining and Engineering World Nov. 9, 1912.
Explains conditions and causes of failure. 1500 w.
Clear Creek and Gilpin County Notes.
STEPHEN L. GOODALE.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 2, 1913.
Reviews technically interesting districts. Some placer
mining still conducted. Ills. 2000 w.
History and Development of Placer Mining in Colorado.
J.A. THEOBALD.
Mountain States Mineral Age, vol. 1, no. 3, Aug. 1930,
pp. 46 and 20.
City of Denver founded by placer miners, June 24, 1858:
lodes bearing gold discovered; more
extensive placer fields discovered; methods
of operating placers; hydraulic giants
developed to handle low value sands;
development of dredges; various placer
machines developed.
155
156
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Gold Placer Mining in Colorado.
E.J. GARBELLA.
Military Engineer v 24 n 138 NovDec 1932 p 55860.
Historical review; recent activities, unfortunate
results of encouraging inexperienced people
to migrate from cities and from other
states, increasing problem of small
communities in caring for destitute; placer
mining machines.
Denver Mechanical Gold Pan.
J.N. CRONK.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz)v 16 n 15 Dec. 30, 1932,
p 67.
Machine driven by 3/4 hp gasoline engine and utilizing
same principle as handoperated gold pan.
Portable Washing Plants for Gold Placers.
R.A. MARTIN.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 16, n 17, Jan. 30,
1933, p. 6 and 8.
Descriptions of equipment supplied by dealer in Denver,
Colo.
Humphreys Gold Corporation Dredging Operations on Clear
Creek.
R.H. FORBES.
Mining Magazine v 23 n 5 May 1933 p 910.
Character of placer deposits on Clear Creek; features
of suction dredge with digging ladder, 2l ft
wide and 33 ft long, requiring draft of 20
in. of water with dredge fully loaded; use
of drag line equipment in digging bed rock
drainage ditch; equipment, costing about
$25,000 designed to handle about 2000 cu yd
material per 24 hr. at cost not more than
l5c per yd; first deposit to be worked has
shown values 30 to 80c per cu yd.
Gold Mining in Leadville.
J.M. KLEFF.
Mines Magazine v 24 n 1 Jan 1934 p 134 and 16.
Early activity at Leadville in gold placer mining;
search for gold veins led to discovery of
lead and silver deposits; outline of
geology; notes revival of placer and lode
gold mining from 1930 to date.
Clear Creek DryReclamation Placer Gold Mining.
C. SCHLOSS.
Mining Congress Journal v 21 n 9 Sept 1935 p 5860.
Description of equipment and mining methods of
Humphreys Gold Corp, modification of plant
and practice described by R.H. FORBES, from
Mines Mag, May 1933; 2 dragline scrapers
excavate and deliver gravel to hopper of
washing plant; power shovel moves boulders
and digs where draglines cannot; stacker for
157
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
tailings; pit is kept substantially dry.
Mining on Continental Divide; Alma's Output Chiefly
Gold. Both Lode and Placer.
H.L. TEDROW.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 136 n 8 Aug 1935 p
405.
Brief general description of district 100 mi southwest
of Denver, on east side of continental
divide; narrow veins worked selectively,
relatively much development required; small
blockedout reserves; local ores amenable to
flotation, carrying also silver, lead,
copper, and zinc.
Placer Operations of Humphreys Gold Corporation. Clear
Creek, Colo..
E.D. GARDNER and J.R. GUITERAS.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 6961 Oct 1937 16
p.
History from 1859; successful operations conducted in
1936, 2 draglines and power shovel, about
3000 cu yd daily; gravel screened in
portable washing plant; trommel oversize
discarded, and under-size pumped to gold
saving plant; gold caught in riffles in
sluice boxes; total cost about 20c /cu yd.
Placer Mining North of Craig, Colorado.
Mines Magazine v 29 n 11 Nov 1939 p 558.
Brief illustrated item; gold is microscopic in size and
difficult to save; one operator is said to
be saving $5.00 per cu yd; caterpillar
Diesel tractor used to operate scraper; gold
saving equipment consists of mixing,
screening, washing, jigging and amalgamating
machinery operated as one unit.
CraigBaggs Gold Placer Region, Moffat County, Colorado
Geologic and Economic Aspects.
H.W.C. PROMMEL.
Mines Magazine v 32 n 5 June 1942 p 2825.
Region includes about 900 to 1000 sq mi and is covered
by "Craig" U.S. Geological Survey
topographic sheet; boom followed discovery
of gold in 1892, but soon subsided; gold
production data; dredging activities;
physiography; areal geology and structure;
sand and gravel deposits; water resources;
economic aspects; region offers
possibilities for placer operations of large
scale and merits attention.
Some unique DumpTruck Placers in Colorado.
H.W.C. PROMMEL.
157
158
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Engineering and Mining Journal v 143 n 1 Jan 1942, p.
489.
Notes on operations of small operators in vicinity of
Alma and Fairplay, in Park County, Colo; at
several mines; small steamshovel or Diesel
power shovel loads gravel into truck, which
transports it to washing plant; some of
latter use revolving trommel screen instead
of inclined stationary screen.
Colorado Placer Mining.
H.W.C. PROMMEL.
Mining Congress Journal v 31 n 12 Dec 1945 p 2431.
Statistical and descriptive review of State's placer
mining industry and its future.
Cooley's Tarryall Placer.
Mining World v 10 n 7 June 1948 p 168.
Operation near Como, Colo. has 3 1/2 cu yd dragline
bucket feeding 200 cu yd per hr washing
plant; gravel deposit varies from 8 to 30 ft
in depth; washing plant is 40 by 56 by 4 ft.
on seven pontoons.
Gold Placers and Their Geologic Environment in
Northwestern Park County, Colorado.
Q.D. SINGLEWALD.
US Geological Survey Buln 955D 1950 p 10372.
Placer district covers 250 sq mi; metamorphic,
sedimentary and igneous rocks; stratigraphy;
structure; lode deposits from which placer
gold could be derived; physiography of
mountain province; characteristics of
glacier deposits; production and fineness of
gold; distribution of placers contained in
moraines.
159
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACERS
Location
U.S.
Georgia
Placer Mining for Gold Near Dahlonega, Ga.
G. PEYTON.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 141 n 4 Apr 1940 p 39.
Mining and washing equipment and practice of Ferey
Mining Co. reworking old deposits along
Dukes Creek for more than 3 yr; dragline
excavator with 1 cu yd bucket; portable
washing plant; 300 to 500 cu yd gravel
handled in 10 hr; average gold content is
25c per cu yd; overburden is stripped and
stacked, to one side of 70 by 90 ft working
pit; overburden is 3 to 6 ft and gravel
depth is similar; washed gravel is dumped
back and top soil replaced.
159
160
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACERS
Location
U.S.
Idaho
Steam Shovel and Derrick Placer Mining in Idaho.
JOHN B. HASTINGS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 21, 1895.
Illustrated description. 800 w.
The American Hill Placer mine, Idaho.
EDMUND JUESSEN.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 27, 1897.
Illustration, with description of methods of working.
800 w.
Snake River Gold Fields of Idaho.
DON MAGUIRE.
Mines and Minerals Sept., 1899.
Describes the river and its tributaries, discusses the
sources of the very fine gold and the
methods of obtaining it. 4000 w.
The Placer Fields of Custer County, Idaho.
C.C. CLAWSON.
Engineering and Mining Journal April 14, 1900.
History of the work in this locality, and the recent
revival of mining. 1700 w.
In Boise Basin, Idaho.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 25, 1904.
Illustrated description of gold dredging, hydraulic
mining and of gold mines in this district.
1500 w.
Boise Basin, Idaho.
W.A. SCOTT.
Mining and Scientific Press July 16, 1910.
Describes the locality and gives an account of placer
mining in the past and present. 2000 w.
Idaho Placer Operations (75927).
JULIUS HORNBEIN.
Engineering and Mining Journall Jan. 13, 1917.
Dredging and hydraulicking operations. Ills. 1200 w.
Geology and Gold Resources of Boise Basin, Boise
County, Idaho.
S.M. BALLARD.
Idaho Bureau Mines and Geology Bul., no. 9, Dec.1924,
100 pp. 28 figs. partly on supp. plates.
Early history; geography; topography; geology; gold
placer mining operations; economic geology;
early development of lode deposits; mines
and prospects.
161
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
New Methods Recover Salmon River Gold.
Mining Truth, vol. 13, no. 14, Sept. 1, 1928, pp. 910
and 32, 3 figs.
Historical note of early placer mining activity on
lower Salmon River in western Idaho;
estimated that miners recovered only 34 per
cent of gold contained in gravel and sands;
description of project to recover fine gold
by treatment of sands on concentrating
tables and chemical treatment of black sands
to render gold amenable to amalgamation.
Elementary Methods of Placer Mining.
W.W. STALEY.
Univ. Idaho Bureau of Mines and Geology Pamphlet no.
37, May 1931, 20 pp. 10 figs. on supp.
plats.
History of alluvial mining; geology of alluvial
deposits; sampling of placer deposits;
simpler mining methods; and apparatus;
recovery of gold from sands; placer mining
in Idaho; list of mining districts and of
placer mining districts of Idaho; State
Mining laws; identification of minerals
common in gold placer deposits.
Bibliography.
Fine Gold and Platinum of Snake River, Idaho.
T.H. HITE.
Economic Geology v 28 n 3 and 7 May 1933 p 25665 and
Nov p. 68691.
Deposits of fine gold occur over practically entire
length of Snake River; history of placer
operations; deposits are of bench and river
bar types; gold particles are usually so
fine that it takes 5000 colors to weight 1
cent in value; value estimates range from 5
cents to $2.50 per cu yd. from 50 to 90 per
cent recoverable; occurrence of platinum and
associated metals. Bibliography.
GoldBearing Gravel of Nezperce National Forest. Idaho
County, Idaho.
J.C. REED.
Idaho Bureau of Mines and Geology Pamphlet n 40 June
1934 26 p supp plates. Clearwater Mountains
have yielded nearly $50,000,000 in placer
gold; outlook favourable, for largescale
operation of lowgrade deposits; deposits of
highlevel and recentvalley type, latter
ordinarily much smaller but richer; about 23
properties in Elk City, Tenmile, and Castle
Creek districts are briefly described;
Florence, Dixie and other districts in
general area are not included in report.
161
162
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Placer Operation, Boise Basin, Idaho.
C.W. HARKINSON.
Mines Magazine v 24 n 2 Feb 1934 p 15 and 26.
Notes on work conducted by Big Creek Syndicate, since
summer, of 1933; gravel is excavated with
dragline excavators; details of washing
plant; entire plant is electrically
operated; results indicate that cost of
handling material will be about 9c per cu
yd.
Prospector Claims Source of Coarse Gold Along Salmon Is
In Ancient Gravel Deposit.
J.F. VAN BROCKLIN.
Northwest Mining v 3 n 2 Feb 4 1937 p 4.
Brief news item, giving views of credited author as to
nature and origin of placer gold found along
Salmon River in Idaho, between Short Bar and
point below White Bird; gold from ancient
river channel deposit on Rattlesnake Creek
is of same type.
Reconnaissance of Placer Mining Districts in Idaho
County Idaho.
S.H. LORAIN and O.H. METZGER.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 7023 June 1938 93
p. supp plates.
Description of principal known commercial and near
commercial deposits of gold bearing gravel
and principal placer mining operations;
location; history; production; topography;
climate and vegetation; transportation;
power; fuel; lumber, labour and wages;
general geology; nearly all dredging
deposits of proved value are worked out or
are in hands of strong operating companies.
Reconnaissance of Placer Mining in Boise County, Idaho.
O.H. METZGER.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 7028 34 p.
Historical notes; gold production statistics; outline
of available placer deposits in Boise[
County; description of current practices;
recovery costs of principal producers.
Reconnaissance of PlacerMining Districts in Lemht
County, Idaho.
S.H. LORAIN and O.H. METZGER.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 7082 June 1939 8l
p supp plates.
History; production; description of region; geology;
vein sources are associated with granite;
details of deposits and operations, by
districts; bucket line dredging; dragline
plants; hydraulicking; shovelling,ground
sluicing, and small scale hydraulic
163
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
operations.
Mining Activity in North Fork of Clearwater River Area.
W.W. STALEY.
Idaho Bur Mines and Geological Pamphlet n 54 Sept 1940
6 p.map.
Working season is usually from April to November; cost
of living for 2 men about $16 to $18 per mo;
gravel about 12 to 15ft deep; gold particles
settle rapidly and are easily saved; some
small nuggets; for hand operations; gravel
should run about 40c per cy yd to give wages
of $1.50 to $2 per day; lease royalties
usually about 10% of gross recovery;
operating methods; discussion of areas; vein
mine activity.
Faulting in Western Idaho and its Relation to High
Placer Deposits.
S.R. CAPPS.
Idaho Bur Mines and Geology Pamphlet n 56 June 1941 20
p.
Faults have prevailing north or northwest trend, show
displacement of few hundred to 3500 ft and
are normal faults; fourteen of these faults
are described in some detail; many of high
placer areas of region lie in north trending
faulted valleys; nine distinct types of gold
placer deposits have been distinguished, and
each of six placer districts discussed
contains from three to seven types of
deposits.
Fine Gold of Snake River and Lower Salmon River. Idaho.
W.W. STALEY.
Idaho Bureau of Mines and Geology Pamphlet n 72 June
1945 10 p. supp map.
Historical outline of production, extent of deposits
and areas of past production; mining methods
employed, and related problems; treatment
and recovery operations; recommended
procedure. Bibliography.
Distribution of Heavy Alluvial Minerals In Idaho.
W.W. STALEY.
Idaho Bureau of Mines and Geology Mineral Resources
Report n 5 Mar 1948 12 p.
Heavy sands or black sands is term commonly applied to
heavy dark minerals; which usually occur
with gold in placer deposits; there is no
established market for products derived from
Idaho black sands; main difficulty is
economic;transportation to consumers in east
prohibits any attempt at making shipment;
163
164
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
monazite; zircon; titaniumbearing
minerals;distribution of heavy sands in
Idaho; assay results; estimate of resources
available.
GoldBearing Gravels Near Murray, Idaho.
W. DORT JR.
Idaho Bureau of Mines and Geology Pamphlet n 116 Aug
1958 21 p.
Geomorphology as applied to origin of river valleys and
intermontane basins, essential to
understanding of factors which controlled
deposition and concentration of valuable
minerals in placer sands and gravels of
northern and central Idaho; placer
operations and future outlook.
165
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
U.S.
Montana
The Cedar Creek Placers, Montana.
FRED D. SMITH.
Engineering and Mining Journal Feb. 4, 1899.
The location and working of these placers. Ill. 1200 w.
A LowGrade Placer Proposition in Montana.
FRED D. SMITH.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 11, 1899.
An illustrated account of placer being worked, which
yields less than 2c. to the yard. 800 w.
The Bear Gulch Placers, Montana.
FRED D. SMITH.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 23, 1899.
Brief account of recent working of this field. Ill. 600
w.
Placer Mining Operations in Western Montana.
J.P. ROWE.
Mining World April 29, 1911.
Reports concerning various properties. 2000 w.
Gold Placer Deposits of Northwest Montana.
F.C. GILBERT.
Mining Review v 34 n 16 Apr 19, 1932 p. 56; see also
Mining Journal (Phoenix Ariz)v 16 n 1 May 30
1932 p 56.
Notes on region adjacent to Bitter Root mountains;
geology similar to Coeur d'Alene district of
Idaho; stream gravels were probably
thoroughly prospected by early miners; bench
gravels of section are believed to offer
excellent opportunities.
Placer and Lode Gold Mining in Montana.
C.J. TRAUERMAN.
Mining Review v 34 n 45 Nov 8, 1932 p 58.
Notes on recent and pending developments.
Placer Mining in Montana.
O.A. DINGMAN.
Mines Magazine v 24 n 1 Jan 1934 p 178.
Notes on dredge construction in 3 localities; operation
of drag line shovel on Prickly Pear Creek,
near East Helena; tractor shovel and
dragline shovel work in Washington Gulch;
underground placer mining in Emigrant Gulch,
south of Livingston; ground sluicing near
Helmville; comment on activity in various
localities.
Dragline and Stacker Scow.
165
166
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Engineering and Mining Journal v 135 n 8 Aug 1934 p
365.
Brief item on equipment handling 1500 cu yd per 24 hr
day in Prickly Pear Creek, near East Helena,
Mont; Diesel engine power on dragline;
purchased electric power on stacker.
Dragline Installation for Recovering Gold at Virginia
City, Mont..
A.V. CORRY.
Mining and Metallurgy v 17 n 358 Oct 1936 p 46770.
Notes on Alder Gulch; gold discovered 1863; produced
nearly $50,000,000 up to 1904; dredge
operations since 1896; dragline practice,
developed in Colorado in 1932, applied in
Montana in 1935; installations with 2 type
K48 2 1/2 cu yd draglines with 50 ft. booms
and 1 3/4 cu yd shovel to reach gravel
inaccessible to dragline; operating
procedure; power requirements; investment
and cost data; operating results.
Prickly Pear Creek Dredging Project.
A. STROJAN, JR.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz.) v 22 n 13 Nov 30 1938 p
7 and 412.
Features of plant and dredging practice in Jefferson
County, Montana; dredge in electrically
operated, of screen stacker type, with
sectionalized pontoon construction, with
digging capacity of 34 ft below water level;
character of deposit; description of dredge
flow sheet, first in Montana to use jigs
instead of riffles.
Gold Placers of Montana.
C.J. LYDEN.
Montana, Bureau of Mines and Geology Memoir n 26 1948
152 p.
Survey of known placer areas of Montana and also of
lode mines that could have produced placer
gold; no recommendation in this report
should be taken to mean that a property does
contain gold that can be recovered at
profit, but merely that author believes that
systematic and thorough testing of that land
is warranted; types of placer deposits;
methods of mining; description by counties.
Bibliography.
Gold Placer Deposits of Pioneer District Montana.
J.T. PARDEE.
US Geological Survey Bul n 978C 1951 p 6999, map in
pocket.
Character and extent of deposits; mountainous part of
district is built up by Tertiary intrusive
rocks and by Quaternary glacial drift and
167
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
alluvium; geologic sequence of benchlands is
represented by preTertiary rocks, Tertiary
volcanic rocks and lake beds, late Tertiary
and Quaternary gravel; description of gold
placer deposits; production and reserves;
illustrations.
167
168
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
U.S.
Nevada
A Tertiary River Channel Near Carson City, Nevada.
JOHN A. REID.
Mining and Scientific Press April 18, 1908.
Illustrated description of a large and well defined
channel on the east slope of the Sierra
Nevada Mts., giving such facts about it as
appertain to the mining industry. 2500 w.
Notes on Manhattan Placers. Nye County, Nev.
CHARLES COLEOCK JONES.
Engineering and Mining Journal July 17, 1909.
Notes on the formation, ore deposits and related
subjects. Ills. 2000 w.
The Placers of the Johnnie District, Nevada.
CHARLES LABBE.
Engineering and Mining Journal., vol. 112, no. 23, Dec.
3, 1921, pp. 895896, 1 fig.
Area recently discovered covers ten square miles;
Mexican air jig being used to treat gravel,
with good results; source of gold near by.
Portable Washing Plant
J.B. HUTTL.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 135 n 4 Apr 1934 p
173.
Description of gravel treating plant of Apex Mining Co.
at Yerington, Nev; plant is caterpillar
mounted, and is known as Massco "dry land
dredge" treatment plant.
Electricity Features Modern Nevada Placer Mining
Operation.
Mines Magazine v 31 n 5 May 1941 p 205.
Operations at Dayton, Nev; recovery plant fed by
walking dragline, scoop cap. of 19 tons;
plant 15,000 cu yd daily; rec. plant floats
on artificial pond; plant equipped with 24
Westinghouse motors and gear motors; total
555 hp; material below 1/2 in. is jigged;
conveyor belt stacker dumps waste
gravel/sand outside pond; concentrates
amalgamated, w/ tails ground in ball mill
and amalgamated.
Nevada Desert Placer Mining.
A.N. CLARK.
Mining World v 9 n 8 July 1947 p 2730.
Potentialities of "las bajadas" as sources of new
wealth; descriptive definition of bajada
type of deposit; operations of L.S. FISH and
associates, in vicinity of Leonard Creek, in
southern part of Pine Forest Range in
Humboldt County, about 100 mi NW of
169
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Winnemucca; other desert placer projects.
Round Mountain Gold.
Mining World v 12 n 7 June 1950 p 2631.
Progress of new Round Mountain Dredging Corp in Nevada;
Round Mn mineralized by Tertiary rhyolites
intruding earlier Tertiary lake beds; vein
systems, occurring over great area with low
grade but fairly consistent mineralization,
make up "porphyry gold orebody"; ratio of
recoverable gold to silver about two to one;
mill now handling 2/3s of 17,000ton
capacity; desc'pn. of mining system.
169
170
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACERS
Location
U.S.
New Mexico
Placer Deposits in New Mexico.
CECIL A. DEANE.
Mining Industry and Review Feb. 13, 1896.
The article describes the way in which the gold occurs
in the several districts.
2700 w.
Wonderful Dry Placers.
A.W. GIFFORD.
Ores and Metals Oct., 1899.
Reports placers of the Jarilla Mountains, New Mexico,
yield coarse gold worth $100 a yard. 1200 w.
Notes on a Trip to White Oaks, New Mexico.
E. PERCY SMITH and LEON DOMINIAN.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 19, 1904.
Illustrated description of this mining camp,with notes
on its development and production. Gold
placers and veins. 2000 w.
Placers of Sante Fé County, New Mexico.
FAYETTE A. JONES.
Mining World Oct. 6, 1906.
Briefly reviews the history of this region. 1000 w.
New Mexico Gold Gravels.
J.A. CARRUTH.
Mines and Minerals Sept., 1910.
Describes deposits of goldbearing material of great
depth and extent. Ills.
3000 w.
Gold Mining In Desert.
E.R. HARRINGTON.
Mines Magazine v 29 n 10 Oct 1939 p 5089 and 512.
Historical outline, recent activity near Golden, New
Mexico: flat pay streaks, called "mantas"
occur irregularly at varying depths in
gravel and detritus from disintegrated zones
of Mesozoic and sediments intruded by masses
of diorite and monzonite porphyry; practice
of miners in prospecting of mantas, digging
and hoisting gravel by hand labour, and
recovering small amounts of gold with hand
operated or gasoline powered dry washers.
Gold Mining and Gold Deposits in New Mexico.
E.H. WELLS and T.P. WOOTTON.
New Mexico State School Mines Bureau of Mines and
Mineral Resources Cir n 5 Apr 1940 23 p.
Status of gold, with value fixed at $35 per
ounce; some deposits, formerly valueless,
can now be worked at profit; mining and
treatment of placer material; mining and
171
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
milling of gold ores; history of gold mining
in New Mexico; production; general features
of placer and lode deposits; areas
favourable for new discoveries; notes on
mining districts, by counties. Bibliography.
Mobile Dry Placer Plant,.
T.E. SMITH.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 141 n 6 June 1940 p.
50.
Plant at Old Placers, in Santa Fe County, N. Mex.
consists of 180 hp Diesel electric set from
which ac current is transmitted at 440 v
through 600 ft rubber covered
cable,caterpillar bulldozer, dragline
excavator, screening plant, and dry
amalgamator; all units are mounted on
trucks; about 1000 cu yd gravel treated per
3 shift day, with 5 men on each shift;
gravel bed is 12 to 20 ft thick; yield is
not stated.
171
172
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
U.S.
North Carolina
The Placer Mining Industry of North Carolina,.
R. KEMP WELCH.
Mining World May 22, 1909.
Reviews the history of the industry and gives
information in regard to mines now being
worked. Ills. 2500 w.
Gold and Silver Mining in Chili, North Carolina
(76668).
A.S. WHELER and S.Y. LI.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 10, 1917.
Methods of mining and metallurgy. Ills. 5000 w.
Wooden Rocker Recovers Fine Gold.
T.W. SWOYER.
Engineering and Mining Journal, v 134, n 1, Jan. 1933,
p. 16.
Details of twinunit goldrecovery apparatus used on
property of Black Ankle Mining Corp. at
Seagrove, NC.
173
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
U.S.
Oregon
The Auriferous Gravels of the Upper Columbia River.
FRANK L. NASON.
Engineering and Mining Journal March 21, 1896.
Describes the actual conditions under which the gold
occurs and the method of working the placers
and prospecting. 2400 w.
The Columbia Placer, Oregon.
JAMES W. ABBOTT.
Engineering and Mining Journal April 9, 1898.
Describes the manner of working. 2000 w.
Gold in Snake River Gravel Bars.
WILLIAM H. WASHBURN.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 29, 1900.
Reports investigations made from a point about 20 miles
below Huntington, Ore. to 50 miles above
Ontario. 1000 w.
Placer Mining in Southern Oregon.
DENNIS M. STAVEL.
Mining Reporter Sept. 26, 1901.
An account of the mining industry in this region and
the working of the placers. Ill. 1600 w.
Placer Mining in Josephine County, Oregon.
A.B. COUSINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 1, 1902.
Describes the conditions and gives an account of what
has been done since the discovery of gold in
1851 in this district. Ill. 1000 w.
Hydraulic Mining in Southern Oregon.
A.B. COUSIN.
Pacific C Mining May 23, 1903.
A brief account of its history and possibilities. Ill.
2300 w.
Placer Mining in Southern Oregon.
DENNIS H. STOVALL.
Mining and Scientific Press Aug. 15, 1903.
An illustrated account of the hydraulic mines and their
methods. 1000 w.
Hydraulic Mining in Southern Oregon.
DENNIS H. STOVALL.
Mining and Scientific Press Oct. 3, 1903.
An illustrated account of placer mining and the
extensive placer field of this region. 1300
w.
173
174
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
The Distribution of Placer Gold in Oregon.
C.W. WASHBURNE.
Mining and Scientific Press April 30, 1904.
Abstracted from the Bulletin Univ. of Oregon.
Information concerning this region. 1100 w.
Placer Mining in Oregon.
A.E. KELLOGG.
Engineering and Mining Journal, vol 108, no. 3, July
19, 1919. pp. 9091, 1 fig.
Geology of Waldo district.
Llano De Oro Placers, Waldo District, Oregon,.
A.E. KELLOGG.
Mining Journal, vol. 7, no. 4, July 15, 1928, pp. 911,
4 figs.
Describes gold placer mine in southwestern Oregon, with
nearly 5000 acres of auriferous gravels and
equipped with ditches providing large water
supply; history; geology; gravels; present
operations, electric power; shops;
laboratory; sawmill, etc.
Gravitational and Centrifugal Gold Saver.
D.D. BAKER.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz.) v. 16, n 23, Apr. 30,
1933, p. 5.
Features of device successfully used for recovery of
placer gold on Rogue River in Southern
Oregon and in other placer operations in
Pacific northwest.
Beach Placers of Oregon Coast.
J.T. PARDEE.
US Geological Survey Cir n 8 1934 41 p. supp plates.
Gold and platinum bearing deposits were discovered on
present beaches in 1852 and on ancient
elevated beaches 18 to 20 yrs later; after
most profitable stretches had been worked;
mining activity decreased; activity since
July 1931; climate, vegetation and
accessibility; topography; development of
coast line; shorezone formation; general
description of deposits; incomplete
production statistics of gold and platinum;
mining conditions; notes on individual
mines.
Placer Mining on Rouge River. Oregon, in its Relation
to Fish and Fishing in that Stream.
H.B. WARD.
Oregon State Dept Geology and Mineral Industries Bul n
10 Sept 1938 31 p; see also author's summary
in Science v 88 n 2289 Nov 11 1938 p 4413.
Report one cological study, in view of controversy
between recreational interests and mine
operators; description of Rouge River; fish
and fishing; muddy water; changes in river
175
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
affecting fish life; survey of river system
at low and high water; placer mining and
welfare of fish; turbidity measurements;
unfavourable effect of silt on spawning
grounds; quantity of fish food apparently
not affected unfavourably. Appendices:
Turbidity. A.M. SWARTLEY; Tolerance on young
fish for suspended sediment, L.E. GRIFFIN.
Bibliography.
Oregon's Gold Placers.
Oregon State Dept Geology and Mineral Industries
Miscellaneous Paper n 5 1954 14 p. 3 plates.
Placer activities, placer areas, beach placers of
Oregon coast, and riverterrace placers;
description of southeastern and northeastern
placer mining areas; prospecting with gold
pan; maps. Bibliography.
175
176
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
U.S.
South Dakota
Black Hills Mineral Atlas, South Dakota,
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 7688 pt 1 July
1954 133 p. 4 supp plates. Data available on
mines and mineral deposits in Black Hills
that have been explored, developed, mined,
or located; geology of areas;data on
production of gold, silver, base metals;
iron ore, pegmatite minerals;, tungsten,
bentonite, cement, and clay products.
177
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
U.S.
Utah
Cause of Fine Gold in San Juan River, Utah.
A. LAKES.
Mining Reporter Oct. 3, 1907.
Explains the probable origin of the gold and the cause
of its extreme fineness. 900 w.
Geology and Economics of Rio San Juan, Utah.
ARTHUR LAKES.
Mining World May 9, 1908.
The peculiar structure is described, and a theory of
the origin of the placer gold is given. 1000
w.
Utah's Potentially Great Gold Placer Mining Fields.
H.A. STRAUSS.
Salt Lake Mining Review, vol. 25, no. 15, Nov. 15,
1923, pp. 1718.
Utah contains important placer deposits of precious
metals; and rare earths; classification of
placers; placer gold sources.
177
178
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
U.S.
Washington
Effect of Placers on Northwest History.
F.A. THOMSON.
Mining Truth, no 23, Jan. 17, 1929, pp. 7 and 14; see
also Min. Rev., vol. 30, no. 24, Mar. 30,
1929, pp. 911.
Gold discovery at Fort Colville, Wash., resulted in
populating area previously unexplored; early
trappers knew of existence of minerals, but
kept quiet lest influx of settlers drive
game away; roaming miners spread news and
developing followed; point emphasized in
that publicity regarding gold discoveries
stimulates emigration. Read before Northwest
Sci. Soc.
Hand Methods of Placer Mining and Placer Mining
Districts of Washington and Oregon.
G.E. INGERSOLL.
State College Wash Eng Experiment Station Monthly Bul
n 40 v 14 n 10 Mar 1932 45 p supp plates.
Physical properties of gold; origin of placer deposits;
characteristics of placer gravels;
prospecting placer deposits; placer mining
methods; cleaning up; catching fine
gold;amalgamation; maps and list of placer
mining districts of Washington and Oregon;
mining laws; list of prospector's equipment.
Bibliography.
179
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
U.S.
Wyoming
The Douglas Creek Placers, Albany County, Wyoming.
E.P. SNOW.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 7, 1895.
Description with map and halftone illustrations. 2000
w.
Gold and Tin in the Northwestern Black Hills.
BENJAMIN SADTLER.
Mining World April 28, 1906.
Report of the gold and tin bearing district in Crook
County,Wyoming and Lawrence County, South
Dakota. The gold veins carry no tin, nor the
tin veins any gold, but the placer regions
carry both. The geology and development are
described. Ills. 3500 w.
Atlantic City, South Pass Gold Mining District.
A.B. BARTLETT and J.J. RUNNER.
State of Wyoming, Geologist's Office Bul., no. 20,
July 15, 1926, 23 pp. 1 fig. District is
situated in southcentral part of Fremont
County in central Wyoming; history of
development; account of Carissa mine;
placers; ores and treatment and laboratory
tests; fuel and power; notes on goldquartz
veins of Atlantic City South Pass District;
probable extent of gold lodes.
Placer Mining.
B. BEILER, D. TOWNSEND, W.C. DRISKILL, C.W. RAY, R.
LARSON, C. EVANS, C.C. O'HARRA.
Black Hills Engineer v 19 n 4 Nov. 1931 p 30961.
Placer Mining on French Creek. B. BEILER; Placer
Operations Near Sheridan, D. TOWNSEND;
Placer Mining in Tinton District by Driskill
Company, W.C. DRISKILL and C.W. RAY; Placer
Mining on Castle Creek, R. LARSON; Placer
Mining on Rapid Creek, C. EVANS; Early
Placer Gold Mining in Black Hill, C.C.
O'HARRA; Gold Nuggets.
Bajada Placers of Arid Southwest.
B.N. WEBBER.
American Institute of Mining and Metallurgical
Engineers Trans (Mining Geology) v 115 mtgs
Feb. 203 1933, Feb.1922 1934, and Feb. 1821
1935. p. 37891 (discussion) 3912; see also
Am Inst Mining and Met Engrs Tech Pub n 588
mtg Feb 1935, 16 p.
"Bajada placer" is proposed as designation for type of
deposit accumulating on hill slope, distinct
from both stream and eluvial deposits; note
on climate and topography of Sonoran Desert;
179
180
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
erosion, transportation and deposition
factors; tendency is for gold to remain
erratically distributed through detritus,
rather than concentration on bedrock as in
running water; conditions affected
prospecting and development. Bibliography.
PlacerMining Methods of E.T. Fisher Co., Atlantic City,
Wyo..
C.L. ROSS and E.D. GARDNER.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 6846 June 1935 10
p supp plates.
Mine on Rock Creek in South Pass mining district; about
2800 cu yds gravel is dug daily by gasolinedriven dragline shovel with 1 1/4 yd bucket
and washed in movable plant with golddredge
trommel and standard dredge sluice boxes;
total cost is about 12 c per cu yd; details
of plant construction; operating practice
and costs.
Gold Mining in Western United States.
L.A. PALMER.
Mining Journal (Lond) v 204 n 5402 Mar. 4, 1939 p 2078.
General economic statistical and descriptive review;
placer and lode gold production; outlook for
revaluation of gold.
181
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Location
U.S.S.R.
The Gold Placers of Siberia.
E.D. LEVAT.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 23, 1897.
Characteristics of the gold formations described, with
conjecture as to their probable origin. 1500
w.
Gold Stealing in the Siberian Placers.
E.D. LEVAT.
Engineering and Mining Journal Feb. 6, 1897.
An account of the habits of theft and the system of
work. 700 w.
Gold Mining in Siberia.
RUSSELL L. DUNN.
Mining and Scientific Press April 3, 1897.
Gives conclusions from a study of Siberian mines and
mining conditions on the ground, explaining
methods of prospecting, exploration, etc.
Ill. 3000 w.
Gold Gravel Washing in Eastern Siberia.
E.D. LEVAT.
Engineering and Mining Journal April 3, 1897.
Illustrates and describes the sluices in the placers
worked by the Zeya Company. 800 w.
Gold Gravel Washing in Eastern Siberia.
E.D. LEVAT.
Australian Mining Standard June 3, 1897.
Illustrates and describes the sluices in the placers
worked by the Zeya Company. 900 w.
Working Frozen Alluvial Deposits in Siberia.
E.D. LEVAT.
Engineering and Mining Journal June 12, 1897.
Describes the special methods of working where the
ground is always frozen.
Ill. 900 w.
The Siberian Railway and the Siberian Gold Districts
(Die Sibirische Elsenbahn and die GoldVorkommen Siberians).
Glückauf April 30, 1898.
A discussion of the probable effects of the access by
railway upon the gold regions of Siberia,
with data as to locations and past output.
2000 w.
The Auriferous Deposits of Siberia.
RÉNÉ DE BATZ.
181
182
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Transactions of the American Institute of Mining
Engineers Aug., 1898.
Gives some of the reasons for the slow development of
these gold fields,describes the general
geology of the Siberian placers, the
economic conditions, methods of working,
etc. Map. 5000 w.
The Gold Placers of the Eastern Oural Mountains,
Russia.
H.B.C. NITZE.
Engineering and Mining Journal Sept. 10, 1898.
A short outline of the geology, character of the beds
and method of working. Ill. 1200 w.
Placer Mining in the Southern Urals.
CHARLES TAPPAN.
Engineering and Mining Journal July 14, 1900. Serial.
An account of the results of an examination of part of
the South Ural Placer District.
The Gold Mining Industry of Siberia.
H.L. GEISSEL.
Mining and Metallurgy May 1, 1901.
Describes the great gold mining regions, and the
machinery and tools in general use. 2000 w.
The Gold Mines of Siberia.
CHESTER WELLS PURINGTON.
Engineering Magazine Sept. 1901.
Illustrated description of the primitive methods used
in what promises to be an exceedingly rich
region. 2400 w.
The Gold Mining Districts of Central Siberia.
LEWIS BLANCHARD BROWN.
Transaction of the American Institute of Mining
Engineers Oct. 1903.
Describes the southcentral part of Siberia, with
special reference to its geology and mineral
deposits. Map. 10,300 w.
Gold Placers in Bokhara.
E.D. LEVAT.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 24, 1903.
Abstract from "Annales des Mines." Describes the rich
gold deposits of Central Asia. 2200 w.
Gold Mining in Siberia.
J.H. CURLE, in the London "Economist."
Engineering and Mining Journal Sept. 15, 1904.
Information concerning these mines, and a discussion of
racial, political and economic reasons why
the writer considers them unfavourable for
foreign investments. 1500 w.
Placer Mining in Siberia. Abstract translation from
"l'Industrie Aurifere."
183
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
M.D. LEVAT.
Mining World Aug. 26, 1905.
Describes some of the difficulties,the methods of work
and the prospecting. 1500 w.
Siberian Gold Mining.
GEORGE E. WALSH.
Mines and Minerals Sept., 1905.
Gives the location and extent of some of the gold
fields discovered, and some of the
conditions which retard development 2000 w.
Native Methods in Siberia.
FRED L. LOWELL.
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 5, 1910.
Illustrates and describes working methods used by
Russians, Chinese and Koreans in the placer
mining regions of eastern Siberia. 1500 w.
Siberian Gold Regions.
E. DE HAUTPICK.
Mining Journal March 4, 1911. Serial. lst part.
A description of the richest gold regions. The present
article describes the Olekminsk and Vitimak
districts. 1500 w.
Gold and Platinum Alluvial Deposits in Russia.
LEON PERRET.
Institution of Mining and Metallurgy, Bul 92 May 9,
1912.
Gives statistics and history, methods of prospecting
and working,and describes deposits and
conditions. 13500 w.
A Trip to the Siberian
ALEXANDER P. ROGERS.
Engineering and Mining
Illustrated account of
properties.
Placers.
Journal Feb. 8, 1913.
a trip made to examine placer
3000 w.
Some Impressions of Gold Mining in Siberia.
H.E. SYMMONS.
Mining Journal May 23, 1914.
Considers important mining laws; future of the country;
and the dredging industry. 2000 w.
Upper Yenesei Valley and Adjacent Mongolia.
Mining and Scientific Press Oct. 31, 1914.
Describes the region where alluvial gold has been
found. Map. 1800 w.
A Trip to the SiberianMongolian Frontier.
NEWTON B. KNOX.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 12, 1914.
Travel notes on an examining expedition to some new
183
184
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
placers in southcentral Siberia, with
comments on country and people. Ills. 5000
w.
The Gold Mines of the Lena.
C.W. PURINGTON.
Mining Magazine June, 1915.
Peculiar mining conditions and methods at great placer
field. Maps and Ills. 6000 w.
Drilling on the Lena Goldfield, Siberia.
W.E. THORNE.
Mining and Scientific Press March 30, 1918.
Lack of system; inefficiency of workmen; goldstealing,
etc. 4000 w.
DriftGravel Mining in Eastern Siberia.
JOHN POWER HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 11, 1918.
Account of these deposits and the crude methods of
mining, transportation, milling, and
sluicing. Ills. 7 pp.
Russian Placer Mining.
L.A. PERRET.
Mining and Scientific Press, vol. 122 nos. 12, 13 and
14, Mar. 19, 26 and Apr. 2, 1921, 12 figs.
Mar. 19; Conditions under which foreign gold mining is
conducted in Russia. Mar. 26; Drifting and
timbering methods. Apr. 2; Methods of
prospecting and dredging.
The Gold and Platinum Mining Industry in 1922 and Views
of its Future Progress.
A. KRYLOV.
Mining Journal (Russian), vol. 98, no.1012, Oct.Dec.
1922, pp. 458468. (In Russian).
American or Russian Methods of Working our PlacerDeposits?
I. ROGOVIN.
Mining Journal (Russian), vol. 99, nos. 12 and 34,
Jan.Feb. and Mar.Apr. 1923, pp. 2026 and
147154. (Russian).
American or Russian Methods of Working Russian Placer
Deposits
I. ROGOVIN.
Mining Journal (Russian), vol. 99, no. 7, July 1923,
pp.366371. (Russian).
American or Russian Methods of Working Our Placer
Deposits.
I. ROGOVIN.
Russian Mining Journal vol. 99, no. 89, Sept.Oct. 1923,
pp.450455. (Russian).
Gold Mining in Eastern Siberia.
185
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
F.L. COLE.
Engineering and Mining Journal Press, vol. 116, no. 5,
Aug. 4, 1923, pp. 185190, 2 figs.
Résumé of past operations in vast territory that has
produced much gold; climate; labor;
transportation and political conditions.
Methods of Gold Mining in Eastern Siberia.
A.P. SVIRIDOFF.
Engineering and Mining JournalPress, vol. 118, no. 7,
Aug. 16, 1924, pp. 251258, 9 figs.
Gives methods and cost of prospecting and working mines
in goldmining districts of Eastern Siberia.
The Selemdja Alluvial Gold Deposits, Amur Province,
Eastern Siberia.
G.T. EVE.
Mining Magazine, vol. 31, no. 4, Oct. 1924, pp.201205,
2 figs.
Account of gold deposits on Selemdja River and its
tributaries, chief centre of gold mining in
Amur Province with notes of past and present
scales of operation.
Perspectives of Gold Mining Industry of Eastern
Kazakistan.
I. YAKOVLEVSIBIRYAK.
Gorniy Journal, vol. 105, no. 1, Jan. 1929, pp. 8791.
Statistical data and general information on conditions
of placer mining in province formerly known
as Semipalatinsk, during period 1899 to
1914; author concludes that period of placer
mining in district is over and future is
with rock mining. (In Russian).
The Gold Industry in Siberia.
Mining Journal vol. 167, nos. 4912 and 4913, Oct. 12
and 19, 1929, pp. 817818 and 839. Oct. 12:
Historical notes on discovery and working of
gold deposits in Russia and Siberia; tabular
data on reported gold production of Siberia;
gold fields in Ural district of Russia,
western Siberia, and eastern Siberia. Oct.
19; Relative production of gold from placer
deposits and from veins in each region;
effect of World War on gold mining industry;
decline of production during Bolshevist
regime; possibilities of future development,
in view of recent resumption of diplomatic
relation between Great Britain and Soviet
Government.
Podzemnye vody i kharakter osusheniya Lenskikh
priiskov.
185
186
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
E.V. PINNEKER.
Sovetskaya Geologiya v 3 n 11 Nov 1960 p 8593.
Ground water and methods of Lena gold fields drainage;
Lena placers are confined to thick and
aqueous beds of friable deposits partly
bound by permafrost; water is obtained from
surface waters, from alluvium, and glacial
deposits; spillway adits are cut in bedrock
beneath placers to drain deposits; surface
runoff is regulated by enclosing rivers into
gutters or draining by ditches.
Chetvertichnye otlozheniya i rossypi zolota verkhov'ev
Kolymy i Indigirki.
M.D. EL'YANOV.
Sovetskaya Geologiya v 4 n 2 Feb1961 p 13344.
Quaternary deposits and gold placers in upper reaches
of Kolyma and Indigirka Rivers; problems of
stratigraphy of goldbearing areas of Kolyma
River basin; occurrence of placers under
glacial deposits.
K geomorfologicheskoi kharakteristike MaloAnyuiskoi
zolotonosnoi zony SeveroVostoka SSSR.
A.I. SADOVSKII.
Akademiya Nauk,Sibirskoe Otdelenie, Geologiya i
Geofizika n 11 1965 p 8091. Geomorphology of
MaloAnyuiskaya goldbearing zone of NorthEastern Soviet Union; data on geological
structure and geomorphologic development
indicate that sectors of ancient valleys
drained by Recent rivers are most favorable
for prospecting for gold placers. In
Russian.
Kompleksnye metody poiskov mestorozhdenii zolota v
Eniseiskom kryazhe.
I.L. KOMOV.
Sovetskaya Geologiya n 11 Nov. 1965 p12531.
Methods of gold prospecting in Enisei Ridge;
prospecting for new gold deposits is urged,
because old rich placer deposits in Enisei
Ridge are greatly exhausted; recommendations
are made concerning aeromagnetic,
geological, geochemical; and geophysical
methods of prospecting; analysis of
collected samples by spectrum analysis and
chemical methods. In Russian.
187
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Metallurgy
Notes on the Hydrometallurgy of Gold and Silver.
W. GEO. WARING.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 9, 1896.
Calling attention to facts in hydrometallurgy that are
not well understood, and stating that the
advances of the present day do not consist
in the discovery of new processes, but in
improvements in manipulation of the old and
wellfounded methods. 2700 w.
Metallurgy of Gold.
H. VAN F. FURMAN.
Colliery Engineer Oct. 1896.
Its occurrence, its properties and metallurgical
processes for extracting it from ores.
Crushing and pulverizing machinery;
amalgamation methods; concentration;
chlorination and bromination; the cyanide
process, smelting process, new methods;
melting, assaying and parting gold bullion.
6000w.
Crystalline. Crystalline Structure of Nuggets.
A. LIVERIDGE.
Australian Mining Standard Sept. 12, 1901.
Extracts from an address describing some recently
obtained nuggets from Victoria and the
Klondike and New Zealand. Ill. 1000 w.
Crystalline Structure of Nuggets.
A. LIVERIDGE.
Australian Mining Standard Sept. 12, 1901.
Extracts from an address describing some recently
obtained nuggets from Victoria and the
Klondike and New Zealand. Ill. 1000 w.
The Metallurgy of Alluvial Mining.
JOHN M. NICOL.
Mining and Scientific Press May 29, 1915, Serial, 1st
part.
Examination of the principles involved, with
suggestions. Ills. 2800 w.
Recovery of Gold from a Magnetic Black Sand.
JOHN A. DAVIS and JOHN GROSS.
Reports of Investigations, Bureau of Mines, serial no.
2158. Aug. 1920, 5 pp.
Tests made by Alaska section of Bureau of of Mines.
Recovery of Gold from Black Sand by Classifier
Concentration.
JOHN A. DAVIS and JOHN GROSS.
Reports of Investigations, Bureau of Mines, Dept. of
187
188
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Interior, serial no. 2160, Sept. 1920, 3
pp.
Results of metallurgical tests conducted by Alaska
section of Federal Bur. of Mines, on
recovery of gold from black sands of placer
cleanups.
Recovery of Gold from Black Sand Tailings.
JOHN GROSS.
Reports of Investigations, Bureau of Mines, Dept. of
Interior, serial no.2170, Oct. 1920, 2 pp.
Tests conducted at Alaska station of Bur. of Mines.
Comparison of Methods of Gold Recovery from Black Sand.
JOHN GROSS.
Reports of Investigations, Bureau of Mines, Dept. of
Interior, serial no. 2192, Dec. 1920, 4 pp.
Results of tests conducted by Alaska station of U.S.
Bureau of Mines.
Metallurgy of Gold.
T.K. ROSE and W.A.C. NEWMAN.
7 ed. rev. Phila., J.B. Lippincott Co., 1937, 561 pp.
ills. diagrs., charts, tables, $15.00. Last
edition of this standard treatise appeared
over 20 years ago; it has been necessary,
therefore, to write what is practically a
new book; obsolete methods of ore treatment
deleted; new ones on flotation and ore
testing added.
189
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Arid Regions
Dry Placer Machines.
Australian Mining Standard Oct. 5,1895.
Description of the method of working dry placers in the
arid regions of Arizona. Panning is used on
a small scale similar to the wet method. The
machine used consists of a series of screens
arranged so that a blast of air from the fan
blows sand and dirt away; it resembles the
fanning machine used to clean grain. 1000 w.
The Woods' Dry Placer Miner.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 8, 1896.
The device consists of a disintegrator, resembling an
inclosed ore washer, which delivers its
pulverized product to an inclined table
having riffles at intervals and having a
bottom of coarse cloth through which a
bellows underneath drives the air in
pulsations as in jigging. The gold settlers
to the surface of the cloth and is there
collected. 650 w.
A Dry Placer Machine.
Mining and Scientific Press March 14, 1896.
Illustrated description. 400 w.
Dry Gold Placers of the Arid Regions.
GEORGE H. STONE.
Mines and Minerals April, 1899.
The difference in the methods by which they and the wet
placers were deposited and the reasons for
the failure of so many dry placer machines.
3700 w.
The Problem of Dry Placers.
HENRY A. MATHER.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 29, 1903.
Considers the difficulties of gold recovery and the
means employed. 1200 w.
Dry Placer Mining Machines.
E.B. WILSON.
Mines and Minerals May, 1911.
Illustrates and describes some of the different methods
that have been used for concentrating with
little or no water. 2000 w.
A Dry Land Dredging Machine.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
189
190
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 16, 1911.
Illustrated description of the HearnsMartin placermining machine used near Oroville, Cal., for
working shallow gravel where hydraulicking
is barred. 2000 w.
The Western Australian Goldfields.
L.E. SHAPCOTT.
Scientific American Dec. 19, 1914.
Brief account of how water supplies are provided in a
waterless country. Ills. 1000 w.
Dry Placer Mining on a Large Scale.
W.G. KEISER.
Mining and Engineering World May 27, 1916.
QuennerStebbins plant, in Arizona. 1500 w.
Successful Dry Placer Operations, at Plomosa, Arizona.
WILLIAM L. PLUMMER.
Mining and Engineering World July 1, 1916.
Experimental plant. Ills. 1200 w.
Dry Blowing.
J. MCBRIAN.
Mines Magazine v 28 n 7 July 1938 p 3178.
Example of application of successful process for
separation of gold from alluvial dirt, as
used in Australia for several years;
construction details of dry blowing machine;
operating procedure.
New DryLand Dredging Plant on Wheels Adaptable to SemiArid Region Places.
A.N. CLARK.
Mining and Contracting Review, v 41 n 1 Jan 15, 1939 p
67 and 21.
Narrative description of plant and its successful
operation near Loomis, Calif; compare
similar paper by same author, from Mining
Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) Dec. 15, 1938.
DryLand Dredge Extracts Desert Gold.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 162 n 8 Aug 1961 p 79.
New dryland dredge is expected to demonstrate
feasibility of extracting gold from vast
Western goldbearing desert lands; after
screening and drying; material drops onto 6
electrostatic separator tables; dry air
stream passing over gold imparts
electrostatic charges preferentially to gold
particles which adhere to table screen,
while gangue is blown off end of table by
continuous stream of air; dredge capacity is
50 to 100 cu ft/hr.
191
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Methods
Cold Regions
Frozen Gold Gravel.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Oct. 20, 1906.
Illustrated description of phenomena observed in the
frozen ground of the far north, and the
methods used in breaking and thawing it
preparatory to recovering its gold contents,
suggesting improvements. 2500 w.
Dredge Working in Severe Cold.
E.N. BARBOT DE MARNY.
Mining Journal Aug. 1,1908.
Gives experience and opinion in Russia. 2500 w.
The Use of Sectionalized Machinery.
T. LANE CARTER.
Engineering and Mining Journal July 15, 1911.
Suggestions for the manufacture and use of machinery
used in outoftheway places. 2000 w.
Winter GoldMining in Siberia.
C.W. PURINGTON.
Mining Magazine Jan, 1912.
Describes the topography, climate, geology and
conditions of the TransBaikal region, giving
the history of gold mining. Map and Ills.
2500 w.
Electrical Installations of the Lena Gold Mining
Company.
Mining Journal June 29, 1912.
Describes electrical installations in Siberia for
generating power for the mines. Ills. 2000
w.
Thawing Frozen Ground for Placer Mining.
ARTHUR GIBSON.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 17, 1914.
Discusses thawing ground never thawed by nature, giving
efficiency and cost data of the different
methods. 1200 w.
Thawing Methods at Fairbanks.
HUBERT I. ELLIS.
Engineering and Mining Journal July 3, 1915.
Principles and practice of steampipe methods. Ills.
5000 w.
Winter Mining at Fairbanks.
HUBERT I. ELLIS.
Engineering and Mining Journal
Oct. 30, 1915.
191
192
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Methods. Ills. 3500 w.
Winter Sluicing at the Lenskoi Gold Mines, Siberia.
C.W. PURINGTON and R.E. SMITH.
Mining Magazine Sept., 1916.
Method and plant now in use. Ills. 5000 w.
Mining the Frozen Gravel of the Arctic.
DR. HENRY M. PAYNE.
Sibley Journal of Engineering Sept, 1916. Serial, 1st
part.
Auriferous territory described and methods applied.
Ills. 2500 w.
Further Notes on Yukon Mining Problems.
HENRY M. PAYNE.
Canadian Mining Institute, Transactions 1917.
Thawing methods and results. Ills. 19 pp.
Thawing Frozen Gravel with Cold Water.
WALTER S. WEEKS.
Mining and Scientific Press, vol. 120 no. 11, Mar. 13,
1920, pp. 367370, 3 figs.
Experiments at Nome, Alaska showed it is claimed that
surface water could accomplish thawing
effectively without addition of artificial
heat.
ColdWater Thawing of Frozen Gravel.
EDWARD E. PEARCE.
Mining and Scientific Press, vol. 124, no. 5, Feb. 4,
1922, pp. 154156, 3 figs.
Describes new process, showing methods employed and
results obtained by it on a piece of
dredging ground in Candle Creek, Alaska.
Recent Progress in the Thawing of Frozen Gravel in
Placer Mining.
CHARLES JANIN.
US Bureau of Mines, Tech. Paper, no. 309, 1922, 34 pp.
11 figs.
Methods evolved in working of frozen gravels in Alaska
and Yukon Territory.
Valuation of Dredging Ground in SubArctic.
A.M. NORDALE.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Trans v 50
1947 p 48796 (Bul n 425 Sept. 1947); see
also Western Miner v 19 n 11 Nov. 1946 p 90,
92, 94, 96, 989, 102, 104.
Accepted practice of sinking cased test holes with
churn drills had not been designed to meet
Arctic conditions in Alaska and Yukon;
attempts to thaw ground by use of steam;
development of "open hole" method, without
casing; drilling technique.
Cold Water Thawing of Frozen Placer Gravel.
193
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
J. LUND.
Canadian Minining and Metallurgical Bulletin v 44 n 468
Apr 1951 p 2737.
Gold bearing placers of Alaska and Yukon Territories
are buried under layer of permanently frozen
alluvial overburden; frozen muck is stripped
from placer by powerful jets of water from
hydraulic dredges; cold water will thaw
frozen ground much faster and cheaper than
either steam or hot water; low grade, placer
deposits, have become of great economic
importance with development of cheaper cold
water thawing methods.
Arctic Gold Dredging.
P.H. O'NEILL.
Mining Engineering v 6 n 11 Nov 1954 p 106871.
Features of dredge designed to operate under arctic
conditions; experience in dredging
permanently frozen gold bearing grave; bank
stabilization by freezing; pond ice removal
and steam thawing seasonal frost.
Economic Factors in Cold Weather Operation.
E.B. SPICE.
Mining Engineering v 8 n 7 July 1956 p 7127.
Ways in which cold weather can affect economics of mine
development and operation, such as
exploration, engineering design,
construction, mine and mill operation,
transportation.
Sistemy podzemnoi razrabotki mnogoletnemerzlykh
rosspei.
S.V. POTEMKIN.
Gornyi Zhurnal v 136 n 7 July 1960, p 204.
Systems of underground mining of placers under
conditions of permafrost; in northeastern
Siberia placers are 0.4 to 2 m thick and are
located below 15 to 20 m of overburden;
axial height of stope is 1.3 to 1.5 m; roof
is strong; length of field does not exceed
200 m.
Iglovaya ottaika rossypei s estestvennym naporom vody.
R.I. BLINNIKOV.
Gornyi Zhurnal v 136 n 7 July 1960 p 1720.
Thawing of placers by means of insert pipes to
introduce water under natural head; placer
is in permafrost of Magadan region; its
thickness is 78 mm; insert pipes are 3/4 and
1 in. in diam; water is supplied from 18 km
long canal; spacing is 3.5 by 3.5 m;cycle of
inserting pipes and keeping them in frozen
placer lasts 1625 days; after thawing
dredging begins.
193
194
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mining in Arctic Future Prospect Brightens.
P.E. QUENNEAU.
Mining Engineering v 13 n 7 July 1961, p 6959.
Present mining development in Arctic and factors which
influence future development; principal
factors responsible for greater development
of Arctic in eastern hemisphere is Gulf
Stream and Arctic Ocean; logistics, power
supply, manpower and living conditions in
Arctic.
195
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Tropical Regions
Placering in Tropical Countries.
A.D. AKIN.
Engineering and Mining JournalPress, vol. 114, no. 12,
Sept. 16, 1922, pp. 500502.
Enterprises often fall because of difficulty of
controlling water and because of
cloudbursts; dragline dredging method
promises solution.
195
196
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
Africa
Improved English Gold Dredge in West Africa.
FRANK C. PERKINS.
Mining World Sept. 4, 1908.
Illustrates and describes construction of gold
dredges,comparing advantages in operation.
1200 w.
Bucket Dredges for Nigerian Tin Deposits.
Engineering March, 14, 1913.
Illustrated description. 900 w.
A Pioneer Bucket Dredge in Northern Nigeria.
H.E. NICHOLLS.
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy, Bul 137 Feb. 17,
1916.
Details of dredge; work; deposits, operated by semiDiesel engine. Ills. 3000 w.
A Pioneer Bucket Dredge in Northern Nigeria.
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy, Bul 138 March 16,
1916.
Discussion of Nicholl's paper. 2000 w.
Dredging in Mozambique.
L.C. DE LA MARLIERE.
Engineering and Mining Journal April 15, 1916.
Lowgrade gravels. Ills. 1200 w.
Dredging: South African Practice.
GEO. STEWART.
South African Engineer, vol. 32, nos. 11 and 12, Nov.
30 and Dec. 31, 1921, pp .217220 and 233237,
6 figs.
Nov. 30: Objects and developments of dredging; hopper
or barge loading dredgers; ladder
dredges;suction dredging. Dec. 31; Described
drag, spud, dipper, grab, suction and bucket
dredgers, and discusses dredger efficiency.
Nouvelle drague aurifére, cystoma de Dorlodot.
J. DUGUE.
Gènie Civil v 106 n 26 June 29 1935 p 6412.
Design, construction and operation of Dorlodot type of
gold dredge especially adapted to conditions
prevailing in African colonies of France.
Gold Dredging in West Africa.
F.M. BLANCHARD.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 137 n 4 Apr 1936 p
1757.
First placer gold dredger on Gold Coast started
operation in 1902 on Offin river; during
197
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
1909 there were 15 operating on 5 rivers;
work stopped in 1925; Tano river area being
prospected; adverse digging conditions
overcome by special features of dredge
design; two dredges completed, 10 cu ft
buckets; ladder permits digging depth 40 ft
below water; swinging stacker.
Bremang.
D.D. HOWAT.
Mine and Quarry Engineering v 5 n 9 Sept 1940 p. 2438.
Alluvial dredging on Aukobra river; concessions with
total area 33.47 sq mi; dredgeable widths
average 800 ft; average depth 21 to 24 ft;
level surface from 10 to 15 ft above low
water level; two BucyrusErie dredges,
combined capacity of 320,000 cu yd per 600
running hours; electric power; gold recovery
flow sheet; proven reserves in three
sections, total over 100,000,000 cu yd,
values averaging 2.77 to 3.80 grains gold
per cu yd.
Gold Dredging.
Electrician v 126 n 3269 Jan 24 1941 p 467.
Description of electric equipment in operation on
shallows of Ankobra River, Gold Coast;
dredges are electrically operated and are
supplied from individual substations fed by
55 kv; overhead transmission line from power
stations at Ankobra Junction, 20 mi away;
power also carried to Ariston Gold Mines
substation at Prestea and to Gold Coast Main
Reef, Ltd., at Dondaye substation; features
of main generating plan and substations.
Gold Dredge in Rhodesia.
Mining and Minerals Eng v 1 n 2 Oct 1964 p 723.
Hydrojet dredges with multiple pontoon hull is employed
in winning goldbearing sand and gravel in
depth up to 30 ft; during tests its output
is reported to have been 300 cu/yd in freerunning sand; 210 cu yd/hr in freegetting
gravel up to stone size of 7 in. sphere and
62 cu yd/hr in gravel in crevices and
between large rocks and boulders; craft is
designed for dredging freegetting materials
at considerably greater depths than
conventional craft; 200 ft dredging depth is
feasible.
197
198
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Methods
Dredging
Asia
Dredging Possibilities in Korea.
R.Y. HANLON.
Mining and Scientific Press June 4, 1910.
An illustrated article giving information in regard to
the placers and the methods of working. 1200
w.
SteamElectricDriven Dredge for the Philippines.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 22, 1915.
Details of a dredge that will operate in tidal water.
Ills. 1800 w.
Japanese GoldDredging Enterprise.
H.S. LITTLE.
Engineering and Mining Journal, vol. 130, no. 10, Nov.
24, 1930, pp. 513514, 3 figs.
About 6000 acres near Kintei, Province of Zenrahudo,
Korea, being developed by Mitsubishi Kogyo
Co. of Japan; tested by Japanese engineers
with Empire hand drills; average depth 20
ft., granite bedrock and gold is usually in
3 ft. layer immediately above bedrock; 10
cu. ft. closeconnected dredge of Yuba type,
with steel hull; construction notes; average
yardage 7000 cu yards for 22 hr. operating
times per day; application of resoiling
equipment has been successful.
Coco Grove Dredges Have Interesting Features.
G.R. JOHNSON.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 143 n 4 Apr 1942 p 5961.
Coco Grove, Inc., operates two modern 8 cuft all steel
bucket line dredges in Paracale district on
Luzon, in Philippines; it owns or controls
about 2500 acres of placer ground and is
managed by Marsman and Co. Inc. of Manila;
dredge work both virgin ground and tailings;
dredges are all steel boats, equipped with 8
cu ft buckets; bucket line has 106 buckets
and can dig 65 ft under surface of water.
199
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
Australasia
Dredging the N.S.W. Rivers.
A.O.S.M.
Australian Mining Standard March 17, 1898.
Suggests the advisability of testing the rivers known
to contain auriferous gravel, and gives a
brief history of this industry in New
Zealand. Ill. 1300 w.
Dredging in New South Wales.
C.L. GARLAND.
Australia Mining Standard June 9, 1898.
An interview with Mr. C.L. GARLAND regarding the
progress made in dredging for gold, which
gives promise of satisfactory results. 2000
w.
Hydraulic Dredging.
Australia Mining Standard June 30, 1898.
Description, with illustrations of working of the
Yackandandah leases in Australia, by
dredging for gold. 2500 w.
Notes on Gold Dredging, with Reference to the
Introduction of the Industry into New South
Wales.
J.B. JAQUET.
New Zealand Mines Record Sept. 16, 1898.
A report upon the results obtained and the machinery
used. 7500 w.
Australian Dredging Progress.
Australia Mining Standard (special) June 1,1899.
Explains the various operations usually confused with
dredging proper, and gives an account of the
work erroneously called hydraulic dredging
in Victoria and New South Wales. 5500 w.
Gold Dredging in New Zealand, Victoria and New South
Wales.
GEORGE ROBSON.
New Zealand Mines Record Jan. 16, 1900.
Descriptive paper read before the New South Wales
Chamber of Mines, giving information
concerning the process with general
discussion. 2800 w.
Notes on Gold Dredging in New Zealand and New South
Wales.
J.W.H. PIPER.
199
200
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
New Zealand Mines Record June 16, 1900.
Read at meeting of N.S.W. Chamber of Mines. Showing the
immense advantage of the bucket dredge as a
gold producer. 1700 w.
Dredging in the Ovens Valley.
Australian Mining Standard June 11, 1903.
General remarks on dredging work, with illustrated
description of the plant of the Ovens Valley
Gold Dredging Co., Victoria. 2200 w.
Recent Dredging Practice in Australia and New Zealand.
H.L. LEWIS.
Mining Journal April 1, 1905. Serial. 1st part.
The present article considers buckets vs. pumps in
dredging, and hints on prospecting. 2800 w.
The Career of the Gold Dredge in New South Wales.
DAVID K. BLAIR.
Engineering and Mining Journal Oct. 28, 1905.
Abstract of a paper in "Trans. of the Australasian
Min.Engrs." Gives a brief history of the
career of the gold dredge from its
introduction, March, 1899, up to the present
time. 2200 w.
GoldDredging and Hydraulic Sluicing in Victoria.
D.B. SELLARS.
New Zealand Mines Record Oct. 16, 1908.
A report of the work. 2000 w.
Dredging and Hydraulic Sluicing, Victoria, 1908.
E.H. GOODENOUGH.
Australian Mining Standard May 5, 1909.
Abstract of annual report on operations in 1908. 1500
w.
Dredge Mining and Hydraulic Sluicing in 1909.
D.B. SELLARS.
Australian Mining Standard June 22, 1910.
A review of the plants in New South Wales. 2000 w.
A Large Dredger for a Siamese Tin Field.
Engineer, Lond Feb. 13, 1914.
Illustrated detailed description of the dredgers of the
Siamese Tin Syndicate and their work. Plate.
2500 w.
The Victorian Dredging Industry.
Mining and Scientific Press March 14, 1914.
From the Aust. Min. Stand. Information from the report
of the special board appointed by the
government to inquire into matters connected
with the sluicing of gold and other metals.
201
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
2500 w.
Bucket Dredging for Tin in Federated Malay States.
HARRY D. GRIFFITHS.
Mining Magazine Dec. 1916. Serial, 1st part.
Dredging operations, methods, conditions, etc. Ills.
6300 w.
Australian Practice in PumpDredging.
ARTHUR H.P. MOLINE.
Mining Magazine July, 1917.
Experience of a system of treating alluvial deposits
containing tin or gold. Ills. 9500 w.
Air Transport of Dredges in New Guinea.
Engineering and Mining Journal, vol. 130, no. 8, Oct.
23, 1930, p. 379, 3 figs.
Bulolo Gold Dredging, Ltd., is developing tract; Guinea
Airways, Ltd., has established direct 32 1/2
mi. airline between Salamoa, on east coast,
and Wau, at gold fields; line will be used
primarily for transporting heavy mining
equipment and supplies; 3 special G31
Junkers airplanes ready for service before
end of year, three 450 hp. aircolled
BristolJupiter engines of each will produce
fullload speed of 115 m.p.h.; duralumin and
sheet steel used for struts and for parts
not exposed to particular stress; electron
and silumin for pieces of unusual shape.
Air Transportation of Gold Dredges in New Guinea,.
C.A. BANKS.
Institution of Mining and Metallurgy Bul n 334 and
335. July 1932 16 p and(discussion) Aug p.
18 supp plates; see also Engineer v 154 n
3994 July 29 1932 p 1078; Far Eastern Review
v 28 n 10 Oct. 1932 p 4825 and Aircraft Eng
v 4 n 44 Oct 1932 p 2613.
Data on proven dredging area of 4 1/2 mi of Bulolo
riverbed and flats, 35 mi from coast; coast
of 90 mi road to transport two dredges would
be about $1,000,000 and construction would
require 1 to 1 1/2 years; 2 Junkers G31
airplanes used; details of procedure;
comparative cost data.
Bulolo Golddredging Enterprise.
F.W. GRIFFIN.
Mining and Metallurgy v 13 n 312 Dec 1932 p 528 and
530.
Description of enterprise on island of New Guinea, with
data similar to that in paper by C.A.BANKS.
Transporting Gold Dredges by Aeroplane.
201
202
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 25 n 294 Mar 6
1933 p 1857.
Historical outline of gold exploration and development
in Mandated Territory of New Guinea;
activities of Bulolo Gold Dredging Ltd.,
Guinea Gold N.L. and Guinea Airways, Ltd.;
transportation of freight by airplane;
features of dredging equipment; gold
production statistics; compare paper by C.A.
BANKS, covering similar ground.
Air Transport of Mine Equipment, Supplies and
Personnel.
A. DRESEL.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 134 n 5 May 1933 p
2012.
Notes by engineer of Junkers Flugzeugwerke AG of
Dessau, Germany, supplementing paper by C.A.
BANKS.
Revival of Gold Dredging in Ovens River Valley,
Victoria.
H.S. ELFORD.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 26 n 304 Jan
1934 p 1538.
Objections to granting of leases, because of river
pollution, destruction of valuable land,
silting of river and erosion of river;
growing pines on dredge tailings; modern
methods of resoiling.
Adelong Dredge.
H.S. ELFORD.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 27 n 318 Apr 8
1935 p 23741.
Construction features of allsteel dredge operating near
Bright in Victoria, Australia, since Nov
1933; hull 111 ft long, 38 ft 9 in. wide and
7 ft deep. ladder, 76 ft between centers,
designed to dig 35 ft below water line; new
bucket band of 64 buckets, each 7 1/2 cu ft
capacity, installed in Aug 1934; electric
power; operating and cleanup practice;
costs.
Tiveri Gold Dredge.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 29 n 340 Jan 8
1937 p 1445.
Description of dredge on Lakekanu goldfield,
Papua;steel pontoon 50 ft. long, 20 ft wide,
3 ft deep; bucket band of 34 buckets 1 1/4
cu ft each, capable of digging 15 ft below
water level, digs 13,000 cu yd monthly;
operating and financial results for 1935 and
1936; total cost of dredge £5,763.
203
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Treatment of Low Grade GoldTin Concentrate.
G.B. O'MALLEY.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 29 n 341 Feb 8
1937 p 1868.
Description of gold recovery and tin concentrate plant
of Cocks Eldorado dredge, operating at
Eldorado, Victoria, Australia; low grade
concentrate produced on dredge and
subsequently treated in "tin shed" on shore;
flow sheet.
Pontoon of Australia's Largest Dredge.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 29 n 342 Mar 8
1937 p 222.
Illustration of pontoon, with brief description of
dredge of Wellington Alluvials Ltd. designed
to operate in Macquarie river in New South
Wales, pontoon 212 ft.long 68 ft wide and 13
ft. deep with well 9 ft. wide; band of 115
buckets; each 14 cu ft. to dig 75 ft. below
paddock level and expected to dig 300,000 cu
yd monthly; leaves recoverable value 7 1/2 d
per cu yd with gold at L4 (Australian) per
fine ounce.
Air Transportation and Operation of Gold Dredges in New
Guinea.
C.A. BANKS.
Institution of Mining and Metallurgy Bul n 396 and 398
Sept. 1937 9 p and supp plates and Nov
(discussion) p 212.
Object of present paper is to supplement and bring uptodate description as given in issues of
July and Aug 1932, figures on materials;
moved during 4 1/2 yr; data on 4 dredges
operating; gold production costs.
Gold Dredging on Macquari River.
Industrial Australian and Mining Standard v 92 n 2251
Oct. 1 1937 p 2935.
Notes on alluvial fields near Wellington, New South
Wales, and construction progress on dredge
of Wellington Alluvials, Ltd., designed to
dig and treat 3,000,000 cy yd of overburden
and goldbearing gravel per annum; 110
buckets each of 14 cu ft capacity; bucket
ladder 158 ft long; dredge will effectively
dig to depth of 75 ft below paddock water
level, and about 30 ft above water level;
treatment plant; handling of overburden;
mooring winch, ladder hoist; electrical
equipment.
Application of Jigs in Placer Mining Operations.
203
204
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
D.N. VEDENSKY.
Mining Congress Journal v 24 n 5 May 1938 p 847 and 98.
Use of jigs,suggested by R.H. RICHARDS in 1907, was
later given tryout on large scale in
California; increased recoveries obtained by
Bulolo Gold Dredging Co., in New Guinea in
1932 after installation of jigs, has
resulted in expanded application
determination of tailing losses; sampling
methods; typical flow sheets.
Gold Dredging in Australia.
H.S. ELFORD.
Mining and Quarry Engineering v 3 n 10 Oct 1938 p 3738.
Causes in decline of bucket dredging for gold since
World War; stimulus given by rise in gold
price; details of eight gold dredging
companies in New South Wales and Victoria;
comment on three other properties being
equipped.
Harrietville Dredge Construction Proceeds.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 33 n 391 Apr
10 1941 p 1978.
Progress notes on building of dredge at Harrietville,
near Bright, Victoria; capacity will be
350,000 cu yd per month; pontoon 300 ft long
and 72 ft wide; 20 cu ft buckets; digging
capacity 130 ft below water level; gold
saving appliances.
Tronoh Company's New Harrietville Dredge.
F.W. VINCENT.
Mining Journal (Lond) v 219 n 5591 Oct 17 1942 p 4967.
Features of dredge described in Chemical Engineering
and Mining Review Apr 10 1941, as then being
under construction; work is nearing
completion; data on leases, etc. From Mining
and GeologicalJ (date not specified)
published by Victorian Dept Mines.
Operations of Victoria Gold Dredging Co. N.L.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 38 n 446 Nov
10 1945 p 3940.
Description of dredge in operation at Newstead,
Victoria; steel pontoon 112 ft long, 52 ft
wide, and 8 ft 9 in deep; girder type bucket
ladder, 72 ft between tumblers, capable of
digging 27 ft below water level and bank 16
ft above paddock water level; buckets 9 1/2
cu ft capacity, dumping rate 21 per min;
electric power; company has treated
15,425,700 cu yd for recovery of 3.1 gr. per
cu yd; resoiling; costs.
Reequipping and Repairing Bulolo's Dredges.
205
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 38 n 448 Jan
10 1946 p 1158.
Within period of 12 months it is hoped that Nos. 1, 2,
3 and 7 of eight dredges of Bulolo Gold
Dredging in New Guinea will be in operation
again; remainder will be placed in
commission as soon as possible thereafter;
damage by enemy action and "Scorched Earth"
policy; details of dredge fleet yields and
reserves; reequipment plans.
Expansion of Gold Dredging in Australia.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 39 n 12 Sept
10, 1947 p 4516.
Editorial Staff reports three new areas to be worked;
new dredge to be built; record of Victoria
Gold Dredging Co; resoiling results.
Australia's Largest Mining Dredge.
C. LYNCH.
Western Miner v 21 n 2 Feb 1948 p 47; see also Mech
World v 123 n 3188 Feb 20 1948 p 199200.
Descriptive and dimensional data on dredge of Tronoh
Finance Co of London at Harrietville,
Victoria; in 27 weeks to Guly 1947,
1,240,500 cu yd were treated for 1989 oz
gold, average of 0.77 grains per cu yd;
steel hull is 300 ft long; dredge was
designed to dig to 130 ft and to treat
4,250,000 cu yd year; it is electrically
operated.
Operations of Bulolo Gold Dredging Ltd.
H.D. DUNKIN.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 42 n 5, 6, 7,
8. Feb 10 1950 p 17789, Mar 20 p 22234, Apr
10 p 26979, May 10 p 30818.
Eight dredges have recovered 1,500,000 oz gold and
680,000 oz silver from 148,000,000 cu yd of
alluvium; review of early history and
development; reconstruction after war damage
of 1942; estimated gravel reserves include
13,500,000 cu yd that will ultimately be
handled by hydraulic equipment, power
supplies, workshops,transport services, and
timber milling operations described; outline
of organization.
Dredging Operations by Wellington Alluvials Ltd.
J.H. BURFORD.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 49 n 5 Feb 15
1957 p 15760.
205
206
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Dredging operations in Macquarie River valley; dredge
was designed to dig and treat 3,000,000 cu
yd of overburden and gold bearing gravel per
annum; total digging range is 105 ft; gold
treatment plant; resoiling operations
restore condition of dredged land.
207
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACERS
Mining Method
Dredging
Canada
B.C.
Gold Dredging in British Columbia.
R. LUID WATSON.
Mines and Minerals Aug., 1900.
An illustrated description of the dredging plant and
methods of operation used on the Fraser
River. 2500 w.
GoldDredging Possibilities on the North Thompson River
Near Kamloops, B.C.
JOHN REDMOND.
British Columbia Mining Record Sept. 1901.
Discusses the possibility of profitable dredging. 2000
w.
A Few Notes Upon Gold Dredging.
F. SATCHELL CLARKE.
Canadian Mining Review Feb. 28, 1902.
Gives some account of gold dredging in British
Columbia, the types of dredges used, their
operation, etc. 4000 w.
Dredge Mining in British Columbia.
WILLIAM M. BREWER.
British Columbia Mining Record Aug, 1903.
Discusses briefly the causes of the unsatisfactory
results obtained. 1500 w.
Dredging for Gold in British Columbia.
MINISTER OF MINES.
British Columbia Mining Record June,1905.
Notes from the annual report of the MINISTER OF MINES.
2800 w.
The Fraser as a Dredging Field.
H.G. STRINGER.
Mining Journal March 16, 1907.
An account of this river as a gold producer, and the
attempts at dredging. Ills. 2200 w.
Gold Dredging in British Columbia.
ARTHUR E. HEPBURN.
Journal of the Canadian Mining Institute1909.
Compares conditions with those existing in other
countries, indicating the causes for the
nonsuccess. Ills. 3000 w.
Gold Dredging Possibilities in the Barkerville Area,
British Columbia.
W.A. JOHNSTON.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Bulletin,
no.118, Feb. 1922, pp. 151167.
Draws attention to possibilities of gold dredging on
207
208
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Antler and Williams creeks in Barkerville
area, and describes general character of
placers and their associated deposits.
Dragline Gold Dredging.
G.A. COLLINS.
Western Miner v 18 n 2 Feb 1945 p 326.
History of "Doodlebug" dredge, using drag line shovel
and floating washing plant; design and
operating functions; operating procedure;
description of experience in dragline
dredging in Cariboo district of British
Columbia.
Placer Mining by Dragline and Dredge.
G.A. COLLINS.
Western Miner v 18 n 10 Oct 1945 p 7881.
Dragline dredging is largely outgrowth of depression of
19291935, when necessity prompted some
California contractors who had dirt moving
equipment and nothing for it to do; this
came at time of increased in price for gold;
deposits were easily accessible to such
mechanical equipment; discussion of
possibilities in Cariboo region of British
Columbia; conditions limiting this type of
operation; advantages; general factors.
Before Prospecting Session, Canadian
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
Dredging at Similkameen Atkinson Dredging Company.
H.R. RICE.
Canadian Mining Journal v 69 n 7 July 1948 p 6671.
Description of enterprise winning gravels of
Similkameen and Tulameen Rivers in British
Columbia; geology of area; history of gold
placer mines; holdings of claim leases;
major equipment in use is arranged on "dragline dredging" principle, in which washing
plant floats on steel pontoons and
excavating is done with separate unit;
flowsheet; platinum metals; are recovered
from "black sands" concentrate.
Historic Cariboo.
D.D. FRASER.
Western Miner v 22 n 4 Apr 1949 p 989.
Descriptive review; dredging operators seek alluvial
deposits.
209
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
Canada
N.W.T.
Tailing Dredge on Great Bear Lake.
H.R. RICE.
Canadian Mining Journal v 74 n 7 July 1953 p 5961.
Situated 27 mi south of Arctic Circle, and where ice
forms to thicknesses of six and seven ft.,
dredge operates throughout year, floating in
pool kept melted by waste water derived from
mine and plant; pumping equipment,
temperature conditions, ice inhibition, and
dredging operation reviewed.
209
210
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
Canada
Yukon
Yukon Dredging.
R.H. STRETCH.
Mining Industry and Review May 19, 1898.
Considers it exceedingly questionable whether such
operations in Alaska would meet with
success, and gives reasons for the opinion.
1200 w.
The Stewart River Gold Dredge.
A.W. ROBINSON.
Canadian Mining Review March 31, 1903.
A brief description, with illustrations. 2800 w.
The Opportunities for Gold Dredging in the Yukon.
C.B. BOLGER.
Mining and Scientific Press May 14, 1904.
States conditions in this region and describes a
dredger which worked successfully. 1000 w.
Dredging in the Yukon.
T.A. RICKARD.
Mining and Scientific Press Aug. 29, 1908.
Data gathered by personal observation. Ills. 3000 w.
New Klondike Dredges.
GUY A.R. LEWINGTON.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 7, 1911.
Illustrates and describes Canadian No. 2, the largest
gold dredge operating in the world. 1800 w.
Gold Dredging in Alaska and the Yukon.
CHARLES JANIN.
Mining Magazine Jan. 1912.
Map and illustrated account of operations. 1600 w.
Development of Dredging in Yukon Territory.
O.B. PERRY.
Engineering and Mining Journal - Dec. 25, 1915.
Read before the Can. Min. Inst. Problems and their
solution. Ills. 3500 w.
Electric Dredging on the Yukon.
ALLEN E. RANSOM.
Electrical Journal, vol. 17, no. 3, March 1920 p. 8690,
13 figs.
Dredge and characteristics and operating data.
Solving Mechanical Problems in Dredging.
L.L. ROGERS.
Western Miner v 19 n 7 July 1946 p 423.
Brief illustrated notes on problems dealt with in
machine shop Yukon Consolidated Gold Corp.
on Bear Creek on Klondike River between
Hunker and Bonanza Creeks.
211
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Dredging in Far North.
Mining World v 8 n 12 Nov 1946 p 448.
Yukon Consolidated, largest operator in Klondike
region, is now working six of its ten
dredges as compared with only three in 1944
when shortages of labor and materials;
forced drastic curtailment; map showing
dredge locations; notes on practice; dredge
data.
HomeMade Dawson Dredge.
A.A. GILLESPIE.
Western Miner v 21 n 5 May 1948 p 467.
Narrative of experimental dredge built by C.RENDELL and
T. RENDELL in Dawson, Yukon Territory, later
towing it to Stewart River and elsewhere;
description of building another dredge for
working Stewart River bars.
211
212
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
Central America
On Horseback in Western Chihuahua.
MARK R. LAMB.
Engineering and Mining Journal July 25, 1908.
An account of travels among mining camps where
sectionalized machinery is the rule. Ills.
5000 w.
A Successful Gold Dredging Enterprise in Guatemala.
A.C. LUDLUM.
Engineering and Mining Journal. Press, vol. 121, no.
14, Apr. 3, 1926, pp.557559, 4 figs.
Production proves extreme reliability of drill
sampling; yield 21.24 cts. per cu. yd.;
operating cost 9.26 cts.
213
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
Europe
Gold Dredging in Europe (Die Goldbaggerie in Europe).
L. ST. RAINER.
Oesterreichische Zeitschrift für Berg and Hüttenwesen
April 27, 1907. Serial.
Read before the Mining and Metallurgical Section of the
Austrian Society of Engineers and
Architects. Discusses the goldbearing
streams and the dredging operations. 2800 w.
Building a Placer Mining Dredge with Electric Power
Plant in Portugal.
H.G. PEAKE.
Mining and Scientific Press Oct. 3, 1914.
Describes a plant for the mining of placer tin. Ills.
1200 w.
213
214
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
General
The Ball Gold Dredger.
Engineer, Lond Oct. 8, 1897.
Describes a combination dredger and gold saver in use
in South Africa and in Madagascar. 2300 w.
Gold Dredging and Gold Saving.
PERRY F. NURSEY.
Industries and Iron Oct. 29,1897.
Describes the invention of Charles Ball for
automatically securing the gold. Also
reviews the systems of dredging which have
been used from the earliest time to the
present. 1800 w.
Notes on Dredging for Gold.
JOHN W. GRAY.
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 13, 1897.
Information of dredge used and the success of the work
both in America and New Zealand. 2300 w.
A New Form of Dredge for RiverBed Placers.
J.M. SWEENEY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 25, 1897.
Describes a proposed method for cleaning up the bedrock
of streams containing gold deposits which
claims to overcome the objections to known
methods, and can also be used for any
deposit of gravel or sand. Ill. 1600 w.
Electrically Operated Power Dredges.
Electrical World March 5, 1898.
Illustrated description of machinery for mining
developed by the Bennett Amalgamator
Manufacturing Co. 2000 w.
Dredging for Gold.
ROBERT NORMAN BELL.
Mines and Minerals March, 1899.
The construction of dredges which successfully work
gravel which cannot be profitably handled by
other means. 1600 w.
Dredging for Gold.
C.C. LONGRIDGE.
Engineering April 21, 1899. Serial.
Gives a review of the history of gold dredging, the
various dredges used, etc., in part first.
Dredging for Gold.
Australian Mining Standard (special)
June 1 1899.
215
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Gives detailed account of the evolution of the modern
dredge as used for gold recovery. Ill. 5200
w.
Gold Dredging.
JOHN M. SWEENEY.
Mines and Minerals July, 1899.
Illustrated description of devices for obtaining gold
from placer deposits with a limited water
supply, giving results of experiments and
practical trials. 3800 w.
GoldBearing Gravels of the West.
ALEXANDER McDOUGALL.
Mining and Scientific Press July 15, 1899.
Condensed from paper by Alexander McDougall.
Illustrates and describes the McDougall
plant for placer mining. 1400 w.
Alexander McDougall's Dredging System.
Modern Machine July, 1899.
Illustrates and describes a dredging machine for use in
placer mining. 2100 w.
Dredging: Its Present and
J.G. HYDE.
New Zealand Mines Record
On the chief difficulties
dredging. 1000
Future Outlook.
Nov. 16, 1899.
yet to be overcome in gold
w.
Hydraulic Dredging, or the Working of Deep Alluvial
Deposits by Elevation with Centrifugal
Pumps.
A.S. KENYON.
Transactions of the Australian Institute of Mining
Engineers Vol. V.
Illustrates and describes the system in use. 3000 w.
Dredging for Gold.
THEO. F. VAN WAGENEN.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 27, 1900. Serial.
Considers the problem of gold recovery by dredging, the
conditions, etc. Ill.
A Modern Dredger Mining Plant.
Mining and Scientific Press March 24, 1900.
Illustrates and describes dredgers the motors of which
are operated by alternating current. 700 w.
Gold Dredging.
R.H. POSTLETHWAITE.
Mines and Minerals March, 1900.
Discusses conditions necessary for a dredge to fulfil
in order to operate successfully. 2200 w.
215
216
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Dredging for Gold.
J.W.H. PIPER.
Australian Mining Standard May 10, 1900.
On the advantage of the bucketdredge as a gold
producer. 2100 w.
Spoon and Grab Dredges.
J.W. JAFFRAY.
Australian Mining Standard July 28, 1900.
Read before the N.S.W. Chamber of Mines. Discusses the
efficiency and economy of these dredges.
2800 w.
Notes on Gold Dredging.
J.W.H. PIPER.
British Columbia Mining Record Aug. 1900.
Read before the N.S.W. Chamber of Mines. An illustrated
article, showing the great advantage of the
bucket dredge as a gold producer. 1700 w.
The Efficiency of GoldSaving Appliances on Dredges.
J.B. SMITH.
New Zealand Mines Record Nov. 16, 1900.
Discusses the losses and improvements needed, and the
importance of a skillful winchman. 1000 w.
Ridland's Patent Pneumatic RockScraper.
J.A. MILLER.
New Zealand Mines Record Nov. 16, 1900.
Illustrated description of a machine designed for
getting gold out of a hard crevassy rock by
means of a tunnel on the diving bell
principle. Its operation is also explained.
1200 w.
Suggestions on Inland Gold Dredging.
A.C. ETESON.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 22, 1900.
Suggestions on the practical working of a dredger. Ill.
1000 w.
Dredging Fine Gold.
FRED. SHURY.
New Zealand Mines Record Feb. 16, 1901.
Explains how the mixingtank system can be successfully
worked in dredging beach gold. Ill.1700 w.
Gold Dredging.
F.C. NETTLETON.
Mines and Minerals April, 1901.
Discusses the things which should be considered in
installing a plant, some of the difficulties
and how they may be met. 2000 w.
Gold Dredges Their Construction and Manipulation.
DAVID K. BLAIR.
Canadian Mining Review Nov. 30, 1902. Serial. 1st
part.
217
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Read before the N.S.W. Chamber of Mines. A description
of the "Bucket Gold Dredge," the general
principles of construction and manipulation,
the accidents liable, with their cause,
effect and remedy. 9000 w.
The Development of GoldDredging in the United States.
RALPH L. MONTAGUE, in "Mining Journal," London.
New Zealand Mines Record Dec. 16, 1902.
A comparison with New Zealand methods and costs. 2800
w.
The Development of GoldDredging in the United States.
RALPH L. MONTAGUE, in London "Mining Journal."
Canadian Mining Review Feb. 28, 1903.
Describes the type of dredge used, stating its
advantages, and comparing with the New
Zealand type; also gives brief history of
the undertakings in the United States. 3000
w.
Peck's Centrifugal Tailings Elevator.
F. DANVERS POWER.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 23,1903.
Illustrated description of a new tailings elevator
designed to supersede the heavy and costly
ladder type used on gold dredges. States the
advantages claimed. 1000 w.
Present Practice in Gold Dredging.
R.H. POSTLETHWAITE.
Mines and Minerals May, 1903.
Describes some of the newer devices which experience
has shown to be advantageous. 2200 w.
The Electrical Equipment of a Gold Dredge.
RALPH L. MONTAGUE.
Transactions of the American Institute of Electrical
Engineers July 1903.
Explains use and object of these dredges and describes
the electrical equipment. Ill. 3800 w.
Gold Dredging.
F. WINTER TAYLOR.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 14,1904.
Describes the methods used, types of dredges, etc. Ill.
2000 w.
Gold Dredging Under Difficult Conditions.
F. WINTER TAYLOR.
Engineering and Mining Journal March 24, 1904.
Discusses the design of a dredge that is to be worked
under exceptionally hard conditions. Gives
plan. 2500 w.
The Gold Dredging Industry.
217
218
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
F.W. GRIFFIN.
Transactions Col. Mining Institute
Mining and Scientific Press April 16, 1904.
Information concerning dredges and dredging, and the
rapid development of this business. 3000 w.
Gold Dredging and Prospecting.
ROBERT H. POSTLETHWAITE.
Mining Magazine Jan. 1905.
A short illustrated review of this industry under
existing conditions. 4000 w.
The TwentiethCentury Gold Ships and their Cargoes.
ALEX. DEL MAR.
The Engineering Magazine July, 1905.
A graphic statement of the progress and possibilities
of gold dredging, the general requirements
of dredge construction and operation, and
the prospective effect on the world's output
of gold. Ills. 3000 w.
Dredging I. Prospecting and Historical.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal July 15, 1905. Serial.
1st part.
Reviews the history of dredge mining as introductory to
a discussion of present practice. 1500 w.
Application of Electric Power to Gold Dredging.
J.F. DOSTAL.
Mining and Scientific Press Oct. 7, 1905.
Read at meeting of the Colorado Elec. Lgt., Power and
Ry. Assn. Describes the object and method of
dredging and the schemes for regaining the
gold. Also describes the dredgers and the
electrical equipment of one of them. 2200 w.
An Improved Dipper Dredge.
F.F. COLEMAN.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 25, 1905.
Illustrated description of a new dipper dredge made by
the AllisChalmers Company.1000 w.
Gold Dredges.
F.F. COLEMAN.
Marine Engineering Jan. 1906.
Describes the general character of the dredge, and the
work it is to do, illustrating types, and
explaining the kind of work for which each
is adapted. 2000 w.
Gold Dredging in 1905.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 20, 1906.
A review of the progress in this business, the failures
and the causes, practice and dredge design,
sampling, etc. 3000 w.
219
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
A New Gold Dredge.
GEORGE L. HURST.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 27, 1906.
Illustrated description of a new dredge recently built
at El Dorado, on the American River.
Dredging is possible to a total depth of 50
ft. 1500 w.
The BucketDredging Industry.
E. SEABORN MARKS and GERALD N. MARKS.
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy April 19, 1906.
Discusses bucketdredges and their construction,
alluvial, deposits suited to bucketdredging,
and the requisite conditions for successful
operations; dredging operations and costs.
Ills. 11000 w.
The BucketDredging Industry.
E. SEABORN MARKS and GERALD N. MARKS.
Institution of Mining and Metallurgy April 19, 1906.
Discussion of this paper. 6000 w.
The Robinson GoldDredger.
Engineering May 25, 1906.
Illustrates and describes a new golddredger of simple
design, and its working. 1700 w.
Economy in Mining with Modern GoldDredges.
GEORGE E. WALSH.
Mining World May 19, 1906.
Describes the modern gold dredging plant and its
working, giving information concerning the
cost for the plant, the working costs, etc.
Ills. 2000 w.
Gold Dredging by Electric Power.
FRANK C. PERKINS.
Electrical Engineer, London Aug. 17, 1906.
Illustrates and describes method used in the west of
applying electrical energy to this work.
1200 w.
A New American Gold Dredge.
Engineering News Nov. 1, 1906.
Illustrates and describes details of the bucket used in
a new dredge of the elevator type. 1200 w.
The Weaver Dredging System for the Recovery of Fine
Gold.
Mining Reporter Nov. 1, 1906.
Describes this system which is meeting with marked
success in Idaho. 1500 w.
Gold Dredging in 1906.
219
220
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 5, 1907.
An account of the testing of dredging ground,
expansion, methods, dredge design, cost,
etc. 3000 w.
Recent Applications of Gold Dredging Machinery.
FRANCIS C. NICHOLAS.
Mining World March 23, 1907.
Illustrates and describes a special dredge designed to
save both placer gold and diamonds. Suggests
its application in other fields. 900 w.
Modern Gold Dredging Practice and Equipment.
HORACE J. CLARK.
Mining World Nov. 30, 1907.
An illustrated discussion of the dredging of shallow
bars and beds of rivers as a commercial
possibility. 1000 w.
Gold Dredging in 1907.
JOHN POWER HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 4, 1908.
Discusses the attempts made to dredge frozen ground,
variation in practice,steamshovel dredging,
etc. 2200 w.
Developments in Gold Dredging During 1908.
JOHN POWER HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 23, 1908.
Review of the year reporting great activity in
California and progress in the Klondike.
4000 w.
Recent Developments in Gold Dredging.
FRANK W. GRIFFIN.
Mining and Scientific Press Aug. 15,1908.
An illustrated review of progress. 2500 w.
The Method and Cost of Gold Dredging by the Elevating
Bucket.
Engineering and Contracting Nov. 4, 1908.
Describes its use, reporting costs. Ills. 2000 w.
The Recovery of Values from River Bottoms.
W.D. EGILBERT.
Mining World Jan. 16, 1909.
Describes the DuBois suction dredge of the latest type,
and its operation. 2000 w.
Development of Dredges for Placer Deposits.
GEORGE B. MASSEY, II.
Engineering and Mining Journal April 24, 1909.
The evolution of the dredge is reviewed. Ills. 1500 w.
Hydraulic Dredging for GoldBearing Gravels.
HENRY G. GRANGER.
221
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
April 1909.
Describes an effective suction dredge, discusses
special conditions of golddredging, reviews
the history, gives conclusions. Gives
specifications for a hydraulic golddredge.
Ills. 7000 w.
Modern Gold Placer Dredging.
GEORGE B. MASSEY, 2nd.
Cassier's Mag Aug. 1909.
An illustrated article considering details necessary to
make a dredging enterprise successful, and
the important points about the property.
3500 w.
Development of Modern Gold Dredgers.
Engineer,Lond Sept. 10, 1909.
Describes special features of a propulsion screen gold
dredger for Peru. 700 w.
Future of Dredging.
CHARLES JANIN.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 31, 1910.
Briefly reviews dredging operations in various
countries, and discusses future prospects.
3500 w.
Type No. I of the New Era Gold Dredge.
E.S. BENNETT.
Mining World Jan. 28, 1911.
Illustrated description. 1200 w.
Review of Gold Dredging in 1911.
CHARLES JANIN.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 13, 1912.
Reviews work in various states. Ills. 2500 w.
Gold Dredging Up to Date.
ARTHUR LAKES.
Mines and Minerals July 1912.
Reviews the history of dredging in America, giving
costs and conditions in various regions.
Ills. 4000 w.
Gold Dredging Up to Date.
ARTHUR LAKES.
Mines and Minerals Aug. 1912.
On the conditions to be noted in selecting a field for
gold dredging and their influence on the
cost of the work. Ills 3200 w.
The Evolution of Gold Dredging Machinery.
A.H. MARTIN.
Machinery, N Y Jan. 1913.
221
222
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Reviews, briefly, the development of the gold dredge
and its equipment. 1200 w.
Review of Gold Dredging in 1912.
CHARLES JANIN.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 4, 1913 (Special).
Information concerning the work in the United States
outside California,Alaska and the Yukon
Territory. Ills. 2500 w.
Gold Dredging in 1912.
ROBERT E. CRANSTON.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 11, 1913.
Reports little advance during the past year, reviewing
operations in different fields. Map. 1800 w.
Mining Gold by Proxy.
ARTHUR L. DAHL.
Scientific American Sup May 24, 1913.
Illustrated description of a gold dredge and its
operation. 1000 w.
Gold Dredging in 1913.
ROBERT E. CRANSTON.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 10,1914.
A report of dredge operations during the year. 2500 w.
Gold Dredging in the United States.
CHARLES JANIN.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 10, 1914.
Reports for past year on dredging in California, Idaho,
Montana, Colorado and Seward Peninsula.
Ills. 3800 w.
Placer Mining with Bucket Dredges.
W.M. HOEN.
Electric Journal March, 1914.
Illustrated description of the dredge and the
application of electric power to its
operation. 2000 w.
Recovery of Gold in Dredging.
CHARLES JANIN.
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 7, 1914.
Method of estimating the goldsaving and the gold
content of a property. 3500 w.
Application of Jigs to Gold Dredging.
J.W. NEIL.
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 28, 1914.
Detailed description of experiments and the improved
recovery. Ills. 2500 w.
Discussion on "Application of Electric Motors to Gold
Dredges" (Rosenblatt), Spokane, Wash., Sept.
11, 1914. 4500 w.
ROSENBLATT.
Proceeding of the American Institute of Electrical
223
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Engineers
Jan. 1915.
Gold Dredging in 1914.
ROBERT E. CRANSTON.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 9, 1915.
An account of work in California and other states,
Alaska, the Yukon, and South America. 1500
w.
Dredging Operations at the Beginning of 1916.
Mining and Engineering World - Jan. 1, 1916.
Editorial review. Ills. 6500 w.
Gold Dredging in 1915.
ROBERT E. CRANSTON.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 8, 1916.
Review of work and conditions. 2500 w.
GoldSaving on Dredges.
HOWARD D. SMITH.
Mining and Scientific Press Aug. 5, 1916.
Method of concentration that includes jibs and a
Hardinge mill. Ills. 1200 w.
Dredging for Minerals.
F.W. PAYNE.
Mining and Engineering Review Oct. 5, 1916.
Retrospective and prospective. 1200 w.
Dredging for Minerals: Past and Present.
F.W. PAYNE.
Mining and Engineering World Dec. 16, 1916.
Historical review. 1500 w.
Mineral Dredging Operations of the World.
Mining and Engineering World Jan. 6, 1917.
Brief review. Ills. 6000 w.
Commonsense of Gold Dredging.
A.C. LUDLUM.
Engineering and Mining Journal March 3, 1917.
Review of the essentials preliminary to a successful
golddredging operation. Ills. 2000 w.
Three Big American GoldDredges.
Mining Magazine, June 1917.
Details of design. Ills. 3500 w.
Recovery of Platinum in GoldDredging.
JAMES W. NEILL.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 8, 1917.
223
224
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Methods of recovery causes of less; but improvements in
concentration. Ills. 2500 w.
Gold Dredging in the United States.
CHARLES JANIN.
US Bureau of Mines Bul. 127.
Summarizes the development of the gold dredge, giving
the essential features of presentday dredges
and methods. Ills. 214 pp.
Use of Electricity on Gold Dredges.
Electrical Review (London), vol. 73 no. 23, Dec. 7.
1918, pp. 881883, 3 figs.
Description of typical dredge; value of centralstation
service for work; points to observe in
selecting apparatus required; description of
electrical equipment used.
Largest Capacity GoldMining Dredge in the World.
H.G. PEAKE.
Engineering and Mining Journal, vol. 109, no. 20, May
15, 1920, pp. 11061109, 3 figs.
Describes the Estabrook dredge, with largest buckets
built for placer mining, erected at
considerable distance from railroad,
necessitating heavy haulage over mountain
roads; wooden hull constructed from timber
sawn on ground.
The Dependence of the Loss of Gold at the Dredging on
the Type and Dimension of the Dredges.
E. BARBOTDEMARNI.
Mining Journal,(Russian), vol. 98, no. 69, JuneSept
1922, pp. 244255, 1 fig. (In Russian)
A New Type of Gold Dredge.
JAMES W. NEILL.
Pacific Min. News of Engineering and Mining
Press, vol. 2, no. 3, Mar. 1923,
figs. Application of dragscraper
to gold dredging is suggested in
gold dredge, objective of design
to substitute dragscraper bucket
line.
Journal.
pp. 7375, 3
excavator
new type of
of which is
for bucket
Electrical Equipment of Sand and Gravel Dredges.
J.E. BORLAND.
Electric Journal, vol. 20, no. 11, Nov. 1923, pp. 390395, 14 figs.
Describes two electrically operated dredges for sand
and gravel service and their operation.
Bucket Dredge for Alluvial Gold.
Engineering, vol. 119, no. 3101, June 5, 1925, pp. 697699, 21 figs. partly on supp. plate.
225
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Ladder dredge with closeconnected buckets, furnished
with concentrating appliances but dependent
for its small amount of locomotion on being
hauled by head and side lines.
Dredge Electrification.
C.T. PEARCE.
La. Eng. Soc. Proc., vol 16, no. 6, Dec. 1930, pp.
219228 and (discussion) 228231. Advantages
of electrification of different types of
dredges; information concerning proper type
of electrical equipment for each dredge
application; outstanding advantage of
electric drive as compared to steam engine
is its superior economy when supplied with
shore power or where utilizing steam turbine
or Diesel engine as prime mover; another
advantage is its unusual flexibility and
ease of operation and control.
Electricity for Dredges.
H. HEINRICH.
Electrical Journal, vol. 28, no. 6, June 1931, pp. 363366, 10 figs.
Two common classifications result from nature of work,
hydraulic and bucket dredges; one uses
suction pipe and rotary cutter, other
employs endless bucket chain for digging;
economy resulting from electrification, ease
of control, and absence of mechanical
strain, all combine to create growing demand
for electric dredge.
DredgeSluice Efficiency.
B.W. BELLINGER.
Engineering and Mining Journal., vol. 132, no. 9, Nov.
1931, pp. 403404. 1 fig.
Dredging efficiency is percentage of recoverable metal
recovered, and not of amount estimated by
drilling; example of efficiency test, by
weighing platinum and gold recovered from
short sections of sluice; comparative
results may also be had with different types
of riffles, different grades, and different
amounts of water.
Operation of Gold Dredges.
R.S. LEWIS.
Canadian Mining Journal v 56 n 3 Mar 1935 p 10610.
Historical outline of development of gold dredges;
effect of high specific gravity of pond
water, due to mineral matter in suspension;
screens; gold saving tables; cleanup
tailings disposal; anchoring; digging
practice; auxiliary sluices, or "savealls";
cost of dredge may be anywhere from $65,000
225
226
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
to $1,000,000, depending upon details of
design; advantages of sectionalized hull
made of pontoons.
LargeGold Dredger.
Engineer v 160 n 4170 Dec. 13 1935 p 631.
Illustrated description of dredge constructed by Yuba
Manufacturing Co. of San Francisco, believed
to be world's largest dredger; hull is of
allsteel construction 233 ft 9 in long by 68
ft wide and 11 ft 6 in deep; built of
plates, angles, and channels; digging
ladder, which supports bucket line is of
plate girder type; particulars of equipment.
Continued Improvement Trend in Dredging.
H.A. SAWIN.
Mining Congress Journal, v 23 n 8 Aug 1937 p 1921 and
43.
Discussion by sales engineer of machinery manufacturing
company; larger dredges; improved bucket
unit design; steel hulls; tailings stackers;
gold saving equipment; summary of requisite
factors for successful dredging.
Jigging Applied to Gold Dredging.
P. MALOZEMOFF.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 138 n 9 Sept 1937 p
347.
Paper defines, in general terms,some of problems
involved in operating jigs on dredges;
sketch showing four methods of application;
possibility of using flotation to recover
fine gold lost by jigs; testing of dredge
tailing losses; factors affecting jig
installation and jig recovery;jigging
practice.
Successful Dragline Dredge.
J.F. MAGEE.
American Institute of Mining and Metallurgical
Engineers Trans v 126 1937 (Metal Min) p
18093 (discussion) 193200.
Indexed in Engineering Index 1936 p 532, from Tech Publ
n 757 mtg Feb 1936.
Evolution of "Doodlebug,".
G.L. HOLMES.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 21 n 11 Oct 30 1937 p
34 and 38.
Types of dredge for small, comparatively shallow and
limited areas of placer ground not
warranting construction of floating dredge
of standard type; earliest rigs "compiled"
from contractors' accumulations of used
equipment; in some cases, washing apparatus,
gold saving tables, and stacker are mounted
227
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
on floating hull; in other types they are
mounted on skids or crawler treads.
Mining by Means of Dredges.
P.R. LAKE.
Mine and Quarry Engineering v 3 n 12 Dec 1938 p 43741.
Selection and testing of areas with alluvial deposits
of gold or of tin ore.
Modern Tendencies in Alluvial Dredge Design.
S.A. WESTROP.
Mining Journal (Lond) v 204 n 5402 Mar 4 1939 p 193.
Motive power; spud or head line operation; overburden
removal; buckets; lower tumbler and ladder
rollers; ladder construction; upper tumbler
and tumbler drive; winch room and controls;
treatment plan; wearing parts.
Dragline Dredge of Lord and Bishop Near Valley Springs.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 23 n 5 July 30 1939 p
7 and 36.
Brief description of plant combining Diesel powered,
multiple flume gold panning machine or
dredge, and Diesel powered 3yd
dragline;operating practice; dragline works
three 8 hr shifts per day and feeds dredge
1400 to 1500 cu yd of material per
shift;operation represents investment of
about $90,000; on day shift, 6 men operate
entire plant; on night shifts, 3 men are at
work.
Reducing Hydraulic Dredge Operation Cost.
B.M. MILLS.
Engineering News Rec v 124 n 17 Apr 25, 1940 p 6871.
Saving in electric power costs on dredges through use
of proper speed control system for main pump
drive; comparative description of Kraemer
and Scherbius systems of speed control;
dredge pump speed characteristics; induction
motor drives; comparative power savings;
typical installations; selfpowered dredges.
Jig Versus Riffle Concentration in Gold Dredging.
T.D. GALLOWAY.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 141 n 6 June 1940 p
401.
Attention directed to comparative ratios of
concentration at various stages;
hypothetical case of dredge treating 45,000
cu yd per week is discussed, volumes and
ratios in diagram showing approximately what
is to be expected in average property in one
week's operation; advantages lie with jigs,
as they reduce material by stages, in manner
227
228
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
that permits adjustment without remodelling
dredge.
Diesel Dredge for Aquatic Gold Mining,.
W. VAN DOORN.
Motorship v 25 n 9 Sept 1940 p 5267.
Dredge "Narino," operated by Compania Minera de Marino;
hull measures 155 ft by 70 ft and has draft
of 8 1/2 ft; propelled by three Worthington
Type DS6, 6 cyl Diesel engines with bore 13
1/4 in. and stroke 17 1/2 in., each
developing 500 hp at 360 rpm.
GoldDigging Giants.
O.A. FITZGERALD.
Compressed Air Magazine v 45 n 12 Dec 1940 p 62966301.
Statistical data on gold dredges and dredging
operations in various localities; placer
mining near Fairbanks, Alaska, where project
includes 16,000,000 cu yd of goldbearing
gravel; dredging operations at Sunbeam,
Idaho, using 8 cu ft dredge to extract gold
from 15,000,000 cu yd of gravel in valley of
Yankee Fork of Salmon River.
Extending Scope of Placer Dredging.
C.M. ROMANOWITZ and H.A. SAWIN.
American Institute of Mining and Metallurigical
Engineers Tech Pub n 1347 for mtg Feb 1941
6 p.
Review of dredge development for alluvial deposits,
esp. for gold recovery; deep dredging at
Ham-monton, Calif; removal of fines, which
tend to slide forward and accumulate in
dredge pond; new gold saving tables; length
of hull; buckets and other improved
equipment; handling large boulders.
Single Bucket Dredge for Shallow Heavy Alluvial.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Journal v 33 n 393 June
10, 1941 p 2612.
Brief illustrated description of Becker Hopkins dredge
being manufactured in United States by Yuba
Manufacturing Co; digging unit consists of
1cu yd bucket built integral with sluicetype
boom, which conveys dredged material from
bucket to screen; dredge will handle 2000 cy
yd daily; cost records from Alaska indicate
that field working costs are less than 9c
per cu yd; digging depth is 15 ft below
water level; 90 hp is required.
Bucket Line Dredge Methods.
N. CLEAVELAND.
Mining Congress Journal v 27 n 11 Nov 1941 p 1922.
Refinements and improvements made in design and
supplemental equipment is more widely
229
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
employed; field of application of these
dredges is also being widened and larger
quantities of gravel are being made
available; notes on some dredges and their
operation in California and Nevada.
Dredging.
C.M. ROMANOWITZ.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 142 n 8 pt 1 Aug. 1941
p 115.
Historical resume of developments of mining
dredges;though depths as great as 175 ft
below ground level are now being dredged
successfully, future will see greater depths
dredged at cost comparable to present
operations; buckets will reflect radical
changes in size and design; material dredged
will be more thoroughly sized; other changes
predicted.
Dragline Gold Dredging.
G.A. COLLINS.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Trans v 48
1945 p 71725 (Bul n 403 Nov 1945); see also
Mining Journal(Lond) v 26 n 5771 Mar 30 1946
p 24851.
Before 18th Annual Mining Inst of College of Mines,
Univ Washington, Jan 24 1945; from Western
Miner Feb 1945.
Bucket Dredges for Mining.
J.P. GARDEN.
New Zealand Engineering v 4 n 3, 4, Mar 10, 1949 p 1526, Apr 10 p 2525. Illustrated description of
dredge equipped with stone stacker and spud;
mooring equipment; data on costs and
performance; details of bottom tumbler,
bearings, ladder rollers and ladder; data on
bucket, drop chute, screens, winches and
sources of power.
HighSpeed BucketLines.
C.M. ROMANOWITZ.
Mining World v 22 n 6 July 1960 p 3943.
Improvement and important changes on dredges have
increased production, making possible
continued operation despite rising costs;
dredging operations are being introduced
into new areas; optimum production is
obtained by varying dredge bucket size and
line speed; dredges have highspeed bucketlines running up to 35 buckets/min;
operations are generally continuous.
229
230
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
New Zealand
River Dredging for Gold.
R.H. POSTLETHWAITE.
Mining and Scientific Press Sept. 4, 1897.
A resume of dredging as carried out in the river
Molyneaux, in New Zealand. 1500 w.
Dredging for Gold.
J.B. JAQUET.
Australian Mining Standard Sept. 22, 1898. Serial
Official report of the industry in Otago, N.Z. Ill.
Some Notes on Alluvial Mining in New Zealand. Jno.
W. GRAY.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 24, 1899.
Notes taken mainly from information given in the
Government report, showing unabated interest
in alluvial mining. 1600 w.
Gold Dredging in New Zealand.
W.H. CUTTEN.
New Zealand Mines Record Sept. 16, 1899.
Historical sketch of the dredging industry in Otago,
from a paper by W.H. CUTTEN, with tables
showing dimensions and cost, operations and
returns. 3700 w.
Dredging: Its Present and Future Outlook.
J.G. HYDE.
New Zealand Mines Record Nov. 16, 1899.
From the inspecting engineer's report. Considers the
chief difficulties to be overcome, and
improvements needed. 1000 w.
The Waiau River as a Gold Dredging Channel.
RO. CARRICK.
New Zealand Mines Record Nov. 16, 1899.
Gives a description of dredging ground peculiar to this
basin. 1600 w.
Gold Dredging in New Zealand.
W.M. MACKINNON.
British Columbia Mine Record. Dec. 1899.
Illustrated description of the methods used in the
district of Otago. 1500 w.
The Origin and Progress of Gold Dredging in New
Zealand.
W.H. CUTTEN.
Engineering Magazine Feb. 1900.
A fully illustrated paper showing the methods of
operating the gold dredging apparatus in the
waters of New Zealand, and the wonderfully
231
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
rich results which have been obtained. 3000
w.
Gold Dredging in New Zealand.
Engineering April 13, 1900.
Illustrated description of one of the largest dredges
used, and its cost and working. 1800 w.
Gold Dredging in New Zealand.
P.G. MORGAN.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug.4, 1900. Serial.
Describes the alluvial deposits showing the conditions
which led to this industry, giving the
history of early attempts at dredging, and
describing types of dredges used. Ill.
The Saving of Fine Gold on Dredges.
JOHN HAYES.
New Zealand Mines Record Aug. 16, 1900.
From the report of the Dept. of Mines on the Goldfields
of New Zealand, for the year 18991900.
Discusses the losses of gold in dredging,
and means of overcoming the difficulty. 1500
w.
Gold Dredging Experience in New Zealand.
Mining Reporter Sept. 13, 1900.
A description of some working devices, and results of
operations. 1000 w.
Notes on GoldDredging in New Zealand.
A.C. PERKINS.
New Zealand Mines Record Nov.16, 1900.
Read at meeting of the N.S.W. Chamber of Mines. The
early dredges used are described and the
improvements noted; also the manner of
working, and the cost per cu. yd. 2800 w.
The GoldDredging Industry in Otago.
New Zealand Mines Record April 16, 1901.
Table showing capital, gold obtained, and dividends
declared, with remarks on this industry.
2000 w.
Dredging for Gold in New Zealand.
RAYMOND PAYNE.
Engineering and Mining Journal Sept. 28, 1901.
An illustrated account of the methods and success
attained. 1900 w.
Another Accident Caused by Oiling Machinery While in
Motion.
-
231
232
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
New Zealand Mines Record July 16, 1902.
Describes frightful accident at Beaumont, Otago, on
dredge which the engineer was oiling. 1200
w.
GoldDredging in New Zealand.
C. EDWARD TURNER, in the "Mining Journal," London.
New Zealand Mines Record Feb. 16, 1903.
An account of its inception, progress and practice.
6000 w.
The Gold Dredging Industry in New Zealand.
WILLIAM WYLIE, in "Trans. Aust. Inst. of Min. Engrs."
Canadian Mining Review Aug. 31, 1903.
Reviews the development of this industry, methods
tried, and describes present practice. 4000
w.
New Zealand Gold Dredges.
Engineering and Mining Journal April 14, 1906.
Illustrated description of Watt and Nisbet's dredgebucket system, and a dredge "Knewstubbs"
system for the restoration of agricultural
lands. 1000 w.
GoldDredging Practice in Central Otago.
HUGH R. MACDONALD.
New Zealand Mines Record Nov. 16, 1906. Serial. 1st
part.
Briefly reviews the past history of gold dredging in
this field,showing the development of this
important branch of alluvial mining, and
describing the practice. 8000 w.
The Dredging Industry in New Zealand.
ARTHUR C. BUCKLAND.
Mining Journal May 1, 1909.
Describes the present condition and the outlook. 3000
w.
GoldDredging in New Zealand.
Times Trade and Engineering Supp., vol. 14, no. 298,
Mar. 22, 1924, p. 46.
Plan for damming of Lake Wakatipu outlet.
Gold Dredging in Central Otago, New Zealand.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review vol. 16, no.
192, Sept. 5, 1924, pp. 473475, 1 fig.
History of dredging in district.
Through Shotover Gorge with 8 c ft Bucket Dredge.
S. CHAPMAN.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 28 n 327 Dec.
9, 1935, p. 456.
Description of dredge 106 ft deep, dredging depth 35
233
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
ft. electrically driven from 11,000 v.
transmission cable, built in 1928 and in
1934 had worked out area on lower Tucker
Beach; dismantling and transporting to new
claims was considered impracticable;
features of working upstream for 1 1/2 mi,
through two steep narrow gorges and tortuous
river bed.
Launching Molyneux Dredge.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 29, n. 339,
Dec. 8, 1936, p. 1013.
Principal features of dredge under construction at
Clyde, Central Otago, New Zealand, designed
to dig 100,000 cu yd monthly from 65 ft
depth in fast flowing Molyneux River;
pontoon 156 ft. long, 45 ft. beam, and 11
ft. 6 in. deep; 47 buckets, 10 cu ft
capacity; electric power and 200hp Dieselelectric installation as emergency standby
for mooring in event of shore power failure.
Mining by Means of Dredges.
P.R. LAKE.
Mine and Quarry Engineering v 4 n 3 Mar 1939 p 97101.
Short history of gold dredging, with special note on
experience and practice in New Zealand.
Design of Gold Dredges.
W.J. SYME.
New Zealand Institution of Engineers Proc v 26, 19391940 p 22965 (discussion) 26578; see also
Chem,Engineering and Mining Rev v 32 n 380
May 10, 1940 p 299301.
Observations on design of dredges and account of
factors to be considered and methods used in
designing particular dredge; based upon
experience with gold dredging on west coast
of South Island, New Zealand; capital cost
of dredges; water supply; power supply;
speeds; flotation and trim; design of hull
or main pontoon; main drive; etc.
233
234
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Methods
Dredging
South America
Gold Dredging in Ecuador.
LEONARD L. WETMORE.
Mining Magazine May 1906.
Information concerning the placer fields and something
of their history, showing the difference
between modern methods of working placers
and the crude methods adopted by the
Spaniards. Ills. 3000 w.
Gold Dredging in Tierra del Fuego.
JUAN D. ROBERTS.
Mining Journal June 1, 1907.
An illustrated account of modern methods being
introduced in this placer mining region. 800
w.
Gold Dredging Possibilities in Bolivia.
ALEXANDER BENSON.
Mining World April 30, 1910.
Brief account of rich unexplored fields in the
interior, and the difficulties that must be
overcome in their development. 1800 w.
Gold Dredging in the River Coxipomirim, Matto Grosso,
Brazil.
LUIZ CAETANO FERRAZ.
Mining Journal March 30, 1912.
Describes the work and the dredges used. 1800 w.
Gold Dredging in Tierra Del Fuego.
LYMAN CHATFIELD.
Engineering and Mining Journal April 14, 1917.
Conditions described. Ills. 1200 w.
Gold Dredging in Chile.
J.H. IVEY.
Mining Magazine, vol. 33 n 6 Dec., 1925. pp. 338339. 1
fig.
Details of dredging operations at Las Dichas near
Vaparaiso with 6ft. bucket; allsteel dredge
capable of handling 100,000 cu. yd. per
month; considering test case for a number of
other similar deposits.
235
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER Mining Methods
Columbia
Dredging
South America
Gold Dredging in Colombia.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 2, 1905.
An account of a recent examination of the deposits on
the Magdalena river and its affluents, with
conclusions as to dredging probabilities.
3000 w.
Gold Dredging on the Choco River, Republic of Colombia,
South America.
HENRY G. GRANGER.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
Sept. 1908.
A descriptive record of an important golddredging
field. Maps. 10500 w.
Dredging in the Nechi Valley.
Engineering and Mining Journal Sept. 15, 1917.
Results in Colombia are given. 2000 w.
Life for Colombia's Dredges.
G.B. WOOD.
Mining World v 11 n 7 June 1949 p 3740; Spanish version
in Revista Mineria v 24 n 143 Aug 1949 p
1109911109.
Notes on practices of gold dredging companies operating
along Nechi River and tributaries and in
other localities in Colombia; how
reconditioning of dredge parts by use of
nickel manganese welding rod permits lower
cost operation and prolongs life of bucket
lines.
235
236
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER Mining Methods
Guianas
Dredging
South America
Recent Developments in Gold Dredging, particularly in
the Guianas (Les récents Développements des
Dragages auriféres dans le monade et
particularierement dans les Guyanes).
L. DELVAUX.
Memoires de la Société des Ingenénieurs Civils de
France Feb. 1908.
An elaborate paper discussing gold dredging problems of
all kinds and reviewing the present state of
the industry. Ills. 18400 w.
Conditions for Gold Dredging in French Guiana.
ALBERT BORDEAUX.
Engineering and Mining Journal Sept. 17, 1910.
Describes the climatic and labor conditions, stating
the requirements, costs, etc. 2000 w.
The Gold Fields of French Guiana and the New Method of
Dredging.
ALBERT F.J. BORDEAUX.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
Nov. 1910.
History and illustrated description of the country and
conditions, the geology, placers, dredging
methods, costs, etc. 8800 w.
A Recent Dredging Enterprise in French Guiana (Note sur
une récente Entreprise de Dragages auriféres
en Guyane Francaise).
LEON DELVAUX.
Memoires de la Société des Ingenénieurs Civils de
France Jan. 1911.
Describes the operations on Roches creek. Ills. 3600 w.
Gold Dredging in French Guiana (Le Dragage de l'Or en
Guyane Francaise).
LEON DELVAUX.
Génie Civil Feb. 4, 1911.
Describes conditions, practice, and extent of the
dredging operations. Ills. 2500 w.
Gold Dredging in French Guiana.
LEON DELVAUX.
Engineering and Mining Journal Feb. 11, 1911.
An illustrated account of the work of the new dredge of
the Syndicate Mine. 2500 w.
GoldDredge for French Guiana.
Engineering March 3, 1911.
Brief illustrated description. 500 w.
237
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Gold Dredging in French Guiana (Note sur la
Récuperation de l'Or dans le Dragage des
Alluvions auriféres en Guyane Fran\aise).
L.C. DE LA MARLIERE.
Memoires de la Société des Ingenénieurs Civils de
France July, 1911.
Brief description of the alluvial deposits, the
recovery practice, and the results. Ills.
2000 w.
Gold Mining in British Guiana.
Engineering and Mining Journal., vol. 110, no. 13,
Sept. 25, 1920, pp. 611614, 7 figs.
Gold production has been decreasing since 1895 and is
now only about oneeighth maximum recorded.
Few companies are still operating, but
mining is hampered by lack of transportation
and high costs.
237
238
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
S.E. Asia
Gold Dredging in Borneo.
Australian Mining Standard March 15, 1900.
An interesting interview with T.R. TOBY, who has been
recently on an exploring and prospecting
trip in West Borneo. Considers the country
sure to become a great gold producer. Ill.
2400 w.
Gold Dredging at Parocale.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 12, 1910.
An account of work on the southeast coast of the Island
of Luzon, Philippine Islands. 1500 w.
The Tin Dredging Mill "Diniang" for State Tin
Production on the Island of Banks (De
tinbaggermolen "Diniang" voor de
Gouvernementstinwinning op het eiland
Banka).
J.F. STREUR.
Ingenieur, vol. 41, no. 44, Oct. 30, 1926, pp. 893901,
12 figs.
Details of bucket dredge used in Diniang valley, two
feet or more below sea level and having area
of 1,000,000 sq. mi. with about 12,000,000
cu. mi to dredge.
Launching Sea Dredge Pontoon.
Tin Dec 1958 p 2778.
Note on sea dredge for Tongkah Harbour Tin Dredging
Ltd., being built for mining in sea areas
off coast of Thailand; hull, or pontoon of
new sea dredge is 230 ft long with beam of
72 ft and depth of 11 1/2 ft; all plate work
and steel fabrication was done at site.
239
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
U.S.
Alaska
Gold Dredging in the Nome District.
G.P. GRIMSBY.
Engineering and Mining Journal June 22, 1901.
An illustrated description of dredges used at Nome and
why they were not successful; also an
illustrated description of one being
constructed for the work. 1000 w.
Dredging for Gold in the Nome Goldfields.
OTTO HALLA.
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 18, 1905.
A brief account of the successful working of this
field. 700 w.
Dredging Beach Gravel Deposits Near Nome.
JOHN POWER HUTCHING.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 23, 1907.
Illustrates and describes methods tried and
difficulties met. 4000 w.
Dredging on the Seward Peninsula.
T.A. RICKARD.
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 28, 1908.
An account of experience with a number of dredges,
discussing the probability of its being
profitable. Ills. 5000 w.
Gold Dredging in Alaska.
GEORGE E. WALSH.
Scientific American Oct. 23, 1909.
An account of gold dredging in Australia, California,
and Alaska, showing its success in the
latter. 1200 w.
Submarine Gold Mining on the Alaskan Coast.
M.I. MACDONALD.
Mining World Nov. 20, 1909.
Brief descriptions of methods and apparatus used and
proposed for submarine mining. Ills. 1000 w.
Dredging at Nome in 1909.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 1, 1910.
An illustrated description of dredges in operation and
proposed, with a report of the results. 2500
w.
Dredging Nome Beach Sands.
Mines and Minerals March, 1910.
239
240
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Illustrates and describes a type of dredge that is
saving gold from underwater sands. 1800 w.
Pony Dredges in Alaska.
WILLIAM H. WASHBURN.
Mining and Scientific Press March 5, 1910.
A brief review of plans tried in adapting machinery to
placer mining. Ills.2000 w.
Submarine Gold Dredging at Nome, Alaska.
ELMER E. CAREY.
Mining World March 19, 1910.
Discusses plans for dredging the rich fields of the
Arctic Ocean along the Nome coast. 1500 w.
Dredging Conditions on the Seward Peninsula.
G.B. MASSEY, II.
Engineering and Mining Journal Oct. 29, 1910.
Illustrates and describes dredges and their operation
in a region noted for the general
distribution of gold. 6500 w.
Nome Dredges in 1910.
T.M. GIBSON.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 7, 1911.
Illustrates and describes dredges constructed during
the past year, and the work they are
expected to accomplish. 5500 w.
Gold Dredging Industry on Seward Peninsula.
T.M. GIBSON.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 6, 1912.
Map and report of work by the different companies.
Ills. 5000 w.
(Special)Gold Dredging on the Seward Peninsula.
CHARLES JANIN.
Mining and Scientific Press Sept.28, 1912.
Map and illustrated account of the work. 3000 w.
Some New Gold Dredges in Alaska.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 25, 1913.
Gives, briefly, details of five new dredges. Ills. 100
w.
Some Notes on Gold Dredging in Alaska.
FREDERICK POWELL.
Mining and Engineering World March 7, 1914.
Describes conditions and common practice and operation.
2500 w.
The Cache Creek Dredge Alaska.
SUMNER S. SMITH.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 23, 1916.
Details of new dredge and its working. Ills. 1200 w.
241
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Dredging for Gold on Seward Peninsula, Alaska Season
1916.
COREY C. BRAYTON.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 13, 1917.
Practice under various conditions. Ills. and Map. 3500
w.
DieselElectric Operation of Gold Dredges in Alaska.
H.J. GALLAGHER.
Oil Engine Power, vol. 2. no. 6, June 1924, pp. 312314,
6 figs.
1575 b. hp. power plant furnishing current to dredges
was placed in service in 1923 and duplicate
order followed in 1924; Diesel power enables
practically allyearround work to be carried
on.
Dredging Gold Deposits of Alaska Operations of
Fairbanks Exploration Company,
O.J. EGLESTON.
Mining Review vol. 33, no. 8, Apr. 30, 1931, pp. 1319,
12 figs.
Gravels buried from few feet to over 100 ft. in depth
and overlain by muck from few feet to over
70 ft. in thickness; hydraulicking away muck
with giants; thawing gravel and any
remaining muck by cold water pipe thawing
method; dredging thawed gravel.
Moving Gold Dredge Overland.
Engineering and Mining Journal., vol. 132, no. 1, July
13, 1931, p. 11, 1 fig.
No. 2, 9cu. ft. gold dredge of Hammon Consolidated Gold
Fields Co. at Nome, Alaska, pulled from
Little Creek to Center Creek, distance of
8000 ft; bucket crane, ladder, spuds,
stacker removed, leaving 2000 tons to be
moved; average daily progress 240 ft.
maximum movement 380 ft. working 16 hr. per
day.
Washing Gold at Fairbanks.
G.R. PLUMB.
Mines Magazine v 22 n 6 June 1932 p 910; see also
Mining Review v 34 n 26 June 28 1932 p 57.
Practice in hydraulicking away moss/muck by giants,
thawing remaining muck/gravel by cold water
method, and dredging thawed gravel and
extracting gold, at property of Fairbanks
Exploration Co.
Thawing and Dredging Gold at Fairbanks, Alaska.
R.H. OGBURN.
Mining and Metallurgy v 14 n 317 May 1933 p 2146.
Prospect drilling with Keystone drills; greatest
241
242
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
concentration in gold is at or near bedrock;
gravel is cemented by ice and is overlain by
frozen muck with ice content 20 to 80%;
frozen muck stripped by hydraulic giants,
sluicing muck off after thawing; thawing
gravel by driving 3/4 in. pipe points at
apexes of 16 ft equilateral triangles; 5
dredges handling ground up to 92 ft in
depth; dredging season Apr 15 to Dec. 15;
steamelectric power plant.
To Dredge Undersea Beaches of Alaska.
D.L. PRATT.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 22 n 20 Mar 15, 1939 p
3 and 31.
Notes on 125 ft. Diesel powered freighter to operate on
offshore placer deposits near Cordova,
Alaska; is being equipped with suction pumps
and dredging apparatus; tested deposits are
said to have shown values of 65c to $2.25
per cu yd, with average $1.35; vessel is
expected to handle 1000 to 2000 cu yd per
day, with operating costs $3000 per month;
diving equipment will be carried.
Alaska Plus Diesels Yields Platinum.
Diesel Power v 22 n 5 May 1944 p 4801, 484.
Diesels used by Goodnews Bay Mining Co for power and
light; mining operations are carried on by
two types of units, dredge and pair of
draglines; in addition, several Caterpillar
Diesel bulldozers are employed as well as
Caterpillar Diesel pumping unit; main power
on dredge is McIntosh and Seymour 8cyl, 4 cycle, 720 hp, 12 1/2 x 13in. 600 rpm
engine, driving 625kva, 60cycle, ac
Westinghouse generator equipped with 7.5 kw
exciter.
Dredging for Gold in Alaska.
Mining and Mt v 29 n 502 Oct 1948 p 57480.
In addition to its base metal and coal mining
operations, United States Smelting Refining
and Mining Co. has been one of few large
American mining companies interested in
dredging; its activities in this field are
confined to gold, and to Alaska; Fairbanks
operations, J.D. CRAWFORD and J.C. BOSWELL;
Nome operations, C.S. and W.A. GLAVINOVICH.
Principal Alaskan Dredging Operations.
Mining Engineering v 13 n 12 Dec 1961 p 13356.
Recently, gold placering has weakened but platinum from
placer gravels at Goodnews Bay has been
relatively stable since 1935; most gold
243
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
production comes from dredges operated by 2
big companies while remainder is from
sporadic mining by small groups or
individuals using hydraulic
monitors,draglines, and small dredges; sites
of major dredging activity are Fairbanks,
Nome, Nyac, Goodnews Bay, Hogatza River and
Chicken; operations in permafrost area at
Nome and Fairbanks platinum placering.
243
244
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
U.S.
California
Gold Dredging in California.
R.H. POSTLETHWAITE.
Mining and Scientific Press July 8, 1899.
Information of the work in the Feather River, near
Oroville, Cal. 1400 w.
Gold Dredging at Oroville, Cal.
H.G. PARSONS.
Mining and Scientific Press July 7, 1900.
An account of the work, the types of dredges in use,
etc. 1000 w.
A California Gold Dredger.
R.H. POSLETHWAITE.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 15, 1900.
Illustrated description of a dredger on the Feather
River. 1200 w.
Dredging for Gold.
W.S. RUSSELL.
Mines and Minerals Dec. 1900.
Facts in regard to the operation of dredges on placers
at various places in the western part of the
United States. Ill. 1800 w.
Gold Dredging in California.
THOMAS J. BARBOUR.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 26, 1901.
Abstract of a report made to the California State
Miners' Assoc. Reviews the work in dredging
of various companies with a schedule as to
what may be expected, showing the
possibilities of gold dredging. 3000 w.
Gold Dredging in California.
E.H. BENJAMIN.
New Zealand Mines Record April 16, 1901.
Information concerning this industry. At present there
are about twenty dredges running, which are
producing about $1,000,000 per year. 3000
w.
Gold Dredging Operations in California.
G.P. GRIMSLEY.
Engineering and Mining Journal June 29, 1901. Serial.
1st part.
Reviews industry in this State, and describes the
Postelthwaite dredge and its operation. Ill.
1300 w.
Dredging for Gold.
ENOS BROWN.
245
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Scientific American Nov. 8, 1902.
Illustrates and describes the work as carried on at
Oroville, Butte Co., Cal., giving a brief
review of earlier work, and explaining the
difficulties. 1400 w.
Dredging at Oroville.
NEWTON B. KNOX.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 29, 1903.
Abstract of a paper in the "Pro." of the Inst. of Min.
and Met., London. Brief account of the
dredgemining for gold in California. 900 w.
Dredging and Valuing Dredging Ground in Oroville,
California.
NEWTON BOOTH KNOX.
Canadian Mining Review - Oct. 31, 1903.
Abstract in Engineering and Mining Journal - Aug. 29,
1903.
Paper from Inst. of Min. and Met.,London. Account of
dredgemining for gold in this field. 4000
w.
Blasting Tight Placers Before Dredging.
OLIVER B. FINN.
Engineering and Mining Journal July 7, 1904.
An illustrated detailed account of the way a Keystone
driller was used in California to loosen, by
blasting, a very tight gravel deposit,
preparatory to dredging. 900 w.
Gold Dredging at Oroville.
HOWARD D. SMITH and ELWYN W. STEBBINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 8, 1904.
Describes the character of the ground, which is
peculiarly favourable to dredge operations,
and the types of dredges and methods used.
Also gives a summary of the operating
expenses. 4400 w.
Gold Dredging in Oroville District, Cal.
L.J. HOHL.
Abstract from the Transactions of the California Mining
Association.
Mining and Scientific Press April 15, 1905. Serial.
1st part.
An account of this method of working auriferous gravel
deposits, giving illustrated description of
dredges and general features of different
types. 3000 w.
Dredges for Working GoldBearing Gravels.
Engineering News April 27, 1905.
Illustrated description of a dredge recently built for
use in California, with some account of this
245
246
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
method of working. 1700 w.
A Large Gold Dredger.
Mining and Scientific Press May 6, 1905.
Illustrated description of the construction and
operation of a modern dredger said to be the
largest placer mining dredger in the world.
Also reviews the early history of dredging
in California. 3800 w.
Gold Dredging in California.
A.G. HILLEN.
Mining World Aug. 5, 1905.
Illustrated article giving information in regard to the
extent of this method of working, the cost,
etc. Map. 2500 w.
Gold Dredging in California.
Mining and Scientific Press Aug.19, 1905. Serial. 1st
part.
Information from the Bul. of the State Min. Bureau of
Cal., giving the history of dredge mining in
the state, the area of dredge gravel, etc.,
in the present number. Ills. 2800 w.
The Modern Gold Ship.
GEORGE ETHELBERT WALSH.
Scientific American Sup July 6, 1907.
An illustrated description of the work of the gold
dredge in California. 1500 w.
Gold Dredging Practice in California.
ROBERT SIBLEY.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 30, 1908.
An illustrated description of the construction of the
hull of a dredge, the machinery, the designs
most in favour and the method of operation.
6000 w.
Dredging at Oroville.
DOUGLAS WATERMAN.
Mining and Scientific Press June 5, 1909.
Illustrated description of the types of dredges in use,
and details of their operation. 3000 w.
Gold Placers Dredging Operations in California.
A.H. MARTIN.
Mining World Sept. 25, 1909.
Illustrates and describes dredges used and reviews the
advances in construction. 3500 w.
Less Known Gold Dredges in California.
W.M. KNOX.
Mining and Scientific Press July 2, 1910.
Brief descriptions of dredges working with good results
in isolated districts. Ills. 1000 w.
247
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Gold Dredging and Rock Crushing in California.
GEORGE BOWERS.
Engineering Record July 16, 1910.
Describes dredges and methods used successfully in the
Folsom Division of the Natomas Consolidated.
Ills. 2500 w.
Notes on the Construction of California Dredges.
JOHN TYSSOWSKI.
Engineering and Mining Journal Oct. 15, 1910.
A report of the tendency in building, and the cost,
giving tabulated data on the dredge
equipment and power consumption. Plate. 3500
w.
Gold Dredging in California.
CHARLES JANIN and W.M. WINSTON.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 7, 1911.
Maps and review of the work during 1910. 1500 w.
Dredging for Gold in California.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal July 8, 1911.
Illustrates modern dredgers and gives a report of
recent work. 5500 w.
The YubaRiver Dredging Field in California.
A.H. MARTIN.
Mining and Engineering World Sept. 2, 1911.
Illustrated description of the Yuba dredges and their
work. 1500 w.
Dredge Building in California.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Sept. 30, 1911.
Illustrated discussion of 24 dredges to be built in
1911, at a cost varying from $35,000 to
$275,000 each. 5000 w.
Latest Gold Dredge Built in the Oroville Field.
GEORGE L. HURST.
Mining and Engineering World Oct. 2, 1911.
Illustrated description of Oroville's largest and
latest dredge. 1000 w.
Giant Gold Dredges at Natoma, California.
NEWTON CLEAVELAND.
Mining and Scientific Press Oct. 7, 1911.
Illustrated description of dredges of the endlesschain
type,and their operation.
1500 w.
The Design and Mechanical Features of the California
Gold Dredge.
ROBERT E. CRANSTON.
Journal of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers
247
248
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Feb. 1912.
Describes designs commonly used in California,
discussing the mechanical features. Ills.
14500 w.
Northern California Gold Dredging.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal March 23, 1912.
Describes different types of dredges used, each
designed for the particular conditions. Map.
4000 w.
PresentDay Problems in California Gold Dredging.
CHARLES JANIN.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
March, 1912.
A review of the development and of the work of modern
dredges. Ills. 5000 w.
Elevating TenCent Gravel at a Profit.
C.S. HALEY.
Mining and Scientific Press April 13, 1912.
Illustrates and describes an elevating system in use in
California for handling lowgrade, poor dump
bars of rivers and similar problems. 4000 w.
Dredges on Upper American River.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 18, 1912.
An account of operations in California dredging fields.
Ills. 3000 w.
Gold Dredging in the Folsom Field of California.
A.H. MARTIN.
Mining and Engineering World May 25, 1912.
Illustrates dredge used, and gives an account of one of
the most important dredging fields in the
State. 2500 w.
Reducing California Dredging Costs.
AL H. MARTIN.
Mines and Minerals June 1912.
Explains economies resulting from the use of dredges
having buckets of larger capacity. 1500 w.
The Union Dredge at Folsom, Calif.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 10,
1912.Illustrated description of this closeconnected, bucketelevator dredge,designed to
dig 55 ft. below the water line. 1000 w.
Dredging on Butte Creek, California.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 16, 1912.
Describes two bucketelevator gold dredges, showing
differences in constructional details. Ills.
5000 w.
249
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Gold Dredging in California.
CHARLES JANIN.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 4, 1913(Special)
A review of operations during the year. 2500 w.
Natoma No. 10, an AllSteel Dredge.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 31, 1913.
Illustrated detailed description of dredge, completed
in 1912, for use in California. 3500 w.
Gold Dredging at Mammoth Bar, California.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 24, 1914.
Illustrated account of work with Pacific No. 1 dredge
operating on American River. 2500 w.
The Latest and Largest ElectricallyOperated Gold
Dredge.
W.H. GARDNER and W.M. SHEPARD.
General Electrical Review May, 1914.
Describes and illustrates in detail the construction,
equipment and operation of the allsteel Yuba
No. 14. 4000 w.
Gold Dredging Operations of the Ashburton Mining Co.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 9, 1914.
Describes the operations of the first company in the
American River district of California. 2500
w.
Jigs on a California Dredge.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 29, 1916.
Grinding mill and jib system installed on a dredge and
successfully used. Ills. 1000 w.
Yuba No. 15 AllSteel Gold Dredge.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 19, 1916.
Largest placer dredge, at work in California. 1000 w.
Yuba No. 16 DoubleStacker Dredge.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 1, 1917.
Details of one of the largest gold placer dredges in
the world, and the first doublestacker of
its type. Ills. 1000 w.
Possibilities of Dredging in the Oroville District,
California.
CHARLES H. THURMAN.
Mining and Scientific Press, vol. 118, no. 8, Feb. 22,
1919, pp. 257258.
Reasons why earlier type of dredge did not recover all
249
250
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
of the gold.
Features of Electrically Operated Hydraulic Dredge.
CHARLES W. GEIGER.
Cement, Mill and Quarry, vol. 15, no. 6, Sept. 20,
1919. pp. 3537, 5 figs.
Description of dredge owned and operated by City of
Oakland, Cal.; advantages of electric drive
and savings effected. Centralstation service
is used.
Gold Mining in California.
GEORGE J. YOUNG.
Engineering and Mining Journal. vol. 109, no. 7, Feb.
14, 1920, pp. 439447, 12 figs.
Said that golddredging industry is declining, and that
drift, placer, and hydraulic mining produce
small amount of precious metal and future
production is dependent upon deeplode
mining.
ClamShell Dredges of Large Size on the Sacramento.
Engineering News Record, vol. 86, no. 23, June 9, 1921,
pp. 978981, 3 figs.
Design and construction of clamshell dredges built in
recent years for use in Sacramento Valley,
Cal. Dredges with booms up to 240 ft. in
length operate buckets which carry 8 cu. yd.
of material.
Description of Property and Operations of Lewiston
Dredge, Lewiston, Calif.
L.K. REQUA.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 6660 Nov. 1932 14
p. supp plates.
Operating history and practice of Placer Development
Ltd. on Trinity River in Trinity County,
Calif.
Methods and Costs of Dredging Auriferous Gravels at
Lancha Piana, Amador County, Calif.
C.G. PATMON.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 6659 Nov. 1932 16
p supp plates.
Practice of Lancha Plana Gold Dredging Co. operating
near Mokelumne River 12 mi west of San
Adreas, Calif.
Safety Practices in California Gold Dredging.
S.H. ASH.
US Bureau of Mines Bul n 352 1932 31 p.
Status of gold dredging in California; safety practices
and conditions at properties of principal
operators; accident statistics; examples of
nonfatal and fatal accidents; extracts from
safety rules of California Industrial
Accident Commission.
251
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
$35 Gold Stimulates Dredge Designer's Ingenuity.
C.M. ROMANOWITZ and G.J. YOUNG.
Engineering and Mining Journal, v 135 n 8 Aug 1934 p
33841.
Features in redesign and enlargement of Yuba
Consolidated Gold Fields. No. 17 dredge;
after completion of planned work at
Hammonton, Calif, dredge was shut down in
1926; change in value of gold changed status
of marginal low grade deposits; new boat
handles gravels to depth of 150 ft.
Dredge Yardage Improved by Adopting Automatic Control
for SideLine Winch Motor.
F.L. BOISSONNAULT.
Engineering and Mining Journal, v 135 n 9 Sept 1934 p
3923.
Compares manual operation in making adjacent cuts
between same points showed increase of 12 to
19% in hourly production depending on nature
of ground; saving was 0.29c per cu yd. or
approx-imately $10,000 per year. In
operation of dredge of Natomas Company in
Folsom area of California.
Natomas' Newest Dredge Has Novel Points of Design.
J.B. HUTTL.
Engineering and Mining Journal, v 136 June 1935, p.
2702.
Features of 16 cu ft of allsteel dredge completed at
Salsbury, 6 mi west of Folsom, Calif;
directdriven hoist; dc power for bucketline
motors and bowline winches; air operated
brakes on winches for stern line and ladder
hoist; pushbutton starting; automatic
control; electric cranes for repairs and
maintenance; speed reducers on all
mechanical units.
VariableVoltage Drive Boosts Gold Dredge Output.
C. STOECKLY.
Electrical World v 105 n 21 Oct 5 12 1935 p 245 and 80.
Improved pf.reduced power consumption and increased
production accomplished for 500cu ydperhr
riverbottom dredge by Natomas Co.operating
near Folsom Calif; designed by L.S. ROSENER,
fully electrified boat embodies many radical
departures from established designs.
Arroyo Seco's New Dredge.
J.B. HUTTL.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 136 n 10 Oct. 1935 p
4946.
Design features of installation near One,Calif; steel
hull 88 ft. long 40 ft. wide 7 ft deep;
251
252
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
digging depth 32 ft. 82 close connected 6 ft
buckets; electric drive; with rated capacity
140,000 to 160,000 cu yd per month, has dug
and treated 73,000 cu yds gravel per day.
Successful DragLine Dredge.
J.F. MAGEE.
American Institute of Mining and Metallurgical
Engineers Tech Publ n 757 mtg Feb. 1936 16
p.
New plant by Wyandotte Gold Dredging Co. in Oroville
area California, in 1936; tract operated
from Apr 5, 1935 to Jan.1936 has gravel of
two "runs" or ages overlying false bedrock
of decomposed lava ash; average depth of
gravel dug was 9 1/2 ft;prospecting by lines
of shafts sunk by hand, 30 to 75 acres;
operating data; costs; net operating profit
$57,560.95 on investment of $40,000.
Dragline Dredges Used in California Gold Fields.
A.M. WILSON.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 19 n 22 Apr 15 1936 p
5 and 28.
Features of equipment used in Oroville field, suitable
for small tracts of land and shallow
gravels; floating barge washing plant,
separate from dragline boat; construction
cost from $12,000 to $15,000; boat handles
3200 cu yd gravel/24 hr.,digging average of
9 ft to soft false bedrock; est. operating
cost 10c per cu yd; use of portable steel
boats, built in sections; advantage of
Diesel engine power.
Digging Gold With Dragline and Doodlebug.
D.W. EVANS.
Excavating Engineer v 30 n 5 May 1936 p 2313, and 258.
Description of plant operating near Valley Springs,
Calif; BucyrusErie 34B Diesel dragline with
1 1/2 cu yd bucket used to dig gravel and
deliver to floating washing plant known as
"doodlebug"; one advantage over dredge is
that, without digging machinery on boat,only
30 in. draft is required; details of
equipment and operation.
Novel Washing Plant Designed for Shallow Placers.
J.B. HUTTL.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 137 n 10 Oct 1936 p
4956.
Brief description of sectionalized plant used by
Pioneer Dredging Co near Redding, Calif; all
units are within loadcarrying capacity of
large truck, heaviest piece weighing about 7
tons; digging element is No. 601 Lima
dragline equipped with 1 1/4 yd Page bucket;
washing plant is built entirely of steel,
253
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
including hull, which is separate unit from
superstructure.
DragLine Dredging.
J.F. MAGEE.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Trans v 40
1937 mtg Oct 1936 p 11725 Bul n 298 Feb
1937. Partial rewrite, with data
supplementing earlier paper by same author,
in Am Inst Mining and Met Engrs Tech Publ n
757 mtg Feb 1936; description of properties,
equipment and operations of Wyandotte Gold
Dredging Co. on Farnan Ranch in Oroville
district, Calif; operating accounts for
three units given, showing yields, costs and
profits.
Gold Dredging in California and Methods Devised to
Increase Recovery.
E.S. LEAVER and J.A. WOOLF.
American Institute of Mining and Metallurigical
Engineers Tech Publ n 792 (Mining
Technology) Feb. 1937 18 p and July
(correction) 1 p.
Description of operations, with particular reference to
unusual features, including types of
deposits and recent attempts to improve
recovery of gold; dredging areas; types of
dredges; types of deposits; experimental
work by US Bureau of Mines, in development
of gold recovery methods. Bibliography.
New Departure in Placer Gold Dredging.
A.N. CLARK.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 22 n 14 Dec 15 1938 p
45 and 367.
Features of mobile plant, for dry land transportation
from property to property, designed for
Panob Gold Dredging Co. at Loomis,
Calif;washing plant is fed by 1 1/4 yd
dragline shovel; gravel handling capacity
100 cu yd per hr and uses only 400 gal water
per min; similar plant planned, to be
equipped with placertype jigs for gold
recovery.
Dragline Dredges New Way to Mine Placer Gold.
C.W. MERRILL.
Mining and Metallurgy v 19 n 384 Dec 1938 p 5215.
Development of dragline excavation auriferous gravel by
H. ONYETT, near Oroville, Calif. in 1933;
other operations in California and
elsewhere;features of equipment design,
plant assembly and operating practice;
statistical data on California operations.
253
254
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Placer Mining Dredging Still One of California's
Leading Industries.
C.M. ROMANOWITZ and H.A. SAWIN.
Western Machinery and Steel World v 31 n 1 Jan 1940 p
146; see also Pac Mar Rev v 37 n 2 Feb 1940
p 202.
Use of gold dredges in California; large gold
production, development of design of dredge;
power for dredging is usually electric, if
available, and is delivered to dredge by
submarine shore cable floated on barges;
most dredges in California had ac electric
equipment, but in recent years several have
been equipped with dc units and variable
speeds.
Some Operating Costs of Dredging on Klamath River.
V. AUSTIN.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 141 n 9 Sept 1940 p
57.
Cost sheet of Lincoln Gold Dredging Co., covering its
operations on Klamath River, near Happy
Camp, Cali. from March 15 to Sept. 3, 1939;
also 500,000 cy yd handled by dragline and
floating washer at less than 13c per cu yd.
Dragline Dredging in Siskiyou County.
C.V. AVERILL
California Journal of Mines and Geology v 37 n 2 Apr
1941 p 32831.
Special feature of two installations described; Scandia
mine, on Horse Creek near Klamath River,
Moccsion mine on Klamath River, about 1 1/2
mi upriver from Horse Creek; equipment and
operation.
Developments in California Bucket Line Dredge Methods.
N. CLEAVELAND.
Mining Journal (Lond) v 216 n 5558 Feb 28 1942 p 98100.
Before Metal Mining Convention, Am Mining Congress,
indexed in Engineering Index 1941, p 550,
from Mining Congress J, Nov 1941.
Deep Gravels Dredged Successfully.
H. SAWIN.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 144 n 7 July 1943 p 971.
Description of principal parts of Yuba No. 20 dredge,
at Hammonton, Calif. designed for digging to
depth of 120 ft. below water level, at times
against bank of 50 ft.above water; electric
power; auxiliary features; operating time
(three shifts) has averaged 21 hr 39 min per
day; gravel dugh as averaged 12,260 cu yd
per day, at field cost of 4.32 c per cu yd.
Operations of Golden Feather Dredging Company.
E.A. WILTSEE.
255
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mining Congress Journal v 30 n 8 Aug 1944 p 214, 35.
Historical and descriptive notes on combined flood
control and mining project at Oroville,
Calif. for many years, city had been opposed
to dredging operations, fearing possible
inundation from irregular distribution of
dredge tailings; preliminary prospecting
showed average of 25 c per cu yd; average of
entire deposit removed was 26 5/8 c per cu
yd.
Costs in Dragline Gold Dredging.
C.H. THURMAN.
American Institute of Mining and Metallurgical
Engineers Tech Publ n 1900, 1945 6 p
(Mining Technology July 1945). Dragline
dredges should not be considered for mining
large areas of lowgrade placer gravel;
comparison with bucketline dredges;
percentages of operating time are important
factors; examples of cost of operation of
draglines in California, prior to late 1942.
Gold Dredging in California.
H.A. SAWIN.
Mining Congress Journal v 32 n 8 Aug 1945 p 614.
Data are presented to contradict assertion that dredges
are ruining farming in California; dredge
tailings for many years have been principal
source of California's road and building
materials; arguments regarding resoiling.
Refore Mining Committee of Commonwealth Club
of San Francisco.
Hard Digging.
Mining World v 8 n 2 Feb 1946 p 246.
Description of equipment and operation of Tuolumne Gold
Dredging Corp about 1 1/2 mi south of La
Grange, Stanislaus County, Calif; dredge was
built in 1937 and later modified; hull 155
ft by 72 ft. wide. 144 ft. ladder with 100
buckets each 12 cu ft.
Placer Mining Dredges.
R.G. PAUL.
Western Machinery and Steel World v 38 n 7 July 1947 p
7881, 112.
Historical note on gold mining and use of dredges in
California including information on details
and principals involved in operation of
modern dredge equipment employed at Yuba
Mft. Co. Benicia, Calif.
"Bobtailed" Dredge on California's Clear Creek.
A.N. CLARK.
255
256
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mining World v 10 n 6 May 1948 p 30, 74.
Narrative description of dragline operation working
below French Gulch in western Shasta County:
1 1/2 cu yd shovel feeds to hopper, which
delivers to 48 in. trommel; operating three
8hr shifts, plant handles 2000 to 2500 cu yd
per day; one 28 hr run said to have yielded
25 oz of gold.
Dredging, Evolving Art.
H.S. SAWIN.
Mining World v 11 n 1 Jan 1949 p 379.
Historical outline; first successful dredging of gold
from California rivers was by W.P. HAMMON in
1898; dredging vs agriculture controversy;
improvements in dredge design; summary of
California dredging practice; use of
amalgamation and jigs; effects of pegged
gold price of $35 per ounce.
California Placer Dredging Its Influence as Worldwide
Industry.
H.A. SAWIN.
Mine and Quarry Engineering v 16 n 7 July 1950 p 205120. from Mining World Jan 1949.
These Jigs Pay Their Own Way ... in Gold and
Aggregates.
Rock Products v 61 n 3 Mar 1958 p 114, 116, 144.
One of largest applications of jigs for separating
light and heavy material from aggregate is
that of Yuba Consolidated Gold Fields near
Marysville, Calif; company operates huge
dredges which dig up aggregate for its gold
content and process it on board with
jibs;these floating processing plants each
go through 650 to 800 cu yd of aggregate per
hr.
257
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
U.S.
Colorado
Dredging Placer Gravels at Breckenridge, Colorado.
ARTHUR LAKES, SR.
Mines and Minerals July 1908.
Illustrates and describes the ground worked and the
construction and operation of the dredges.
5000 w.
Dredging at Breckenridge, Colorado.
A.H. BRADFORD and ROY P. CURTIS.
Mining and Scientific Press Sept. 11, 1909.
Thesis. Describes briefly the geology of the region and
the extensive placer deposits; reviews past
operations and the causes of their failure;
and describes present methods and results.
Ills. 4400 w.
Placer Mining in Western United States.
E.E. GARDNER and C.H. JOHNSON.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 6788 Feb 1935 81
p supp plates. Part III.
Dredging and other forms of mechanical handling of
gravel, and drift mining.
Colorado Attracts Another Large BucketLine Dredge.
H.W.C. PROMMEL.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 142 n 10 Oct 1941 p
357.
Description of dredge built by South Platte Dredging
Co., completed in June 1941 and being
operated in valley of South Platte River
near Fairplay, Park County, Colo: weight
fully equipped is 2400 tons; hull is 54 l/2
by l58 ft; digging ladder, 139 ft. from
tumbler to tumbler, has 103 11 cu ft buckets
weighing 3300 lb each and can dig 70 ft
below water level; rated capacity 17,000 cu
yd per day; stacker 165 ft long; gold is
recovered by tables and jigs.
Colorado's Largest Dredge.
Mining World v 8 n 9 Aug 1946 p 369.
Operations of South Platte Dredging Co near Fairplay,
Park County, Colo; digging ladder is
equipped with 103 bolted lip buckets of 11
cu ft capacity, close connected, designed to
dig 70ft below water level; electric power;
gold recovery system.
Big Boulders Beaten.
257
258
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mining World v 10 n 1 Jan 1948 p 1820.
Illustrated notes on dragline dredge operated on 2900acre tract between Alma and Fairplay, Colo;
character of gravel; handling boulders;
washing plant.
259
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Methods
Dredging
U.S.
Georgia
Gold Dredging in North Georgia.
HENRY V. MAXWELL.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 2, 1901.
Illustrations with brief descriptions of methods. 500
w.
259
260
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Methods
Dredging
U.S.
Idaho
Gold Dredging on Snake River in Idaho.
F. POWELL.
Engineering and Mining Journal Oct. 6, 1900.
Discusses the reasons for the numerous failures, the
dredger used, cost,etc. Ill.
1800 w.
Dredging for Fine Gold in Idaho.
ROBERT BELL.
Engineering and Mining Journal Feb. 15, 1902.
Describes methods of placer mining on the Snake River.
Ill. 1800 w.
A Gold Mining Dredge of Recent Design.
SAMUEL S. WYER.
Engineering and Mining Journal June 9, 1904.
Illustrates and describes a dredge designed by the
writer for work in Idaho, which presents
unique features. 2000 w.
Dredging for Fine Gold in Idaho.
ROBERT BELL.
Mining World March 11, 1905.
Describes method employed to recover fine gold from the
Snake River placer beds. 2000 w.
GoldDredging in the Boise Basin of Idaho.
JOHN H. MILES.
Mining and Scientific Press Sept. 14, 1912.
Brief review of the history of gold dredging in the
Boise Basin,illustrating and describing the
15 cu. ft. Yuba dredge now at work. 1500 w.
Recent Developments in Idaho Dredging.
F.A. KENNEDY.
Mining Congress Journal v 26 n 3 Mar 1940 p 224.
Descriptive review; three bucket type dredges and one
dragline dredge have changed from sluice
boxes and riffles to placer jigs for
improving gold recovery; details of jigging
operation; flow sheet of De Lamar plant, in
Silver City district; dragline boats in
Idaho have not found satisfactory method to
handle boulders, except to avoid getting
them in boat; notes on other items of
practice.
261
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
U.S.
Montana
Handling Refractory Placer Ground.
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 30, 1895.
Illustrated description of a gold dredging plant at
Bannack, Mont. The bucket dredge uncovers
the river bottom and then makes a dam
further up stream; the water is pumped from
the pit below and the rich gold gravel
excavated to rock by hand. 1400 w.
PlacerMining Dredges on Grasshopper Creek, Montana.
Engineering News Oct. 14, 1897.
Illustrated description of the ladder dredge used for
this work. 1000 w.
Gold Dredging in Montana.
EUGENE B. BRADEN.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 20, 1897.
Illustrated description of dredging experiments in this
state, with their results. 2500 w.
Late GoldDredging Practice.
RALPH L. MONTAGNE.
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 2, 1901
Describes an attempt to use this method in Montana in
1894, and the difficult ties met; also
discusses the economic advantages of
dredging methods. Serial. 1st part. 2100 w.
.
Electric Gold Dredging.
Electric Review, Lond Jan. 18, 1907.
Description, with illustration, of an electric dredge
in service in Montana. 900 w.
Gold Dredging Practice at Ruby, Montana.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal June 29, 1907. Serial.
1st part.
An illustrated account of how the Conrey Placer Mining
Company has met a series of difficult
conditions in handling clayey gravel and
boulders. 3000 w.
Dredging in Montana and Idaho.
W.A. SCOTT.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 1, 1910.
A report of the gold dredging operations. Ills. 1700 w.
261
262
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Gold Dredging Operations in Montana.
J.P. ROWE.
Mining World Aug. 27, 1910
Describes the various properties being worked,
illustrating the dredges used. 3000 w. .
Gold Dredging near Ruby, Montana.
Engineering and Mining Journal April 22, 1911.
Illustrated description of the improved machinery
recently introduced in this field. 1800 w.
Dredging at Ruby, Montana.
FLOYD BUSHNELL.
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 25, 1911.
Illustrated description of the Conroy dredge No. 4, and
the work. 1500 w.
Gold Dredging Operations in Breckenridge District.
ARTHUR LAKES, JR.
Mining and Engineering World Dec. 2, 1911.
Illustrated description and history of this region,
9,600 ft. above the sea, and the appliances
and methods used and results obtained. 4500
w.
The Magpie Dredge, Montana.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 24, 1912
Illustrated description of a 5 cu. ft. dredge of a
modified California type. 3000 w.
Electric Power in Gold Dredging.
T.D. PRIER.
Electric Journal Dec. 1916.
Gold dredging in Montana. 2500 w.
Small Placers to Benefit from Dredge Improvement,
C.M. ROMANOWITZ and G.J. YOUNG.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 135 n 6 June 1934 p
2489.
General comments on tendency towards sectionalized
construction, to facilite dismantling and
transportation and reerection; description
of dredge installed near Avon, Mont; bucket
capacity 5 3/4 cu. ft., digging depth 26 ft;
hull is constructed by bolting together 28
steel pontoons, each of welded watertight
construction.
Gold Dredging Operations Near Helena, Montana
M. GREENFIELD.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 20 n 14 Dec. 15, 1936
p 5 and 29.
Brief descriptions of 10 installations and their
operation.
263
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Dredging Washington Bar.
F.G. FRINK, JR.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 140 n 3 Mar 1939 p 412.
Notes on operation in locality 70 mi southeast of
Butte, Mont., where placers were formerly
worked by hand; ground is cemented and
contains many large boulders; digging varies
from 20 to 28 ft against 10 to 15 ft bank,
which is carved by undermining; design
features of dredge with hull built of 23
steel pontoons, handling 3600 cu yd per day
with close linked chain of 4 1/2 cu ft
buckets; electric power, with total of 260
hp consumed.
Running 6Cu Ft Dredge at Helena, Montana,
D.M. MANN.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 141 n 8, Aug 1940 p
64.
Brief account of equipment and operations of Porter
Bros Corp at lower end of Last Chance Gulch,
about 1 mi north of city of Helena, Mont;
operating cost over 4
1/2 yr is $0.0491 per cu yd on gravel averaging 42 ft.
deep.
Unique Bucketline Dredge Recovers Placer Scheelite.
W.A. NOON.
Engineering and Mining Journal n 151 n 5 May 1950 p 824.
Description of operations of H and H Mines Inc., on
Henderson Creek, about 17 mi south of
Drummond, Mont; gold dredge is only one in
United States that was not shut down during
World War II, due to production of tungsten
concentrates; dredge and shore plant flow
sheets; test data; operation details.
263
264
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
U.S.
Nevada
Dayton's Dragline Dredge.
Mining Congress Journal v 27 n 7 July 1941 p 146.
Features of equipment of Dayton Dredging Co. operating
at Dayton, Nev; BucyrusMonihan dragline with
15 cu yd bucket delivers gravel to hopper on
floating gold recovery plant; dragline can
dig to depths greater than 100 ft and can
handle 15,000 cu yd gravel per day.
Nevada's Manhattan Gold Dredge.
A.N. CLARK.
Mining Journal. (Phoenix, Ariz) v 29 n 23 Apr 30 1946 p
24.
Project described is only successful bucket dredge
mining enterprise in Nevada; operations
began in Oct. 1938, about 4 mi west of old
mining town of Manhattan; available yardage
estimated as 25,000,000 cu yd; dredge boat
172 ft long, 60ft beam, draws 9 ft of water;
chain of 105 buckets; each 10 cu ft, digs to
75 ft below surface of pond; daily capacity
12,000 cu yd; equipment and operating
details.
New 17,000ton DryLand "Dredge" Uses Draglines, Shovel,
Belts, Washing Plant,
J.B. HUTTL.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 151 n 6 June 1950 p
6870.
Round Mountain Gold Dredging Corp, Nye County, Nev,
operating since Jan 1, 1950; main placer
deposit is of residual type; construction
program involved building large central
gravel washing plant, preparation of pit,
installation of portable crushing plant, and
conveyor system for transporting mined and
crushed gravel from pit to washing plant,
and water supply system.
How Natomas Keeps Large Dredge Operating in Desert
J.B. HUTTL.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 151 n 10 Oct. 1950 p
969.
Twin stackers on bucketline dredge near mouth of Copper
Canyon, handle 500 yd per hr; 9 1/2 cu ft
buckets clean bedrock down to 85 ft below
water line, come up with gravel at 35
buckets per min; dc motors permit high speed
and flexibility of control; chief problems
are power and water supply.
265
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
U.S. Oregon
Gold Dredging in Southwestern Oregon.
R.C. TREASHER.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 142 n 3 Mar 1941 p 3941.
Of 22 areas in Jackson and Josephine Counties, that had
been or were being dredged in spring of
1940, 13 are active including 2 connected
bucketline dredges, 5 dragline floating
washing plants, and 6 power shovel
excavators; notes on individual plants and
operations; map indicating locations of 22
areas.
265
266
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER Mining Method
Dakota
Dredging
U.S.
South
Castle Creek Dredge at Mystic, South Dakota.
JESSE SIMMONS.
Mining and Engineering World Aug. 26, 1911.
Information concerning the first dredge installation in
the Black Hills, S. Dakota. Ills. 1200 w.
267
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
U.S.S.R.
The GoldDredging Fields of Eastern Russia.
C.W. PURINGTON and J.B. LANDFIELD, JR.
Engineering Magazine Dec. 1901.
A fully illustrated study of the auriferous gravels of
Eastern Russia, showing the favourable
conditions for electric mining. 4000 w.
Gold Dredging in the Urals, with Notes on Dredging in
Siberia.
WILLIAM H. SHOCKLEY.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
July 1906.
An illustrated article giving data of gold dredging in
the Urals, and information regarding the
country, labour, etc. 2000 w.
A 5 1/2 Foot Dredger with Two Trommels.
D. ZICKS.
Mining Journal May 30, 1908.
Describes a dredge built by the Poutiloff Works Co.,
Russia, for gold recovery. Ills. 6000 w.
Siberian Dredging Statistics for 1908.
JEROME B. LANDFIELD.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 22, 1910.
Gives a resume of statistics gathered by the Gold and
Platinum Miners' Assn. of Russia, showing
conditions. 1000 w.
Cost of Dredging in Russia and Siberia.
W.H. SHOCKLEY.
Mining and Scientific Press May 7, 1910.
Information based on a report of the Commission of
Engineers organized to consider the utility
of dredges in Russia. 1500 w.
Kolchan Placer of the Orsk Goldfields, Ltd.
PURINGTON and HUTCHINS
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 7, 1910.
Information, reports by authors, concerning this
eastern Siberian dredging field. 2500 w.
The Dredging Industry in Russia.
S.I. LITTAUER.
Mining and Scientific Press May 20, 1911.
Abstract translation of a general review of the Russian
situation in the golddredging industry.
Editorial. 2500 w.
GoldDredging in Russia.
267
268
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
CHARLES JANIN.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 6, 1912. (Special)
Illustrated review. 1400 w.
Loss of Gold in Dredging Operations in Russia.
THOMAS REECE.
Mining and Engineering World Oct. 5, 1912
Reviews an article by BARBOT DEMARNY, in the Gorniy
Jour. 1600 w.
Dredging by Hand in Siberia.
JOHN POWER HUTCHINS.
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 22, 1913.
Describes the conditions under which such work is
performed, in the recovery of gold or
platinum from the beds of streams. Ills.
1000 w.
Dredging in the Russian Empire.
JOHN POWER HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 14, 1914.
A brief outline of the history of dredging in Russia
and the reasons for failure of most of the
companies. Ills. 4800 w.
Our Dredging and Dredge Construction Problems.
E.N. BARBOT DEMARNY.
Gorniy Journal, vol. 105, no. 1, Jan. 1929, pp. 8187.
General discussion of gold mining by dredging in
Siberia and other goldmining districts of
Russia; prospects of mechanization of gold
mining in Russia; with special reference to
introduction of American methods. (In
Russian).
Some Fundamentals of Dredge Design.
A.A. ROZHNOVSKY.
Tzvetniye Metalli n 8 Aug 1931 p 104858.
Principles of design of gold dredge, including ore
concentration plant, especially adapted for
Russian conditions experience with Bucyrus,
Marion and Yuba gold dredges in Siberia. (In
Russian)
269
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER Mining Method
Repairs
Dredging
Construction and
The GoldDredge as a Machine.
Engineer, Lond April 12, 1907.
Discusses defects of these dredges and the causes of
breakdowns and interruption of work. 4500 w.
The Metallurgy of Gold Dredging.
Mining Journal Jan. 9, 1909.
Explains some of the troubles and causes of failure,
showing the necessity of improving the
present practice. 4000 w.
Failures in Spuds.
HOWARD D. SMITH.
Mining and Scientific Press May 22, 1909.
On the care that should be taken to provide for the
strains in these long steel beams used to
hold gold dredges against the bank. Ills.
500 w.
Righting the Calaveras Dredge.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 30, 1912.
Gives the history of a 6cu ft gold dredge, showing the
endurance through constant operation and two
serious mishaps. Ills. 2500 w.
Righting an Overturned Gold Dredge.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Oct. 25, 1913.
Illustrated account of the righting of Natomas No. 5,
which sank in 49 ft. of water, starboard
side down, June 8, 1913. 2000 w.
The Design of Gold Dredge Buckets.
GEORGE E. SIBBETT.
Engineering and Mining Journal Feb. 7, 1914.
Illustrates and describes new type used on the Yuba
Consolidated Goldfields. 2500 w.
Construction of an AllSteel Dredge.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal March 28, 1914. Serial,
1st part.
Illustrated description of the construction of Yuba No.
14 allsteel 16cu. ft. bucketelevator goldplacer dredge at Hammonton, Calif. 1800 w.
Effect of Dredge Pond Water on Steel Hulls.
269
270
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
W.H. WRIGHT.
Engineering and Mining Journal Sept. 26, 1914.
Tests of paint protectives in mining operations. 1000
w.
Righting a Wrecked Gold Dredge.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 12, 1917.
Natomas No. 7 allsteel gold dredge capsized in April,
1916. Righted in six months, eleven days at
a cost of $108,248. Ills. 2000 w.
Shop Operations and Repairs on Gold Dredges.
FRANK A. STANLEY.
Western Machinery World, vol. 12, no. 7, July 1921, pp.
290293, 13 figs.
Features of shop practice on Natomas Co. of California
in connection with making new parts for
dredges and repair of old parts at company's
plant.
Dredge Construction at Dayton, Nev.
GEORGE J. YOUNG.
Engineering and Mining Journal., vol. 112, no. 3, July
16, 1921, pp. 9196, 12 figs.
Erection of steel hull and dredger equipment. Design
made to conform to important parts obtained
from dismantled dredges.
Forging Gold Dredge Bucket Pins
Western Machinery World, Vol. 12, no. 8, August 1921,
pp. 337338, 6 figs.
Heat treatment and method of recording data of
individual pins.
GoldDredge Bucket and Other Work
FRANK A. STANLEY.
American Machinist, vol. 55, no. 26, Dec. 29, 1921, pp.
10351036, 7 figs.
Manganese steel used for lips. Oxyacetylene torch cuts
holes located by a jig. Repairing a large
pulley.
Operations in the Construction of Gold Dredges.
FRANK A. STANLEY.
Western Machinery World, vol. 13, no. 3, Mar. 1922, pp.
7579, 10 figs.
Machining of gears, links for ladders, spiders for
driving wheels, and erecting of winches.
Emergency Repairs on a Gold Dredge Gear.
FRANK C. HUDSON.
American Machinist, vol. 59 no. 11, Sept. 13, 1923, pp.
393394, 3 figs.
Saving undue delay on milliondollar dredge; reinforcing
cracked hub with heavy plates shrunk and
bolted into place.
271
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Gold Dredges and Some of Their Repairs.
American Machinist, vol. 59, no. 24, Dec. 20, 1923, pp.
913914, 6 figs.
Details of type of machine little known east of Pacific
Coast; repairing manganese steel buckets and
replacing them in chain.
Dismantling and Rebuilding a Gold Dredge.
Engineering and Mining Journal, vol. 128, no. 19, Nov.
9, 1929, pp. 736737, 3 figs.
Brief note on Bucyrus dredge with 77 buckets of 6cu.
ft. capacity, which excavates to depth of 30
ft.; completely equipped electrically; total
cost of moving and rebuilding at point 14
mi. upstream was about $32,000.
When Gold Dredge Capsizes.
C. THOMAS.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 138 n 6 June 1937 p
27982.
Description of righting and dismantling over turned
gold placer dredge near Folsom, Calif; hull
10 ft 6 in, deep 56 ft wide and 150 ft long,
with displacement 2200 tons u der operating
conditions; details of salvaging job with
photographic illustrations and sketch plan.
Metals Used in Dredging Industry.
H.A. SAWIN and C.M. ROMANOWITZ.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 22 n 4 July 15 1938 p
35.
General commentary on improvements in dredge capacities
and efficiency, attributed largely to
improvements in steel used in dredge
construction; individual items of dredge
parts discussed, as concerns most suitable
alloys to meet requirements of design.
Welding Worn Dredge Equipment.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review 32 n 382 July 10
1940 p 36972.
Complete paper gives full details of experiences in
building up worn parts on typical tin
dredge; routine repairs were made to bucket
pins, lips, hoods and treads, top tumbler
tread plates, and at longer intervals; to
top and bottom tumbler treads; welding
technique, using dc welding machine and
manganese steel electrodes. Extract from
paper before Dredging Assn of Southern
271
272
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Malaya.
Moving a 2,000 Yd. Dragline Dredge Across Paved
Highway.
W.G. SWART.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 142 n 6 June 1941 p
44.
Problem in connection with operation of 60ton floating
gold recovery plant; enough gravel remained
below bridge to yield profit; dismantling
and reassembling would require 8 days, with
estimated cost of $1500; trucking bids were
from $1800 to $2000; sketch shows use of
"Woodsman's Luff," by which beat mounted on
50ft log runners was skidded to new pond in
6 hr at cost of $200.
HardFacing in Gold Dredge Maintenance.
Western Machinery and Steel World v 32 n 11 Nov 1941 p
5645.
Analysis of costs of dredge maintenance made by gold
dredging company operating chain bucket type
dredges in California; analysis, based on
records kept for one of dredges, proved
savings made possible by hard facing worn
bucket pins and led to adoption of this
maintenance procedure as standard.
Moving 200Ton Dredge Overland to New Panama Canal Lock
Site.
Engineering News Record v 127 n 21 Nov. 20 1941 p 721.
Brief details on movement of 22in hydraulic dredge
"Grand Lake" which was picked up bodily and
placed on shore, then skidded 1800 ft.
overland into artificial pool, to begin
excavating for additional locks for Panama
Canal.
Dredge Bucket Renewal Conserves Manganese Steel.
C.H. THURMAN.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 144 n 4 Apr 1943 p 68.
Utilization of scrap manganese steel to restore worn
units on 8 1/2 cu ft bucketline dredge
operated by Thurman Gold Dredging Co near
Reading, Calif: electric welding: in
addition to conservation of manganese steel,
estimated saving in cost of one bucket line
is $2600 over 8 months
Righting Capsized Dredge Takes 50 minutes.
W.B. MACAULAY.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 45 n 4 Apr 1944 p 801.
Illustrated account of capsizing and of rehabilitation
of placer mining dredge, operated by Rand
273
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Gold Dredging Associates for recovery of
scheelite, near Randsburg, Calif; it has
steel hull 75 ft long, 36 ft wide and 6 ft
deep; before actual righting operations were
undertaken, experiments were made with model
built on scale of 3/8 in. to 1 ft.
Gold Dredge Kept Digging.
H.B. MCGUIRE.
Welding Engineer v 33 n 7 July 1948 p 4850, 645.
Maintenance of bucket line of cast manganese steel
buckets; how driving tumbler is kept close
to same pitch as digging buckets; building
up of tumbler by welding; 2 tone process
used; bucket renovation; costs and materials
used are tabulated.
Aluminum Dredge Designed for Difficult Placer Job.
J.B. HUTTL.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 150 n 4 Apr 1949 p 724.
Construction details of dredge known as "Guayabal unit"
specially designed for Pato Consolidated
Gold Dredging Ltd for operation on Porce
River project in Colombia; use of aluminum
alloys cuts overall weight about 100 short
tons and decreases mean draft 10 in.
Welding May Cut Your Dredge Maintenance Costs.
H.B. MCGUIRE.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 150 n 9 Sept 1949 p
801.
Replacement of tumbler on bucket line may mean
investment of $8000 to $10,000 and much lost
time, where welding may restore tumbler to
operation at estimated cost of $1100;
similar savings can be effected in bucket
repair; how job was done on one dredge
operating in California.
Giant Moving Operation at Steep Rock Lake.
S.G. HANCOCK.
Canadian Mining Journal v 76 n 5 May 1955 p 579.
Methods used in moving overland two electric dredges
weighing about 900 tons, from Hogarth to
"GD" ore body; hulls were moved intact for
distance of about 2 mi by using crawler
tracks.
Zavisimost konstruktivnykh parametrov drag i drazhnykh
razrezov ot moshchnosti rosspei.
I.I. AFANAS'EV.
Gornyi Zhurnal n 10 Oct 1962 p 404.
Dependence of structural parameters of dredges and pits
on thickness of placers; determination of
optimum capacity of bucket on mining and
273
274
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
geological conditions; evaluation of
depletion percent of placers during dredging
of thick and medium thick placer deposits as
result of depth of scooping and system of
mining.
275
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Dredging
Land Restoration
Tailing Disposal of Gold Dredges.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Feb. 3, 1906.
Reviews the history of tailing disposal and the methods
that have been tried to restore worked out
land to its original condition. Ills. 3800
w.
Restoring Dredged Ground.
D.B. Stellars
Engineering and Mining Journal May 8, 1909.
Abstract from a report concerning methods used in
Victoria, Australia, to restore the dredged
area to usefulness for agricultural
purposes. Ills. 1200 w.
Rock Crushing Plant Reclaiming Dredge Lands.
A.H. MARTIN.
Mining World Feb. 5, 1910.
Illustrated account of methods of removing and
utilizing the debris, and restoring the
ground for cultivation. 1600 w.
Restoring Dredged Ground.
A.S. ATKINSON.
Mines and Minerals Feb. 1911.
Describes an Australian golddredging method which
leaves the ground in condition for
agriculture. 2200 w.
Methods of Restoring Soil on Dredged Areas and Costs of
Gold Dredging in Australia.
Engineering and Contracting March 13, 1912.
Gives the stipulations of the Australia mining laws,
and describes plants for resoiling dredged
land. 1800 w.
A California Dredge with Two Tailings Stackers.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 22, 1916.
A dredge equipped with means for resoiling the area it
dredges. Ills. 2500 w.
California Dredge with Four Tailings Conveyors.
LEWIS H. EDDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal, June 23, 1917.
System which leaves land in condition for agricultural
cases. Ills. 1200 w.
275
276
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Redredging Will It Pay?
WALTER H. GARDNER.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan 5, 1918.
Discusses attempts to dredge soil in California. Ills.
1500 w.
Resoil Dredging Without Stream Pollution.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 29 n 344 May
1937 p 3049.
Features of dredge plant with 9 1/2 cu ft buckets
designed to handle 175,000 cu yd of
overburden and wash gravel monthly at
Newstead, Victoria; arrangements made to
deliver heavy coarse stones at point 12 to
15 ft behind stern of dredge; sand from gold
saving boxes at point of 25 ft. behind;
overburden will be stripped by raising
bucket ladder and digging soil dry; ground
will be finally levelled off with scoops and
scrapers.
Resoiling After Dredging.
D.R. DICKINSON.
Industrial Australian and Mining Standard v 94 n 2381
Feb 15 1939 p 435.
General comments on feasibility of reconditioning
dredged land; outline of practice in Loddon
Valley, near Newstead, Victoria, Australia;
overburden to depth of about 9 ft is dredged
in semidry condition and discharged by belt
conveyor more than 100 ft behind dredge;
screen oversize material from washed gravel
is dropped 15 ft astern, and sands about 25
ft astern; notes on procedure in other
localities. Extracts from paper in Mining
and GeologicalJ.
Dredge Resoiling Highly Successful.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 34 n 398 Nov
10 1941 p 414.
Example described and discussed; Victoria Gold Dredging
Co NL, operating at Newstand, has completed
restoration of 50 acres of ground dredged in
first year's operations; results shown in
set of photographs.
Dragline Dredging and Resoiling.
C.V. AVERILL.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 34 n 404 May
11, 1942 p 239.
Extracts from paper in Calif J Mines and Geology Apr
1941.
Notes on Resoiling, with Special Reference to Dredging
and Reclaiming of Auriferous Farm Lands at
Newstead, Victoria.
277
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
J.H.W. MCGEORGE.
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Bul n 461, 463,
July 1943, 11 p. supp plate and (discussion)
Nov p 14.
Goldbearing gravel is covered by overburden averaging
13 ft: upper layer of overburden is dredged
off in advance of gravel face; then
underlying gold bearing gravel is dredged;
conveyors dump coarse gravel on bottom of
pond; on this is deposited sandy undersize
from screen; new surface is then formed with
soil and clay overburden; cost data.
Notes on Resoiling, with Special Reference to Dredging
and Reclaiming of Auriferous Farm Lands at
Newstead, Victoria.
J.H.W. MCGEORGE.
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Bul n 467 July 1944
p 58.
Author's reply to discussion of paper from issue of Nov
1943.
Progress of Resoiling by Wellington Alluvial Dredge.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 38 n 455, Aug
10 1946 p 4067.
Supplementing article from Mar 11 1940 issue, notes are
given on more recent equally successful
results obtained in reclamation of area of
approx. 25 acres of land previously used as
sludge settling area; method of cultivation;
recovery of crop, particularly Wimmers rye
grass, lucerne and subterranean clover
during winter and spring of 1945 resulted in
outstanding pasture crop.
277
278
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
General
Placer Mining Kinks.
CHARLES P. RICHARDSON.
Mining and Scientific Press March 29, 1902.
Illustrates and describes simple devices made where
materials were scarce and hard to obtain.
Serial. 1st part. 2300 w.
Placer Mining.
NELSON BLOUNT.
Yale Scientific Monthly June 1902.
Describes places and methods of working. Ill. 2200 w.
Principles of Gravel Mining.
WILLIAM H. STORMS.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 2, 1911.
Considers the fundamental principles of placer mining.
1500 w.
Electrical Applications in the Coeur d'Alenes.
J.B. FISKEN.
Mining and Engineering World July 26, 1913.
Remarks on the general application of electricity to
mining, reviewing the history of early
applications, and especially developments in
the district named. Ills. 3500 w.
Modern Methods in Placer Mining.
CARNEY HARTLEY.
Mining and Engineering World April 25, 1914.
A review of placer mining and methods, discussing
changes needed to meet present conditions.
Ills. 2500 w.
Placer Gold and Its Recovery.
HARBOURED A. MAIGRE.
Engineering Magazine June 1914.
Describes the sluicing and dredging methods. Ills. 3500
w.
Lode and Alluvial Mining.
JOAN SERVES.
Australian Mining Standard July 16, 1914. Serial, 1st
part.
Gives particulars and illustrations of operations. 2500
w.
Opportunity in Placer Mining.
CARNEY HARTLEY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 23, 1915.
Discusses the slow development of placer mining methods
outside of dredging and causes therefor,
with special consideration of semiarid
279
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
regions, outlining methods which should be
successful for such deposits. 3300 w.
The Mining of Alluvial Deposits.
NEWTON B. KNOX and CHARLES S. HALEY.
Mining Magazine Feb. 1915. Serial, 1st part.
Relative advantages of various methods. Ills. 6500 w.
Notes on Ancient and Primitive Mining and Metallurgical
Methods.
T.A. RICKARD.
Engineering and Mining Journal, vol. 122, nos. 2, 12
and 17, July 10, Sept. 18 and Oct. 23, 1926,
pp 4853, 451455 and 649651, July 10.
Early placers; oil on Golden Fleece; refining as
described by various authors; Pliny on
working alluvial deposits.
Parker Trap Catches Vermilion Gold.
J.E. PARKER
Mining Truth, vol. 13, no. 12, Aug. 2, 1928, pp. 56, 1
fig; see also Min. Rev., vol. 30, no. 9,
Aug. 15, 1928, pp. 78, 2 figs.
Describes device invented by author, consisting of
arrangement of riffles in center and steps
along sides of fanshaped passage; water
enters narrow end and slows down as trap
widens; details of design undergoing
revision.
A Plea for Alluvial Gold Mining.
F.H. WILLIAMS.
Mining Journal, (Lond.), vol. 170, nos. 4962, 4963 and
4964, Sept. 27, 1930, pp. 762763; Oct. 4,
pp. 781782, Oct. 11, pp. 799800. Sept. 27.
Desirability of increasing gold production; lode gold
mining now at peak; alluvial gold rushes
have led to rapid development of countries;
many known placer fields still exist;
important points in prospecting and
examination of areas. Oct. 4, Gold dredging.
Oct. 11; Working costs; bulk treatment of
alluvials; dredging working costs; dredgable
areas numerous; saving and treatment of gold
concentrates; outlet for dormant British
Capital is foreseen.
SmallScale Placer Mining Methods.
C.F. JACKSON and J.B. KNAEBEL.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 6611 Apr 1932 17
p supp plates.
Data covering questions recently referred to Bureau of
Mines for answer; maps showing location of
placer mining districts in several states;
geology and types of placer deposits;
minerals associated with placer gold;
279
280
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
prospecting and mining methods; portable and
semiportable placer mining equipment and its
operation. Bibliography.
Prospecting and Operating Small Gold Placers.
W.F. BOERICKE.
New York, John Wiley and Sons, 1933. 136 pp., illus.
diagrams, tables. $1.50. Inexperienced
prospector will find much wise counsel in
book, which aims to teach him how to
prospect intelligently and to suggest ways
of equipping and operating any placers that
he may find; author confines himself to
methods that do not require much investment
of capital but are suited to wants of small
operators. (Revised 2nd edition in 1936.)
Tilling Sands for Gold.
A.S. PARK.
Compressed Air Magazine, v 38 n 3 Mar 1933 p 40758.
Comment on revival of interest in gold placer mining;
training of gold seekers in Canada and in
Colorado and California; equipment is of
same type as used in California gold rush of
1849; procedure in use of gold pan, rocker
and sluice boxes.
Where Does Mine Dollar Go!
P.M. TYLER.
Mining and Metallurgy v 15 n 328 Apr 1934 p 1835.
Most prolific source of cost data relative to mining
and treatment of mineral raw materials is in
reports of US Bureau of Census; graphic
representation of cost distribution of
expenditures by mining and quarrying
industries of United States; effects of
displacement of manual labour by machines;
approximate rank of specified mineral
industries, based upon margin above direct
cost in 1929, 1919 and 1909.
What Will It Cost to Work Gold Placer of Medium Size!
H.C. CHELLSON.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 135 n 10 Oct. 1934 p
4415.
Calculations based on operation of property in Gilpin
County, Colo; figures are given for 24 hr
yardages of 100 up to 2000, for gravel
ranging in value from 20c up to 74c per yd,
and for price of both $20.67 and $35.
Placer Mining in Western United States.
E.D. GARDNER and C.H. JOHNSON.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 6786 Sept 1934 73
p and n 6787 Oct. 89 p. Part I.
General information, handshoveling and groundsluicing.
281
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Part II. Hydraulicking, treatment of placer
concentrates and marketing of gold.
Wake Up, Placer Operator!
J.M. HILL.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 136 n 10 Oct 1935 p.
4967.
It is suggested that something may be learned from lode
gold sampling and recovery methods;
contention is that loss of fine gold by
placer miners has been excessive.
Alluvial Mining Data.
H.L. HOLLWAY.
Mining Magazine v 54 n 2, 3, and 4 Feb 1936 p 857, Mar
p 14653 and Apr p 20811. Compilation of
formulas; on flow of water; tabulated data,
for use in simplifying field calculations;
pipe lines, safe working heads; horsepower
required to pump water; sluice boxes; duty
of water; hydraulic elevators; gravel pumps.
(see follow-up art. Oct, 1937)
Prospecting and Operating Small Gold Placers.
W.F. BOERICKE.
2 ed. New York, John Wiley and Sons, 1936.
Practical guide designed to assist man without
technical education to prospect
intelligently and to equip and operate
placer deposits on small scale; new edition
has been revised to agree with current price
of gold and chapter on placer mining
machines rewritten. 144 pp. illus., diagrs.
tables.
Prospecting for Placer Gold.
W.R. STORMS.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 20 n 1 May 30, 1936 p.
34 and 301.
Suggestions as to location of gold placer deposits in
western United States and best methods for
prospecting them; hopeful (but unproven)
theory of one author is quoted, to effect
that stream action will gather fine pieces
of gold and weld them together to provide
new deal for prospectors of abandoned
gulches.
Locating Rims of Buried Gravel Channel.
F.A. CRAMPTON.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 20 n 15 Dec. 30 1936 p
7 and 34.
Description of technique developed by author, tried in
California, and found satisfactory; it
involves determination of course and
location of ancient river, from evidence on
281
282
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
surface; beginning made at some point where
cross section of channel is exposed by
erosion; compass survey, contour sketching,
and detailed notes of topographical and
geological inspections are plotted on map
for study and interpretation.
Advice to WouldBe Placer Operators.
R.L. KIDD.
Mining and Metallurgy v 18 n 366 June 1937 p 2834.
Comment on uncanny ability of some people to sink test
pits in high grade gravel, to encourage
investment in property on theory that
thorough sampling is waste of time reputable
owner or promoter can save embarrassment by
having reliable engineer sample and report
on property before trying to interest
investors or operators; outline of most
important factors to be considered in
investigation of placer deposits.
Alluvial Mining Data.
H.L. HOLLOWAY.
Mining Magazine v 57 n 4 Oct 1937 p 2106.
Tabulated data and charts for drilling calculations
that amplify those given in paper by same
author from issues of Feb, Mar and Apr 1936.
Die Maschinen zum Abbau alluvialer Metallvorkommem.
F.A.M. WUELFINGHOFF.
Fördertechnik und Frachtverkehr, v 31 n 10, 11 and 12
May 11, 1938 p 1869 May 25 p 2057 and June 8
p 2227.
Mining machinery for alluvial metal deposits; general
data on mining of soapy minerals; bucket
chain dredges; design, dimensions and
operation; preparation methods; and
equipment; output and cost data.
Bibliography.
Notes on Recovering Gold and Other Minerals in Placer
Mining.
J.H. ROBERTSON.
Canadian Mining Journal v 62 n 4 Apr 1941 p 2235.
Operations by individual miners; effect of riffles;
cleaning up to recover minerals; largescale
operations; use of under currents, where
water is abundant; jigs; recovering gold
from concentrates; amalgamation.
Placer Mining
J.H. ROBERTSON.
Canadian Mining Journal v 63 n 1 Jan 1942 p 104.
To be remunerative, mining of low grade placer deposits
has to be carried out on large scale,
requiring large capital outlay; occurrence
of placer deposits and mining of them;
283
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
classification of placer mining methods;
function of examining and reporting
engineer; preliminary inspection; water and
its application; testing; shafting;
drilling; sampling; records; determining
methods of mining, type of installation,
cost, etc; estimate of profits; capital
requirements.
Safety Practices in Dredging and Hydraulic Mining.
R.W. FATZINGER.
US Bureau of Mines Bul n 470 1948 76 p.
Paper is based upon observations made and records
received in Alaska during 1946 and in
California during 1946 and 1947; data from
30 active dredging operations and 34 active
hydraulic operations; description of placer
dredges; description of hydraulic mining;
employment and accidents in dredging and
hydraulic mining; causes of dredging
accidents and their prevention; causes of
accidents in hydraulic mining and their
prevention. Bibliography.
Mechanization in Canadian Gold Mines.
I.M. MARSHALL.
Canadian Mining Journal v 70 n 7 July 1949 p 625.
First step in mechanization is careful, long range
planning; every machine must be worked to
limit of capacity; there must be readiness
to accept wide reaching changes in system of
mining; attention should be directed to
minor mechanical devices and innovations;
care should be taken in choice and training
of machine operators; safety; change in
greater or less degree, is required in
mental attitude of both staff and workmen;
both must become more mechanically minded.
Introductory Prospecting and Mining.
L.M. ANTHONY.
Alaska Univ School Mines Bul 4 (revised) 1961 123 p.
I
Identification of minerals; general geology and map
reading; rocks and rock structure; ore
deposits, lode prospecting and sampling;
placer prospecting and sampling; geophysical
prospecting; geochemical prospecting; small
scale lode mine development; small scale
placer mining methods, mining law and claim
staking; mine promotion and mineral markets;
sight identification of minerals and field
tests; glossary of mining terms.
Placer Mining.
L.G. WHITE.
283
284
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Western Miner and Oil Review v 34 n 3 Mar 1961 p 2836.
Origin and types of placer deposits; general methods of
prospecting and testing placers; simple
recovery devices; characteristics and types
of placer gold; mechanical methods of
testing placer ground; mechanical mining
methods; gold recoveries; cleaning gold;
placer mining regulations and staking.
Belt Conveyors Speed Placer Mining.
H.H. SCHMIDT.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 162 n 11 Nov. 1961 p
1045.
Dozer belt conveyor operation is fast, lowcost method
for open cut placer mining; it consists of
mobile conveyors, sluice box and dozer or
two; belt conveyor was first successfully
used for stacking tailings and then applied
to feed system; feed conveyor gives steady
feed rate, lowcost elevating medium for
washing, sizing and de-watering and has
mobility combined with short moving and
settingup time; setup and operation.
Vtoroe soveshchanie po geologii rosspynkh
mestorozhdenii poleznykh iskopaemykh.
I.S. ROZHKOV, G.P. MIKHALEV.
Geologiya Rudnykh Mestorozhdenif v 6 n 3 MayJune 1964 p
11316.
Second conference on geology of placer type mineral
deposits; conference took place on Feb 12
through 17 1964 in Moscow; 59 papers
presented at conference were dedicated to
various problems of geology of placer
deposits, to methods of their prospecting,
and exploration.
285
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Hydraulic
Africa
Hydraulic Tin Mining in Swaziland.
J. JERVIS GARRARD.
Institution of Mining and Metallurgy Bul 149
1917. Plates and tables. 22 pp.
Methods of working.
285
Feb. 5,
286
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Hydraulic
Australasia
Hydraulic Dredging.
F. DANVERS POWER.
Engineering and Mining Journal April 21, 1906.
Illustrates and describes this method of working
alluvial ground, as practiced in Australia
stating its advantages. 1800 w.
The Lisle Goldfield, Tasmania.
W.H. TWELVETREES.
Australian Mining Standard Oct. 14, 1908.
Specially considering the sources of the alluvial gold.
1600 w.
An Australian PumpDredge.
CHARLES JANIN. I
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 11, 1911.
Illustrated description of a pump hydraulic sluicing
plant for treating goldbearing alluvials.
1200 w.
The Conservation of Water for Hydraulic Sluicing.
S.R. STONE.
Mining and Engineering World June 1, 1912.
Gives particulars of difficulties overcome at the
Palmer district, of Queensland. 2000 w.
287
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Hydraulic
Canada
B.C.
Hydraulic Gravel Elevators.
Australian Mining Standard Nov. 22, 1900.
Illustrated description of a complete hydraulic gravel
eliminating plant at the Cariboo Gold
fields, B.C. 900 w.
Hydraulic Mining in British Columbia.
HOWARD W. DUBOIS.
Columbia Engineer 1906.
Considers the conditions necessary for successful
hydraulic operations, and shows what has
been accomplished. 2500 w.
The Cariboo Consolidated Hydraulic Plant, Bullion, B.C.
W.J. DICK.
Journal of the Canadian Mining Institute Vol. X, 1907.
Student's prize paper. Describes this property and its
development, 2500 w.
Hydraulic Mining in Cariboo.
DOUGLAS WATERMAN.
Mining and Scientific Press Sept. 7, 1907.
An illustrated description of this auriferous deposit
and the method used in mining. 1800 w.
The Solution of Some Hydraulic Mining Problems on Ruby
Creek, British Columbia. CHESTER F. LEE and
T.M. DAULTON.
American Institute of Mechanical Engineers, Bul May
1916.
Difficulties overcome in this northern district. Ills.
1500 w.
Hydraulic Mining
J.H. ROBERTSON.
Canadian Mining Journal, vol. 49 nos. 26, 27, 29, 30
and 32, June 29, July 6, 20, 27 and Aug. 10,
1928, p. 521522, 546547, 580582, 600602 and
639641, 12 figs. June 29;
Geological outline of alluvial deposits; article
chiefly reviews deposits of British
Columbia; sources of gold or mineral;
disintegrated stockworks; veins at or near
junction of slates and granites; fallacy of
belief that minerals never found further
than 4 mi. away from source; preglacial
deposits usually coarse gold, postglacial
fine; source of "big stuff" is debatable.
July 6: Possibilities of working placer
287
288
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
property by hydraulic mining methods. July
20; Outlines four main methods; simple
hydraulicking, hydraulicking combined with
hydraulic elevating, suction dredging or
suction elevating, and bucket dredging. July
27; Methods of securing water under
pressure. Aug. 10; Water supply; dam,
ditches; flumes; penstock; pipe lines;
recovery of minerals; handling boulders;
cleanups.
Hydraulic Operation on Otter Creek.
J.E. MORAN.
Canadian Mining and Metallurgy Bulletin n 238 Feb 1932
p 6571.
Operating methods of La Compagnie Francaise des Mines
d'Or du Canada in Atlin district.
Hydraulic Operations on Otter Creek.
J.E. MORAN.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy and Mining
Soc Nova Scotia Trans v 35 1932 p 6571,
from Can Mining and Met Bul n 238 Feb. 1932.
Bullion Hydraulic Mine, Cariboo, B.C.
R.F. SHARPE.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Trans v 42
1939 (mtg Nov 1939) p 5938. Bul n 332 Dec
1939.
Mine is on left bank of South fork of Quesnel river; 3
mi below outlet of Quesnel Lake; historical
notes; description of channel; geology;
maintenance of safe face; water supply;
mining methods of Bullion pit; shooting of
boulders; description of sluice; cleanup;
equipment and facilities.
What Does Hydraulicking Cost!
W.H. EASSIE.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 145 n 6 June 1944 p
924.
Data based upon case study of remote area in British
Columbia; Venture Exploration (East Africa)
Co., operated on Germansen Creek, in Omineca
district, from 1937 to 1942; for 3 seasons,
costs averaged 9.8c per cu yd.
289
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Hydraulic
Canada
Quebec
Hydraulicking in Beauce County, Que.
FRITZ CIRKEL.
Engineering and Mining Journal June 1, 1912.
An illustrated account of the hydraulic working of
alluvial gold gravels. 400 w.
289
290
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Hydraulic
Canada
Yukon
Hydraulicking in the Yukon Region.
C.R. SETTLEMEIER.
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 19, 1904.
Describes the conditions of this region and the methods
used. Ills. 2700 w.
Hydraulic Mining in a Cold Climate.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Mining and Scientific Press June 2, 1906.
A discussion of this method of mining and its problems,
especially in relation to its use in the
Klondike and other northern places. Ills.
4500 w.
Notes on Hydraulic Mining.
Mines and Minerals Aug. 1907.
Discusses the subject of hydraulic gold mining, with
special reference to the Cariboo District,
British Columbia, and Yukon Territory. Ills.
4000 w.
The Hydraulic Equipment of the Old Channel Mines.
JOHN M. NICOL
Mining and Scientific Press Sept. 14, 1907.
Describes mines that have been worked for 30 years,
especially the present plant and methods of
working. 3000 w.
Hydraulic Mining in the Yukon.
R.E.W. HAGARTY.
Canadian Engineer Nov. 6, 1908.
Describes methods used. 4000 w.
Hydraulic Engineering in the Yukon.
E.W. HAGARTY.
Canadian Engineer Feb. 19, 1909.
An illustrated article describing the engineering
development of the Yukon Gold Co. 4000 w.
Standard Sprinkler System Strips Frozen Overburden.
H.H. SCHMIDT.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 165 n 7 July 1964 p
801.
By using conventional irrigation sprinklers during 2mo
period, Ballarat Mines Ltd was able to strip
165,000 yd of frozen muck from placer gold
deposit on Dominion Creek, Yukon Territory,
Canada; area of ground covered by sprinker
setup was 200,000 sq ft, with muck total of
188,400 cu yd; system was very successful in
clear frozen muck, fair in dry clay and poor
291
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
when mantle of slide collected and protected
surface.
291
292
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Hydraulic
Europe
Gold Mining in the Ancient Roman Workings in Spain.
ALEXANDER DEL MAR.
Engineering Magazine March 1905.
An account of the placers of Las Medulas describing the
manner in which the ancients used advanced
methods of hydraulic engineering in gold
mining. 4000 w.
293
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Hydraulic
General
Practical Notes on Hydraulic Mining.
GEORGE H. EVANS.
Mining and Scientific Press April 10, 1897.
Part first names points on which a mine manager should
be thoroughly posted, and considers water
facilities, and nature of the country for
grades, etc., as the first two.
Some Notes on Hydraulic Mining.
AUGUSTUS J. BOWIE.
Engineering and Mining Journal Oct. 30, 1897.
Some of the difficulties encountered are mentioned
showing how hazardous anticipated estimates
of yield are. 2500 w.
Defining Hydraulic Mining.
T.L. FORD.
Mining and Scientific Press April 23, 1898.
Extracts from a letter by author, of San Francisco, to
an inquiry as to what constituted hydraulic
mining. 1700 w.
Centrifugal Sluicing.
A.J. BENSUSAN.
Canadian Mining Review Oct. 31, 1900.
From the "Jour. of the N.S.W. Chamber of Mines."
Describes this process of mining gold from
auriferous gravel, giving information
concerning work done. 3300 w.
Notes on Hydraulic Mining.
GEORGE H. EVANS.
Mines and Minerals Dec. 1900.
Practical points necessary to be considered in carrying
water in ditches, flumes, etc. Ill. 2200 w.
Hydraulicking LowGrade Gravel.
P. BOUERY.
Mining and Scientific Press April 18, 1903.
Gives results obtained in working placers, showing that
low grades can be worked with some profit.
1400 w.
Working LowLying Gravel Deposits by the Hydraulic
Elevator System.
R.H. CAMPBELL.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 13, 1904.
Illustrations of the latest improved Campbell hydraulic
elevator, with remarks. 800 w.
Notes on Hydraulic Mining Practice.
RICHARD L. GRIDER.
Engineering News July 20, 1905.
293
294
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Abstract of an article in the Colorado School of Mines
"Bulletin." Jan. 1905. Illustrated
description of methods of work in a
hydraulic mine. 3500 w.
Conserving the Water Supply in Placer Mining.
DENNIS H. STOVALL.
Ores and Metals March 20, 1907.
Considers advantages gained by properly constructed
reservoirs, to lengthen the hydraulic
season, and the employment of a selfshooter.
1000 w.
Ways of Cleaning Up in Hydraulic Placer Mining.
DENNIS H. STOVALL.
Ores and Metals July 20, 1907.
Shows how gold and platinum may be lost through
carelessness, and gives suggestions as to
method of reducing these losses. 1000 w.
The Ruble Hydraulic Elevator.
J. MCD. PORTER.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
Oct. 1909.
Illustrated detailed description of this appliance and
its work. 1200 w.
Notes on Placer Mining, with Special Reference to
Hydraulic Sluicing.
N.A. LOGGIN.
Institution of Mining and Metallurgy, Bul 76 Jan. 18,
1911.
Discusses details of hydraulic mining and the many
difficulties and problems requiring
solution. Ills. 11500 w.
Losses in Hydraulic Mining.
CHARLES S. HALEY.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 21, 1911.
The difficulty of saving flaky gold, with suggestions.
1500 w.
Notes on Hydraulic Sluicing.
N.A. LOGGIN.
Engineering and Mining Journal April 8, 1911.
Review of placer mining with suggestions as to the
design of ditches, dams, flumes and
penstocks. Ills. 2000 w.
Principles of Hydraulic Mining.
H.L. MEAD.
School of Mines Quarterly April, 1913.
Outlines different types of gravel deposits and
describes methods of working Ills. 4000 w.
A Study of riffles for Hydraulicking.
PIERRE BOUERY.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 24, 1913.
295
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Gives results of experiments made to determine saving
capacities. Ills. 3500 w.
Syphoning Gravel.
J. JERVIS GARRARD.
Institution of Mining and Metallurgy, Bul. 159 Dec.
13, 1917.
Method of hydraulicking and elevating by means of a
syphon. Ills. 2000 w.
Some Practical Points on Hydraulic Mining.
W.A. NEWMAN.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 137 n 1 Jan 1936 p 102.
Study of nozzle flow; also commentary on various
factors tending to improve technique in
hydraulic mining practice.
Hydraulic Mining.
J.H. ROBERTSON.
Canadian Mining Journal v 62 n 11 Nov. 1941 p 7504.
Details of various principles in installation of
hydraulicking plant; dams; ditches and
flumes; pipe lines.
Hydraulic Mining Methods.
S.S. HOLLAND.
British Columbia Dept Mines Bul n 15 1942 76 p.
Bulletin is in large part reprint from U S Bureau of
Mines Information Circular 6787, by E.D.
GARDNER and C.H. JOHNSON. Bibliography.
Problems in PresentDay Hydraulicking.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Mining Congress Journal v 28 n 3 Mar 1942 p 204.
Analysis of various questions arising in connection
with resumption of hydraulic mining on large
scale in Sierra Nevada mountains; principle
object is to emphasize need for teamwork and
cooperation; future price of gold as factor;
some deposits may be dry stripped for
hydraulicking; most acute problem is
tailings disposal.
Notes on Hydraulic Mining.
J.H. ROBERTSON.
Canadian Mining Journal v 63 n 6 June 1942 p 36870.
Arranging mining operations; service pipes, valves,
sluices, etc.
Hydraulic Mining Methods.
E.D. GARDNER AND C.H. JOHNSON.
Mine and Quarry Engineering v 8 n 4, 5,
Apr 1943 p 758. May p 10310,
July p. 15762, Aug. p. 1836,
Oct p 2313. Reprinted from U
6, 7, 8, 9, 10,
June p. 1337,
Sept. p. 2079,
S Bureau of
295
296
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mines
Information Cir n 6787.
Hydraulic Mining Methods.
E.D. GARDNER and C.H. JOHNSON.
Mine and Quarry Engineering v 9 n 1 Jan 1944 p 189, 17.
Reprinted from U S Bureau of Mines Information Cir n
6787.
297
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Hydraulic
New Zealand
Hydraulic Sluicing in the Collingwood District.
H.F. LOGAN.
New Zealand Mines Record Feb. 16, 1900.
Descriptive. 2400 w.
History of Hydraulic Mining in New Zealand.
JOHN EWING.
Mining Journal March 9, 1907.
Outlines the work of nature in the South Island of New
Zealand, and the early methods of extraction
of gold, describing the system of hydraulic
elevating introduced in 1878. 2700 w.
Alluvial Working at Addison's Flat, New Zealand.
A. GORDON MACDONALD.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 23, 1909.
Illustrates and describes a system of hydraulic
sluicing, the tailings being elevated by
means of a "back balance." 1000 w.
297
298
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Hydraulic
South America
San Antonio de Poto Hydraulic Mine, Peru.
W.E. GORDON FIREBRACE.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 5, 1908.
An illustrated account of this famous placer mine. 1200
w.
Suchez de Bolivia Hydraulic Mine.
W.E. GORDON FIREBRACE.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 20, 1909.
Illustrated description of largest known auriferous
gravel deposit in South America. 1000 w.
Hydraulic Mining In Colombia.
R.S. BOTSFORD.
Mining Magazine, vol 43, no. 3, Sept. 1930, pp. 137142,
7 figs.
Account of progress and of hydraulic mining activities
near Medellin, in department of Antioquia.
299
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Hydraulic
U.S.
Alaska
Hydraulic Elevator Work on Anvil Creek, Nome, Alaska.
C.W. PURINGTON.
Mining and Scientific Press April 26, 1913.
Illustrates and describes the handling of unfrozen
gravel by the hydraulic nozzle with the
accompaniment of the hydraulic lift and
tailing nozzle. 2000 w.
Hydraulic Placering in Alaska.
Mining World v 8 n 13 Dec 1946 p 367.
Notes on operations at small property on upper Fish
Creek near Fairbanks; flexible water line,
plus welded steel smooth plate feedbox, cut
costs; sluicing practice.
Successful Handling of Bedrock.
Mining World v 9 n 6 June 1947 p 257.
Illustrated notes, describing operations of A. and P.
MISCOVICH on Otter Creek, near town of Flat,
Alaska; overburden is sluiced off with
hydraulic giants; gravel overlying bedrock
is easy to handle and sluice; due to cracks
and crevices in bedrock, much of latter is
worked to recover values; use of dragshovel.
Operating Slate Creek, Alaska, Placer Property.
Mining World v 10 n 8 July 1948 p 29.
Brief illustrated note on hydraulic and sluicing
operation at Flat, Alaska, caterpillarbulldozer and dragline used for stripping
muck and overburden and for various other
lifting and shifting jobs.
Automatic Monitors Cut Placer Mining Costs.
J. MISCOVITCH.
Mining Congress Journal v 38 n 1 Jan 1952 p 557.
Alaska mine operator reduced striping costs 96% by
using monitors; characteristics of
"Intelligiant"; labor cost per cu yd in 1951
was 0.4c.
Sound Planning and Hard Work Make This Alaskan Placer
Pay.
H.G. GRUNDSTEDT.
Mining World v 18 n 6 May 1956 p 535.
Placer operation near Ruby comprises stripping,
excavating, sluicing, pumping, and
299
300
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
hydraulicking; mining is done by excavating
blocks of gravel 200 ft wide 300 ft long and
treatment of gravel in recovery plant; cold
weather problem.
301
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Hydraulic
U.S.
California
Amount of Loss to California Due to Closure of
Hydraulic Mines.
Mining and Scientific Review Jan. 16, 1897.
Considers the loss under three headings; 1st, direct
loss of the gold formerly produced by the
mines; 2nd, depreciation in value of the
property and equipment; 3rd, the loss to
sympathetic industries. 1300 w.
California Hydraulic Mining Under the Caminatti Act.
Scientific American Sup July 21, 1900.
Explains the manner of occurrence and gives illustrated
description of methods of hydraulic mining
used. The difficulties which led to the
passage of this act are also explained. 3400
w.
Proposed Retaining Barriers for the Débris from
Hydraulic Mining in the Yuba River, Cal.
Engineering News Jan. 15, 1903.
Brief description of the methods adopted by the
California Débris Commission. Ill. 1400 w.
Impounding Mining Débris in Yuba River, California.
FRANKLIN RIFFLE.
Engineering Record Feb. 28, 1903.
An account of the troubles arising from hydraulic
mining and the dumping of tailings into the
river, and the action taken by the Débris
Commission for the storage of the detritus.
2300 w.
A Great Engineering Problem.
W.A. LAWSON.
Engineering and Mining Journal Oct. 13, 1904.
An account of the effort to be made to arrest the flow
of mining débris in the Yuba River and to
prevent its descent into the Feather River,
and so on to the Sacramento, to the
detriment of navigation. 2500 w.
DébrisRestraining Barriers of the Yuba River.
CAPT. WM. W. HARTS.
Scientific American Sup Nov. 19, 1904.
An illustrated article explaining the plan proposed by
the California Débris Commission for the
treatment of this river, which suffered from
301
302
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
the accumulation of mining detritus. 3000 w.
Débris Barrier No. 1, Yuba River, Calif.
Engineering News June 15, 1905.
Illustration, with brief description of structure now
being built for holding and storing mine
debris in the river. 1000 w.
Control of Hydraulic Mining Débris in California by the
Federal Government.
CAPT. WM. W. HARTS.
California Journal of Technology Sept. 1905.
Read before the Mining Conference. Explains the
problem, the extent of the damage,
discussing the duties of the commission, and
the general principles of improvement. Ills.
6000 w.
The Control of Hydraulic Mining in California by the
Federal Government.
WILLIAM W. HARTS.
Proceedings of the American Society of Civil Engineers
Feb. 1906.
Explains the débris problem, describing the mining
region and methods, the duties of the
Commission, the general principles of
improvement, etc. ill. 11500 w.
Hydraulic Mining in California.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 19, 1906.
Account of method of mining, problems and difficulties,
results, and present standing. ills. 2800 w.
The Control of Hydraulic Mining in California by the
Federal Government.
WILLIAM W. HARTS.
Proceedings of the American Society of Civil Engineers
May 1906.
Discussion of the paper by author 4500 w.
A Hydraulic Mine in California.
D'ARCY WEATHERBE.
Mining and Scientific Press Sept. 8, 1906.
Illustrated description of the Spring Valley mine, in
Butte Co. 1200 w.
The Rehabilitation of Hydraulic Mining.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 10, 1906. Serial.
1st part.
Considers the steps now in progress to restore
California's gold washing industry to its
former importance, without interfering with
agriculture. Ills. 1500 w.
303
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
The Government and Hydraulic Mining in California.
WILLIAM W. HARTS.
Mining World April 6, 1907.
An account of the methods of solving the d1bris
problem. Ills. 2000 w.
Debris from Hydraulic Mining in California.
WILLIAM W. HARTS.
Mining Reporter Sept. 19, 1907.
Some account of the work done by the California D1bris
Commission. 1600 w.
La Grange Hydraulic Mine.
DONALD F. CAMPBELL.
Mining and Scientific Press Oct. 10, 1908.
Illustrated detailed account of the profitable mining
of lowgrade auriferous gravel, in northern
California. 1800 w.
Practical Methods of Examining and Fitting Up a
Hydraulic Mine.
H.A. BRIGHAM.
Journal of the Association of Engineering Societies
Oct. 1908.
A review of the methods of hydraulic mining as
practiced in California. Ills. 16000 w.
Hydraulic Mining in California.
AL. H. MARTIN.
Mining World June 19, 1909.
Describes the La Grange mine, as an example of the
methods of gold recovery and the extent and
resources of the average California
hydraulic property. Ills.
2000 w.
Stripping a Vein by Hydraulicking.
A.F. HUGHES.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 11, 1909.
Brief illustrated description of a method of uncovering
ore, used near Carville, California. 800 w.
Hydraulic Mining on the Pacific Coast.
AL. H. MARTIN.
Mines and Minerals Dec. 1909.
Describes properties operating in California and
Oregon. 3000 w.
The LongTom and Hydraulic Mining in California.
R.H. CAMPBELL.
Mining and Scientific Press June 25, 1910.
Describes this device, used in the early mining days,
and gives a brief account of the hydraulic
mining period. Ills. 1800 w.
303
304
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Hydraulic Mining of Auriferous Gravels.
JAMES W. PHILLIPS.
Journal of the Western Society of Engineers Aug. 1910.
A description of hydraulic mining in California. Ills.
Also discussion. 15800 w.
Mining and Milling at Trinity Mine.
J.W. SWAREN.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 6, 1911.
Describes methods used at this California gold mine.
The overburden is removed by hydraulicking,
and the gold recovered by cyanidation.
Ills. 3500 w.
Hydraulicking on the Klamath River.
J.H. THELLER.
Mining and Scientific Press March 28, 1914.
Describes the character of the bedrock, the water
supply and methods. Ills. 2500 w.
HydraulicMining Debris in the Sierra Nevada.
G.K. GILBERT.
Mining and Scientific Press March 16, 1918.
Discussion on the quantity and ultimate deposition.
Ills. 2800 w.
Hydraulic Mining in California With Special Reference
to the You Bet Mine.
F.A. COODALE.
Colorado School Mines Magazine., vol. 9, no. 7, July
1919, pp. 167173, 2 figs.
Including example of calculations involved in
determining size and grade of sluice.
Inception and Development of Hydraulic Mining in
California.
J.D. STEWART.
Mining Congress Journal, vol. 12, nos. 9 and 11, Sept.
and Nov. 1926, pp. 638639, 786787, and 832,
5 figs.
Hydraulic mining first became possible in 1853, and
thrived until difficulties arose concerning
disposition of tailings; since that time
this form of mining in California has
practically been at standstill. Nov.: Points
out that rehabilitation of hydraulic mining
industry will be great benefit to California
and will greatly augment gold production.
A Proposed Plan for the Rehabilitation of Hydraulic
Mining.
R.H. ELLIOTT.
Mining Congress Journal., vol. 13, no. 11, Nov. 1927,
pp. 817819.
Plan for rehabilitation which includes government
construction of concrete dams in accordance
with provisions of Caminetti Act, and
general provisions of Cloudman Bill.
305
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Is Agriculture to Continue to Restrict Hydraulic Mining
in California?
J.D. STEWART.
Engineering and Mining Journal., vol. 125, no. 23, June
9, 1928, pp. 928931, 1 fig.
Hydraulic mining will aid flood control, storage for
irrigation, lowering of salinity of delta
regions, holding back natural erosion from
filling up stream beds, and will release
stored waters in summer months; it costs
United States government 0.06 cts. per cu yd
to dredge debris from navigable water; dams
built to hold back hydraulic mining debris
reduce cost. Paper presented before
Commonwealth Club of Calif.
Present Status of Hydraulic Mine Debris Disposal in
California.
W.W. BRADLEY.
American Institute of Mining and Metallurgical
Engineers Tech Pub n 673 mtg Feb 1936 10
pp. see also Calif J Mines and Geology v 31
n 3 July 1935 p 34567.
Review of work of California Debris Commission,
pursuant to action taken in consequence of
resolution adopted Aug. 18, 1933, by
Committee on Rivers and Harbors of House of
Representatives; text of brief filed by
State Mineralogist of California,
summarizing pertinent data and figures on
gold values in gravel deposits on
tributaries of Sacramento River in
California.
Scott River Lifts Itself for Hydraulic Mining.
R.J. BARBER.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 137 n 4 Apr 1936 p
1714.
Illustrations and text describing area in Siskiyou
Country, Calif, once famous for its richness
and now containing remnants of gravel
channels; estimated 1,000,000 cu yd minable
gravel, about two thirds above drainage
grade and rest of it below present water
level; water supply system; plan of
operation.
Hydraulic Mining Problem In California.
F.A. CRAMPTON.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 20 n 7 Aug 30 1936 p
34 and 278.
Commentary on changed conditions, contrasted with those
of 1852 to 1884; effects of Sawyer decision
305
306
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
of 1884, and Caminett Act of 1894; salient
provisions of California Placer Mining
District Act of 1933; court decisions and
injunction affecting hydraulic and other
placer mining; with provisions made for
building of retaining dams, method and
machinery for resumption of hydraulic mining
are in hands of mine owners.
Hydraulic Mining Looks Up in California, as Projected
Governmentbuilt debris dams approach
realization.
L.A. PALMER.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 138 n 10 Oct 1937 p
2933 and 52.
Historical review of events and conditions following
"Sawyer decision" of 1884, which did not
enjoin hydraulic mining as such but
restricted dumping of tailings; licensing of
storage space by California Debris
Commission; outline of plans for Middle and
South Yuba, American River, Bear River, and
KlamathTrinity district; annual yardage and
production estimates and expected profits.
Bibliography.
Present Status of Hydraulicmine Debris Disposal in
California.
W.W. BRADLEY.
American Institute of Mining and Metallurgical
Engineers Trans v 126 1937 (Metal Min) p
2018 (discussion) 20810. from Tech Publ n
673 mtg Feb 1936.
Three Concrete Arch Dams for Mining Debris Control.
Western Construction News v 13 n 7 July 1938 p 2623.
Outline of $6,000,000 program to provide three
reservoirs on Yuba River and American River,
in California, to permit resumption of
hydraulic mining; structure will provide
reservoir space capable of restraining
168,000,000 cu yd of debris; characteristics
of structures.
Hydraulic Miners Won Through Cooperation.
H.S. MATTHEWS.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 22 n 4 July 15 1938 p
67.
Commentary on outcome of efforts of California
Hydraulic Mining Association; Federal funds
available and work has been started on first
of 3 dams to be constructed for impounding
tailings from hydraulic mines on Yuba and
American rivers in northern California;
outline of legislative steps making
resumption of hydraulic mining possible.
307
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Hydraulic Mining to Resume in Central California.
W.G. ALLEN.
Mining Congress Journal v 24 n 8 Aug 1938 p 125.
Historical resume of clash of interests of farmers and
hydraulic miners in early days; Caminetti
Act of 1893 and later legislative proposals;
organization of miners; comment on 4 debris
dams planned by Federal Government to
impound over 200,000,000 cu yd of waste from
hydraulicking operations; map showing
proposed storage reservoirs for debris.
Hydraulic Mining on American River.
P. BURCH.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 22 n 23 Apr 30 1939 p
46.
Comment on construction of concrete single arch debris
dams of overflow type making possible
resumption of hydraulic mining along
American and Yuba rivers in California;
North Fork Dam on American river, 5 mi from
Auburn, has storage capacity of 24,000,000
cu yd debris; estimates of yardages of
workable gravel.
Hydraulicking for Gold at Poverty Hill.
J.M. EHRHORN.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 141 n 8 Aug 1940 p 658.
Mine is in west end of Sierra County, Calif; sampling
in two pits indicated recoverable values of
35c and 25c per cu yd respectively; after
testing various mining methods, decision was
made on all pumping and hydraulic mining
procedure with operations based on eight
months program; mining and washing practice;
revised plan involves stripping low grade
part of overburden; Diesel power.
SingleArch Dams for Debris Control.
P. BURCH.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 24 n 15 Dec 30 1940 p
23.
Supplementing paper from issue of Apr 30 1939, author
gives further data on progress in building
of dams to permit resumption of hydraulic
mining in California; Upper Narrows dam on
Yuba River, near Marysville, to be completed
in 1941; development of single arch type of
dam; debris dams are all overflow structures
with no separate spillway structure
provided.
New Debris Dams Will Revive California's Hydraulic
GoldMining Industry.
307
308
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mining and Metallurgy v 22 n 411 Mar 1941 p 1723.
Note on completion, in Jan 1941, of 237 ft Upper
Narrows hydraulic debris dam on main Yuba
River; project is key unit in series of four
similar structures; dam is single arch type,
with debris storage capacity of more than
118,000,000 cu yd; cost was $4,500,000;
historical summary of hydraulic mining.
Hydraulic Mining and Debris Control, Sacramento River
and Tributaries, California.
F.M.S. JOHNSON.
Mines Magazine v 31 n 4 Apr 1941 p 15762 and 184.
Review of early hydraulic mining, from about 1852 until
stoppage by court injunction in 1884; since
passage of California Debris Act in 1893,
about 1200 applications for mining were
filed, of which about 1/3 were rejected;
descriptions of debris dam projects and
construction; design factors.
Hydraulic Mining at Lost Camp.
F.L. ELAM.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 25 n 1 May 30 1941 p
34.
Notes on operations of Lost Camp Mining Company, near
Blue Canyon, Calif; water brought to
reservoir by 17 mi ditch; 22 in. pipe from
penstock to V. from which 15 in. and 11 in.
pipes feed two monitors equipped with 7 in.
and 6 in. nozzles; about 1400 cu yds of
gravel sluiced daily; caterpillar bulldozer
used to push gravel and large rocks to
sluice; will be used later in stripping
bedrock; semicemented gravel is loosened by
blasting.
Relief Hill Hydraulic Pit Replaces Townsite.
F.L. ELAM.
Mining Journal (Phoenix Ariz) v 25 n 4 July 15 1941 p 2
and 36.
Note on operations of Western Gold, Inc., at Hydraulic
mine near North Bloomfield in Nevada County,
Calif; taken over 10 yr ago, mine has been
worked on small scale for five years; now
that debris can be dumped behind Yuba
Narrows debris dam near Smartville, from
3500 to 4000 cu yd can be washed down and
sent through sluices each day.
Revival of Historic La Porte District.
W. CARNIE, JR.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 25 n 7 Aug 30 1941 p
2.
Notes on new developments; dredging on Poverty Hill
properties; hydraulic operations at
Gibsonville, Scales, Holland Flat and
309
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Pioneer mines; activity at several small
drift mines.
Nevada City: Where Hydraulicking Began.
B. THOMPSON.
Mining World v 11 n 3 Mar 1949 p 178.
Narrative of region in California, said to have been
first prospected by James Marshall in 1848;
hydraulic mining; with canvas hose 35 ft
long, started in 1852; experimental milling
of gold quartz.
309
310
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Hydraulic
U.S.
Colorado
Hydraulic Mining in Colorado.
W.E. THORNE.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 8, 1906.
Gives some of the actual costs in this class of mining
in Colorado, as conducted at a high altitude
and during short seasons of from four to
five months. Ills. 1200 w.
311
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Hydraulic
U.S.
Oregon
Hydraulic Mining with Centrifugal Pumps.
ENOS BROWN.
Scientific American Aug. 19, 1905.
Illustrates and describes a successful plant installed
at Grant's Pass, Oregon, where there are
acres of rich placers which have never been
extensively worked. 1100 w.
Giant Hydraulic Placer Mining in Oregon.
A.S. ATKINSON.
Mines and Minerals March 1906.
Explains the great difficulties encountered in working
high elevations, and describes the pumping
of water with turbines against a head of 430
feet for operating giant nozzles. 1700 w.
311
312
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Other
Placer Mining.
ARTHUR LAKES.
Colliery Engineer May 1896.
A general and specific account of placers, their
formation, distribution and the construction
and development of the different machinery
and devices used in working them. Ill. 5800
w.
Placer Mining.
Mining Industry and Review July 8, 1897.
Gives calculations made to estimate the plan of working
a placer, and the value and future of the
same, as an illustration of the correctness.
2200 w.
Pointers on Placer Mining.
Mining Industry and Review July 29, 1897.
Discusses the problems presented to the placer miner,
and a few of the difficulties. 1400 w.
Placer Mining on Wheels.
J.M. SWEENEY.
Railway and Engineering Review Dec. 18, 1897.
Ill. description of machine to recover gold from placer
beds by washing all the gravel. 1800 w.
Placer Mining by Machinery.
WILLIAM M. JOHNSTON.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 5, 1898.
Reviews some of the methods adopted which often have
resulted in loss, and endeavors to point out
lines which may be safely followed. 3000 w.
A New Method of Placer Mining for Gold.
F.B. KNIGHT.
Mines and Minerals April 1898.
Device for excavating and handling large quantities of
material at low cost, means by which a goldsaving flume can be used and the tailings
disposed of when the surface has but a
moderate degree of fall. Ill. 2900 w.
Placer Gold and How It is Secured.
JOHN E. BENNETT.
Cosmopolitan Nov. 1898.
An explanation of what placers are, how formed, descrpn
of methods of placer mining. 3500 w. Ill.
Deep Alluvial Mining.
313
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
D.H. BROWNE.
Australian Mining Standard
Practical hints. 3800 w.
Dec. 6, 1900.
How to Pan Gold from Gravel.
Prof. HENRY S. MONROE
Engineering News Feb. 12, 1903.
Taken from the printed instructions, by author, for
students in the ore dressing, laboratory of
the School of Mines, Columbia Univ., New
York. 1200 w.
Gold Washing in the South.
E.B. WILSON.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 17, 1906.
Describes some crude methods which succeed where
expensive outfits would fail. 900 w.
Improved Apparatus for Mining in River Beds.
J.W. HUNSAKER, V. BEISSWINGERT, and R.L. DAVIS.
Mining World May 23, 1908.
Illustrates and describes invention for reaching
pockets of goldbearing sands or gravels.
2000 w.
Art of Placer Piping.
DENNIS H. STOVALL.
Mining and Scientific Press Nov. 13, 1909.
Brief discussion of the work of an expert piper. Ills.
1000 w.
A New Method of Working Stream Beds.
H.S. TAYLOR.
Mining World Dec. 11, 1909.
An invention relating to placer mining for gold is
illustrated and described, and other work,
to which it may be applied, is suggested.
600 w.
Mobility in Placer Mining.
JOHN POWER HUTCHINS.
Mining Magazine July, 1910.
Brief discussion of the importance of factory of
mobility in all placer mining operations.
Ills. 1400 w.
Hughes' Patent Alluvial Concentrator.
E. CECIL SAINTSMITH.
Queensland Gov Mining Journal July 15, 1914.
Describes apparatus designed to eliminate boxsluicing.
Drawings and Ills. 6000 w.
Timbering in Deep Placer Mining.
HAROLD T. POWER.
Mining and Scientific Press Aug. 11, 1917.
Hidden Treasure mine durability of different woods;
methods of framing and setting. Ills. 2200
313
314
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
w.
Some Special Methods and Machines for Recovery of Gold
and Platinum in Placer Deposits.
C. MCK. LAIZURE.
Calif. Division of Mines and Min., vol. 24, no. 1, Jan.
1929, pp. 94135, 28 figs. Detailed
description of many types of special dry and
wet washers, concentrators and amalgamators;
notes on recovery methods, largely extracts
from article by E.S. Leaver in U.S. Bureau
of Mines Information Cir., no. 608, Aug.
1928, and from Calif. State Min. Bureau
Bul., no. 85, by C.A. Logan, OP.
DeepSeated or Buried Placer Deposits.
J.H. ROBERTSON.
Canadian Mining Journal, vol. 50, nos. 10 and 12, Mar.
8 and 22, 1929, pp. 208209, and 263265, 8
figs. Mar 8:
Discussion of deposits formed in river channels of
tertiary age, later buried by debris of
glacial period; three groups are considered,
classed according to their relation to
present drainage. Mar. 22: Details of mining
practice; dip and rise, longwall and
longwall retreating systems; main and
auxiliary shafts; haulage roads; support of
main and haulage roads by dirt pillars and
timbering; timbering at working faces;
caving; washing of dirt; operating costs
variable, with about $2 per cu. yd. as
minimum.
The Mining of Placer Deposits.
J.H. ROBERTSON.
Canadian Mining Journal vol 50, no. 25, June 21, 1929,
pp. 572574, 2 figs.
Some deposits are so situated and constituted that
neither hydraulic nor drift mining is
applicable in both instances, it is matter
of applying systems by which dirt can be
handled conveniently and economically;
general description of effective mechanical
shovel system; dragline scrapers as against
shovels and trucks.
Mining Placer Gravel On Steep Grades.
J.W. NEILL.
Engineering and Mining Journal., vol. 128, no. 20, Nov.
16, 1929, pp. 771772, 1 fig.
Mining machine designed for special problem, but not
built; essential units consist of steam
shovel to do digging and floating; washing
plant to handle gravel; recover gold, and
stack tailings; outfit equipped with 1 1/4
cu. yd bucket; should be able to dig from 75
to 90 cu. yd. per hr., depending on gravel-
315
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
bank conditions and skill of operators.
Notes on Timbering DeepSeated Placer Deposits.
J.H. ROBERTSON.
Canadian Mining Journal, vol. 51, no. 24, June 13,
1930, pp. 564565, 4 figs.
How to proceed with calculations and design of
timbering of drifts and other underground
openings; effects of nature of dirts; angle
of repose; supporting beams; props; examples
of calculation.
More Notes on Timbering Shafts in DeepSeated Placer
Deposits.
J.J. ROBERTSON.
Canadian Mining Journal, vol. 52, no. 27, Oct. 1931,
pp. 759760, 4 figs.
Data supplementing paper from issue of June 19, 1930.
Making Light Rocker.
R. HARVIE
Canadian Mining Journal v 53, n 8 Aug 1932, p 3434.
Equipment built and used by author in course of
examination of Ditton River placer field in
Quebec; design based on data given in
Peele's Mining Engineers' Handbook, with
modifications.
Centrifugal Separator for Recovery of Placer Gold.
J.B. GIRAND.
Mining Journal (Phoeniz, Ariz.) v. 16 n 12 Nov. 15,
1932, p. 34.
Features of machine designed by author; material fed to
rotating barrel of double conical shape,
largest diameter at center, speed 200 rpm;
by regulating speed and amount of water fed
to mass, centrifugal force is utilized to
increase effective differences in specific
gravities of gold or minerals; and of
lighter material to be discarded; low
operating cost and high recovery are
claimed.
Placer Mining by Centrifugal Pump.
W.E. SINCLAIR.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 134 n 5 May 1933 p
1847.
Features of principal types of centrifugal gravel
pumps, usually made in pipe sizes 6, 8, 10
and 12 in.; three methods of applying gravel
pump as pumping unit in placer mining
operations; examples typical of practice in
Nigeria; detailed yardage costs; example of
gravel pump report for 1 mo. operation of
tin mines.
315
316
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Koloro Placer Mining Machine.
E.M. KOLBEN.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 16, n 24, May 15,
1933, p. 5 and 22.
Design of wet placer machine built on principle of dry
washer, using diaphragm to force water
through riffle table, where in dry machine
bellows forces air through table; machine
weighs 550 lb. completely equipped and is
capable of handling 50 to 70 cu yd of gold
bearing gravel in 8hr shift; operation
procedure.
New Gold Saving Machinery.
F.P. MARUGG.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz.) v 17, n 3, June 30,
1933, p. 5.
Note on Marmac concentrator, combining principle of
rocker and sluicebox riffle; separate items
on Harris doublefan dry washer and
mechanical panner and cleanup machine.
Note on Panning for Gold When Ores of Bismuth are
Present.
J. HENDERSON.
Chemical Metallurigical and Mining Society of South
Africa J v 34 n 6 Dec. 1933 p 217.
Author's reply to discussion of paper from issue of Apr
1933.
Power Elevation in Placer Mining.
E.F. CARPENTIER.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz.) v 18 n 10 Oct 15 1934 p
5.
Advantages of use of electric power, at about 1c per
hphr, for driving centrifugal pump to supply
water under pressure, in operation of gold
placer deposits that are below water level
of streams, or too low for ordinary
sluicing; estimate of expenses and profits.
Dragline Excavator in Placer Mining.
S.R. FOX.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 136 n 4 Apr 1935 p
1636.
Features of machinery suitable for deposit too small in
area and depth to warrant construction of
gold dredge, or too low in grade to be
worked by hand labor; cost of installation,
including washing plant and accessories,
plus working capital for 60 days, ranges
from $25,000 to $50,000; examples of steamoperated and electricallyoperated
installations; operating details.
Working Alluvial by Dragline.
-
317
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 28 n 325 Oct 8
1935 p 48790.
Comment on work done by Nokomai Gold Mining Co. in New
Zealand in 1933 and 1934, using 5 cu yd
bucket and later 4 1/2 cu yd bucket,
operated from winch driven by 310 hp motor;
ground was 90 ft. deep; 485 oz. gold
recovered during 7 mo. and scheme abandoned;
extracts from US Bureau of Mines Inf. Cir
6846 describing successful operation in
Wyoming.
Modern Method of Recovering Placer Gold.
A.R. BREWER.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 19 n 11 Oct. 30 1935 p
34 and 29.
Description of machinery developed by Production
Engineering Co. for recovery of gold values
concentrated in bedrock cracks and crevices;
equipment used to test placer deposits;
feature of each is agitation by use of highpressure hydraulic jets and removal of
material with centrifugal pumps.
WingDamming River Bottoms for Gold Recovery.
E.F. CARPENTIER.
Mining Journal (Phoenix Ariz) v 19 n 12 Nov. 15, 1935 p
5.
Notes on oldtime method, consisting of mining section
of river bottom in which ground is blocked
off by damming with cribs which have been
filled with dirt, changing water course to
other side of stream.
Excavating Machinery and Portable Washing Plants in
Placer Mining.
S.M. SHOROHOV.
Mining Magazine v 50 n 5 Nov. 1936 p 2705.
Brief description of placer mining methods; now widely
used and review of conditions necessary for
their advantageous application.
De quelques dispositifs de récupération de l'or fin
alluvionnaire.
R. VAN AUBEL.
Chronique des Mines Coloniales v 6 n 62 May 15 1937 p
26871.
Means employed for recovery of fine alluvial gold;
notes on use of corduroy. Rauschenbusch
elutriator, helicoidal classifiers, jigs,
amalgamation and centrifuging; flotation.
Alluvial Mining With Shovels and Draglines.
S.A. WESTROP.
Mining Magazine v 58 n 3 Mar 1938 p 13750.
Author discusses rapid strides that have been made in
317
318
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
applying mechanical excavation methods to
alluvial mining work and gives some
indications as to costs; typical examples of
equipment illustrated, with comments on
advantages and applicability.
PowerShovel and Dragline Placer Mining.
E.D. GARDNER and P.T. ALLSMAN.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 7013 May 1938 68
p.
Paper supplements Information Cir n 6788, plant
layouts; floating washing plants; typical
flow sheet; movable land plants; stationary
plants; power; water; labor; sampling and
recovery; plant and operating costs.
Where Jigs Replaced Sluice Boxes.
F.A. KENNEDY.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 139 n 7 July 1938 p
505.
Notes on operation of dragline dredge and methods
employed in recovering gold and other
concentrates from gravel deposit of De Lamar
placer mine on Jordan Creek, near De Lamar
quartz and other old gold producers in
Owyhee County, Idaho; gravel 6 to 18 ft
deep; value 9 to 44c per cu yd; 6300 lb
dragline bucket; flow sheet; detail of jig
operation; amalgamation of gold concentrate;
costs for full crew operation, at 3000 cu yd
per 24 hr.
Placering Has Its Pitfalls!
M.H. GUISE.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 141 n 1 Jan 1940 p 53.
Notes on various projects, indicating that inexperience
of new investors (and of some reputed
engineers and practical miners) is often
great.
Mining of Deepseated Placer Deposits.
J.H. ROBERTSON.
Canadian Mining Journal v 61 n 10 Oct 1940 p 64850.
Rich deposits are often found deeply buried under
unpayable dirts; study of procedure in
attacking these deposits; importance of
careful and accurate drilling; case of
deposit with mineralcarrying strata at two
horizons is considered, water being
encountered in each and also in stratum
nearer surface; drill holes as factor in
breaking of "seal" between flows of water of
different horizons.
New Developments in Placer Mining and Recovery of Gold.
C.M. ROMANOWITZ and H.A. SAWIN.
Mining Congress Journal v 26 n 12 Dec 1940 p 217
(discussion) 289 and 68; see also Mining
319
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Journal (Lond) v 211 p 5494 Dec. 7 1940, p
7204.
Basic principles of placer mining; resoiling problems,
dredge developments; Becker Hopkins dredges;
increasing use of tractors; use of portable
washing plants; dry land placer operations;
progress in use of jigs; improvements in
dredge design; pond silt and stackers;
Alaskan practice; discussion by C.W. MERRILL
and H.W.C. PROMMEL.
Simple Mobile Washing Plant Invented Especially for
Shallow Placers.
W.A. ERICKSON.
Mining World v 9 n 5 May 1947 p 34.
Brief illustrated description, of placer washing plant
that permits disposal of tailings without
rehandling and permits easy maintenance of
sluice grade; machine is fully covered by
patents, but is not yet on production.
Portable Placer Unit.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 162 n 9 Sept 1961 p
108.
Portable washing and concentrating plant, that can
handle about 50 cu yd of bankrun gravel/hr.
has been developed; l5 x 30 ft unit, mounted
on structural steel frame, can be equipped
with crawlertype forged tracks, or be
adapted to pontoontype floating boat; when
used in conjunction with portable conveyor
and feed hopper, unit can follow dragline
throughout placer deposit.
Novaya mashina dlya obogashcheniya krupnykh klassov
rossypnogo materiala i ulavlivaniya
samorodkov.
E.I. BOGDANOV.
Bornyi Zhurnal v 137 n 9 Sept 1961 p 6871.
New machine for treatment of coarse grained placer
material and recovery of nuggets; design of
OMTIII600 machine having daily throughput
capacity of 700800 cu m; machine represents
jig with scraperconveyor.
Ratsional'nyi tip promyvochnogo pribora pri razrabotke
rossypei bul'dozerami i skreperami.
E.I. BOGDANOV.
Gornyi Zhurnal n 11 Nov 1962 p 704.
Rational type of washery used during mining of placers
by means of bulldozers and scrapers; design
of portable washery consisting of skid
mounted autonomous aggregates, such as
conveyor and sluices.
319
320
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
321
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Sluice
General
Sluicing for Gold in Queensland.
Queensland Gov Mining Journal Nov. 15, 1902.
Describes the system of working on the Russell
goldfield. Ill. 2800 w.
The Saving of Alluvial Gold in Alaska and the Klondike.
CHESTER WELLS PURINGTON.
Mining Magazine Jan. 1905.
Notes on sluices and goldsaving appliances from a
forthcoming report of the U.S. GEOLOGICAL
SURVEY. Ills. 2700 w.
The Washing of Goldbearing Gravel in Sluices (Die
Verwaschung Goldhaltiger Gerölle In
Gerinne).
L. ST. RANIER.
Oesterreichische Zeitschrift für Berg und Hüttenwesen
Feb. 4, 11, 1905.
A discussion of the influence of the size of pebbles
and the velocity of the water flow upon the
separation of the gold. Two articles. 5000
w.
Sluice Building on Placer.
DENNIS H. STOVALL.
Mining World Nov. 4, 1905.
Calls attention to important features in the
construction of a sluice. Ills. 900 w.
Pan, Rocker and Sluice Box.
H.H. SYMONS.
Mining in California v 28 n 2 Apr 1932 p 20513.
Notes on simple equipment for placer mining.
Design of Sluices for Gold Placer Mining.
F.C. GILBERT.
Mining Journal (Phoenix Ariz) v 16 n 8 Sept. 15, 1932,
p 34.
Mathematical derivation of formula involving several
factors; special conditions may be
considered by change in constants.
Efficient Sluice Box.
F.A. CRAMPTON.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 20 n 19 Feb 28 1937 p
7 and 29.
Size of sluice boxes, grade, and type of riffles all
have important bearing on gold recovery;
these must be varied to suit type of gravel
321
322
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
handled; essential features of design
discussed.
L'emploi du velours Corduroy dans les exploitations
auriféres.
L. LAFFITTE.
Chronique des Mines Coloniales v 5 n 57 Dec. 1, 1936 p
3989.
Brief note on use of corduroy velvet in exploitation of
alluvial deposits.
Sluice Boxes Must Pay.
W.A. NEWMAN.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 138 n 5 May 1937 p
22931.
Examples of design of sluice boxes; purpose of sluice
in hydraulic mine is to transport alluvial
gravels from pit to their final resting
place, and to recover gold and black sands;
sluice should be so designed and built as
not to sacrifice effectiveness of one
function to that of other; notes on
operation of sluices.
Saving Gold by Means of Corduroy.
M.W. VON BERNEWITZ.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 7085 Aug 1939 17
p supp plates; see also Mining Journal
(Lond) v 207 n 5434 Oct 14 1939 p 905;
Rhodesian Mining Journal v 11 n 150 Nov 1939
p 1465 and 1469.
Corduroy suitable for wearing apparel is unsuitable for
gold saving; characteristics of textiles
efficient for catching gold; corduroy
tables; ore testing with corduroy; notes on
plant practice in various parts of world;
launders lined with corduroy; treatment of
corduroy concentrates; corduroy for platinum
ores; rubber matting for saving gold.
Bibliography.
Use of Corduroy in Gold Milling.
Canadian Mining Journal v 65 n 9 Sept. 1944 p. 6213.
General notes on Canadian practice; type of corduroy
cloth used for clothing is unsuitable for
recovery of gold and associated minerals;
corduroy blaknet tests; descriptions of use
of corduroy at specific Canadian mills;
treatment of concentrates collected on
corduroy.
Simplified Sand Sluices Cut Downtime.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 163 n 4 May 1962 p 82.
Improved separator keeps slurry mixed uniformly
throughout system and only adjustments
necessary are at sluices discharge ends;
323
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
separator's individual parts were small
enough to reduce greatly costs of
maintenance, repair and shipping.
323
324
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Sluice
New Zealand
Sluicing along Shotover River.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 27 n 318 Mar 8
1935 p 2013.
Feature of project in New Zealand, involving building
of sheet piling weir across river and
diversion of water into steel flume 1500 ft
long 20 ft wide and 8 ft deep, so that bed
of river could be searched for gold;
sluicing and elevating practice; gold saving
devices and other gear; hydroelectric power
plant.
325
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Sluice
Sluicing Methods at Fairbanks.
HUBERT I. ELLIS.
Engineering and Mining Journal
Ills. 2500 w.
U.S. - Alaska
Dec. 18, 1915. Details.
325
326
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Mining Method
Sluice
U.S.S.R.
Sluicing at the Kolchan Mines, East Siberia.
CHEST W. PURINGTON.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 4, 1911. Serial. 1st
part.
Map and description of the main physical features of
the district. Ills. 1500 w.
327
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACER
Misc. Treatments
The Extraction of Gold by Chemical Methods.
T.K. ROSE.
Nature March 11, 1897.
Discusses the various processes, with their advantages
and disadvantages. 2500 w.
The Loss of Gold in Waste Tailings.
HENRY ROSALES.
Australian Mining Standard April 8, 1897.
Account of examinations made to determine the actual
loss of gold in waste tailings. 2800 w.
An Improved BlanketTable.
THOMAS WHITE.
Canadian Mining Review Nov. 30, 1898.
Before the Australasian Inst. of Min. Engs. Description
of improvements for simplifying the working
of blankettables, and supplying a cheap,
easily worked concentrator. discussion. Ill.
2200 w.
The Chemical Precipitation of Gold.
P. DE WILDE.
Journal of the Chemical and Metallurigical Society of
South Africa Feb. 1899.
A reply to the discussion on the writer's process of
gold extraction, and also a paper by WILLIAM
BETTEL, replying to the paper given. 6300
w.
Fine Gold Mining and Concentration.
N.J. FLECK.
Engineering and Mining Journal July 15, 1899.
On the excellent work accomplished with the river
burlap machine. 1200 w.
What Has Become of the Gold Run in the Tailings?
B.C. WILSON.
Canadian Mining Record Jan. 31, 1900.
Read before the Min. Soc. of Nova Scotia. On the
doubtful value of old tailings. 1300 w.
Gold Extraction Processes and New Solvents.
J. OHLY.
Mining Report April 26, 1900.
Part first describes the process of M. DE RIGAUD, and
the substitution of bromine for chloride in
the chlorination process.
Working Over an Old Dump.
327
328
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mining and Scientific Press May 26, 1900.
Describes an old dump in California being worked with
profit, though first worked closely and
economically. Describes the process employed
by the old company and the present method.
Ill. 2800 w.
Saving Gold from Black Sand.
Mining and Scientific Press June 28, 1902.
Explains the difficulty met in solving this problem,
and considers the cyanide process the
solution, precipitating the gold by the use
of a current of electricity. 1200 w.
The Edison Dry Process for the Separation of Gold from
Gravel.
Mr. EDISON
Engineering and Mining Journal May 9, 1903.
A description of a pneumatic and gravity process,
authorized by author, Ill. 1200 w.
Undercurrents for Saving Flour Gold and Platinum Sands.
DENNIS H. STOVALL.
Mining and Scientific Press Oct. 24, 1903.
Describes the system in use at the Royal Group
hydraulic mines of Galice District, Oregon.
Ill. 800 w.
Second Preliminary Report on Investigation of Black
Sand.
DR. DAVID T. DAY
Mining Reporter Dec. 7, 1905.
Information from the report of author concerning the
experiments in concentration by mechanical
tables of gold from the sands of the Pacific
Coast and the Columbia River, which have
been conducted at the Lewis and Clark
Centennial Exposition, with a view of
ascertaining the most economical method of
separation. 1500 w.
Treatment of Auriferous Black Sands.
KENNETH ROSS
New Zealand Mines Record Aug. 16, 1906.
Information concerning experiments in Otago and
Southland. Also report by author on "Some
Experiments on the West Coat." 4000 w.
Loss of Gold in Placer Mining.
DENNIS H. STOVALL.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 23, 1907.
Suggestions for a durable and efficient riffle, and
remarks on causes of loss. 1000 W.
Rusty Gold, and How It Is Saved.
DENNIS H. STOVALL.
329
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Mining World Oct. 3, 1908.
Method of saving dark red or "rusty" gold in placer
mining. 1000 w.
The Saving of Fine Placer Gold.
FRED H. HAZARD.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 26, 1911.
Explains the difficulties, and discusses the utility of
undercurrents and related subjects,
describing a design of blacksand
concentrator. Ills. 3000 w.
Centrifugal Concentration of Placer Gravel.
J.B. GIRAND.
Engineering and Mining Journal, v 134 n 3 Mar 1933 p
1101.
Features of equipment and practice at plant installed
at Oro Blanco, Ariz, 1 1/2 mi north of
Mexican boundary, placer gravel is given
primary treatment of grizzlying off large
boulders, scrubbing to break down clay, and
screening to minus 3/8 in; scrubber is built
on principal of concrete mixer; centrifugal
concentrating machine was described in paper
by same author in Mining Journal (Phoenix
Ariz) Nov. 15, 1932.
Flotation of Gold from River Sand and Black Sand.
A.W. FAHRENWALD.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 16 n 23 Apr 30 1933 p
34.
Method of treating placer sand by flotation; results of
laboratory tests on Snake River goldbearing
gravel.
Huelsdonk Concentrator.
D.D. BAKER.
Mining Journal (Phoenix Ariz) v 17 n 1 May 30 1933 p 5.
Device designed for saving gold in auriferous gravels,
but adaptable to recovering values in hard
rock ores; concentrator consists of
disintegrator for breaking up and washing
gravel, and long narrow concentrating table.
Treatment and Sale of Black Sands.
N.W. VON BERNEWITZ.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 7000 Mar 1938 21
p.
Black sand defined; report issued in answer to
inquiries regarding possible treatment and
sale of black sands recovered in beach and
river placering; excerpts from literature on
origin and occurrence of black sands; cleanup and recovery methods; concentrating
tables; grinding and amalgamation; list of
329
330
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
makers and suppliers of ball mills and
grinding pans; buyers of black sands and
platinum.
Auriferous Black Sands.
E.H. VAUGHAN.
Western Miner v 20 n 8 Aug 1947 p 501.
Notes on treatment of "black sands," to enable
prospectors and placer operators to recover
values on profitable basis; description of
"cradle" or "rocker"; many old workings and
creek concentrations contain from 5 to
sometimes 25 lb black sands per cu yd;
examples of net smelter returns on shipments
carrying gold, platinum, iridium, thorium,
etc.
Preliminary Investigation of Concentrating Certain
Minerals in Idaho Placer Sand. W.W. STALEY
and J.S. BROWNING.
Idaho Bureau of Mines and Geology Pamphlet n 87 June
1949 23 p. supp plates. Research described
deals only with monazite, zircon, ilmenite,
and magnetite; work is confined almost
entirely to investigation of screening,
gravity concentration methods, magnetic
separation, combination of which proved
successful.
331
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GOLD PLACERS
Testing and Sampling
Methods of Testing and Sampling Placer Deposits.
EDMUND B. KIRBY.
Mining and Scientific Press June 17, 1899.
Read before the Colorado Scientific Society. Describes
the best way of carrying on the work.
Sampling Placer Deposits.
EDMUND B. KIRBY.
Mines and Minerals July 1899.
Read before the Colorado Scientific Society. On the
importance of correct methods of testing
their value. 3800 w.
Testing and Sampling Placer Deposits.
EDMUND B. KIRBY.
Engineering and Mining Journal July 29, 1899.
Abstract of a paper read before the Colorado Scientific
Society. Outlines the evidence to be secured
by tests, etc., and the methods used in test
workings. 2000 w.
The Testing of Flat Placer Deposits.
ROBERT NYE.
Engineering and Mining Journal July 14, 1900.
Discusses usual methods of testing, and the proper use
of a well driller. 2400 w.
Prospecting Gold Dredge with Steel Hull.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 7, 1903.
Describes a prospecting dredge of all steel
construction, designed to clean up bed rock
at 22 ft. depth, and to handle free material
at the rate of 60 tons per hour. 1700 w.
The Prospecting and Valuing of Dredging Ground.
NORMAN C. STINES.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 3, 1906. Serial. 1st
part.
Describes the prospecting of gravel deposits by means
of the Keystone drill, to test their fitness
for dredging purposes. Ills. 2000 w.
A Few Hints to Prospectors.
CHARLES A. BRAMBLE.
Canadian Mining Review June, 1906.
Suggestions especially for prospecting work in the
north of Canada and British America. 2000 w.
331
332
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Prospecting a Gold Placer.
Mines and Minerals July 1906.
A description of the machinery used and methods of
operating and of calculating values from the
results. Ill. 3000 w.
Prospecting Dredging Ground.
D'ARCY WEATHERBE.
Mining and Scientific Press Oct. 20, 1906.
Discusses points to be taken into account beside the
actual gold content, and the methods of
determining them. Ills. 3000 w.
Examination of Placer Ground.
REGIS CHAUVENET.
Mining Reporter April 4, 1907. Serial. 1st part.
Remarks on the importance of a careful testing of the
ground in placer mining, and a discussion of
the pan as a means of testing are given in
the present article. 1800 w.
Examining a Placer Property.
GEORGE W. MAYNARD.
Mining World July 6, 1907.
Outlines methods and gives an account of an
investigation of property in Arizona. 1800
w.
The Essential Data of Placer Investigations.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal Aug. 24, 1907. Serial.
1st part.
Calls attention to points to be ascertained and
precautions to be taken in the examination
and valuation of placer ground before
exploitation. Ills. 2500 w.
River Prospecting for Gold.
MARSHALL MACFARLANE.
Mining Journal Sept. 19, 1908.
Describes an effective plant and methods of work in
French Guinea. Ills. 1600 w.
Examination of Gold Dredging Properties.
T.S. RUH.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 1, 1909.
Comments on methods that cause failure. 1000 w.
Testing Dredgeable Gravels.
WILLIAM H. RADFORD.
Mining and Scientific Press May 22, 1909.
Suggestions for testing and working placers. Ills. 3500
w.
Placer Examinations.
ARTHUR LAKES, JR.
Mines and Minerals July 1909.
333
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Explains method of prospecting with churn drills,
collecting and panning samples, estimating
and recording results. 3000 w.
Dredging and the Sampling of Placer Ground.
A.P. ROGERS.
Engineering and Mining Journal March 12, 1910.
Brief description of methods of testing and preliminary
sampling. 2000 w.
Sampling Placer Ground.
J.P. HUTCHINS and N.C. STINES.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 25, 1911.
Directions for treating the sample, calculating the
gold content, etc. 2000 w.
Examination of Dredging Properties.
FRANCIS J. DENNIS.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
April 1912.
Considers factors necessary to ascertain in determining
the value of placerground. 1500 w.
Prospecting Gold Placers in Korea.
J.J. MARTIN.
Mining and Scientific Press May 18, 1912.
Describes prospecting work at the Chiksan mines. Ills.
1800 w.
The "Salting" of Samples and Means of Detection.
GEORGE A. JAMES.
Mining and Engineering World May 25, 1912.
Calls attention to cases due to ignorance or
carelessness. 2000 w.
ChurnDrill Examination of Placers.
JAMES E. DICK.
Mines and Minerals Sept. 1912. Serial. 1st part.
Illustrated description of drill and tools, method of
setting up, driving casing, pumping,
sampling, and calculations. 3500 w.
Preliminary Testing of Placer Ground.
WILLIAM F. WARD.
Engineering and Mining Journal April 5, 1913.
A combination Empire and Keystone drilling outfit is
described by author. Ills. 2500 w.
Successful Salting of Alluvials.
C.S. HALEY.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 27, 1913.
Discusses methods of salting worthless gold mines. 2000
w.
Placer Salting in Santo Domingo.
J.W. LEDOUX.
333
334
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Engineering and Mining Journal Feb. 14, 1914.
An account of extensive salting in connection with
placer deposit explorations. 3500 w.
Methods of Testing Placer Gravels.
W.J. RADFORD.
Mining and Scientific Press July 4, 1914.
Gives detailed statements of results based from tests
made in both North and South America. 5000
w.
Examination of Placer Ground.
THOMAS A. GRAVES.
Mining and Scientific Press Dec. 26, 1914.
Discusses methods of prospecting and of calculating
values. 2500 w.
Prospecting Wet Placer Ground by Shaft Sinking.
DONALD STEEL.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 9, 1915.
Describes the work. Ills. 1200 w.
Prospecting Methods at Fairbanks.
HUBERT I. ELLIS.
Engineering and Mining Journal May 8, 1915.
Methods and devices used. Ills. 5000 w.
Prospecting Gold Gravel with Keystone Drills.
J.D. GALLOWAY
Canadian Mining Journal Dec. 15, 1915.
From report of author on conditions in Cariboo
division, B.C.
Information on operations.
2000 w.
Prospecting Before Dredging on Seward Peninsula,
Alaska.
COREY C. BRAYTON.
Mining and Scientific Press April 29, 1916.
Review of methods for testing and of dredge design to
meet local conditions. Ills. 5000 w.
Hydraulic Prospecting at the Reelberg Tin Mines.
E.R. SCHOCH.
Journal of the South Africa Institute of Engineers.,
vol. 17, nos. 45, Nov.Dec., 1918, pp. 6167,
9 figs.
Surface prospecting by means of hydraulic jets or
monitors on level ground with artificially
conserved return water.
Placer Prospecting Practice.
GERALD H. HUTTON.
Mining and Metallurgy no 176, Aug. 1921, pp. 1517.
Discusses the points to serve as a basis for systematic
investigation and technical discussion.
Valuation of Placer Deposits.
335
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
GERALD H. HUTTON.
Mining and Scientific Press, vol. 123, no. 11, Sept.
10, 1921, pp. 365368, 2 figs. Discusses
discrepancies between sampling estimates and
actual recoveries, also methods in use.
Drilling Results and Dredging Returns.
CHARLES W. GARDNER.
Engineering and Mining Journal, vol. 112, nos. 17 and
18, Oct. 22 and 29, 1921, pp. 646649, 1 fig.
and pp. 688692, 3 figs. Oct. 22:
Accuracy of churn drilling of placer deposits limited
by irregular distribution of gold, the
relatively small samples taken, the skill of
operator, and many other factors. Work
difficult to check. Oct. 29: Examples of
placer operations in various parts of the
world indicate that prospecting data must be
intelligently interpreted to obtain accurate
and reliable estimates of probable gold
content and recovery.
Placer Prospecting Practice.
A.C. LUDLUM.
Mining and Metallurgy, no. 179, Nov. 1921, pp. 2728.
Observations on handdrilling operations with rotated
casing with which in author's belief,
accurate results are secured.
The Discrepancy Between Drilling and Dredging Results.
R.G. SMITH.
Engineering and Mining Journal., vol. 112, no. 21, Nov.
19, 1921, pp. 812815.
Nature of clay, gravel, and gold, operating methods
employed, crew efficiency in dredging and
other factors exert important influences.
Valuation of Placer Deposits.
WILBUR H. GRANT.
Engineering and Mining Journa, vol. 113, no. 8, Feb.
25, 1922, pp. 329331.
Discusses present methods; accuracy in relation to cost
of investigation; controlling factors in
sampling methods.
Magnetometric Determinations Applied to Placer Mining.
ARTHUR GIBSON.
Engineering and Mining Journal Press, vol. 114, no.
25, Dec. 16, 1922, pp. 10641069, 7 figs.
Results obtained by this method of making
surveys to ascertain approximate location of
mineral concentrations; use of maps and
charts.
A Comparison of Estimates Upon a Golddredging Orebody.
-
335
336
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Engineering and Mining Journal. Press, vol. 114, no.
21, May 26, 1923, pp. 934936.
Editorial study of reports of four engineers making
independent examinations.
The Determination of Gold Values in Placer Deposits.
J.H. MARKS.
Mountain States Mineral Age, vol. 12, no. 3, Mar. 1927,
pp. 1314.
Outline of plan to find value of placer ground.
The Valuation of Alluvial Deposits.
W.R. RUMBOLD. I
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Bul. (Lond.), no.
283, Apr. 1928, 13 pp. 4 figs; see also
discussions and contributed remarks in nos.
284, 286, 288, 289 and 2910, May, July,
Sept. Oct. and Nov. 1928, pp. 1135, 15, 1329, 12 and 131, 7 figs. Two systems of
sampling now in vogue; applied to deposits
directly related to present river system and
to ancient deposits which have no such
relation; underestimates to be guarded
against as much as overestimates; generally
impossible to have all tin concentrate
samples assayed by wet methods; tin contents
must be estimated by vanning, specific
gravity or some other roughandready methods;
cost of sampling.
Alluvial Prospecting: the Technical Investigation of
Economic Alluvial Minerals.
C. RAEBURN and H.B. MILNER.
Nature (Lond.), vol. 122, no. 3081, Nov. 17, 1928, pp.
764765.
Review of book published by D. van Nostrand Co., New
York; main body of text consists of
introduction and ten chapters dealing
amongst other matters with classification,
lithology, provenance and association of
alluvial and allied deposits and minerals;
theories of transport and accumulation;
prospecting methods; geophysical aids; field
work; report; and laboratory methods.
The Valuation of Alluvial Deposits.
W.R. RUMBOLD.
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Trans., vol. 37,
1928, pp. 437451 and (discussion) 451541, 11
figs.
Two systems of sampling now in vogue; applied to
deposits directly related to present river
system and to ancient deposits which have no
such relation; underestimates to be guarded
against as much as overestimates; generally
impossible to have all tin concentrate
samples assayed by wet methods; tin contents
must be estimated by vanning, specific
337
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
gravity or some other roughandready method;
cost of sampling.
A Case of Discrepancy Between Bore Values and
Recoveries
J.C. COLDHAM.
Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. Proc.
no. 76, Dec. 31, 1929, pp. 233238 and
(discussion) 238242, 1 fig.
Comparison of results of test boring done under
contract and of yield from actual mining
operations by sluicing and hydraulic
elevators; narrow valley deposit of fluvioglacial origin; wash is 80 to 90 ft. deep
and is formed in two distinct layers;
returns indicate that drill fails to pick up
coarse gold, while mined gold shows high
percentage of coarse gold in form of thick
plates.
Alluvial Prospecting in South America.
H.L. HOLLOWAY.
Mining Magazine, vol. 43, no. 2, Aug. 1930, pp. 8587.
Details of shaft and hand drilling methods; used in
prospecting certain alluvial deposits in
Equador and Colombia.
Estimating Metal Reserves of Placer Deposits, Etc.
D.N. OGLOBLIN.
Tzvetniye Metalli n 7 July 1931 p 92649 3 supp plate.
Method of isolines proposed by B.K. SOBOLEVSKY;
directions for use of method; practical
numerical examples. (In Russian)
Systematic Sampling of Alluvial Deposits by Banka
Drill.
P.R. LAKE.
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Bul n 331 Apr 1932
p 118 and discussions in 332, 333, 334, 335,
336 and 337, May p 124, June p 511, July p
117 Aug p 1933, Sept p 1 and Oct p 113.
Available literature on alluvial mining and on sampling
and computation of mineral values of
alluvial deposits shows wide divergence of
opinion, especially as to procedure and
method in sampling; plea is made for
simplification and standardization of
sampling; layout of property for sampling
and preparation of boring plan; taking
sample by Banka drill; computation of
mineral values.
Prospecting for Alluvial Deposits.
A.F. SKERL.
Mining Magazine v 46 n 4 Apr 1932 p 21319 and
discussion by W.C. GRUMMIT in n 6 June p
337
338
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
3478. Notes on purpose and methods, with
special application to tin field of northern
Nigeria.
Sampling Gold Placer.
D.L. SAWYER
Engineering and Mining Journal v 133 n 7 July 1932 p
3813.
Practice at Rich Hill and Weaver Creek placers in
southern Yavapai County, Ariz; shafts sunk
and gravel from each 5 ft of depth
segregated and washed separately; shafts as
sunk average 3 1/2 by 5 1/2 ft cross section
and 12 ft deep and most of them had to be
cribbed; cribbings used were 2 by 12in
planks, cut in 3ft 4in. and 5ft 4in.
lengths; labor cost varied from $2 to $6 per
ft.
Placer Ground Sampled By WellDigging Equipment.
M.D. DRAPER.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 133 n 10 Oct. 1932 p
537.
Example of application of well drilling machine in
southern California; average thickness of
gravel 25 ft. ranging 12 to 48 ft; few rocks
above 6 in. diam; digging cylinder about 2.5
ft. diam, with cutting blades bolted to
bottom; Kelly stems each 18 ft long; if
rocks are not over 3 to 4 in diam. 25 ft
holes can be drilled in 2 to 4 hr in
ordinary gravel; cost/foot of hole is less
than by hand work.
Drilling Placer Deposits.
J.H. ROBERTSON.
Canadian Mining Journal v 53 n 12 Dec 1932 p 5414.
Continuation of serial in issue of June 13, 1930;
details of testing methods.
Systematic Sampling of Alluvial Deposits by Banka
Drill.
P.R. LAKE.
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Bul n 340 Jan 1933
p 334.
Author's reply to discussion of paper in issue n 331
Apr 1932.
Alluvial Sampling.
A.J. PETERSON.
Mining Magazine v 47 n 2 Feb 1933 p 858.
Review of some of difficulties standing in way of
standardization of alluvial sampling
methods.
Evaluating Gold in Certain Placers by Microscopy.
A.L. CRAWFORD.
Mining and Metallurgy v 14 n 321 Sept 1933 p 3724.
339
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Procedure developed by author for microscopic
examination of samples of goldplacer
gravels; examples of application of method
to samples of placer gravel from various
deposits in Utah.
Notes on Valuation of Gold Dredging Placers by Keystone
Drilling.
J.W.G. MCGEORGE.
Institute of Mining and Metsllurgy Bul n 351 Dec 1933
34 p supp plates.
Types of deposits; mapping; drilling scheme; laying out
preliminary drill holes and holes for
systematic sampling of channel deposits;
description of keystone drill; drill crew;
drilling procedure; record forms;
calculation of values.
Notes on Valuation of Gold Dredging Placers by Keystone
Drilling.
J.W.H. MCGEORGE.
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Bul n 352, 354 and
359 Jan 1934 p 114. Mar p 512 and Aug p 35.
Discussion of paper in issue n 351 Dec 1933.
24in. Alluvial Prospecting Drill.
W.A. VAN DER HOFF.
Mining Magazine v 50 n 5 May 1934 p 2837.
Description of powerdriven drill originally designed by
S.J. VERMAES of Mining University at Delft,
for sinking pits 2 ft. in diam. in alluvial
material; casing with sawtoothed shoe is
rotated and driven down, and ground within
casing excavated by grab or other device;
operating procedure; advantages as compared
with small diameter drills; examples of
comparative results on tin and gold placer
deposits. Bibliography.
Anent Placer Prospecting with Drills.
G.L. HOLMES.
Mining Journal (Phoenix Ariz) v 17 n 24 May 15, 1934 p
34.
General observations; drilling and sampling not exact
science, but accurate results can be
obtained by use of efficient methods; study
of drilling records and operating results of
100 dredges showed average recovery as about
65% of anticipated results as indicated by
drilling; in one case, dredge recovered 139%
of expectation; some details of good
drilling practice.
Core Control in Alluvial Drilling.
V.V. CLARK.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 135 n 7 July 1934 p
339
340
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
2937.
Method for determining, from extracted gravel, total
amount called for by drive; author
stipulates that if system is to work, enough
holes must be drilled systematically to
permit law of averages to be used in
computation; equipment must be improved and
drill runners should be trained accordingly.
Panner's Role in Placer Drilling.
J.J. BACH.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 136 n 7
323.
Suggestions for increasing efficiency of
promoting greater accuracy in
special reference to northern
Alaska.
July 1935 p
crew and
sampling, with
areas such as
Placer Gravels in Colorado River Basin.
J.W. RICHARDSON.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 19 n 22 Apr 15 1936 p
4.
Outline description of method used in testing large
gravel deposits near Searchlight, Nevada;
material shoveled in benches, by hand labor
and washed in 12ft sluice lined with
corduroy; laboratory test on concentrates
gave value of 1.41 oz gold per ton; hand
panning showed erratic values.
Neues Schuerfbohrverfahren zur Untersuchung von Seifen
P. STEIN.
Metall und Erz v 33 n 10 2nd May 1936 issue p 24550.
New exploratory drilling method for examination of
placers; after brief discussion of socalled
Banka drill and Vermaes exploratory drill,
new Conrad shaft drill is described in
detail and illustrated; apparatus is mounted
on Fordson tractor.
Testing Placer Ground in Unique Way.
P.L. JONES.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 137 n 7 July 1936 p
3378.
Description of method developed during testing of
deposits in Wyoming; three trenches, each
representing dragline cut with dredge, are
dug with pull shovel and material is
sluiced; to simulate dredging conditions,
trenches were dug under water.
Sampling and Testing of GoldScheelite Placer Deposit in
Mohave Desert, Kern and San Bernardino
Counties, Calif.
H.W.C. PROMMEL.
US Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 6960 Sept. 1937
18 p.
History and general description; water supply survey
341
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
methods; and maps; ground was tested by
drilling with two portable rotary drilling
rigs using auger type buckets; procedure and
test results; 16,278 ft. of drilling on
rental basis cost 98.6c per foot of hole,
not including cost of engineering and
testing of samples.
Prospecting.
E.J. PRYOR.
Mine and Quarry Engineering v 3 n 11 Nov 1938 p 4058
and 414.
Types of alluvial deposits, and forces operating to
form them, are considered; technique of
placer location, delimitation and valuation,
discussed.
Examination of Placer Deposits.
T.A. GRAVES.
New York, Richard R. Smith, 1939.
General information on alluvial deposits and their
examination which will enable student to
make actual placer examinations; topics
covered include description and location of
placers, placer working (including economic
considerations), determination of value,
reports and records, and field equipment.
168 pp. ills., diagrs, tables, $3.00.
Valuation of Gold in Boreholes in Testing Alluvial
Dredging Areas.
A.H. FLOWERDEW.
Chemical Engineering and Mine Review v 31 n 372 Sept
1939 p 4923.
Values recorded in grains per cubic yard by three
methods; value calculated from measured core
extracted; value calculated for each section
from volume of pipe; average of preceding,
called mean value; assumption is made that 6
in. power drill has been used to test
ground; boring practice; handling core;
measuring box; method of calculating and
recording results.
Testing for Tailing Losses in Placer Mining.
P. MALOZEMOFF.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 140 n 9 Sept 1939 p
4752.
Methods of continuous sampling for use on gold dredges
explained.
Notes on Testing of Placer Deposits by Drilling.
J.H. ROBERTSON.
Canadian Mining Journal v 61 n 6 June 1940 p 3558.
Outline of drilling process; securing core;
341
342
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
calculations as to volume of core;
measurement of core after drive and after
extraction; comparative figures; rate of
drilling; recovering gold from cores;
treating core dirts; removing gold particles
or colors from pan, by picking out, fire
assays, or amalgamation; use of rocker as
preliminary to panning; supervision; keeping
of records.
Unique Portable Sampler for Shallow Placers.
J. HUTTL.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 142 n 9 Sept 1941 p
556.
ParX sample described sinks small shaft large enough
for one man to enter; summary of
requirements which had to be considered in
designing unit; mobile mounting consists of
long wheelbase truck chassis; digging
element is specially designed clamshell type
bucket, bucket carrier, mast and guide
frame; construction; details; operating
procedure; present equipment is designed to
max depth of 30 ft; digging speed averages
35 ft per day in normal ground.
Prospecting.
F.D. POWER.
Mine and Quarry Engineering v 6 n 9, 10, 11, 12, Sept
1941 p 2437, Oct p 2736 and 272, Nov p 299303 and Dec p 3337; and v 7 n 1, 5 and 11
Jan 1942 p 1521, May p 1246 and Nov p 2714.
Sept 1941.
Fifth of series based on free lectures delivered at
University of Sydney. Minor's cradle or
rocker; paddler; working auriferous beach
sand; spear pump; wet shaker, dry blowing;
dry shaker. OctNov: Earth and timber dams,
for storing water supply; boom gate for
ground sluicing; Californian pump; sluice
box; ground sluicing operations;
hydraulicking. Dec: Eight of series:
Miner's wheelbarrow; ladders; ropes; useful
knots; windlass; buckets; hooks. Jan 1942:
Ninth of series; horse operated whip; horse
whim; exploring ore deposits; open cuts;
overhead transport; adit, tunnel or day
level; timbering; shafts. May 4: Tenth of
series; Ore and rock handling; stoping;
ventilation. Nov: Eleventh of series:
Minerals of commercial value; aluminum;
alunite; antimony; arsenic; asbestos;
asphalt; barytes; beryllium; bismuth; borax;
cadmium; cerium; chromium; clays; cobalt;
copper.
Placer Valuation in Alaska.
L.C. DOHENY.
343
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Engineering and Mining Journal v 142 n 12 Dec 1941 p
479 and v 143 n 1 and 3 Jan 1942 p 434 and
Mar p 489. Dec:
By application of certain factors; adapted from
prospecting in frozen ground to adjacent
thawed ground, underruns and overruns are
controlled. Jan: Methods of estimating gold
contents of a block; triangle valuation.
Mar: Caisson sinking, in thawed, shallow
loose ground; volumetric valuation; sluffed
holes in frozen ground; standard for thawed
ground.
Sampling Cat Camp Gold Placers.
J.F. DULING.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 25 n 18 Feb 15 1942 p
35.
In thorough and systematic testing of Cat Camp placers
in Calaveras County, California, 59 samples
were taken from 39 different sampling
places, or on equivalent of one sampling
place for each 2 1/2 acres; complete details
of procedure followed are given.
Estimation of Gold and Tin Alluvials in Malaya.
A.G. PALMER.
Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Proc v
128 Dec 31 1942 p 20120.
Methods described were used in actual practice by
author and previous engineers for same
company; sampling procedure; field
procedure; calculations; drilling equipment;
reporting.
Exploration of Placers Suitable for Bucket Line
Dredging.
E.J. BLOOM.
Mines Magazine v 33 n 4 Apr 1943 p 1738, 184, 194, 196.
Broad discussion of search for gold and tin placer
deposits; types of places of deposition;
conditions necessary to successful bucket
line dredging; environmental conditions
affecting placers; prospecting by drilling
and shaft sinking; cost of examination of 28
properties in 7 states in 6 mo; it cost
$1241.94 in taxes for the privilege of
spending $20,000 in work from which no
profit accrued.
Boring Results and Dredge Recovery.
Chemical Engineering and Mining Review v 37 n 435 Dec
11 1944 p 7981.
Valuation of alluvial deposits of gold and tin is
influenced by factors which should make
possible greater degree of accuracy than can
343
344
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
be attained in estimation of value of lodes;
comparisons at four New Zealand properties;
discrepancies due to irregular occurrence
rather than inefficient dredge work.
War Time Placer Testing in Sonora, Mexico.
H.W.C. PROMMEL.
Mines Magazine v 35 n 1 Jan 1945 p 214, 42.
Narrative account of experiences.
Averaging Alluvial Samples.
R.T. HANCOCK..
Mining Magazine v 79 n 5 Nov 1948 p 2704.
Description of method in which assays to be averaged
are arranged in order of magnitude and
divided into groups, each of which covers
some convenient range of values higher than
that of its predecessor; number of samples
within each group is expressed as percentage
of total number of samples and upper
limiting assay of each group is plotted on
logarithmic probability paper against
cumulative percentage up to that limiting
figure.
Logarithmic Pattern in River Placer Deposits.
J.B. WERTZ.
Economic Geology v 44 n 3 May 1949 p 193209.
Experiments made in laboratory with wooden trough,
supplemented by cases taken from actual
placer maps; results indicate that
deposition areas and erosion areas alternate
with each other; ore concentration zones
coincide with erosion areas, whereas barren
zones coincide with sedimentational areas;
this proves useful in interpretation of
placer maps, in checking of quality of
prospecting and in explanation of
irregularities, where interference factors
are to be taken into consideration.
New Way to Interpret Results of Placer Sampling.
J.E. HARDING.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 153 n 1 Jan 1952 p 968.
Suggestion based on field experience, for avoiding
disastrous errors that are too easily made
in interpreting drill logs; drill log
described; calculation outlined; counting
colors of samples; handling core size;
methods; compared.
Gold Pan: Neglected Geological Tool.
J.B. MERTIE, JR.
Economic Geology v 49 n 6 SeptOct 1954 p 63951.
Technique of panning for heavy and semi-heavy accessory
345
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
minerals; types of pans, factors in panning,
operation of panning, and processing of
concentrates in field; gold pan is versatile
and efficient field tool, which is
completely independent of laboratory
facilities.
Valuation of Alluvial Deposits.
H.L.H. HARRISON.
2nd ed. Mining Publications, Ltd., London 1954 308 p
L2.50.
Guide for estimation of surface deposits of tin, gold,
platinum, chromium, manganese, tantalum and
niobium, titanium, tungsten, thorium,
zirconium, kaolin and china clay; methods of
prospecting; records and valuation; methods
of mining alluvial tin ore deposits;
chemical assays for tin; health in jungle of
South East Asia.
Gold Pan as Quantitative Geologic Tool.
P.K. THEOBALD, JR.
US Geological Survey Bul n 1071A 1957 54 p.
Gold pan used has shape of frustrum of cone with diam.
at lip of 16 in., diam at base of 9.5 in and
depth of 2.5 in.; field techniques of
panning, laboratory work, and analysis of
recovery of heavy minerals; recovery of
heavy minerals; in riffle samples, recovery
and grain size of heavy minerals, relation
of recovery to type of sediment and to
sorting of concentrate; suggestions for
improved panning technique.
Novyi metod oprobovaniya rossypnkyh mestorozhdenii
zolota.
A.I. TYUSHNYAKOV, I.P. IVANOV.
Razvedka i Okhrana Nedr n 12 Dec 1962 p 915.
New method of sampling gold placer deposits; upgrading
of samples involves washing in special
device and amalgamation; new method supplies
data on gold content with more accuracy than
method of panning samples from boreholes and
exploratory pits; criteria for unification
of samples.
Valuation of Large, GoldBearing Placers.
A. DAILY.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 163 n 7 July 1962 p
808.
Unit (drill hole) and areal valuation of large thawed
or frozen auriferous gravel deposits using
data obtained by prospecting with churntype
placer drill, resulting in basic valuation,
and preparation of estimates of recovery
before and after extractive mining
345
346
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
operations are under way; data from drilling
required for valuation; procedures are
equally applicable to valuation of alluvial
platinum bearing deposits, with
modifications to tin bearing deposits.
Usovershenstvovanie tekhniki razvedki rossypnykh
mestorozhdenii zolota.
B.P. MAKAROV, A.I. LIFSHITS.
Razvedka i Okhrana Nedr n 4 Apr 1963 p 316.
Improvement of techniques in prospecting for gold
placers; advantages of impactgrab method of
drilling exploratory boreholes and use of
centrifugal separator in treatment of
samples.
Novye metody razvedki rossypnky mestorozhdenii zolota.
A.S. VLASOV, S.G. ZHELNIN.
Razvedka i Okhrana Nedr n 4 Apr 1964 p 812.
New methods of exploration of gold deposits; in Far
East of Soviet Union placers with irregular
distribution of gold and in part water
logged are explored by excavating trenches
by means of bulldozers and excavators; this
method proved to be more efficient than
exploration by means of pits; details on
excavating operations and sampling.
Testing and Evaluation of Australian Placer Deposits.
E.H. MACDONALD.
Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Proc n
218 June 1966 p 2545.
Some important mineral fields are referred to in
discussing formation of placer deposits in
Australia; testing methods include boring by
hand, with percussion rigs, with auger and
pit digging drills, and by vibro drilling;
sampling errors are minimized by use of
correct techniques and equipment for boring;
sampling and sample dressing; hypothetical
set of data is used to demonstrate final
process of evaluation, and some relevant
taxation provisions are discussed.
347
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
LAW
Canada
Deficiencies in Canadian Mining Laws.
H. MORTIMER LAMB.
Mining World June 18, 1910.
Read before the Can. Min. Inst. Critical discussion of
some existing regulations. 3000 w.
Canadian Mining Law.
J.M. CLARK.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining Engineers
April 1911.
A short introductory paper inviting discussion of the
proposed changes. Discussion. 3500 w.
The Canadian Mining Law.
J.M. CLARK.
Engineering and Mining Journal April 1, 1911.
Present status, mining law and changes necessary,
discussion by ROSSITER W. RAYMOND. 3500 w.
Mining Laws.
HORACE V. WINCHELL.
Journal of the Canadian Mining Institute Vol. XV.
Importance of liberal mining law, refer to laws of US
and Canada, and recommendations. 5500 w.
Uniform Mining Law for North America.
T.E. GODSON.
Bulletin of the American Institute of Mining and
Metallurgical Engineers, no. 148, Apr. 1919,
pp. 653665. Also in Can. Min. Inst. Bul.,
no. 84, Apr. 1919, pp. 339405.
Mining laws of Canada represented as unassimilated to
demands of industry.
Observations upon Mining Law in the Empire.
G. STONE.
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Bul., no. 271, Apr.
1927, pp. 110.
Deals with Canadian and Australasian, South African,
British India, concession, Rhodesian and
miscellaneous systems; examples of rent and
royalty charges.
Notes on Mining Laws in Canada.
W.B. MCPHERSON.
Canadian Mining Journal, vol. 49, nos. 37, 38 and 40,
Sept. 14, 21 and Oct. 4, 1928, pp. 740744,
761763 and 808809. Sept. 14:
Notes mining legislation in Canada; outline of Dominion
regs on coal, petroleum, and natural gas,
347
348
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
dredging; alkali, carbonblack production
from natural gas, quarrying; details of
procedure by provinces. Sept. 21: Mining
laws of British Columbia, Manitoba, Alberta,
Saskatchewan, Yukon and Northwest
Territories. Oct. 4: Nova Scotia divides
regs according to two classes of minerals;
gold and silver ores are 250 ft. N and S by
150 ft.E and W; lease rentals and royalties,
licenses to search for, and leases of right
to mine, minerals other than gold or silver;
license may not exceed 5 sq mi.; lease may
not exceed 1 sq. mi.; bond to compensate
owner of lands for damage; special leases
for coal; rents and royalties.
Protection of the Mine Investor in British Columbia.
H. MORTIMERLAMB.
Canadian Mining Journal, vol. 49, no. 47; Nov. 23,
1928, pp. 962964.
No Blue Sky Law in British Columbia and belief is that
none is needed; mining law permits resident
engineers to give personal or public notice
regarding statements not in accordance with
actual facts and conditions; Engineering
Act, providing that only registered
engineers can legally report in that
capacity on mines, is considered as
protection in some degree.
Mining Investments by the Public.
J.D. GALLOWAY.
Canadian Mining and Metallurgy Bulletin, no. 200, Dec.
1928, pp. 13951406.
Paper presents conclusions regarding mining
investments, based largely on British
Columbia experience; public becomes
interested by grubstaking prospectors,
buying mineral claims, forming development
syndicates; or by buying shares in mining
companies; last phase is discussed in
detail.
Taxation of a Canadian Gold Mining Company.
E.D. FOX.
Canadian Mining and Metallurgy Bulletin n 264 Apr 1934
(Trans sec) p 16583.
Financial statement of hypothetical Company was
designed with express object of having it
assessed in respect to profits by several
taxing bodies representing Federal and
Provincial Governments, Canada; copies were
sent to several Ministers of Mines, with
request that they be submitted to their
acting authorities and assessed accordingly;
material constitutes digest of taxation as
directly applied to gold mining profits in
Canada.
349
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Taxation of Canadian Gold Mining Company.
E.D. FOX.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy and Soc of
Nova Scotia Trans v 37 1934 p 16583. cf.
Can Mining and Met Bul n 264 Apr 1934.
Mine Taxation in Canada.
B. NEILLY.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy and Soc of
Nova Scotia Trans v 37 1934 p 2519. cf. Can
Mining and Met Bul n 265 May 1934.
Mine Taxation in Canada.
J.Y. MURDOCH C.G. WILLIAMS and A.S. BAILLIE.
Canadian Mining and Metallurgy Bulletin, n 284 Dec 1935
p (Trans) 5315, 53643 and 54451.
Three separate papers, submitted at Vancouver, B.C.
meeting, Nov 1935; first paper discussed
outstanding factors; second gives details of
various provincial and Dominion regulations,
third is on Cost of Taxation in Mining
Industry, dealing largely with conditions in
British Columbia.
Advance in Price of Gold and Its Significance to
Canada.
G.C. BATEMAN.
Canadian Mining and Metallurgy Bulletin n 284 Dec 1935
(Trans) p 5526.
Economic analysis and critical commentary; new
constructive efforts should be encouraged;
because gold mining is only noncompetitive
industry; governments that demand too much
and dissipate too much stifle initiative and
kill enterprise; national difficulties
cannot be solved by undue taxation of rich;
capital will not venture unless it gets
square deal.
Canada 1941 Review and Outlook 1942.
J.B. DEMILLE.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 143 n 2 Feb 1942 p 613
and 72.
Metals placed under strict control to insure adequate
supplies for war; Dominon's gold output
increases slightly; cumulative dividend
record of Canadian metal mines; by provinces
and territories; list of Canadian metal
mines producing in 1941.
Mining Laws of Canada, prepared by author.
A. BUISSON
4th ed. Canada Dept Mines and Tech Surveys Mines
Branch, n 828, 1950, 133 p. Digest of
Dominion and Provincial laws and regulations
349
350
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
affecting mining; synopsis of mining laws at
present in force, summary of special acts
relating to mining, mine taxation, etc.
lists of acts, amendments and regulations at
present in force, royalties, bounties,
schedule of fees, and personnel.
Digest of Mining Laws of Canada.
H.A. GRAVES, G.R.L. POTTER.
Canada Dept Mines and Tech Surveys, Ottawa Mines
Branch n 854 1957 148 p. Mining laws and
regulations designed for Indian reserves,
federal land, and separate provinces,
petroleum and natural gas regulations
included.
Mining Legislation in British Commonwealth Countries
Where Minerals are Vested in Crown.
F.R.H. GREEN.
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Trans v 73 pt 8
196364 p 57183.
Right to explore and prospect may either be
nonexclusive or exclusive; right to mine may
be shortterm and renewable annually or longterm for periods of from 5 to 99 yr; holders
of rights to mine must pay rent to owner of
surface and mineral rent to government, must
commence operations within given periods,
keep proper plans and records and submit
periodic returns and reports; 3 main systems
of royalty and circumstances under which
they are applicable; ways in which control
of possession, purchase and sale of certain
minerals are exercised.
Comments on Mine Taxation in Canada and United States
of America.
V.C. WANSBROUGH. I
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Trans v 73 pt 8
196364, p 5659.
Provisions of Canadian federal and provincial taxation
applying to mining industry, including
depletion allowances, new mine tax
exemption, capital cost allowances, excise
and income taxes and provincial royalties
and percentage levies; comparison with
United States mine taxation.
Summary Review of Federal Taxation and Legislation
Affecting Canadian Mineral Industry.
E.C. HODGSON, W.J. BEARD.
Revised February 1964. Canada, Dept. Mines and Tech
Surveys Mineral Resources Div Mineral
Information Bul 73 1964 27 p.
Summary of certain Federal legislation affecting
mining, oil and gas enterprises in Canada;
details on Income Tax Act, Excise Tax Act,
Customs Tariff, and certain other Federal
351
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
legislation.
351
352
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
LAW
Canada
B.C.
Mining Law of Foreign Countries.
Colliery Guardian Dec. 24, 1896.
Reviews and compares the laws of different lands. 1600
w.
Mining Law and Its Bearing on the Development of Mines
and Mining Districts.
FRANK C. LORING.
Canadian Mining Review Jan. 1898. Paper read at
meeting of the B.C. Assn. of Min. Engs.
Historical review of laws in various lands regarding
ownership and right to dispose of mines,
reviewing quite extensively the conditions
existing in the United States, with the
special object of considering the state of
affairs in British Columbia. 7500 w.
The Mineral Act of British Columbia.
R.W. RAYMOND.
Canadian Mining Review Feb. 1898.
Considers various points of the law, especially the
size of claims, the proof of their mineral
value, and the manner of their demarkation.
2000 w.
Mining Law in British Columbia, Mexico and the United
States.
ROSSITER W. RAYMOND.
Engineering Magazine March, 1898.
A general summary by the secretary of the American
Institute of Mining Engineers intended to
afford a basis for comparison with other
countries and especially with the laws of
South Africa. 2500 w.
Mining Laws of British Columbia.
US Consular Reports. No. 413 April 29, 1899.
Copy of a placer mining act passed Jan. 18, 1899. 3600
w.
Placer Gold Mining Claims in British Columbia.
US Consular Reports., No. 956 Feb. 8, 1901.
A brief statement of the laws governing the locating
and working of placer claims. 1300 w.
Mining Laws of British Columbia and Some Notes on Blue
Sky Legislation.
A.M. WHITESIDE.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Bul. no.
353
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
149, Sept. 1924, pp. 574585.
Discussion of laws bearings upon economics of mining in
British Columbia.
Aspects of the Mining Industry in British Columbia.
W. SLOAN.
Mining and Metallurgy, vol. 7, no. 235, July 1926, pp.
284286, 1 fig.
Mining statutes in province are especially liberal to
outside capital; taxation is relatively
light.
New Legislation and the Mining Industry of British
Columbia.
Canadian Mining Journal, vol. 50, no. 18, May 3, 1929,
pp. 410411.
Of 90 new acts prorogued at session of 17th Parliament,
only 10 either directly or indirectly affect
mining industry; summaries of legislation
are given.
Some Legal Aspects of Prospecting.
H.L. JESTLEY.
Western Miner v 19 n 11 Nov. 1946 p 504.
Continued existence of mining industry in Canada is
dependent on prospector and promoter;
relationship between men in field and men
supplying capital should be so clear as to
preclude possibility of dispute of later
date; litigation is expensive and often
retards development; importance of holding
Free Miner's Certificate, or License;
British Columbia Statutes. Before
Prospecting Session, Annual Western Meeting,
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
353
354
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
LAW
Canada
Yukon
The Yukon Mining Laws.
ROSSITER W. RAYMOND.
Canadian Mining Review Aug. 1897.
Comments on and objections to the regulations governing
placer mining along the Yukon river and its
tributaries, recently adopted by the
Dominion Government. 2000 w.
Yukon Gold Region.
US Consular Reports Oct. 1897.
Canada's Mining Regulations. Copy of the regulations
governing placer mining on the Yukon, issued
by the Canadian Government. 3300 w.
The Mining Regulations for the Canadian Yukon.
Engineering and Mining Journal Feb. 5, 1898.
The new regulations governing placer mining and
dredging of this district in Canadian
territory. 4400 w.
New Canadian Mining Regulations.
US Consular Reports March 10, 1898.
A copy of the new regulations issued by the Interior
Department of Canada, governing mining in
the Yukon regions. 5500 w.
Canadian Mining Regulations.
MR. HAMILTON SMITH
Engineering and Mining Journal March 19, 1898.
Extracts from a letter published in the Montreal
"Star," containing much of interest in
regard to the mining regulations for the
Yukon district. 1200 w.
The Yukon Royalty.
A.N.C. TREADGOLD.
Canadian Mining Review Sept., 1898.
Discusses the justice of the royalty imposed,
concluding that the crown keeps back too
much considering the conditions. 1500 w.
Yukon Mining Laws.
J.B. TYRRELL.
Journal of the Canadian Mining Institute 1906.
Presents some of the main provisions of the laws which
have been in force for the past eight years,
pointing out their advantages and
disadvantages in the working of goldbearing
gravel deposits. 3500 w.
355
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
The Taxation of Mineral Resources in Canada.
O.D. SKELTON.
Canadian Mining Journal Nov. 1, 1908.
Reviews the measures adopted, with comments. 3500 w.
Placer Mining Claims in the Yukon.
J.A. MACDONALD.
Mining and Scientific Press Feb. 27, 1915.
Information concerning terms of the Yukon placer mining
act. Ills. 1000 w.
Incongruities in the Yukon Placer Mining Regulations
and Suggested Remedies.
J.A. MACDONALD.
Canadian Mining Journal March 1, 1915.
An explanation of some of the difficulties and
remedies. Ills. 1200 w.
Operation of the Yukon Placer Act.
C.A. THOMAS.
Engineering and Mining Journall May 5, 1917
Critical discussion. Ills. 4000 w
355
356
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
LAW - Other
Lease of GoldBearing Land in Siberia.
US Consular Reports, No. 562 Oct. 25,
A translation of a circular, issued by
Agriculture and Domains, in
leasing six tracts of land.
1899.
the Ministry of
regard to
700 w.
Auction of Siberian Mining Land.
U S Consular Report No. 595 Dec. 5, 1899.
Details in regard to the leasing by auction of gold
mining territory. 2800 w.
West African Gold Mining and the Concessions Industry.
JOHN GEO LEIGH.
Engineering Magazine August 1902.
A review of conditions on the Gold Coast, giving the
true state of affairs on this overexploited
region. 4000 w.
"Marauding" in French Guiana.
DAVID LEVAT.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 13, 1902.
The term indicates a prospector or placer miner who
practices his industry on any goldbearing
territory regardless of the legal
proprietor, and is not locally considered at
all disgraceful. 1800 w.
Gold Mining in French Guiana.
DAVID E. HEADLEY.
Engineering and Mining Journal Jan. 19, 1905.
An illustrated account of the industry, and of the
regulations which allow no one but a
surveyor to mark boundaries, and so deprive
the poor miner of his opportunity. 1600 w.
Methods of Financing Large Mining Operations.
H.B. FERNALD.
Mining and Metallurgical Society of America Bul. no.
195, vol. 21, no. 3, MayJune 1928, pp. 4860
and (discussion) pp. 6072.
Discussion excludes all cases below stage of large
mining operations; states three typical
situations in which large mining operations
are considered as justified; questions of
amount of money needed and when; what return
expected, and when; will earnings as
realized be available to pay off investment
or must they be reinvested in further
equipment or development; viewpoint of
banker; present value formulas;
357
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
bibliography.
357
358
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
LAW
General
Notes on Development of Mining Law.
H.C. and L.H. HOOVER.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 2, 1912.
History shows that the tendency has been to give the
individual wider rights at the expense of
the state. The present tendency is to limit
the rights of the individual and exalt those
of the community. 4000 w.
Proposed Regulating of GoldDredging.
CHARLES JANIN.
Mining and Scientific Press March 8, 1913.
Reviews the history of golddredging, the area of land
affected, reclaiming dredged land, and
related subjects. 3500 w.
Effect of Revaluation on Goldmining Industry.
J.J. CROSTON.
American Institute of Mining and Metallurgical
Engineers Tech Publ n 709 1936 28 p; See
also Mining Journal (Lond) v 193 n 5250?,
5260 and 6261, June 6, 1936 p 5455, June 13,
p 5645 and June 20 p 58891.
Review of recent trends in production, ore reserves and
costs; statistics of annual output of
world's leading gold mines, 1929 to 1935,
inclusive; gold production of custom
smelting, silver and basemetal mining
companies; reported ore reserves; production
and cost data of principal companies;
government taxation takes large proportion
of gain caused by increased in world price
for gold.
359
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
LAW
U.S.
Responsibility for Debris.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 9, 1897.
Data aiming to prove that hydraulic mining was not the
chief cause of the evils complained of, but
that the Sacramento River has been raising
its channel and increasing the swamps for
centuries. 1100 w.
The Law as to Dredging in Rivers for Gold.
R.W. RAYMOND.
Engineering and Mining Journal March 5, 1898.
Some information on points hearing upon this subject.
900 w.
Lodes vs. Placers.
F.T. FREELAND.
Engineering and Mining Journal April 1, 1899.
Discusses an opinion rendered by Justice Goddard in the
Supreme Court of Colorado, and also other
decisions. 900 w.
The Principles of Mining Law.
CHARLES J. ALVORD.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 17, 1900.
Abstract of a paper read before the Inst. of Min. and
Met., in London. Reviews briefly the law of
the more important countries of the world.
3200 w.
The Debris Problem in the Sacramento Valley.
Engineering Record Nov. 24, 1900.
Information from the Report of the California Debris
Commission, concerning the prevention of
injury to navigation in the Sacramento
Valley from the enormous quantity of
material washed into the river beds by
hydraulic mining. 2500 w.
The Leasing System.
PROF. ARTHUR LAKES.
Mines and Minerals Nov. 1903.
Describes a method of working mines which is operated
on both large and small scales and is
applicable to peculiar conditions. 2000 w.
Control of Hydraulic Mining Debris in California by the
Federal Government.
CAPT. WM. W. HARTS.
359
360
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
California Journal of Technology Sept. 1905.
Read before the Mining Conference. Explains the
problem, the extent of the damage,
discussing the duties of the commission, and
the general principles of improvement. Ills.
6000 w.
Control of Hydraulic Mining Debris in California by the
Federal Government.
CAPT. WM. HARTS
Mining and Scientific Press Sept. 2, 1905.
Abstract of a lecture by author, at San Francisco,
Cal., giving an account of what has been
done and what is proposed in this great
work. Ills. 4000 w.
Mergers in Placer Mining.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal June 23, 16. 1906.
Discusses benefits from merging, and the recent merger
in dredgemining operations. Ills. 2300 w.
What Does and What Does Not Constitute a Placer?
ARTHUR LAKES.
Mining Reporter Aug. 23, 1906.
Discusses the almost universal distribution of alluvial
gold, and the legal test to determine what
should be classed as placer. 1500 w.
The Rights of the Miner.
THEO F. VAN WAGENEN.
Mining and Scientific Press May 16, 1908.
Discusses existing laws as related to prospectors,
laboring miners, mining engineers, and
mining investors. 5000 w.
Growth of American and Australian Mining Law.
A.C. VEATCH.
Engineering and Mining Journal April 2, 1910.
Compares the laws of America and Australia, explaining
the causes that helped to form them. 9500 w.
Geologic Bases of Mining Law.
COURTENAY DE KALB.
Mining and Scientific Press May 7, 1910.
Address before the San Francisco Bar Assn. Explains the
variety of ore deposits and their sources,
and the mining laws of the present, showing
that they were formed when knowledge was too
limited to cover all the facts. 6000 w.
Methods of Promoting or Financing a Mine.
FRANCIS C. NICHOLAS.
Mining World Aug. 20, 1910.
Critical discussion of different plans and methods.
4000 w.
361
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Proposed Revision of Alaskan Mining Laws.
F. LYNWOOD GARRISON.
Mining and Scientific Press Jan. 6, 1912 (Special.)
Gives the report of the committee of the Min. and Met.
Soc., and extracts from the address of W.L.
FISHER, with critical remarks. 3500 w.
A Discussion of Mining Law.
H.V. WINCHELL.
Engineering and Mining Journal March 9, 1912.
Read before the Can. Min. Inst. Considers features of
mining laws in general and of the United
States in particular. 6500 w.
Birth of the American Mining Act.
H.W. MACFARREN.
Mining and Scientific Press April 13, 1912.
Explains the conditions under which was passed the
first mining act of 1866 relating to lode
claims, the second act of 1870 relating to
placer claims, and the third and final act
of 1872 superseding the acts of 1866 and
1870. Serial. 1st part. 5500 w.
The Prospector and the Mining Law.
T.F. VAN WAGENEN.
Mining and Scientific Press May 18, 1912.
Discusses the ends to be secured in mining laws, with
special reference to inducements and
protection. 3000 w.
The New Mining Laws of Alaska.
Mining and Engineering World Nov. 29, 1913.
An act providing for the location and possession of
mining claims in Alaska. 2500 w.
Placer Mining Investment Possibilities.
J.F. DULING.
Mining Journal (Phoenix Ariz) v 16 n 15 Dec 30 1932 p
45 and 289.
Broad discussion of possible profits from operations of
different types of gold placer deposits in
western United States and Alaska.
Federal Grubstaking of Placer Mines
A.S. KONSELMAN.
Mining Journal (Phoenix Ariz) v 17 n 12 Nov 15 1933 p.
5.
Grubstaking experiment conducted for relief of
unemployed by Yavapai County Chamber of
Commerce, Prescott, Ariz: tools, food and
clothing supplied on credit basis; practical
placer miner instructs inexperienced; gold
weighed each week. Federal aid advocated.
361
362
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Federal PlacerMining Laws and Regulations.
F.W. JOHNSON, and SmallScale PlacerMining Methods. C.F.
JACKSON.
U S Bureau of Mines Information Cir n 6611R Feb 1938
37 supp plates.
Reprint and revision of paper published originally in
Apr 1932 and May 1934; special reference
also made to Information Cirs 6659, 6660,
6786, 6787, 6788, and 6846, out of print but
available in most technical libraries;
outlook for success; favourable small scale
areas; laws and regulations; equipment and
methods. Bibliography.
Federal Placer Mining Laws and Regulations.
F.W. JOHNSON and SmallScale Placer Mining Methods. C.J.
JACKSON.
U S Bureau of Mines Tech Paper n 591 1938 49 p.
Information regarding location of placer mining claims,
required assessment work, and procedure to
obtain patent; inquiries regarding mineral
lands in national forests where United
States mining laws are not in effect should
be addressed to Department of Agriculture.
Second section of paper is largely revision
of Information Circular 6611, 1932
War Production Board Orders Nation's Gold Mines to
Cease Production.
Mining Journal (Phoenix, Ariz) v 26 n 11 Oct 30 1942 p
24.
While WPB's order L208 carried note of finality, issue
is not yet settled; gold producers are
taking advantage of appeal provisions and
are filing their cases for review; some
modification of original order is expected.
Gold Dredging and PostWar Employment.
H.A. SAWIN.
Mines Magazine v 34 n 7 July 1944 p 33941.
Comment on effect of War Production Board Order L 208
of Oct 1942, closing down gold mining
industry without notice; granting of special
permits; gold production by dredges, in
earlier years, as indication of potential
post war employment; outline of various
benefits as outcome of gold dredging; dredge
operation; tailings disposal and
utilization.
363
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
YUKON
General
Routes to the Yukon.
Mining Industry and Review Dec. 5, 1895.
Discussion of the various possible routes to the gold
placers along the Yukon River, showing their
relative merits. 1000 w.
Life in the Klondike Gold Fields.
JOE LADUE
McClure's Magazine Sept. 1897.
Personal observations of the founder of Dawson,
recorded by J. LINCOLN STEFFENS. Ill. 3500
w.
The Klondike Country.
Mining Industry and Review Sept. 16, 1897.
Editorial on the richness, character and resources and
the rapid development sure to follow the
mining excitement. 900 w.
The Relief of the Klondike.
PERRY F. NURSEY.
Industries and Iron Nov. 19, 1897.
Reviews the situation in this district, and explains
the works intended to be undertaken by the
Northwestern Trust and Development Company
of America. 1700 w.
The Yukon Mining Region.
CHARLES G. YALE.
Mining Industry and Review March 10, 1898.
The conditions at present existing, the high price of
living and transportation, the severity of
the climate, and the expectations are
discussed. 2300 w.
The Rush to the Klondike over the Mountain Passes.
EDWARD S. CURTIS.
Century Magazine March 1898.
Brief account of the difficulties encountered on this
route in 1897. Ill. 1400 w.
The Gold Region of the Klondike.
Board of Trade Journal, London May 1898.
Describes a new route to be opened by the Canadian
government which will remove the great
difficulties of transport to the Yukon
district. Also briefly comments on the
mistake of people going who were physically
363
364
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
and intellectually unable to cope with the
conditions existing. 900 w.
The Klondike Gold Fever.
D. ZAHN.
Chautauquan Nov. 1898.
Translated from "Ueber Land and Meer." Account of rush
to this field, difficulties of travelling
and living, with report of one who made the
journey. 1400 w.
A Trip to Dawson.
AUGUSTE MATHEZ.
Mines and Minerals Dec. 1901.
Describes the tour as easy and pleasant in the summer,
all the difficulties and dangers of the past
having disappeared. 2500 w.
Recent Publications on Alaska and Yukon Territory.
ALFRED HULSE BROOKS.
Economic Geology Feb. 1906.
Discussion of literature that has appeared during the
past six months. The metalliferous deposits
are first discussed; followed by a brief
summary of the literature on the coal
fields. 6500 w.
The Year 1906 in the Klondike District.
J.P. HUTCHINS.
Engineering and Mining Journal March 16, 1907.
A report of the year showing changes in plan of
working, and discussing some of the problems
of this region. 2500 w.
Condition and Needs of Mining in the Yukon.
F.T. CONGDON.
Canadian Mining Journal Feb. 1, 1910.
Extracts from a speech describing conditions in the
Yukon, explaining the causes of the
reduction of revenue and discussing the
policy of the Canadian government. 3800 w.
Water Supply and Fire Protection in the Klondike Gold
Fields.
DOUGLAS H. FERRY
Engineering Record June 3, 1911.
Notes from a report by author, giving an idea of what
has been done in the way of providing Dawson
with water supply and fire protection. 4000
w.
Conditions in the Yukon.
GUY A.R. LEWINGTON.
Mining Magazine April 1912.
Explains conditions in the Klondike district of Yukon
territory of Canada, showing their
superiority to Alaska, and describing the
climate. 1000 w.
365
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Present Outlook and Conditions in the Klondike Region.
ARTHUR LAKES, JR.
Mining and Engineering World April 27, 1912.
An account of this region of the Yukon, B.C. 1500 w.
Quartz Mining in the Klondike District.
D.D. CAIRNES
Canadian Mining Journal Dec. 1, 1912.
Abstract of a report by author. Describes the deposits,
and gives information concerning the more
promising properties. 4000 w.
The Development and Problem of the Yukon.
HENRY M. PAYNE.
Quarterly Bulletin of the Canadian Mining Institute
March 1913.
Outlines the general characteristics of the region, the
processes by which the gold is removed, and
some of the problems to be solved. 4000 w.
Mining in the Far North.
EMIL EDWARD HURJA.
Mining and Scientific Press Oct. 17, 1914.
Information concerning the districts tributary of the
railroad operating from Skagway to White
Horse. Ills. 3000 w.
Dawson to Nome.
H.E. CHAKO.
Engineering and Mining Journal Dec. 26, 1914.
Gives experience in travelling from Dawson, Yukon, to
Nome, Alaska, and in visiting mining
districts. Transportation very
unsatisfactory. Ills. 4500 w.
Lode Mining in Yukon.
T.A. MACLEAN.
Size 9 3/4 x 6 1/2"; pp. 205. Ottawa: Department of
Mines.
An investigation of quartz deposits in the Klondike
division.
Mining in the Yukon.
J.B. TYRRELL.
Canadian Mining Journal Nov. 1, 1915.
Methods, production, costs. Ills. 6000 w.
The Economic Possibilities of the Yukon
D.D. CAIRNES.
Canadian Mining Institute, Trans 1915. Future. Ills.
34 pp.
Acquiring PlacerMining Claims in British Columbia.
J.A. MACDONALD.
Engineering and Mining Journal Nov. 6, 1915.
365
366
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Details of requirements. Ills. 1500 w.
The Mining Industry in Yukon 1929.
W.E. COCKFIELD.
Canadian Mining Journal vol. 51, no. 7, Feb. 14, 1930,
pp. 150152, 2 figs.
General review, indicating satisfactory progress;
Klondike output slightly reduced; lode gold
mining; Mayo district; new orebodies found;
southern Yukon; transportation much
improved.
Northern British Columbia and Yukon in 1930.
W.E. COCKFIELD.
Canadian Mining Journal, vol. 52, no. 6, Feb. 6, 1931,
pp. 138143, 4 figs.
Gold placer development in Atlin and Big Salmon
districts; Atlin silverlead mines;
engineering old mine on Tagish Lake; Mayo
silverlead district; Klondike district.
What of Alaska!
D.L. SAWYER.
Engineering and Mining Journal., vol. 131, no. 9, May
11, 1931, pp 400402, 6 figs.
Former obstacles to development of mining industry in
Alaska are disappearing; transport
facilities; trail, highway, and railroad;
increasing use of airplane; exploration of
new and promising districts.
Mining Industry of Yukon, 1933, and Notes on Geology of
Carmacks MapArea.
H.S. BOSTOCK.
Canada Dept. Mines, Geological Survey Summary Report
1933 pt A, n 2350 1934 p 18.
Placer mining in Klondike, 60 mi river, Mayo and other
districts; lode mining in Mayo and Carmacks
districts; geological data to indicate
favorable ground for prospecting.
Mining Industry of Yukon, 1934.
H.S. BOSTOCK.
Canada Dept. Mines, Geological Survey Memoir v 178 n
2387 1935 10 p.
Notes on placer mining and lode mining, gathered
chiefly by means of correspondence with
those connected with various enterprises.
More Power for Yukon.
Electrical News v 45 n 14 July 15, 1936 p 178.
About two million dollars worth of gold mined in Yukon
every year and new 5000 hp hydroelectric
unit installed last year by Yukon
Consolidated Gold Corp, indicates that this
mining field is still of considerable
importance; generator supplied by Canadian
367
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Westinghouse, Co is 4695 kva, 80% pf, 3phase, 2300 v. 60 cycle, 514 rpm, 50 C,
horizontal 2bearing coupled type waterwheel.
Carmacks District, Yukon.
H.S. BOSTOCK.
Canada, Dept Mines Geological Survey Memoir 189 n 2413
1936 67 p maps in pocket. Area lies between
latitude 62 and 63 deg north and longitudes
136 and 138 deg west; physiography and
glaciation; general deposits and lode
deposits carrying gold, silver, copper,
lead, zinc, antimony and other metals, was
well as large reserves of bituminous coal.
Bibliography.
Mining Industry of Yukon, 1935.
H.S. BOSTOCK.
Canada Dept Mines Geological Survey Memoir 193 n 2417
1936 12 p.
Notes on mining activities, with data on statistics of
production; placer mining in Sixty Mile,
Klondike, Clear Creek, Mayo, StewartSelwyn,
Pelly River, Big Salmon, Teslin and Laird
River districts and in southwestern Yukon;
lode mining in Klondike, Pelly River,
Carmacks, Teslin, Whitehorse and
Southwestern districts.
Mining Industry of Yukon, 1938.
H.S. BOSTOCK.
Canada Dept Mines and Resources Geological Survey
Memoire 220 n 2452 1939 21 p. Report on
activities; production statistics; gold
placer mining in Forty Mile River, Sixty
Mile River, Klondike, Mayo, and other
districts, 9 dredges in Klondike district
handled 8,550,652 cu yd gravel; lode mining
in Klondike, Mayo, Carmacks and Whitehorse
districts: few hundred tons of coal mined
from Tantalus Butte mine and shipped to
Dawson. Bibliography.
Gold Rushes.
W.P. MORRELL.
Macmillan Co., New York,1941. 427 pp. maps.
Book describes major gold rushes of world in Brazil,
Siberia, Alaska, Canada, Australia, South
Africa and United States: brief preliminary
historical information given in each case
and effect of such occurrences on territory
involved and on world economic conditions
discussed.
Mining Industry of Yukon, 1939 and 1940.
H.S. BOSTOCK.
367
368
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Canada Dept. Mines and Resources Geological Survey
Memoire 234 n 2466 1941 40 p.
Production statistics; placer mining, by districts;
lode mining; Tantalus Butte coal mine near
Carmacks remained closed in 1939, good
readily mineable coal being exhausted;
development at lower level is feasible;
special war minerals; tungsten, antimony,
and manganese deposits and prospects; list
of recent reports and maps.
Mineral Possibilities of Areas Adjacent to Alaska
Highway, Pt I Yukon Section.
L.O. THOMAS.
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy Trans v 46
1943 p 375401. (Bul n 379 Nov 1943).
Exploration has practically been restricted
to areas readily accessible from White Pass
and Yukon railway, from main waterways, or
from two wagon roads west and north from
Whitehorse; eight sections or districts are
briefly described; placer and lode gold;
copper, silver; platinum; lead; zinc;
tungsten; iron; antimony silver; silver
lead; coal; saline deposits; regulations as
to use of Alaska Highway for prospecting.
Bibliography.
Developments in Yukon.
G. BLACK.
Miner v 16 n 12 Dec 1943 p 45.
Brief general review; no great industrial expansion in
Yukon is anticipated consequent on
construction of Alaska Highway; fact that
Canol pipe line traverses rather
inaccessible section of Yukon may open that
section to exploration; gold, silver, lead
and zinc. Before Canadian Institute of
Mining and Metallurgy.
Alcan Highway a Potential Aid to Prospecting.
L.O. THOMAS.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 145 n 8 Aug 1944 p 8891.
Highway traverses Interior Plains and Canadian
Cordillera, latter being preeminently a
mining region; geological outline only small
fraction of region is known in detail;
review of known lode deposits and placers;
along highway and in areas accessible from
highway.
Alaskan Mining Should Gain From Alcan Highway.
H.C. WILCOX.
Engineering and Mining Journal v 145 n 9 Sept 1944 p
847.
Route of Alcan Highway, in Tanana Valley; notes on
known and reported mineral occurrences;
369
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
White River and adjacent region; NabesnaChisana district; SlanaTok area; GerstileJohnson River district; Goodpaster and Healy
Rivers; headwaters of Ladue and Forty Mile
Rivers; obstacles; possibilities.
Lode Mining in Cariboo.
O.H. SOLIBAKKE.
Western Miner v 18 n 8 Aug 1945 p 448.
Comment on three gold stampedes in North America;
California in 1849; Fraser River and Cariboo
in 1860. Klondike and Alaska from 1898 to
1900; narrative of personal experiences in
Cariboo region, from 1927 to date.
Progress in Yukon.
G.A. JECKELL.
Western Miner v 19 n 4 Apr 1946 p 667.
Brief review, with statistics; substantial increase in
gold production; continuation of
prospecting; increase in staking; gold
production for year was 39,424.55 ounces,
which had value of $1,379,859; forecast for
1946; geological reconnaissance.
Klondike Discovery.
H.G. HENDERSON.
Canadian Mining Journal v 67 n 11 Nov 1946 p 10279.
Historical and descriptive narrative of gold rush,
following discovery made in Mar 1896 by
"Klondike Bob" Henderson, when he panned
$620 from discovery claim.
Accelerated Activity in Yukon.
W.F. LOTHIAN.
Western Miner v 19 n 12 Dec 1946 p 479.
Review for 1946; increased activity in both placer and
lode areas; gold production from placer
operations showed substantial increase over
that of previous year, prospecting was
extended over wide area, and prospects for
development of new quartz mining field in
vicinity of Nansen Creek, west of Carmacks,
are believed to be promising. Before Can
Inst. Mining and Met.
British Columbia and Yukon in 1946.
F.H. STEPHENS.
Canadian Mining Journal v 68 n 2 Feb 1947 p 7984.
Review, with statistics; British Columbia mineral
production valued at $70,250,000; greatest
obstacle has been labor trouble; gold;
silver; lead and zinc; copper; Yukon
production advanced; placer and lode gold;
transportation inadequate; labor troubles.
369
370
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
1947 Mining in Yukon Territory.
F.H. STEPHENS.
Canadian Mining Journal v 69 n 2 Feb 1948 p 812.
Brief descriptive review of placer mining and lode
mining; White Horse copper belt; silver lead
deposit staked on south shore of Moose Lake.
Mining in Yukon 1948.
F.H. STEPHENS.
Canadian Mining Journal v 70 n 2 Feb 1949 p 812.
Brief descriptive review; prospecting and exploration
not as active as in preceding postwar years;
little information available on results of
gold rush in Firth River area; dredging and
other gold placer operations; coal mining;
gold vein mining.
Silver and Lead Double Yukon Metal Production.
J.A. MACKINNON.
Western Miner v 22 n 4 Apr 1949 p 901.
Review for 1948; total of 53,660 oz of gold produced;
biggest producer was Yukon Consolidated, in
Dawson Mining District, with 47,649 oz;
United Keno Hill, in Mayo District produced
1,904,562 oz of silver, 5,064,848 lb of lead
and 493,469 lb of zinc; third mining
district Whitehorse, produced 4066 oz of
gold.
Mineral Areas of Yukon.
W.M. BONHAM.
Canadian Mining Journal v 70 n 4, 5, 6, 9, Apr 1949 p
713, May p. 6971, June p. 6770, Sept. p 813.
Apr:
General description of area comprising 207,000 sq mi,
largely unexplored and not prospected;
Klondike placer diggings have produced about
$200,000,000 in gold; copper at Whitehorse;
southern Yukon is accessible by sea; air
fields; road system is poor; some maps on
mineralbearing areas are available; geology
of some areas is favorable to metallic
deposits. May, June: Details of southern
part of Territory, now easily accessible;
many small gold placers have been worked;
Whitehorse copper belt; gold, silver, lead
and antimony in area along Wheaton and
Watson rivers; Windy Arm goldsilver; coal;
Central Yukon; gold; silver; lead; main need
of Yukon is roads. Sept: Northern Yukon,
known only from wide spread traverses; epic
journeys of pioneer travellers; silver lead
on southern border.
New Records in Yukon.
Western Miner v 24 n 4 Apr 1951 p 846.
371
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Gold produced during 1950 estimated at $3,832,720 and
value of silverleadzinccadmium production
estimated at $5,454,650; Whitehorse, Dawson
and Mayo mining districts reviewed.
Progress During 1951.
Canadian Mining Journal v 73 n 2 Feb 1952 p 72112.
Group of related articles; Progress During 1951 in
British Columbia Mining, G.C. CROSS; Yukon
Annual Review, G.C. CROSS; Alberta Mineral
Review, C.W. JACKSON and J.M. YOUNG; Mineral
Activities in Northwest Territories;
Saskatchewan Mineral Industry, J.T. CRAWLEY;
Review of Mining in Manitoba During 1951,
J.P. DEWET; Ontario Annual Review, 1951,
J.C. BROWNING. Quebec Annual Review, 1951,
J.C. BROWNING; New Brunswick Mineral
Industry in 1951; R.J. GILL; Mining Industry
of Nova Scotia, A.H. MCKINNON; Mining
Industry in Newfoundland in 1951, C.K.
HOWSE.
Group of Related Papers on Annual Review of Canada's
Mineral Industries.
Canadian Mining Journal v 74 n 2 Feb 1953, p 62112.
Mineral Production Increases Again, H. MCLEOD; Yukon
Mining in 1952, G.C. CROSS; 1952 in British
Columbia Mining, G.C. CROSS; Mineral
Production in NWT in 1952, F. WHYARD;
Mineral Development in Saskatchewan in 1952,
J.P. DEWET; Mineral Development in Manitoba
in 1952; J.P. DEWET; Ontario Annual Review
1952, J.C. BROWNING; Quebec Annual Review
1952, J.C. BROWNING; Mining Industry of Nova
Scotia 1952, A.K. MCKINNON; Mining Industry
of Newfoundland 1952, C.K. HOWSE.
1953 Annual Review of Canada's Mineral Industries.
Canadian Mining Journal v 75 n 2 Feb 1954 p 54111.
Following related papers presented; Mineral Production
Continues to Rise. H. MCLEOD; Yukon Mining
in 1953, G.C. CROSS; 1953 in British
Columbia Mining, G.C. CROSS; Mineral
Development in Saskatchewan in 1953, J.P.
DEWET; Mineral Development in Manitoba in
1953; J.P. DEWET; Ontario Annual Review
1953, J.C. BROWNING; Quebec Mineral Review
1953, J.C. BROWNING; New Brunswick A Record
Year; Mining Industry of Nova Scotia 1953,
A.H. MCKINNON; Mineral Industry of
Newfoundland 1953, C.K. HOWSE.
Yukon and Northwest Territories.
371
372
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
R.U. MAHAFFY.
Canadian Mining Journal v 75 n 10, 11, 12. Oct 1954, p
647, Nov. p. 7783, Dec. p. 618, v 76 n 1,
Jan 1955 p 658.
Value of mineral production; exploration and production
in Yukon; power supply; mining activity in
Mackenzie district and in districts of
Keewatin and Franklin.
Annual Review of Canada's Mineral Industry 1954.
Canadian Mining Journal v 76 n 2 Feb 1955 p 54101.
Mineral Production Up Again, Tenth Successive Increase.
H. MCLEOD; Yukon Mining in 1954, G.C. CROSS;
Mining in British Columbia in 1954, G.C.
CROSS; Mining Activity in Northwest
Territories 1954, K.J. CHRISTIE; Alberta
Fuel Industry in 1954; G.J. SKILLING;
Mineral Developments in Saskatchewan 1954,
P.J. DEWET; Mineral Development in Manitoba
1954, P.J. DE WET; Ontario Annual Review,
J.C. BROWNING; Quebec Annual Review; J.C.
BROWNING; Exploration in New Brunswick, 1954
A.L. MCALLISTER; Mining Industry in Nova
Scotia, in 1954, M.G. GOUDGE; Newfoundland's
Mining Industry 1954.
Yukon Territory.
H.S. BOSTOCK.
Canada Geological Survey Memoir, n 284, 1957, 650 p. 3
maps.
Compilation of Yukon Territory geological reports
covers period from 1876 to 1933 inclusive,
and is arranged chronologically summarizing
field work accomplished each year; original
accounts of Klondike placer fields.
Whitehorse copper belt, Windy Arm and
Wheaton River silver and antimony ores. Mayo
and Beaver River silverlead camps, Carmacks
coal deposits and other districts and areas
where indications of mineral wealth have
been explored.
Mineral Possibilities of Yukon Territory.
A.E. AHO.
Canadian Mining and Metallurgy Bulletin v 51 n 556 Aug
1958 p 47986.
Major future mineral possibilities are leadzinc,
copper, asbestos, silverlead, gold, and
mineral fuels; mineral possibilities are
outlined for various geological subdivisions
of Yukon.
373
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
Some Economic Factors Affecting Northern Mineral
Development in Canada.
A. DUBNIE.
Canada Dept Mines and Tech Surveys Mineral Resources
Div Mineral Information Bul MR 38 Dec 1959
61 p 1 map.
Factors which contribute to cost increment for northern
operation are geographical factors, size of
operation, type of extraction process
required, availability of labor, and company
policy concerning labor and inventories;
analysis of special problems related to
mining.
Mineral Industry of Yukon Territory and Southwestern
District of Mackenzie, 1960.
R. SKINNER.
Canada Geological Survey Paper 6123 1961 52 p.
Operations and production of placer, lode and coal
mining in 1960; exploration and prospecting;
Yukon placer gold and silver production.
1960; mineral production of Yukon territory;
mineral claims recorded. Yukon territory;
value of mineral production, Yukon
territory.
Mineral Industry of Yukon Territory and Southwestern
District of Mackenzie, 1961.
R. SKINNER.
Canada. Geological Survey Paper 6227 1962 48 p.
Placer and lode mining, coal mining, exploration, and
prospecting; statistics on Yukon placer gold
and silver production, 1961; mineral
production, mineral production; mineral
claims recorded, and value of mineral
production.
Prospecting and Mineral Development in Yukon.
A.E. AHO.
Western Miner and Oil Review v 35 n 2 Feb 1962 p 314.
Areas which are most favorable for exploration of leadzincsilver, silverlead, copper, tungsten,
asbestos, mercury, nickel, gold and iron;
recent discoveries and developments in these
minerals.
Reconnaissance HeavyMineral Study in Northern Yukon
Territory.
C.F. GLEESON.
Canada. Geological Survey Paper 6332 1963 10 p.
Heavy mineral samples were obtained from areas
comprised of plutonic and extrusive rocks;
most of samples were taken from steam and
river gravels and several were procured from
weathered bedrock; general conclusions are
made concerning provenance of heavy
373
374
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
minerals.
Mineral Industry of Yukon Territory and Southwestern
District of Mackenzie, 1962.
L.H. GREEN, C.I. GODWIN.
Canada. Geological Survey Paper 6338 1963 71 p.
Mineral production and exploration in Yukon and Nahanni
mining district; lode mining and
exploration, placer mining, and coal mining.
Annual Spring Number.
Western Miner v 37 n 4 Apr 1964 25 p between p 30 and
79.
Nine articles by 9 authors on value and production of
metals; industrial minerals and fuels,
exploration trends, activities and
discoveries during 1963 in Northwest and
Yukon Territories, British Columbia, Nova
Scotia, Saskatchewan, New Brunswick,
Ontario, Manitoba, and Alberta.
Mineral Potential of Mayo District.
A.E. AHO.
Western Miner v 37 n 10 Oct 1964 p 808
Mineralization in Mayo district is associated with 70
mi long and 30 mi wide anticlinal and
intrusive belt trending N70'E with major
longitudinal faulting along its crestal
region and orebearing, northeaststriking
veinfault fractures complicated by NNW
crossfaults on its flanks, ultimate
potential for silver, lead, zinc, cadmium
and antimony is in order of billion dollars
gross value.
New Mines in Yukon.
F.H. STEPHENS.
Western Miner v 37 n 8 Aug 1964 p 404.
Most current mineral production of Yukon comes from
gold mining operations in Dawson District
and silverleadzinc mining in Mayo District;
in Whitehorse District, 3 separate orebodies
adaptable to open pit mining have reserves
of 1,700,000 tons grading 1.2% Cu and 18%
Fe; rich leadzinc silver orebodies have been
found in Mayo District; large asbestos
deposit at Clinton Creek is being developed;
renewed interest in gold mines in Carmacks
area and in silverleadzinccopper deposit at
Vangorda Creek; in area of Arctic Circle
hematite deposit of 22 billion tons of ore
grading 45% Fe or better recently
discovered.
Annual Mining Review 1961.
Canadian Mining Journal v 86 n 2 Feb 1965 p 75168, 170,
375
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
175, 181, 183, 1856, 194. Twentyfive
articles by 27 authors on mineral industry,
by Provinces, in Canada; principal metals;
nonmetallic minerals, coal, petroleum,
natural gas, mining exploration, mining
methods, milling and process equipment, new
mining equipment; mining developments and
trends in United States, Europe, United
Kingdom, Australia, South Africa and other
African states.
Exploration Activity and Mineral Developments Across
Canada.
H. SARGENT, K.J. CHRISTIE, S.R. LYON, M.G. GOUDGE, A
PRATT.
Can Mining Journal v 86 n 4 April 1965 p 6995.
Group of articles covering mineral production,
important developments and trends in
exploration and mining in British Columbia,
Yukon and Northwest Territories, Alberta,
Saskatchewan, Manitoba, Ontario, Quebec,
New Brunswick, Nova Scotia and Newfoundland.
Annual Spring Number.
Western Miner v 38 n 4 Apr 1965 32 p between p 46 and
122.
Ten articles on value and production of metallic and
industrial minerals and fuels, exploration
trends, activities and discoveries during
recent years in Ontario, Yukon and Northwest
Territories, Alberta, British Columbia,
Saskatchewan, Manitoba, Nova Scotia, Quebec
and New Brunswick.
Mineral Industry of Yukon Territory and Southwestern
District of Mackenzie, 1964.
L.H. GREEN.
Canada, Geological Survey Paper 6519 1965 94 p.
Most of value of mineral production of Yukon in 1964
was from silver, lead and zinc from lodes on
Galena and Keno Hills; in lode exploration,
development work in number of properties
gave promising results, particularly on
Clinton Creek asbestos property and
properties in Whitehorse Copper Belt;
descriptions of most active and few inactive
lode properties; gold placer mining in 1964
increased slightly over previous years; coal
production continued from Carmacks area of
Whitehorse Mining District.
La Forma in Production.
F.H. STEPHENS.
Western Miner v 38 n 9 Sept 1965 p 3944.
Property consists of 32 claims on Free Gold Mountain;
375
376
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
deposit has been described as being contact
metamorphic in Precambrian rocks near
Mesozoic plutonic intrusives; drifting and
diamond drilling has indicated ore shoot
length of 444 ft. assaying 1.01 oz/ton over
average width of 5 ft; ore reserves are
being developed at considerably greater rate
than tonnage being milled.
Mineral Industry of Yukon Territory and Southwestern
District of Mackenzie, 1965.
L.H. GREEN.
Canada. Geological Survey Paper 6631, 1966, 137 p.
Brief descriptions of most of active lode and placer
properties are given together with
descriptions of some inactive lode
properties; details by mining districts on
use of metallic and nonmetallic mineral
resources.
Mineral Industry of Yukon Territory and Southwestern
District of Mackenzie, 1966.
D.C. FINDLAY.
Canada. Geological Survey Paper 6740, 1967, 104 p.
Placer mining and exploration, and lode
mineral exploration; work by Geological
Survey during 1966; data on coal mining.
Lode Mining Potential of Yukon Territory.
L.H. GREEN.
Canada. Geological Survey Paper 6736 1968 28 p, map.
History of prospecting and geological
framework of Yukon Territory deposits of
gold, silver, leadzinc, copper, molybdenum,
nickel, tungsten, antimony, iron, asbestos,
other industrial minerals and coal; probable
potential of known deposits and possible
future developments.
Mining Industry of British Columbia and Yukon, Industry
Survey Report Jan 1968,
J.C. DAWSON.
Industrial Development Dept. British Columbia Hydro and
Power Authority, Vancouver, B.C. Jan 1968 53
p. Phenomenal growth of British Columbia and
Yukon mining industry since 1960 is continuing strong, particularly in British
Columbia's copper and molybdenum ore mining;
total mine concentrator capacity has grown
from about 30,000 tpd in 1960 to 101,000 tpd
in 1967 and is expected to reach 240,000 tpd
by early 1970's; this due to transition from
small highgrade, to large lowgradeoperations; strong growth was also seen in
nonmetallic minerals and fuels segments of
industry; statistical data tabulated and
maps showing locations of principal copper,
molybdenum, silver, lead, zinc, iron, gold,
377
Placer Mining Bibliography - David Neufeld
nickel, mercury, asbestos, and coal mining
centers are included.
Mineral Industry of Yukon Territory and Southwestern
district of Mackenzie, 1967
D.C. FINDLAY.
Canada. Geological Survey Paper 6868 1969 131 p;
Developments in mineral industry in 1967; in Yukon
Territory mineral production rose to about
15.5 million dollars by introduction of two
new producing mines into economy; in lode
exploration, Yukon recorded active year in
1967; placer gold production decreased
sharply to about 11,837 crude oz against
52,953 crude oz in 1966; particular mining
areas are described, 82 refs.
i.
. Joshua E. Hannum, ed., "History of the Engineering Index," The
Engineering Index - 1929 (New York, 1930)p. xi.
ii.
. Ibid., p. xii.
iii.
. "Preface," The Engineering Index - 1919 (New York, 1920),p.
vii.
iv.
. H.C. Bolton, A Catalogue of Scientific and Technical
Periodicals 1665-1895 2nd ed. (Washington, D.C.,
1897).
v.
. H.H. Suplee, ed., "To The User" The Engineering Index 18961900 (New York, 1902) p. vii.
vi.
. J.B. Johnson, "A Short Account of the Origin of the
Engineering Index as published by the Journal of the
Association of Engineering Societies," The Engineering
Index, Five Years 1896-1900 , H.H. Suplee ed. (New
York, 1902), p. vi.
vii.
. J.E. Hannum, ed., "History of the Engineering Index," The
Engineering Index - 1929, (New York, 1930) p. xi-xii.
viii.
. J.E. Hannum,ed. "History of the Engineering Index," The
Engineering Index - 1930, (New York, 1931) p.xiii.
ix.
. H.H. Suplee, ed., The Engineering Index, Five Years - 18961900 (New York, 1902) p.x.
x.
. A search and photocopy service for engineering literature is
provided by the Engineering Services Library, United
Engineering Centre, 345 E 47th St., New York, N.Y.
10017, USA.
377